Home

COMPASS® for Pressure - Pressure Calibration

1. Figure 155 COMPASS Data Viewer main display Table 69 Data Viewer Toolbar Sort the active data set by the test label test date data filename user identification or the station identification Opens the Create Search Query window see 21 4 Create Search Query Data can be searched by using options on the Query Builder or by direct execution of a SQL query The query returned sets the active data set Refreshes the active data set and displays all records contained in the database Opens a separate plot window where the current data is displayed as a plot The plot is updated to reflect the current record as the user navigates through the database Refer to section 20 Data Plot Data File for details on how to use the plot tool Click this option to import a supported COMPASS data file into the database Multiple files may be selected Exports the current test data to COMPASS Data File An ASCII Data File is created The file is formatted identically to the original Data File imported into the database see 27 Data Files XML format XML is an increasingly popular data format used in many applications Any application specifically designed to view XML files can 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 242 21 DATA DATABASE DATA VIEWER IMAGE DESCRIPTION receive files exported in this format Fluke MET CAL A source file available for imp
2. d D p M D 270 23 4 6 TABLE 271 23 4 7 TOOLS 271 23 4 8 W E S Uoc E PORAS 271 XU CEU MARNE 271 PESCE MAIN TOOLBAR E coeur entra Ea oi ane 272 23 6 FORMAT TOOLBAR aa a a une arte ti eau a A aa kaaa tot rte Tire 273 23 7 RULER 275 23 8 STATUS BAR 02 EEEE EA AAT A A A 23 59 OPTIONS ARCHI EMI 23 9 1 5 23 9 2 REPORT GENERATION 23 9 3 TEMPLATES TAB 23 9 4 GENERAL TAB 23 10 FIELD PROPERTIES eee 23 10 1 FIELD PROPERTIES FORM 23 10 2 DATA 23 10 3 DATA SOURCE AND CYCLE SELECTION M TM 23 10 4 FIELD BEHAVIOR 23 11 REPORT CREATION 5 Page V 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 23 11 1 SELECTING TEMPLATE AND DATA eese 283 23 11 2 DRAG AND DROP CREATION 23 11 3 SAVING REPORTS 23 11 4 DISPLAY VIEW 23 12 TEMPLATE CREATION 5 23 12 1 AVAILABLE DATA FIELDS EXPIRED HIE 24 DATABASE S
3. 29 8 3 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE WITH VACUUM REFERENCE iii 29 8 4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL MODE enne nnnm ennt tnnt nnn nnn 29 9 FLUID HEADS nM de NAL IE 29 9 1 FLUID HEAD COMPONENTS rearea ereere eneo eaea riea anase reaot aetan insana tna nee rene ass snas natas sa saa aaa 29 9 2 OVERALL FLUID HEAD CORRECTION eese 359 TROUBLESHO OF UNG niet nne nhe ee X bot im i e n att 361 30 1 ERROR LOG P ued 363 GLOSSARY rx RR ADR erase S NX LE MR RUNE NON E NOR A TR 365 Page VII 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page VIII TABLES amp FIGURES TABLES Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Features of COMPASS for Pressure Basic and Enhanced Versions 1 Common Multiplexer Channel Commands 19 Switching Multiplexer Get Command Macros 20 Pros
4. maaa aaa iaaa maa Aaaa a aiana k 180 12 4 AUXILIARY ein un a aaa aiaa aana 181 13 SETUP PRESSURE MEDIA 183 14 TOOLS OPTIONS eene rennen nnne 185 14 1 OVERVIEW e E E 185 14 2 AMBIENT CONDITIONS TAB 185 14 3 PINITIALIZE TES F EE 186 14 4 R N TEST TAB ssisceccceic cccsentercesnccessssecteeconetccesesectesssscesescuscessenneerdusdecsrdansarsnzascedsnitacersadtdvesasceesiagesszans 188 PX Mi kiEiayir 191 14 6 PISTON GAUGE TAB eec 193 147 DATA GRID TAB is men ni ne ne een ae mn ie sien 194 14 8 DATA FILE ip 195 14 9 DATA IN FILE TAB canere enu neue e cran rum nime nnno creek 197 14 10 DATA HEADER TAB cinereo rere eren Letter 198 14 11 INTERFACE TAB cocci Pt 199 14 12 LANGUAGE S 200 15 TOOLS REMOTE 5 201 16 TOOLS PISTON GAUGE 203 161 OVER E PEEL 203 16 2 CALCULATION MODES
5. Return the Gauge pressure Outil By default this is the raw formatted output of a X device In other cases it is final output of a test configured device in the configured output unit 2 Final output of a test configured device in the configured output unit Out3 Final output of a test configured device in the P configured output unit ParamID Parameter ID of the device cCalc Device Calculation Class that the relation ship applies to The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value For example Relationship51602 1 Outl 5 D HE HD HE HD II ICICI Function CalcGaugePressure Outl Out2 Out3 ParamID cCalc CalcGaugePressure Outl Out2 End Function Page 224 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR Example This macro applies a third order fit to the raw output of a device This allows COMPASS to display a real time compensated pressure In this example the calibration coefficient properties were set by the user when the device was created Calibration coefficients can be entered on the Calibration tab of any of the device editors 4 3 4 AE Return the fully compensated pressure Outil By default this is the raw formatted output of a device In
6. 324 205 DEVICE CLASS union antenne ete oo Lalanne ia Nate ons 324 28 5 1 PROPERTIES EE 325 28 5 2 METHODS lee ALDEE N ee ne ae RT TR 326 28 6 CONFIGURATION CLASS sms 327 28 6 1 PROPERTIES 2 EM 327 28 6 2 METHODS RAA ie a nee eee TE 328 28 7 RANGE CLASS ed ou dune nee sta n D 329 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page VI TABLE OF CONTENTS 28 7 4 PROPERTIES ccrte fs noe tr i ER Taser Drs oda ku c a bn dn tft ena d c as CR ERE 28 7 2 METHODS 28 8 CALCULATION CLASS 28 8 1 PROPERTIES 28 8 2 METHODS 28 9 COMPASS CLASS 28 9 1 PROPERTIES 28 9 2 Hips CALCULATIONS napada 29 71 LI IM T 29 2 TOLERANGE asian 29 3 BEST F ETE 29 4 LINEARITY 29 5 HYSTERESIS tacai ra aieeaa RR RR DDR uk nU CA RUE SR CR 29 6 REPEATABILITY 29 7 MEASUREMENT tenen nnns ains ains sinas snas snas sata sain sata sata asas enea 29 8 PISTON GAUGE PRESSURE CALCULATIONS 29 8 1 GAUGE 29 8 2 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE BY ADDING ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE
7. 0 0 BZU 356 82 59 GENERAL INFORMATION Date Time UserID StationID 5 20021231 15 18 52 Admin ITEST INFORMATION TestName Database Complete Num Pres Num Pres Pres DwellPres Avg TPres Hold Pres Stab Pres Stab Pres Stab Pres Use Num Test Test Dwell Test Hold Test Stab Temp Stat Temp S 10 BG Stande 1 04E 09 1 3 9100s 45s 0 01 0 005 DL 5 300 No 0 0 DUT DBaselD 10 CustlD Manufac SN DAQMethcLCalDate CalCoeff CalDueDatFinalOutTc FinalOutTc FinalOutTc FinalOutTc Mease Mo Label FnlOutMa FnlOuth 1 62 09 DH Instrum 102 RS232 12 16 02 12 16 02 15 DUT RAW 1 DBaselD 10 Manufac SN DAQMethcLCalDate CalCoeff CalDueDat FinalOutTcFinalOutTcFinalOutTcFinalOutTcMease Mo Label FnlOutMa FnlOuth 1 62E 09 DH Instrun 102 85232 12 16 02 12 16 02 15 20 DUT RAW 2 DBaselD 10 Manufac SN DAQMethcLCalDate CalCoeff CalDueDat FinalOutTcFinalOutTc FinalOutTcFinalOutTc Mease Mo Label FnlOutMa FnlOuth DUT RAW 3 DBaselD 10 CustiD Manufac SN DAQMethcLCalDate CalCoeff CalDueDat FinalOutTcFinalOutTcFinalOutTcFinalOutTcMease Mo Label _FniOutMa FniOuth 8 REFERENCE DBaselD 10 CustID Model Manufac SN DAQMethcLCalDate CalCoeff CalDueDat FinalOutTc FinalOutTc FinalOutTc FinalOutTc Mease Mo Label FnlOutMa FnlOuth 1 04E 09 FPG8601 DH Instrun 1111 Other Devi 1 1 80 6 1 80 15 PRE TEST jLeak TargeLeak Dwel Leak Time Leak Rate Leak Statt Cycles Min Target Max Targe Leak Rate Units 1
8. 39 Page 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 296 OUTPUT TAB aa 43 4 3 6 1 OUTPUT TAB FOR SIMPLE TYPE 2 2 44 4 3 6 2 OUTPUT RELATIONSHIP EDITOR a sce pe te re Ml ssec c etae eit 45 437 SET TAB nettiueccise 59 4 3 7 1 SET RELATIONSHIP EDITOR 61 4 3 8 a PR 68 44 REMOTE COMMAND EDITOR sscsssssssessssssesesscsssssecscssscsssseecsnsseecsseecssessecsseseecsesuecsaeececeueceseeenssees 68 44 1 INITIALIZATION COMMANDS sssssssssssssssssssessssssesssssssessssssesssssssesssssseessssseesssssseessssueessssseesssssueessensneessense 69 44 2 READ OUTPUT COMMANDS 69 4 4 2 1 READY COMMANDS 70 4 4 3 CONTROL SET COMMANDS 70 4 4 3 1 ABORTVENECOMMANDSeI ur DSL ilu ue Pese e aT du IP MIL 70 4 4 8 2 MULTIPLEXER VALVE DRIVER COMMANDS nee 71 AWA EDITORO TONS en oracle rte da roa ticus esr dor A re 71 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND 75 54 OVERVIEW cousins e e e OM EM LEM ML D M AD EE M RT EE E 75 527 MAIN MEND BAR de Ei tlic pie ca a Red tof tace 75 mod esee eL ie st he eL ae 75 5 22 SETUP 75 5 23 TOOLS 76 5 24 DATA M a 5 25 DATABASE TT 5 26 WINDOW 507 HELP nu eee eine Arr 53 STATUS
9. Simple DUT j Figure 13 DUT Editor Header Tab Bb Calibration Communications Read Set Manufacturer Despatch Lu Model Ecosphere M Serial Number Identification 7 Customer ID 7 This device can be used as a DUT Figure 14 Support Device Editor Header Tab Header Calibration Communications Manufacturer DH Instruments LI Model Paved Autodetect setup Serial Number 33 7 Identification NENNEN Customer ID f This device can be used as a DUT Platform Type Piston Gauge Figure 15 Piston Gauge Platform Editor Header Tab Page 33 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 8 Device Editor Header Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION DUT Type required drop down list selection DUT Editor only Determines the options available for a DUT Definition There are two choices Simple DUT DUTs that have a pressure output only The DUT cannot control pressure and multiple and or non pressure DUT outputs are not supported Supports non pressure and multiple DUT outputs The DUT may control pressure Advanced DUTs can be setup to be indistinguishable from other support devices The characteristic that makes a device a DUT is the selection of DUT Pressure or General Pressure as the Final Output Advanced DUT COMPASS for Pressure Basic does not support advanced DUTs
10. Cancel Figure 109 Piston Cylinder Selector dl Metrological elements linked to a specific Piston Gauge Platform are still available for use with other Piston Gauge Platforms Page 163 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL See Table 44 Piston Gauge Platform Editor P C MS Tab Fields for complete descriptions of all the tab s fields Header Calibration P C MS Sources Communications Dutput Set DuPctio Ed DHI MassSet 2107 Edt Supot l Mass Bells DHI MassBell 425 y i 7 Default Medium water 200 l Limited to Defaul Medium Default Measurement Mode Absolute by Limted to Default Measurement Mode Piston Cylinders Mass Sets Trim Mass Sets Figure 110 Piston Gauge Platform Editor P C MS Tab Table 44 Piston Gauge Platform Editor P C MS Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Piston Cylinders The list contains all the piston cylinders that can be used with the Piston Gauge Platform optional list box selection Press the Edit button next to this field to modify the list of available piston cylinders Up to 17 individual Piston Cylinders can be linked to a Piston Gauge Platform Mass Sets optional list box The list contains all of the mass sets that can be used with the Piston Gauge Platform Press the Edit button next to this field to modify the list of available mass sets Up to f
11. c eve ad cn a es cd Ste E aaa fers ad 78 54 MAIN TOOLBAR cu ons dedos cria eura adi cd eee 78 5 41 RUN TEST TOOLS me Vi s 79 542 BUNDISPLAY TOOLS deua DU E Uf 79 543 DATA ACQUISITION TOOLS nr A ene uet eee Bae 80 5 5 RUNSCREENS ms m 82 5 5 1 OVERVIEW 82 5 5 2 DUT REFERENCE COMPARISON RUN SCREEN 83 5 5 3 TEST CONDITIONS RUN 5 84 5 5 4 DEVICE OUTPUT RUN SCREEN 85 5 5 4 1 SPY WINDOWS fect vs eu era Lee ha 86 5 5 5 GAUGE DEVICE OUTPUT RUN SCREEN 27 5 5 6 DHI DEVICE RUN 88 5 5 6 1 PG7000 RUN SCREEN 89 5 5 6 2 PPC RUN SCREEN 90 5 5 7 DATA GRID RUN SCREEN 92 5558 DATA PLOT RUN SCHEENM zu traria du ed us Late cr bte 93 B HOW Sd EE REDE Eua ESAE EE RF E DM REN 95 6 1 INITIAL SETUP 6 2 QUICK TIPS re ea cui onda cua Ea ca n dtadduddwasedccsuesecduatebesandutaucsesaducccaccuactacatsvasduseusdiavesd 6 3 APPLICATION EXAMPLES 6 3 1 OVERVIEW 6 32 EXAMPLE 1 DMM aa 6 3 3 2 DMM VOLTAGE OUTPUT DUT sssssssssssssssessssssssssssssesssssssesssssesesssseessssseessssseeessssneesses 654 EXAMPLE RRC crore nee ee cd deed rl Dd e 102 635 EXAMPLE 4 4PGTUOD e ea aceto ternera taret e ume UR 105 6 3 6 EXAMPLE 5 PG700
12. Cut Deletes the current selection and copies it to the Windows clipboard This information is pasted into other applications or other locations within the COMPASS Report Editor Copy Copies the current selection to the Windows clipboard without first deleting it 3 The information is pasted into other applications or other locations within the COMPASS Report Editor Paste Inserts the contents of the Windows clipboard to the current cursor location in B the document Undo Undo is provided to undo the most recent editing operation within the report editor Undo support in the COMPASS Report Editor does not provide the ability to undo all previous steps Only the most recent steps per open document are maintained in the undo buffer As a result the first time Undo is activated the most recent step is undone Redo is provided to reinstate items the undo has just rolled back Redo will not recreate deleted files nor will it create new ones Find provides the ability search for specific text within a report or report template Enter the search text in the Find What field and choose the search options then press Find The search begins at the current cursor location and continues to the end of the document The first occurrence of the search text are highlighted in the current document To repeatedly search for the same text use the shortcut key CTRL F 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc
13. Obj4 See Obj4 OverRangeLimit A multiplier applied to the maximum final output to indicate the maximum output value COMPASS will attempt to set with the device By default 1096 over the maximum full scale value is used This corresponds to 1 1 To allow double the full scale output set this property to 2 Any target output that exceeds the limit is automatically issued at the limiting value See the ioSetOutput method RangeMain The primary device output or set used by the Calculation Class The other Range Classes are in support of this class The UseAs property of this class determines how the Calculation Class will be used RangeRaw1 The Range Class of the instrument used to provide the first raw output value when the RangeMain class requires a support device If a support device is not used for the first raw output in the Output Relationship Editor this property should not be used When the RangeMain class is for a non DHI piston gauge this class represents the piston cylinder temperature measuring device output specified during test initialization RangeRaw2 The Range Class of the instrument used to provide the Second raw output value when at least 2 raw outputs were specified in the Output Relationship Editor When the RangeMain class is for a non DHI piston gauge this class represents the piston position measuring device output specified during test initialization RangeRaw3 The Range
14. Record Type There are three DUT Definition Record Types required drop Individual Intended for DUTs that are tested as specific unique items The DUT down list serial number identification or customer ID is included in the DUT selection definition This type of DUT does not require new entries during Test DUT Editor only Initialization Profile Intended to define a general DUT type rather than identifying a specific DUT A common use of this option is for a type of analog pressure gauge Unique serial number identification and customer ID values are not entered in the DUT Definition Although range information must be specified the lt Min Final Output gt and lt Max Final Output gt values can be altered during test initialization This type of DUT Definition requires the DUT to be identified during Test Initialization Profile w Range Intended to define a general DUT type including a specific range rather than identifying a specific DUT Itis useful when identical DUTs are tested in groups Instead of creating multiple DUTs all differing only by serial number and or identification use a DUT profile w Range Unique serial number identification and customer ID values are not entered in the DUT Definition This type of DUT Definition requires that the DUT be identified during Test Initialization Range related information cannot be edited during Test Initialization Manufacturer Select a manufacturer from the drop down l
15. All test point types are definable In addition Test Macros and reference changes can be used when running a test Advanced Test A COMPASS for Pressure Basic does not support advanced tests Editing Record label The red label flashes when changes to a setup have been made but not saved New toolbar icon Creates a new setup with default information Save toolbar icon Saves changes to an edited setup This icon is not active when no edits have been made If the setup is valid it is saved without further prompting Setups that are incomplete or contain errors generate error messages Resolve any errors before saving Copy toolbar icon Copies the contents of the current setup to a new setup The Record Label of the new setup is the copied setup label plus the text Copy This is the only difference between the original setup and the copy Make sure the new setup is properly edited before saving Restore toolbar icon Restores a setup that is being edited to the last saved state Use this feature to abandon edits made before saving If a new setup was created using the New icon the restore button is nonfunctional as the is no previous saved state to restore to Delete toolbar icon Deletes the setup that is active in the editor removing the setup A message prompt for confirmation displays prior to Open Select 22 toolbar icon Select a sp
16. Enter the length of time to suspend remote interaction with the device after the COMMAND is issued A delay is typically used to allow a physical process to complete between commands For example if a valve takes 3s to physically change states after a command is issued a 3s command delay should be used to prevent COMPASS from carrying out actions associated with a particular valve state change The delay can also be used to allow an internal device average to complete prior to requesting an output For example a DMM may use 3 commands to read a specific output INIT VOLTAGE DC 0 001 TRIGGER FETCH The TRIGGER command initiates an internal averaging cycle that is setup on the DMM front panel If the average were 5s the FETCH command will take 5s to respond Opposed to polling the IEEE bus for 5s a delay of 5s after the TRIGGER command will allow a more response COMPASS remote interface Read Response check box Check this box to poll the remote interface until the response of the device is returned If the device does not respond or the device will continue to function properly when the response is not read do not check this option When checked a response is considered complete when the Response Terminator character s is returned If a response is not complete within the Command Timeout gt interval the response is considered to have Timed Out Process Response check box used for Read Co
17. TempUseReady String Yes or No depending on the test temperature controller Use Ready Test Definition selection NumTempPnts Integer The number of test temperature points defined in the Test Definition TempJog String Yes when the test temperature jog function was enabled and No otherwise TempRegulate String The time in seconds between test temperature regulation updates or No 28 3 1 4 TEST DATA POINT CLASS The Test Data Point Class stores all data for a single test point This class cannot be accessed directly with properties of the Test Data Class Instead methods must be used to return an instance of the Test Data Point at a specific test point A unique class is used for each temperature line pressure pressure cycle and test pressure point Each output value in this class corresponds to the output of an instrument selected during test initialization Not all fields are valid with all devices For example DUT information corresponding to a piston gauge is not available unless the DUT is a piston gauge PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION AmbientHumidity Double Ambient humidity AmbientPressure Double Ambient pressure AmbientTemperature Double Ambient Temperature Aux1Final Aux10Final Double The final output of any one of up to 10 auxiliary output devices Aux1Raw Aux10Raw Double The Raw output of any one of up to 10 auxiliary output devices DateofPoint String The date
18. o 2 Regulate to the DUT output Only possible when used with the test pressure controller iTime The time interval in seconds between regulation updates Return None Value Remarks Regulation is the process that COMPASS uses to automatically adjust the output of an instrument to achieve a specific set point in a DUT or reference The output is automatically adjusted at time intervals based on the iTime argument 3 3 5 1 Any manual entry or manually controlled instrument cannot be used in association with output regulation This function changes the state of the RegulationMode and RegulationTime properties Example None Name SetParamData Purpose Set one of 20 double precision values stored in the class by using a COMPASS macro Syntax Sub SetParamData iID dData Arguments ilD The integer index of the parameter to read The value can be 0 to 20 e GQData The double precision value to store in the class Return None Value Remarks This data space is made available to macros to allow data to persist between macro calls The data can be read using the GetParamData method Any desired data can be added to these 20 fields flags intermediate calculation variables etc Example None 28 9 COMPASS CLASS The COMPASS Class is the only global object supplied by COMPASS within a macro All macro types can access the properties and methods of the COMPASS Class at any time The object is named cCOMPASS Just enter thi
19. 103 1224 uut ind p Unit Prefix k uut ind u Unit Unit P measurement Measurement DUT Raw Output1 measurement_p Unit Prefix measurement_u Unit Unit tol Tolerance Tolerance tol_p Unit Prefix tol_u Unit Unit dev 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Deviation Page 260 DUT Ref DEFINITION FILE dev p MET CAL RESULTS FIELD Unit Prefix 22 EXPORTING COMPASS DATA COMPASS DATA FIELD DATA EXAMPLE dev u Unit Unit test status Test Status Status num meas Number of Measurements DUT Counts sdev Standard Deviation DUT Standard Deviation sdev p Unit Prefix sdev Unit Unit uut range UUT Range DUT Span uut range p Unit Prefix uut range u Unit Unit meas flag Measurement Flag Page 261 1 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 262 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR 23 1 OVERVIEW The COMPASS Report Editor is used to generate reports from COMPASS dat files and data stored in the COMPASS Test Data database The COMPASS Report Editor provides the features to create view and edit reports and templates The Report Editor is essentially a customized word processor and as such navigation and use is intuitive
20. 29 7 MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY The DUT measurement uncertainty resulting from the test is calculated as the root sum square of the various components that determine the overall system uncertainty This includes linearity hysteresis repeatability resolution and reference uncertainty DUT resolution is obtained from the DUT Definition DUT linearity hysteresis and repeatability are calculated from the test data as described in the sections above Reference uncertainty is obtained from the Device Definition of the reference Each of the values is converted to a single standard deviation by dividing by the appropriate value The final measurement uncertainty value is then multiplied by 2 to obtain a coverage factor of 2 The uncertainty value is converted to DUTFS for reporting The measurement uncertainty equation is described below The calculation described determines the value in the DUT s pressure unit of measure full description and analysis of each of the measurement uncertainty components is beyond the scope of this manual see ISO TAG 4WG3 Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty Measurement COMPASS determines measurement uncertainty for each test cycle individually as well as for all test data combined 2 2 E U U 2 S resolution std DUT EstE 3 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 354 29 CALCULATIONS VARIABLE DESCRIPTION span and multiplying by 100 Calculated DUT measurement uncertainty expre
21. The instrument used to control the test temperature TestHeader Test Header Class Page 313 Test definition specific settings and test criteria are maintained in this structure 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 28 3 1 1 DEVICE HEADER CLASS The Device Header Class is used to store the setup information of devices used in a test This information is not logged or available in the data file unless specified in Tools Options Data Header see 14 10 Data Header Tab prior to running the test The data members of the Device Header Class are listed below Not all data members are valid for all device setups For example piston gauge information is not available unless the corresponding device is a piston gauge 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc PROPERTIES CalDueDate DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION The next required calibration date of the device CalibrationCoefficients1 Generic calibration information string The field can be used anyway desired A combination of string and numeric data can be written in the field Various delimiting techniques can be used to extract numeric calibration data from the string value CalibrationCoefficients2 See CalibrationCoefficients1 CalibrationCoefficients3 See CalibrationCoefficients1 CalibrationCoefficients4 See CalibrationCoefficients1 CalibrationCoefficients5 Only COMPASS macros can read or
22. The use of the Julian date in the default Data File name is intended to maintain sequential file order in a given directory If you wish to find a file based on a given test date do not interpret the Julian date into a common date format Instead use the date sorting capabilities of the Windows file browser Choose the Show Details option and click the column named Modified Files are listed in ascending or descending order COMPASS s automatic naming convention for Data Files makes it possible for two dat files to have the same name However the two files will always be stored in different directories since they would have to be for DUTs with different identifications To avoid conflicts or accidental overwrites when moving Data Files to new locations the user should keep in mind that different Data Files might have the same name 27 3 DATAFILE STRUCTURE The information logged in the Data File is dependent on the Tools Options Data File Data Header and Data In File options Data Files have 6 distinct sections General Header Test Header Device Header Pre Test Test Data and Notes With few exceptions each Data File section begins with brackets describing the section Test Data for example The next line is a delimited list of titles for each field in the section This line is followed by a line of actual data that corresponds to the section title information Table 96 describes these sections Refer to section 21 5 Da
23. e The New Calibration Record dialog displays see Figure 162 Enter all calibration information pertaining to the calibration used to generate the Data File The most important entries are the specific lt Cal Date gt and lt Cal Time gt Record the entries to these fields for later use Refer to MET CAL s User s Manual for additional information on creating and using Calibration Records 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 256 22 EXPORTING COMPASS DATA New Calibration Record X Li Pass Due Date Due Time 7 18 03 1o 06 38 am Interval Interval Units Failed Tests Marginal Tests Calibration Procedure Used ELA Comment Standards Used Last Used Any Used STD SEG STD Table Asset Number Sample Device Manufacturer Bulb Co Model XBox Figure 162 New Calibration Record Editor 22 3 2 CREATING A MET CAL SOURCE FILE A MET CAL source file can be created by using the Data Export to MET CAL menu choice in the COMPASS main program or by using the Export option in the COMPASS Data Viewer see 21 2 COMPASS Data Viewer After selecting the Data File to import the Export to MET CAL dialog displays see Figure 163 Enter the calibration date and time that correspond to the desired calibration record date and time see 22 3 1 Creating the Calibration Record Dates should be formatted as MM DD YY and times formatted as HH MM SS Export to MetCal The date of calibration
24. 80 Control Toolbar Data Acquisition Options sssssssesesenenene eene 81 DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen Fields 84 Conditions Run Screen Fields iii 85 Spy Window Information iii 87 PG7000 Run Screen Fields iii 89 PPC Run Screen Fields ofr Ye e ERR e Muti oaa tis eR MOSES SP cue 91 Test Complete Panel Options ss 137 Test Editor Pre Test Tab Leak Test Fields 141 Test Editor Pre Test Tab Exercise Frame Fields 143 Insert Options GhOle6S 2 td ete thai ae tees 145 Custom Operation Point Label Definitions 146 Auto Fill Points Flelds REPE Miete ctetu 147 Test Definition Editor Point Sequence Tab General Child Tab Fields 148 Configure Device Dialogue Fields 151 Test Definition Editor Points Sequence Tab Set Child Tab for Pressure Controller Fields 152 Test Definition Editor Points Sequence Tab Set Child Tab for a PG7000 Fields 153 Test Editor Data Tab Fields 155 Piston Gauge Platform Editor P C MS Tab Fields 164 Page IX 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 6
25. Edit Figure 111 Piston Gauge Platform Editor Sources Tab Table 45 Piston Gauge Platform Editor Sources Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Reference Vacuum Select the device to use to measure the residual pressure under the piston gauge bell jar absolute by vacuum measurement mode Deadweight Tester type Piston Gauges and Piston Gauges that do not support absolute by vacuum measurement mode do not use this selection optional list box selection During Test Initialization the selected value is the default Reference Vacuum choice for the Piston Gauge The selection can be changed if desired The residual pressure under the piston gauge bell jar added to the calculated piston gauge pressure to define the final pressure Piston Cylinder Select the device to use to measure the piston cylinder temperature Deadweight Tester Temperature type Piston Gauges do not use this selection During test initialization the selected value is the default Piston Cylinder Temperature selection for the Piston Gauge The selection can be changed if desired The piston cylinder temperature is used to calculate the effective area of the piston cylinder at its operating temperature optional list box selection Piston Position Select the device to use to measure the piston position During test initialization the selected value is the default Piston Position selection for the Piston Gauge The selection can be changed
26. Minimum and lt Maximum gt output values This determines the raw output span Depending on the Raw Output to Final Output Relationships the values entered may be used to determine the final output In some cases the actual Minimum and Maximum entries are not relevant For example when setting up a resistance output of a DMM the raw output and final output typically have a relationship of lt Same gt Therefore no manipulation between raw output and final output occurs As a result there is no need to enter a specific resistance range The only restriction is that the entries are not the same to avoid a span of 0 Select the Resolution to use when displaying logging and reporting the raw output Use a resolution appropriate for the device and it s tolerance Select a Raw Output to Final Output Relationship This selection determines how the raw output will be manipulated to obtain a final output If the device raw output is the same as the final output for example a digital pressure monitor that outputs pressure directly with no manipulation needed the selection is Same Raw Output Final Output gt Devices that do not output the final output directly most often use Linearly Proportional gt this is the case for most voltage output transducers Page 47 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL O Proceed to the Final Output tab Detailed information on all selections of t
27. Source Voltage Measurement Output Unit Minimum Maximum 20 0000 Resolution 9 9001 Tolerance z5pan 5 0 010 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Figure 23 DUT Device Edit Output Tab for a Simple Type DUT Page 44 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES 4 3 6 2 X OUTPUT RELATIONSHIP EDITOR DHI device definitions setup using the lt Auto Detect Setup gt do not require the use of the Output Relationship Editor All commands and supported outputs and sets are handled by COMPASS Final outputs are created using the features on the Output Relationship Editor Access this editor from any Device Editor Output tab by pressing the Add button to create a new final output or pressing the Edit Output button to edit an existing final output See 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs understanding of this topic ie critical to proper use of the Output Relationship Editor The purpose of the Output Relationship Editor is to identify a device s raw output s and define how the raw output s corresponds to the final output For example a pressure transducer normally has a final output of DUT Pressure however it may have a raw output of Voltage In some cases the raw output is the same as the final output This is the case when a device has a remote interface and the remote commands used to interface with th
28. re ae Ei ph eade Dee ta tte TREE eee EDEN 311 Test Data Class Properties siennes 312 Test Data Class Method Summary 319 Test Definition Class Properties 320 Test RoInt Class biet e b ell e ee e i Mutts pedet P ee iun 323 Test Point Class inte etis et 324 PG7000 Defined Pressure Calculation Variables 355 Troubleshootlrg arresti riot eut ie ri 361 Page XI 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FIGURES Figure 1 Device Setup Raw Output and Final Output 11 FIgure 2 SetJog z ooo ete at utt e bt at RR 15 Figure 3 Multiplexer Set Relationship sise 17 Figure 4 Typical Multiplexer Connection ee eee eee eee eee eee eens 18 Figure 5 Common Multiplexer Command Setup enne enne nennen 19 Figure 6 Multiplexer Individual Output Setup eene nennen nnne ns 22 Figure 7 Multiplexer Channel Specific Output Source Selection 22 Figure 8 Multiplexer Scanned Output Command Setup 24 Figure 9 Multiplexer Scanned Set Command Setup is 24 Figure 10 Setup Selector iii 29 Figure 11 Editor Toolbar iine eee Ae ea Le lae adea ie eR Rabe 30 Figure 12 Test Definition Editor Toolbar iii 30 Figure 13 DUT Editor Header Tab sn 33 Figure 14 Support Device Editor Header Tab 33 Figure 15 Piston Gauge Platfor
29. 0 0 0 0 0 No No DUT DBaselD ID CustlD Model Manufac SN DAGMethod LCalD ate CalCoeff CalDueD ate FinalQutT off FinalQutT ol2 FinalOutT ol3 FinalutT ol4 Mease Mode Medium PistCylE ff reallnit MassUnit PistCyIt DBaselD PistCyll SN PistCyl KN PistCyl Eff amp rea PistCyI2DB aselD PistCyl25N J Tues PistCyl2E ff amp rea dv 1624289791 PPC3 DH Instruments 102 R5 2321 2 16 02 12 15 02 15 30 30 15 15 30 1 kPa kPa 0 0 0 0 DUT RAW 1 DBaselD ID CustlD Model Manufac SN DAQMethod LCalD ate CalCoeff CalDueD ate FinalQutT ol FinalOutT ol2 FinalOutT ol3 FinalO ut ol4 Mease gt 1624289791 PPC3 DH Instruments 102 R5 232 12 16 02 12 15 02 15 15 30 30 15 15 30 1 0 Set Pt Test Press Ref Pressure DUT Pressure DUT Raw Outt Tolerance Span Error Error DUTSpan kPa kPa kPa kPa 0 00000 15 00010 15 00002 15 00000 25 00000 7 50011 7 50003 7 50000 50 25000 0 07512 0 07498 0 07500 75 00000 7 50022 7 49998 7 50010 100 00000 15 00017 14 99999 15 00000 75 00000 7 50005 7 49995 7 50000 50 25000 0 07495 0 07498 0 07510 25 00000 7 50019 7 50002 7 50000 0 00000 15 00004 15 00003 15 00020 Figure 150 Data File Viewer Page 233 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 64 Data File Viewer Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Select Data File Used to pick a different Data File to view This function is disabled when the D
30. Amongst the options are individual Insert Point and Delete Point choices Inserting a point shifts all points down removing a point moves all points up Change the resolution with which the reference and or DUT readings are displayed while running and recorded in the Data File The resolution of any device is determined by its output setup Edit the device and select the desired Final Output Resolutions This is the device s default resolution for displays and the resolution with which data is logged The display resolution of any output is altered by clicking the output displayed on the run screen see 5 5 4 Device Output Run Screen Amongst the items on the pop up menu is an option to change the output resolution Run an automated test with a DUT or DMM that uses RS232 if my computer has only one COM port and a DHI device is being used as the reference Connect the computer s COM port to COM1 of the device Connect the DUT or DMM to COM2 of the device When specifying the DUT s RS232 port select Ref COM2 This tells COMPASS to send commands to the DUT by using the pass through capabilities of a DHI device This solution is only possible with DHI devices that have a COM2 port Troubleshoot communications with remote devices references DMMs DUTs etc Use Tools Remote Communications to interface directly with the device send command strings and display the responses see 15 Tools Remote Communications
31. BANK 1 elseif chnl 21 and chnl 41 then BANK2 channel 1 20 tBase 1 20 BANK 2 elseif chnl 41 and chnl 61 then BANK3 tBase chnl 40 BANK 3 else This is some type of an error exit function end if Must be a 3 digit value 101 not 11 if tbase 10 then GetCahnnelID BANK amp 0 amp tBase else GetCahnnelID BANK amp tBase end if End Function Page 27 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 28 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES 4 COMMON TOOLS AND DHI FEATURES 4 1 SETUP SELECTOR The Setup Selector is used throughout COMPASS to select Test Definitions DUTs Support Devices and Piston Gauge Platforms and elements The Editor Toolbar on all COMPASS editors provides a link to the Setup Selector This allows a setup to be identified quickly from a list rather than by scrolling through all individual setups In the Setup Selector all setups are listed alphabetically by Record Label The selector columns include information that should allow easy identification of a specific setup Click the desired selection and press OK or double click the field to make a selection Select Hardware Label Manufacturer Model Auto PG DH Instruments P7501 DEMO PPC2 PPC2 1971 El Pressure Position Direct Remote PG DH Instruments PG7601 88888 Rotation Pressure Pressure E Mux Channel
32. Class The device used to measure ambient pressure AmbTemp Device Header Class The device used to measure ambient temperature AmbRH Device Header Class The device used to measure ambient humidity Aux1 Aux2 Aux10 Device Header Class The device used to measure auxiliary data devices 1 to 10 DUT Device Header Class The device under test information DUTRaw1 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Device Header Class Page 312 The instrument used to measure the first raw output of the DUT When the DUT has a remote interface this information is typically the same as the DUT PROPERTIES DUTRaw2 DATA TYPE Device Header Class 28 COMPASS OBJECTS DESCRIPTION The instrument used to measure the second raw output of the DUT This data structure is not populated unless the DUT actually is setup to use a Second raw output DUTRaw3 Device Header Class The instrument used to measure the third raw output of the DUT This data structure is not populated unless the DUT actually is setup to use a third raw output FileName String The file name of the data file used as a source of information for the Test Data Class GeneralHeader General Header Class Data structure information used to describe general data file information Notes String Text string containing the current test notes NumberofLinePressurePoints In
33. DH Instruments RPM3 DH Instruments RPM3 Example Example DH Instruments RPM4 DH Instruments RPM4 Example Example Hewlett Packard HP34401 a Hewlett Packard HP34401 a Example IE ample Ruska 7215 Ruska 7215 Example Active COMPASS Setup Database C Program Files COMPASS for PressureXCompS etp mdb Figure 195 COMPASS Database Maintenance Tool 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 292 24 DATABASE SETUP Table 94 COMPASS Database Maintenance Tool FEATURE DESCRIPTION Data to View drip down list box Select the type of information to copy Individual setup types are selected from this list Optionally all setup information can be updated by selecting the lt All Database Information option Merge Database display label The database that contains the desired setup information Use the Open File button to select a different file merge buttons add data to or copy data from this database Active COMPASS Setup Database display label The active database specified in the Database Setup menu choice see 24 2 Database Setup The merge buttons add data to or copy data from this database m button Open a new database file Clear button Clears the current selections All button Selects all available setups in a database frame for the current Data to View selection nig button Transfer data selected in the Data to View list fro
34. Default piston This field represents the default piston position ready zone for piston gauges that use a remote position deadband piston position indicator Test definitions that use a piston gauge as a reference support the entry mm of a test specific dead band value see 8 6 7 When running a manual test the value entered in this field is used to determine if the piston gauge is ready or not ready This value does not affect numere entry DHI PG7000s setup with lt Autodetect Setup gt when running Manual Tests 14 7 DATA GRID TAB The Tools Options Grid tab is used to customize the Data Grid Run Screen that is available while running tests The grid can be customized to display only the desired data field columns while suppressing other columns The order of the columns can also be changed Any test data item logged in the Data File can be included in any column of the Data Grid run screen by using the correct combination of features Refer to section 21 5 3 DATA Table for a listing of the fields available in the data grid Press the Default Settings button to automatically display the COMPASS default data fields Instructions on the operation of the Grid tab are provided in Table 60 When selections are complete click OK to save changes or select another tab to change other options Selections made on the Grid tab have no effect on the data that is logged to the Data File The grid setup ie provided for c
35. Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Pressure Point Sequence Tab us 144 tiat 144 Driver State Selectors ja 2 eee ate dinars ennai a an 145 Test Macro Selecltor retient tea CA Roe sers 146 Custom Operation Point Labels ss 146 Auto Fill Pressure Points iii 147 Test Definition Editor Point Sequence Tab General Child Tab 148 Test Definition Editor Point Sequence Tab Read Child Tab 150 Configure Device Dialogue is 150 Test Definition Editor Set Child Tab for a Pressure 151 Test Definition Editor Advanced Test Set Child Tab for a Pressure Controller 152 Test Definition Editor Points Sequence Tab Set Child Tab for a PG7000 153 Test Editor Data TD oie e c rU eL ER RE e IRURE ERE 154 Test Editor Auxiliary iuo richtete et Rave eS aeree tre 156 Piston Cylinder Selector sise 163 Pisto
36. Figure 176 COMPASS Report Editor Window Menu 23 4 9 HELP Brings up the About window which provides specific version information about the COMPASS Report Editor Page 271 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 235 MAIN TOOLBAR The Main Toolbar presents commonly accessed menu functions as icon based buttons Use the toolbar button in place of the direct menu choice for convenience gegneauem Figure 177 COMPASS Report Editor Main Toolbar Table 81 COMPASS Report Editor Main Toolbar Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Generate a Report Close all documents and begin the process of creating a new report Open a Report Open a report for viewing or editing Create a New Close all documents and begin the process of creating a new template Template Open a Template Open a template for viewing or editing dr Save Save the current report or template Document will be saved to the filename indicated across the top of the window If the filename contains Untitled or New Template then user will be prompted to provide a filename for the document In order to change either to file location or the file name choose File then Save As from the file menu Print Prints the current report or template Print Preview Provides an illustration of how the report or template should appear when printed on the default printer
37. Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL MACRO CODE TO CREATE A SCANLIST FOR AN AGILENT 34970A TO E D II IO IO k Create a scanlist for the DUTs based on their channel position and output type This code assumes That all DUTS are using the same output type DUTs are defined in ascending multiplexer channel order 1 4 10 20 ect z The Raw outputs of the DUTs is V A Ohms or HZ Target Target value when the SetMode it True Valve Driver Chnl ChnlSt True False to activate or de active a valve driver SetMode True for Set commands False for all other commands ParamID Parameter ID of the device cDevice Device class that the relation ship applies to TO IO E IO IO D IO IO I ICI IO IO Function CreateScanList Target ChnlSt SetMode ParamID cDevice Determine which DUTs are using a multiplexer channel With cCOMPASS cConfig for i 1 to DUTPrs Count chnl DUTPrs i RangeMain MuxChannel if chnl gt 0 and chnl lt 60 then DUT is setup to use a MUX if cmd then Store the output type of the DUT ALL DUTs on the multiplexer must have the same output outputType DUTPrs i RangeMain TypeRaw cmd GetCahnnelID chnl Get the channel else cmd cmd amp amp GetCahnnelID chnl end if end if next End With If there is Scan List INFO then make it happen if
38. MEAS CURRENT DC Switch to channel 5 on the second channel 205 bank in the multiplexer and return the DC current measurement The value is returned by both the set and read commands MEAS Resistance Switch to channel 13 and return the resistance 113 measurement The value is returned by both the set and read commands Create the multiplexer set commands by using the lt Replace x gt option when less than 10 channels will be used or use one of the macro options when 10 or more channels will be used see 3 4 1 Using this setup method requires a unique multiplexer Set for each Read output type used The Read outputs cannot be used without the corresponding multiplexer Set A DUT that uses the voltage output from this multiplexer as a raw output must use the voltage multiplexer channel output To simplify the output selection process define unique labels for each output and set 3 4 2 3 SCANNED OUTPUTS Scanned multiplexer outputs use macros to define a scan list command for all DUTs that use an electrical output supplied by the multiplexer The scan list command is used by a multiplexer channel set definition The outputs are read by defining an output for the multiplexer device to read the electrical output and parse the scan list command response The reply parsing macro not only parses the outputs but it also updates the output information of all devices that are setup to use the multiplexer Scanned multiplex
39. Output tab Then review 4 5 Device Editors for details on how the COMPASS device editors function Rights associated with the active COMPASS user may prevent edits in the Device Definition Editor Adjust the user rights as necessary using the Database Users menu choice The Support Device Editor provides features to create edit view and remove Support Device Definitions from the COMPASS database Access the Support Device Editor using the Setup Support Device menu option or the Main Toolbar Device Definition Editor icon When selected the last accessed Support Device Definition displays To edit an existing Support Device Definition use the Editor Toolbar icons to select the desired definition Then simply edit the desired fields Press the Editor Toolbar Save icon to save the changes Device Definitions are defined and maintained in the same manner as DUT Definitions Page 159 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL The DUT Editor is a COMPASS Device Editor See 4 3 Device Editors for complete information on creating editing and saving Device Definitions using Device Editors Use the following steps to create a Support Device Definition e Press the Editor Toolbar New option Enter a Record Label that allows users to quickly identify a unique Support Device Definition Begin defining the Device Definition starting with the Header tab Select the Manufacturer
40. Pressure Media DHI producte defined with the Auto Detect Setup option do not use the pressure media information defined in COMPASS to perform pressure head corrections During Test Initialization COMPASS sends remote commands to the device to set the selected pressure medium and head height All head corrections are performed internally to the product Refer to the device s Operation and Maintenance Manual for details on head corrections Pressure media are used by COMPASS to fluid head corrections for pressure reference devices A head correction is required when the pressure reference level of a reference device is not the same as the reference level of the DUT In many cases the error associated with not performing a head correction is insignificant As a result pressure head corrections are not always necessary To include a pressure head correction specify a Head Height and a pressure Mediums during Test Initialization When the head height is not zero an lt H gt appear next to the reference pressure when running tests to indicate that a head correction is active see 5 5 4 Device Output Run Screen Refer to section 29 9 fluid heads for details on pressure head calculations There are two types of pressure media The first uses a constant value for density and the second uses density that changes with the current ambient conditions Only pressure media supported by the DHI Unit of Measure Converter can use a non fixe
41. RUN MODES Click the label next to the interface to change the interface type For example from R5232 to IEEE 488 Select an lt Output Source gt when the Final Output is not the remote interface of the device This is typically the case for voltage output DUTs In this case the Output Source selection should specify the voltage source for the device The list of available choices is limited to devices that support the required output of the device The Default Hardware Configuration can be used to provide default support device elements to prevent this selection Run Manual Test Setup Configure DUT 1 of 2 Example Voltage DUT Manufacturer Generic Customer ID Model Interface Other Serial Number 1234 Identification BUT Pressure Output Label Pressure DUT Temperature Measurement Min psi 0 NONE xl Max psi 100 Measurement Mode E Raw Output Type Voltage Use Multiplexer Output Source S ample HP DMM 99999 Channel Cancel Back Next Einish Figure 83 Configure DUT Step Profile DUT DUTs have the option to log temperature in addition to their pressure output The lt DUT Temperature Measurement gt listbox contains a list of all devices designated as General Temperature and DUT Temperature If desired select a DUT temperature measuring device DUT temperature measurement of this type is typically not necessary unless a test that varies temperature is executed Do not select a te
42. Reply Parser This type of macro is used to manipulate the raw remote response of an instrument into a numerical value that can be used by COMPASS Realize that there are built in manipulation functions that allow COMPASS to obtain a response from most ASCII output instruments Refer to the Manipulate Responses topic in 4 4 4 These macros are selected in the Remote Command Editor and called each time the instrument that uses the macro responds to a remote command The macro must return a numeric value that represents the raw output of the device in the specified raw output unit Report Macros are used by the report editor only Select this macro when making a report template The Data File information should be manipulated to obtain a single output used for reporting For example multiple test Data Files can be manipulated to determine repeatability or test uncertainty The value returned by the macro is added to the report without further manipulation Any unit conversion or numeric formatting must as must be handled within the macro Test Macros are available for advanced tests only There are many different ways to use a Test Macro beginning of a test end of test at each point or when changing references or controllers These macros are used only when executing a Test Definition A Test Macro can be used in any way desired It is up to the user to decide the intent of a Test Macro COMPASS does not use the response of this ma
43. Set Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Final Set Labels display list box Contains a list of final sets available from a device Final sets are added and removed using the Add and Remove buttons Select a final set and press Edit Set to modify a final set s information This causes the Set Relationship Editor to load Select Edit Commands to create or modify remote commands associated with the final set Add button Press this button to create a new final set The Set Relationship Editor displays to allow the final set information to be edited Remove button Press this button to remove the final set selected in the Final Set Labels list The Undo button on the Editor Toolbar can be used to restore a deleted final set until the record is saved Raw Set label Displays raw set information corresponding to the final set label selected in the Final Set Labels list Final Set label Displays final set information corresponding to the set label selected in the Final Set Labels list Edit Set button Press this button to edit the information associated with the final set selected in the Final Set Labels list The Set Relationship Editor displays Double clicking the lt Raw Set gt or lt Final Set gt fields is a shortcut to this button Edit Commands button Press this button to open the Remote Command Editor to edit remote commands specific to the final set selected
44. Sort the lt Fields to log gt display by selecting an item then using the UP or DOWN arrow keys while holding the CTRL button Page 197 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL COMPASS Options Ambient Conditions Initialize Test Run Test End Test Piston Gauge DataGrid DataFile DataHeader Interface Language Available fields Fields to log Point Date Time Status Set Pt Test Press Set Time Set Pt Line Pres Fnl Pt Line Pres Set Pt Temp Fnl Pt Temp Out Use CTRL Up or Down arrow to Move items to the opposite list by es 2 change the position of the selection in double clicking the data file Default Settings Figure 129 Options Data In File Tab 14 10 DATA HEADER TAB The Tools Options Data Header tab is used to customize the data logged in the header portion of a test Data File Header data includes detailed information on the specific devices used to measure test data Although header data is the basis of report information not all header data is desired Few COMPASS setups will require all header data Check the header options relevant to your typical COMPASS setups Only header items actually logged to the Data File can be imported into the Test Data Database This is evident by noting the number of devices listed in the lt Device Information gt section of the COMPASS Data Viewer see 21 2 COMPASS Data Viewer This featur
45. String Only COMPASS macros can read or set data in this field See Callnfo1 CalTech String The name of the calibration technician that performed the last calibration CertID String The document tracking number or string for the last certification Comment String Text describing any special conditions of the setup CustomerNum String A unique identifier to associate with a customer DaqType Integer The method to use to communicate with the instrument A device output can still use manual entry even when a remote interface is specified for the device 4 3 6 2 1 e 0 Manual e 1 RS232 e 2 IEEE 488 4 TCP IP e 7 Other Device e 8 Macro e 9 HART via RS232 DHIDevice Boolean TRUE when the Auto Detect Setup option is specified for a DH Instruments product 4 3 3 The value is FALSE otherwise Extra1 String String space available for macro data storage This field is not accessible to the user outside of a macro Extra2 String See Extra Extra3 String See Extra Extra4 String See Extra1 Extra5 String See Extra ID String Device Identification Key Long Device database key Label String Unique description used to identify the device setup in COMPASS LastModified String The date the device was last modified LastModifiedBy String The active
46. Test Script GetCommand GlobalCode Interface Relationship gt gt 2 Mare Fila Maerne An nar hara n vraruymm malna Maninnilara Figure 139 COMPASS Macro Editor in Edit Mode The bottom of the COMPASS Macro Editor includes a debug window see Figure 140 Perform simple command and function tests by entering code in the top line and pressing enter Routines that return a value should always be proceeded with a This includes VB Script intrinsic functions as well as Page 213 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL functions defined in the macro Routines that do not return a value should be entered directly in the top line without a prefix Press Enter or Execute test the code The field below the top line displays the output of the script entered or an error message Macro functione that include objecte cannot be tested in the Debug Window Functions that use objecte within the macro code must be tested while running teste or when generating reporte Review section 18 4 Troubleshooting Macros for the details on testing object based macros Debug Window formatNumber 23 056503 2 m Execute FEES Figure 140 Macro Editor in Debug Window 18 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MACROS COMPASS macros are not compiled As a result errors are not detected until the macro is actually used A simple type o can prevent a macro from functioning properly Always use consistent variable
47. The device s remote output unit is not the same as the lt Raw Output Unit gt on the lt Output Relationship gt setup Refer to the device s operation manual for instructions on changing the display and or remote interface output unit of a device If possible use initialization commands to set a device to the required lt Raw Output Unit gt This prevents front panel changes from affecting the COMPASS setup Each time COMPASS runs a test an error log file is created Specific error information is written to this file when errors occur in COMPASS This includes remote communications errors macro errors control timeout errors ect In the event an automated test fails for reasons unknown always refer to this file Ifa new test is started the old error log file is erased and a new error log file is created So do not start a new test until the error log file is checked if a problem occurs The file is named CompErrs log and is stored in the root directory of the COMPASS program Typically this is C Program Files COMPASS for Pressure Page 363 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 364 31 GLOSSARY 31 GLOSSARY 9999 This is an invalid numeric data flag used by COMPASS The value is written to data files but not displayed throughout the program For example a 96 of reading error with a 0 reference pressure will log this value in
48. The test is the procedure used by COMPASS to calibrate or test a DUT Link Tests to DUTs Linking a test to a DUT assures that when a DUT is selected it will be tested with the test script that has been assigned to it Customizable Reports Fully customizable reports that can be saved in MS Word format Automated Support of DHI Products All remotely accessible features in products manufactured by DHI are controllable by COMPASS In most cases this allows complete test automation Page 1 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL COMPASS COMPASS FOR FOR PRESSURE PRESSURE ENHANCED BASIC COMPASS FOR PPC RPM FEATURE DESCRIPTION Define and Maintain DUTs DUT definitions store the comprehensive identifying characteristics of a device under test and the fundamental output to pressure relationship that COMPASS will use to determine the final output pressure Delimited ASCII Character Test Files Comprehensive test parameters and results are saved to delimited ASCII character files that are easily downloaded into other applications such as Microsoft Excel Separation of Reference Control and Measure Two different devices can be used for reference control and measurement within a test For example a low accuracy control device can be combined with a high precision reference measurement device to automate a test Manual Test Support Manual tests allow a
49. This serial number is automatically compared to the serial number of specified in the device definition If this option is checked a warning message displays when the serial numbers do not match This is an easy way to help guarantee that the proper instruments are used during tests Do not check this option if the serial number specified for DH instruments products includes information other than the serial number of the device Use DHI PG ambient conditions when PG is used as the reference check box Check this option to use the ambient pressure temperature and humidity outputs of a DH Instruments PG7000 when it is used as the pressure reference Checking this option prevents the manual selection of these ambient sources List DHI PPC ambient sensors for ambient pressure when applicable check box Some DHI pressure controllers have a built in ambient pressure sensor Check this box to list these sensors amongst the ambient pressure devices If this option is not checked only the main RPT of the controller will be listed amongst the ambient pressure devices Display warning when no DUT is selected check box A test initialization warning message displays when no DUTs are selected in Run Test and Run Manual test modes when this options is selected Auto increment serial number of profile DUTs check box Check this box to allow automatic entry of the DUT serial number for profile DUTs The serial num
50. To display other pressure cycles or compare test or line pressure cycles the field s properties must be edited This is done after each field is added to the template see 23 10 3 Data Source and Cycle Selection Information added after a text field in a table could be over written if the number of pointe exceed the blank rows between celle Normal arat 2 87uj egsseselm SHE Available Data Fields F F Available Data 2 1 2 3 4 5 General Information AZFid Test Data COMPASS Report Example Reference Data Database ID Final Min Pressure DUT Pressure Reference Pressure Rdg Error Final Max Pressure y Final Counts Final Standard Deviation Raw Dutput 1 Raw Output 2 Raw Output 3 Temperature Mass Piston Position Piston Rotation Vacuum Reference Mass List DUT Data Database ID Figure 190 Adding Dynamic Data to a Table Page 287 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 288 24 DATABASE SETUP 24 DATABASE SETUP 24 1 OVERVIEW The database menu choice contains features directly related to the COMPASS configuration database COMPASS uses a Microsoft Access Database to store device setup and configuration information This database can be shared simultaneously by up to 10 users when a COMPASS site license is purchased and the database is placed o
51. output of the PG7000 as the ambient conditions source for the test When a piston gauge is selected as the pressure reference the controller option defaults to Manual Control If a controller is selected it is assumed that the controller will change the mass and float the piston cylinder COMPASS will not prompt the test operator to change the mass load Instead COMPASS will wait for a Ready output from the controller or wait for the piston position to be within the test defined Dead Band value Review section Piston Gauge Ready Not Ready 3 3 5 4 for details on the Ready criterion of a piston gauge Use the drop down arrow next to each selection to select a new device Each list of devices is populated according to the specified final output of the device For example the list of Ambient Pressure devices includes all instruments with a final output of Ambient Pressure and General Pressure The next step is the selection of Auxiliary Output Devices This step is included only when the step is enabled in the Tools Options test initialization Up to 10 Auxiliary Output Devices can be used at a time The intent of auxiliary devices is to allow users to acquire data from instruments that would otherwise be excluded from COMPASS data acquisition Select the auxiliary devices in the display grid in the same way as DUTs 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 128 7 RUN MODES Run Manual Test Setup Test Hardware Configuration
52. to be distinguish from each other it is recommended that separate macros be created for setting and reading with different instruments The arguments are provided for the case in which one instrument can set and read an output In this case a single macro should be created to handle the different command requests Having all of the code in one location will simplify edits and troubleshooting This example returns a command used to read an instrument based on it s ParamID value This command would be polled by the remote interface of COMPASS The user must set the Parameter ID field to the appropriate value during test initialization for this macro to function properly It is not required to use this method If only DUTs are using an address based command chain the position of the DUT in the DUT object collection can be used to determine the address ID value of a command ee D ee ee ee Return pressure output in psi Target Target value when the SetMode it True Valve Driver Chnl ChnlSt True False to activate or de active a valve driver SetMode True for Set commands False for all other commands ParamID Parameter ID of the device cRange Device Range Class that the relation ship applies to The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value For example GetCommandMacro val mid rawReply 5 RU III III III E E AE E E E AE CII ICICI II I
53. 12 1 AVAILABLE DATA FIELDS The Available Data Fields panel displays on the left side of the COMPASS Report Editor when editing a template This display defines all data directly available for reporting Not every field in this panel is guaranteed to be in any selected data source Options in the COMPASS main program control the actual data stored in a Data File see 14 9 Data In File Tab In the case where a data field is included in a template but the corresponding data is not present in the Data File the data field is simply deleted The display of the Available Data Fields panel is segregated in to 4 main sections Within each section are other layers of segregation Locate the desired data by first choosing the appropriate top level topic then search the hierarchy for the desired field Table 92 describes the 4 main sections of the Available Data Fields panel Table 92 COMPASS Report Editor Available Data Fields DATA FIELD DESCRIPTION TYPE General General data fields are replaced one for one by data from the selected data sources Information These fields mostly consist of device and test information In most cases units cannot be appended to these fields Only device information available in the data file can be reported see 14 10 Data Header Tab Test Data Test Data Fields represent actual test data recorded during the test and calculated values commonly used for reporting The items are categorized by d
54. 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL automatically issued by COMPASS to set the entered target It is assumed any output entered is in the current display unit of measure Click these fields to use other controller specific functions such as regulate jog abort control vent and set driver state Outputs that require manual entry have a white background for the Raw Output field Entering a value in these fields automatically updates the Final Output It is assumed any output entered is in the current display unit of measure Devices that have a remote interface also support the use of Spy Windows see 5 5 4 1 Spy Windows These display output specific commands and responses used by COMPASS to communicate with a device Each output has it s own Spy Window This makes it easy to view the commands used to generate a specific output or response in COMPASS To view a Spy Window click the Final Output of any output and select Spy Window from the popup menu Change the unit of measure and resolution of the final output by clicking the output and selecting the desired function Click any output and select Strip Chart to create a strip chart using the selected output COMPASS converts the specified final output of a device to the specified display unit of measure By default the display unit is the test specified unit or the unit defined in the device setup It depends on the type of output and the a
55. 21 2 or to add the data automatically at the end of a test by using the Database Setup menu choice see 24 2 Test one specific DUT without having to enter its serial number and ID during test initialization Set the DUT up as a DUT Definition DUT Definitions define unique DUTs and include the DUT s serial and ID number When a DUT definition is run it is assumed there is only one DUT with the specified serial number and ID DUT Profiles allow serial number and range information to be modified during test initialization DUT Profiles allow a single definition to be used for any number of DUTs of the same type see 4 3 3 Header Tab View the current test point during a test Click either of the inset panels on the Status Bar at the bottom of the main display The Test Status form displays with the current test point information see 5 3 Status Bar Repeat a point in a test Use the Skip Back and Skip Forward keys from the Run Test Toolbar to move through test points Check what Test Definition is being used while a test is running Click on the Run Test Toolbar View Test icon to display the active Test Definition The test display must be closed before data can be collected during a test Repeat the same test several times without having to pause or restart the test Specify multiple Complete Test Cycles in the Test Definition see 8 7 Data Tab In the Data tab of the Test Definition specify a number gr
56. 4 3 6 2 3 1 Tolerance Choices for a detailed explanation of each tolerance choice Entries are provided for Reading FS and Constant values as required by the specific tolerance selection required drop down list selection Page 55 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Tolerance Segment The selection defines the portion of the device final output span to which the Definition tolerance information applies Each selection generates a new graphical representation of the segment The graph is intended to aid in understanding how the tolerance is applied The graph is not proportional to the segment size defined conditional drop down list selection The segment definition choices are All Final Outputs The tolerance information is valid for the entire span minimum to maximum of the device This selection cannot be used when more than one tolerance segment is specified Output lt The tolerance information is valid as long as the measured output is strictly less than the value entered The value must be entered in terms of percent of the output span Tolerdfi e Segment Definition em lt Vall All Final Outputs Less Than fo 00 Tol a Min Max Val1 lt Output Val2 The tolerance information is valid as long as the measured output is greater than or equal to the first value entered and strictly less than the second value en
57. A site license allows COMPASS to run on up to 10 computers belonging to one organization at one site Up to 10 copies of COMPASS can access the database simultaneously This allows multiple COMPASS stations to share the same COMPASS setup at the same time 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 4 2 INSTALLING COMPASS 2 INSTALLING COMPASS 2 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS for Pressure is delivered on a CD ROM The original installation must be made off the CD ROM Subsequent upgrades can be made by download from the website www dhinstruments com With the exception of the installation initialization the installation program prompts and options are the same in either case When the internet download of COMPASS is executed the installation program immediately executes to guide the installation process When installing from a purchased CD ROM the CD s installation program automatically runs To install COMPASS choose the Install COMPASS for Pressure option To install rom CD ROM Insert the COMPASS for Pressure CD into the CD drive If the auto run feature is enabled on the PC the setup application runs automatically If the setup program does not run after 10 seconds press the Windows Start button and select Run Inthe Run dialog box type d setup or f setup depending on the drive letter of the CD drive of the installation disk Select COMPASS for Pressure from the list of applications and follow the installation pro
58. Admin user cannot be removed or renamed Edit the Password if desired COMPASS Users User login during COMPASS startup Supported Users User Access Database v DUT Mass Bells Mass Sets Piston Gauge Platform v Password User Name lack Current User Admin Figure 193 lt COMPASS Users in Edit Mode 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 290 24 DATABASE SETUP The table below lists the user rights associated with different selections in the User Access field To maintain users rights the access level of the current user must include Users access If this is not the case use the Database Change Current User option Use the Add and Remove buttons to add and remove users Table 93 COMPASS Users Selections and Associated Rights FEATURE DESCRIPTION User login during Check this option to require a valid login during COMPASS startup When this feature is not COMPASS startup checked the last user and associated rights are automatically enforced by COMPASS checkbox Supported Users List of all supported users Click a name in the list to view the corresponding User Access limits and lt Password gt drop down list box selection User Access Displays the list of rights associated with the current user selected in the lt Supported Userss list Options that are checked give the user full access Options that are not checked are list of checkboxes
59. Average button is pressed the averaging process continues just as though a fixed time were specified in the Test Definition If the manual average is used a new message displays awaiting confirmation of when to end averaging The elapsed time displays on the window until the average is ended Averaging occurs only for instruments that can be read automatically At the completion of test averaging the manual entry window displays when manual entry devices are used in the test e If this is the last point in a pressure cycle the Tools Options End Test tab last point selection is used to determine what to do after the last point During all other test points pressing the Step Back run toolbar option allows points to be repeated by stepping back through the point sequence Since a new cycle begins or the test ends immediately following the last point this special option is used to allow the user to repeat a point at the end of a test e After all data is collected test execution continues with the setting of the next test pressure target Step 6 This process is repeated for all test pressure points for each Pressure Cycle defined in Test Definition e After each pressure point and pressure cycle are complete test execution resumes with the next line pressure target Step 5 e After each line pressure is complete test execution resumes with the next test temperature target Step 4 When multiple Complete Test Cycles
60. Be sure to refer to the device s User s Manual for assistance specific to the device Changes to interface settings made in Tools Remote Communications are temporary If changes were necessary to establish communications these changes must be made in the device s Device Definition Determine the Manipulate Response selection required to get a number from a response to a remote device Use Tools Remote Communications to query the device and observe its response string Count the number of characters that precede the numeric output This is the number of characters to specify in the Manipulate Response field Log data not already logged by COMPASS Use Setup Support Device to create a device to provide the desired output if the output is not already part of an existing Device Definition When initializing the test select the desired output in the Auxiliary Output test step Realize that any output can be used as an auxiliary device Log data without running a test or take data over an extended period of time Use Run Run Manual Test to begin data acquisition with the desired devices see 7 5 Run Run Manual Test Select the Create Data File option on the Run Toolbar Then use the data acquisition options to log discrete data points or take points over time Page 97 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Copy a COMPASS setup from one PC to another PC or share COMPASS on
61. COMPASS tests this DUT it will identify it as having a voltage output and use the DMM to read the voltage This implementation allows the DMM to be used at other times in COMPASS to read voltage or other signals without redefining the remote interface for each use It also simplifies changes related to the DMM since it only needs to be changed in its Support Device Definition not for each DUT that uses it There are occasions in which a support device is dedicated to a specific measurement or control device For example a DUT may be married to a specific signal conditioner In this case the signal conditioner can be considered part of the DUT included in the DUT Definition Therefore the remote commands for the conditioner should be specified with the DUT Definition Page 39 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL For advanced DUTs and support devices this tab provides support of independent interfaces for measurement and control To set up for a device to use separate measurement and control interfaces uncheck the Common Set and Read Interface When this feature is unchecked separate interface frames for an Output Interface and a Set Interface are displayed Header Calibration Co wurications Common Set and Read interface Data Acquistion Type 932 Y IEEE 488 Address 10 Interface Command Timeout s a Command Terminator CR LF E Response Terminator lt CR gt KL
62. COMPASS users when the device was last modified MandTE Boolean TRUE when the M amp TE flag is specified for a device and FALSE otherwise Manufacturer String Device manufacturer Model String Device model Page 325 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION ParamID User defined identification value for a device This value can be entered only during test initialization It is used as a flag to handle similar devices differently Particularly when devices require individual command addressing This is frequently the case when instruments are connected using an interface chain RecordType Integer Type of information stored in the device e 0 Definition e 1 Profile w Range 2 Profile without Range SetType Integer The interface to use to control the device When the SharedlO property is TRUE use the DaqType property instead See DaqType SharedlO Boolean TRUE when the Set and Output interface of a device will use the same interface settings SN String Device serial number 28 5 2 METHODS Name ShowRunDisplay Purpose Display the device run screen Syntax Sub ShowRunDisplay Arguments None Return None Value Remarks This method is equivalent to selecting the device run screen from the main toolbar 5 4 2 Example N A 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 326 28 COMPASS O
63. Calibration Record menu choice Follow section 22 3 1 Creating the Calibration Record to create a new record When editing an existing calibration locate the correct calibration by the calibration date and time e Select the Edit Calibration Results icon see Figure 164 Cal date Cal Time Pass Due Date Due Time 01718703 10 05 09 34 Eg Ipsos 10 09 34 Figure 164 Edit Calibration Results Option e separate Calibration Results form will display This form includes the option to enter calibration results as text Add the Data File by pressing the Import Calibration Results icon and selecting the COMPASS Data File to import see Figure 165 Alternatively cut and paste the Data File into the Calibration Results window To use this method first open the Data File in the COMPASS Data Viewer or in any text editor such as Notepad see 19 Data View Data File Highlight and copy the text contents by first clicking the text data displayed pressing CTRL A select all followed by CTRL C copy Click the text display in the Calibration Window and press CTRL V paste e Press the Save option and close the Calibration Results form The complete data file is stored in the MET CAL database Calibration Results B Figure 165 Calibration Results as Text Option 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 258 22 EXPORTING COMPASS DATA Follow the steps below to re create the Data File Thi
64. Circular Indicator Green when the PPC pressure is Ready and red when the pressure is Not Ready Refer to the PPCx Operation and Maintenance Manual for complete information on PPC Ready Not Ready conditions Rate The current pressure rate of change pressure unit s Pressure Instantaneous PPCx pressure Change the pressure unit of measure by right clicking the display The unit of measure on the PPOx front panel is not changed COMPASS performs the unit conversion and displays the resultant value ATM Atmospheric pressure output by the PPCx s on board barometer if present kPa Range The active range Target Pressure The last set target pressure Enter a new target pressure and press the computer s Enter key to set a new pressure with the PPCx Hold Limit The active PPCx control hold limit Enter a new value and press the computer s Enter key to change the hold limit Stability Setting The active PPCx stability setting Enter a new value and press the computer s Enter key to change the stability setting Target Limit The active PPCx target limit Only PPC2 and PPCK pressure controllers support this feature Enter a new value and press the computer s Enter key to change the target limit Toggle Vent E Toggles the state of the PPCx vent function Increase Pressure Increases pressure at the PPCx s fast or slow up rate based on the lt Fast Slow gt
65. Cylinders are used with Deadweight Tester Type Platforms and output pressure is defined by summing the pressure values assigned to all of the loaded masses A Piston Cylinder must be used with a platform of the same type as the Piston Cylinder Piston Gauge or Deadweight Tester After a Piston Cylinder is defined future changes using the editor are required only for maintenance purposes updates in effective area or corresponding pressure For this reason and due to the critical metrological impact errors in the Piston Cylinder can cause restricting user access to the Piston Cylinder Editor is highly recommended Administrative users can assign user rights with Database Users Edit Piston Cylinders by selecting the appropriate tab and editing the necessary information Press the Editor Toolbar Save icon save changes to the setup The following sections describe the options on the Piston Cylinder Editor 1L3 1 HEADER TAB See section 4 3 3 Header Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 166 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE 1L3 2 CALIBRATION TAB See section 4 3 4 Calibration Tab 1L3 3 TOLERANCE TAB When the Piston Cylinder Type specified on the Piston Cylinder Editor Header tab Is Piston Gauge the tolerance on the piston cylinder effective area and mass value are specified on the Tolerance tab see 4 3 6 2 3 Tolerance Tab When the Piston cylinder Type specified on the Piston Cylinder Editor Header t
66. DLITs are selected Auto increment serial numbers of profile DLIT s 1 Skip Auxiliary Device test step Select enter user name 1 Select support devices by Label Dutput Label Figure 123 Options Initialize Test Tab Cancel Page 186 14 TOOLS OPTIONS Table 56 Options Initialize Test Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Only use references that are marked M amp TE check box Check this option to prevent pressure and temperature references that are not specified as M amp TE from being selected during test initialization Only use reference Sources that are marked M amp TE check box Check this option to prevent reference support instruments that are not marked as M amp TE from being selected during test initialization This includes DMMs piston cylinders mass sets mass bells and reference vacuum devices Only use reference and output sources that have valid calibration dates check box Check this option to limit references and output sources to instruments that have valid calibration dates That is the date of the test is between the defined calibration date and the calibration due date see 4 3 4 Display warning when DHI device setup SN and remote SN do not match check box The serial number of a DH Instruments device that has the lt Auto Detect gt setup option enabled see 4 3 3 Header Tab is automatically read during test initialization
67. DRAG AND DROP CREATION The COMPASS Report Editor supports the ability create reports with the drag and drop method Data Files are dragged over the main window of the Report Editor and dropped The Report Editor will use the default template to create reports based on this data Multiple 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 284 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR reports may be produced depending on the number of Data Files and the data requirement of the default template Data Files that are dropped must be valid COMPASS Test Data Files and have a dat extension 23 1L3 SAVING REPORTS Depending on options selections the Report Editor will auto save and write protect reports as soon as they are generated see 23 9 1 Reports Tab These options are controlled from the Options window and must be set prior to creating reports These options also govern the default format and location of saved reports These selections are merely defaults There are no restrictions imposed on the location and type of files saved manually by using the Save or Save As option Reports are saved in one of four separate formats The formats are differentiated by file extension Each format has unique benefits By default the doc format is recommended 23 1L4 DISPLAY VIEW REPORTS Old reports are recalled and viewed in the Report Editor by using the File Open Report menu Reports created in the Report Editor Report Format rpt must be viewed
68. Definition and the line pressure reference has a remote interface the target line pressure is adjusted based on the output of the line pressure reference at intervals specified by the Test Definition Regulation is explained in greater detain in section 3 3 5 1 e Stability Test After the line pressure is set using an automated controller the test stability criteria are used to determine when the line pressure is ready controller is ready because the remote response from the controllers Ready Command returns true or the line pressure reference outputs a pressure that is within the hold limit relative to the target and the output is stable within the stability limit Stability and hold criteria are used only when an automated line pressure reference is used e Jog before dwell If jog mode is selected in the Test Definition the Output Control window displays with only the Target Temperature and Jog buttons active Use these control functions in the necessary combination to set the desired output e Dwell If timed dwell is specified in the Test Definition the dwell time counts down and execution continues lf the Test Definition specifies manual dwell COMPASS waits for the operator to press OK on the Dwell Complete dialog box before test execution continues Set Test Pressure Prior to setting the test pressure any pre point macro or valve driver change specified in the Test Definition is set before setting the pressure The active p
69. Dwell 20 Regulate Nor N 45 21 22 utomati E Pressure Cycles i 1 Insert Auto Fil Vent After Each Cycle gt Figure 88 Select Test Definition using lt View gt Page 127 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 7 3 5 VERIFY SELECT TEST HARDWARE This test initialization step allows the user to select the devices to use for ambient conditions reference pressure and control the test multiplexer and the test valve driver By default the selections defined in this step are those specified in the selected Test Definition When running a manual test this step always displays the last selections made when running a manual test Press the Default Hardware Setup button at the bottom of the display to use the hardware specified in the Default Hardware Configuration This option is not available when running a Test Definition with the Lock Setup option enabled see 8 7 Data Tab If the Test Definition species Default for reference or controller the instrument selected in the Default Hardware Configuration option is used see 12 Setup Default Hardware Configuration Test hardware cannot be modified when the selected Test Definition uses the Lock Setup option s When the selected piston gauge ie a DH Instrumente PG7000 a Tools Options Initialize Test preference can be used to automatically select the ambient conditions
70. FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL e Define a vent command setup to allow COMPASS to vent the controller as required by a Test Definition see 4 4 3 1 Click the Use Remote Vent option and press the Edit Vent Command s button see Figure 79 Define the vent command in the Remote Command Editor see Figure 80 Support Device Record sensor PCS 400 8 12 1 Label gt Support Device Editor x Header Calibration Communications Outpu Set 1 Raw Set Pressure 0 000 1500 000 psi Final Set Test Pressure Control 0 to 1500 psi Edit Set Edit Commands Use Ready Status M Hold Stability Ready Add 3 Use Remote Vent Edit Vent Command s Use Remote Control Abort Control Abort Remove Final Set Labels Figure 79 mensor PCS 400 Vent Command Selection s Vent Command Editor Pressure Commands SET 11 post func Command Global Settings Command Type Set Command Number 1 Command pcs4 func vent Delay After Command s 0 Read Response Figure 80 mensor PCS 400 Vent Command Setup e Save the support device The controller will be available for use as a controller and as a reference when initializing a test 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 118 7 RUN MODES 7 RUN MODES 7 1 OVERVIEW Run mode describes the automatic execution function that COMPASS is in Typically instruments are polled over their remote interface while in a run mode
71. Gauge Trim Mass Defines a trim mass set to be used with a Piston Gauge type mass set a Piston Gauge type mass set and a Piston Gauge type platform This is for small masses usually 100 g whose true mass value is assumed to be equal to the nominal value The setup choices of the Mass Set Editor change based on this selection CALIBRATION TAB The Calibration tab is common to the definition editor for all device setups in COMPASS This includes DUT Support Device Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell Editors The fields on this tab are used to include information specific to the device s calibration in its definition COMPASS provides features to limit the use of setups that are out of calibration The Calibration tab information is also available on reports Not all features of the Calibration tab are available on all COMPASS Editors Table 9 describes the Calibration tab features The Feature column notes features that are not available in certain setup types 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 36 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES All features on the Calibration tab are optional The information ie provided for calibration tracking The last edit and the active user for the edit are always provided on this tab in the Record Last Edited and Record Last Edited By fields Use the Calibration Setting fields to store calibration settings for an instrument Not only ie t
72. Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Pre Point Macro This option allows the selection of a COMPASS Test Macro to execute prior to setting a M test point All Test Macros are listed in the Select Test Macro dialog Select a macro from the list or choose the Add Macro option to use the COMPASS Macro Editor to define a new Test Macro see 18 5 8 Test Macros A Test Macro can perform a variety of operations in a single step Changing valve states while monitoring the output of test devices is a common use of this feature Select Test Macro Figure 98 Test Macro Selector Delete Point Deletes the selected test point All points in the test point table are shifted up 8 6 3 CUSTOM POINT OPERATIONS To the left of each point is a number identifying the point and in some cases a sequence of letters These letters describe special operations associated with the test point These operations must take place prior to actually setting a point target The order of these operations is fixed by COMPASS and described in the table below The table lists the codes in order of their operation 110 2 MDV 20 ag Figure 99 Custom Operation Point Labels Table 37 Custom Operation Point Label Definitions CODE FUNCTION A Test Macro will execute for the test point The pressure or temperature measurement reference will change at the test point The reference is defined on the point sequen
73. Line Pressure Control and General Pressure Control Temperature Lists support devices that have Final Set of Temperature Control The control settings associated with the controller are specified on the Point Sequence Tab Set child tab For Advanced Test Definitions the option selected in this field is always assumed to be the first controller if there are multiple controllers The Set child tab species all controllers and indicates the order in which they are used and their control settings Jog Before Dwell check box If this is checked when the test is run test execution pauses just before the dwell phase of the test point to allow the target to be adjusted before completing the point If the controller is automated adjustments are made using the Jog Control form This feature is most often used to adjust test pressure to the DUT indicated cardinal point when testing a visual output DUT such as an analog pressure gauge Jog Before Dwell gt has no affect when the controller is manual Regulate list box selection This feature is used to specify to what device s reading the target should be adjusted when an automated controller and reference are used in the test The lt Regulate gt feature is ignored when either the Read or Set device does not include automated measurement and control see 3 3 5 1 Regulation The choices are None COMPASS calculates and sends the command for the target output to the contro
74. MANUAL allows the user to specify how to merge the target with the remote command to control the device This setup is not required when using DHI products for control When running tests devices that support automated control can be adjusted using their run screens or the Test Conditions Run Screen see 5 5 3 TEST Conditions Run Screen Click the target output display enter the desired target and press Enter on the keyboard When running a Test Definition in Run Test mode this feature can be disabled by using a Tools Options Run Test preference see 14 4 Run Test Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc 3 3 5 1 REGULATION When test controllers and references both use a remote interface regulation is supported by COMPASS Regulation allows control to be to the measurement of a device other than the controller For example the controller may regulate to the device outputting reference pressure or to the DUT This allows the output to be set to DUT cardinal points In regulation mode the test target command is sent to the controller Then at a time interval COMPASS corrects the target value sent to the controller to reach the desired target as read by the output reference or DUT device This process continues until a new test point is set The correction is calculated using the current desired target the last attempted target and the current measured output 98 of this correction is used for each adjustment to dampen
75. MacroDefinedl FormatNumber T 4 next next End With End Function 18 5 2 GET COMMAND MACROS 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc ParamID Chnist Text value entered during Valve driver channel Test Initialization state Target Target Output for a SetMode cRange controll er True when a controller is The Range Class calling the macro and associated with the output FALSE other wise Get Command Macro The macro must use the input infor mtion to determine the appropriate command to send to the remote device Set the macro function name equal to the remote command to send When an emptystring is retur ned acommandis not sentto the remote device Return command to COMPASS Figure 143 Get Command Macro Prototype Page 218 Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Remarks Example 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR GetCommand Macros are used to create remote commands for devices that cannot use a constant ASCII string entered directly in the Remote Command Editor COMPASS calls these macros as needed to obtain read and set commands The return value of the macro must be the remote command to send to the instrument using the instruments remote interface If an empty string is returned COMPASS will not send the remote command Function GetCommand Target ChnlSt SetMode ParamID cRange e Target The target output value when the SetMode parameter is TRUE The target output is determined by a Test Definition or
76. MassBellMass The mass bell mass in kg MassBellSerialNumber The serial number of the mass bell used with the device MassSetDatabaselD The primary database key of the mass set MassSetSerialNumber Page 314 The serial number of the mass set PROPERTIES MassSetTotalLoad DATA TYPE 28 COMPASS OBJECTS DESCRIPTION Mass set total mass in kg MassUnit The unit associated with the mass load For piston gauges the value is always kg Deadweight testers will use a pressure unit MeasMode Pressure measurement mode of pressure output and controlling devices Model Manufacturer s model number PistCyl1DatabaselD Primary database key for the first piston cylinder used for the device PistCyl1EffectiveArea Effective area in for the first piston cylinder used for the device PistCyl1KN Nominal pressure to mass relationship for the first piston cylinder used for the device PistCyl1 SerialNumber Serial number for the first piston cylinder used for the device PistCyl2DatabaselD Primary database key for the second piston cylinder used for the device PistCyl2EffectiveArea Effective area in mm for the second piston cylinder used for the device PistCyl2KN Nominal pressure to mass relationship for the second piston cylinder used for the device PistCyl2SerialNumber Serial number for the second piston cylinder used for the
77. PC by pressing the Port button The actual port and settings used and the interface type can be changed during test initialization see 7 3 3 Configure DUT s Devices e Press the Save toolbar option The PG7000 setup is complete e To verify the setup run a manual test and select the PG700 as the reference Choose the Run Run Manual Test menu choice to start a manual test see 7 5 Run Run Manual Test Do not select a DUT at this time The goal of this run is to simply verify that the PG7000 is properly setup Press Next to proceed to the next Test Initialization step see 7 3 5 Verify Select Test Hardware Select the PG7000 in the Reference Pressure field By default the Pressure Control field will change to Manual Control Based on the current preferences in Tools Options Initialize Test the ambient conditions outputs of the PG7000 are automatically selected as outputs Devices are selected by their Record Label and Serial Number by default Change how devices are selected by changing test initialization options see 14 3 Initialize Test Tab The selection in Figure 62 is baed on lt Record Label gt and lt Output Label gt 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 106 6 HOW DO I Run Manual Test Setup Test Hardware Configuration Ambient Pressure Sample PG7601 Amb Pressure M Ambient Temperature Sample PG7601 Amb Temperature Ambient Humidity Sample PG7601 Amb Humidit
78. Resolution kg g 00000 Pressure Expansion MPa p 737 E 6 Average Density ka nv 7270 Pressure Expansion 2nd n E 6 Min Rotion Rate RPM 5 Reference Level Offset mm n Max Rotion Rate RPM 40 Surface Tension NZm 0 031 Figure 112 Piston Cylinder Editor Piston Gauge Type Characteristics Tab Page 167 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 46 Piston Cylinder Editor Piston Gauge Type Characteristics Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Effective Area required numeric entry The effective area of the Piston Cylinder at 20 C and 0 pressure The value must be entered in square millimeters mm Mass required numeric entry The mass of the piston or cylinder whichever is floated The value must be entered in kilogram kg Mass Resolution required drop down list selection The resolution with which mass values are entered in the Mass field stored in the Individual Masses list The resolution option is necessary to avoid rounding and truncating errors when determining target pressures given a mass load when using the Piston Gauge Calculator Average Density required numeric entry The average or apparent density of the piston or cylinder assembly whichever is floated piston or cylinder head cap The value must be entered in kilogram per cubic meter kg m Min Rotation Rate optional numeric entry field Th
79. Stop Bits The field must be set to the settings defined by the remote device Refer to the device manual for information on how to obtain the proper RS232 settings When incorrect settings are used proper communication is not possible Change the selection by pressing the Ports button This option is available only when the Data Acquisition Type is RS232 or HART RS232 The Binary conditional checkbox selection This feature is available for RS232 interfaces only Check this box when the RS232 instrument requires binary communications instead of ASCII based communications Instruments that use non printable commands sets that include check sums typically require this option to be checked Command Timeout s numeric entry remote interface Data Acquisition Type only The maximum length of time for the device to wait for a response from a remote command If a response is not received within this amount of time a COMPASS timeout occurs Command Terminator text entry drop down list Selection remote interface Data Acquisition Type only Defines how the device terminates command strings The selected or entered value is automatically appended to the end of every command issued Make sure that the terminator is not also included in the remote command setup The selections available from the drop down list are CR lt LF gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Carriage return ASCII character 13 Line
80. THEGK Uncheck All C Program Files COMPASS for Pressure D ata PPC3 01 364 dat Program Files COMPASS for Pressure D ata RPM4 01 364 dat Rename View Test Data Generate Report Re Run Test View Database Data Add Data to Database Delete File Plot Test Data Exit Test Figure 93 lt Test Complete gt Panel Table 33 lt Test Complete gt Panel Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Rename Used to override the default name and directory for the Data File resulting from the test Brings up a standard Windows Save As file box showing the default directory and file action button name These can be rewritten if desired View Test Data Used to review raw test data immediately following test completion without exiting the test completely This selection causes the Data File viewer to appear with the dat file from the test that has just completed open This is functionally equivalent to selecting Data View Data File with the Data File from the test that has just completed see 19 Data View Data File Close the Data File viewer using the control box lt X gt or press lt Esc gt to return to the Test Complete selections action button Generate Report Used as a shortcut to generate a test report immediately following test completion The COMPASS Report Editor merges the Data File with the last used report template to generate a report Multiple individual reports can automatically be crea
81. Tab Leto Ete tege dice ee ie 198 Options Data Header Tab issue 199 COMPASS Options Interface Tab 200 Options Language Tab sisi 200 Direct Remote Communications ss 201 Unit 0 ect 204 Display Piston Gauge Calculator Setup sss 204 Piston Gauge Calculatot eid ec att ecd i ctr datae 205 PG7000 Setup EXtIactQr ieri pea ie eret it acce a dt Maso tenes a 209 COMPASS Macro Edilor ree a att s e en ann 211 COMPASS Macro Editor in Edit Mode ss 213 Macro Editor in Debug Window 214 Device Output Macro 216 Data File Macro Prototype t e ee read be 217 Get Command Macro 1 2 sise 218 Global Macro Prototype sisi 220 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page XIV Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Fig
82. The COMPASS Macro Editor does not provide syntax highlighting and there are no pop up menus available to view the properties events and methods of objects within a macro Fortunately there are many similarities Knowing Visual Basic dramatically simplifies the learning curve of VB Script and macro creation in COMPASS Below is a list of language features that are common to both languages and frequently used in macro implementation in COMPASS For Do and While loops are supported With blocks can be used to avoid using explicit variable qualification Program comments are indicated by a at the beginning of line Objects can be created and used by VB Script Use the GetObject and CreateObject functions as needed The objects returned by these functions can be stored within a COMPASS object or as global objects within a macro module so that the object is not destroyed when a particular script function goes out of scope 5 Good programming practice is always recommended to simplify troubleshooting Use a consistent variable naming convention and add comments to describe the intended function of code A more detailed discussion of this language is beyond the scope of this manual Visit the URL below for a complete language reference Refer to the COMPASS Objects section for information on the objects that COMPASS makes available to the language see 28 1 COMPASS Objects http msdn microsoft com library defa
83. The top of the main screen always displays the current run mode All run modes support the ability to log data to a Data File COMPASS has three run modes Idle No run mode is active Menu items such as Setup can only be accessed in this mode They are not available in active run modes Run Test Definition Activated by the Run Run Test menu option This run mode is to run a Test Definition to follow pre defined test parameters and run a specified test sequence Run Manual Test Activated by the Run Run Manual Test menu option This run mode allows any combination of test hardware and DUTs to be specified There is no pre defined test sequence Pressures can be set as desired and data can be taken at well by pressing the appropriate data acquisition option on the Main Toolbar Other than lt Idle gt which indicates that COMPASS is in a state in which configuration changes can be made each of these run modes is found in the Run menu on the main program Before activating a run mode make sure that all instruments that will be used to run are properly configured and remotely connected to the host PC This will prevent interface time outs that will interrupt the test initialization process 7 2 RUN RUN TEST This menu selection is used to begin test execution using a Test Definition Test Definitions define specific test parameters and a test sequence Data is collected according to the Test Definition sequence Atthe end of
84. Thereis noreturn value Figure 142 Data File Macro Prototype Purpose Data File Macros are used to manipulate data stored in the test Data File These macros are used in the report editor only Generally the macro defined data in the Data File is updated to hold information determined by the macro see 28 2 This information is available for reporting by creating a report template that includes the fields altered by the macro Syntax Function DataFileMacro colData curFile Arguments colData A collection of all active Test Data Classes A separate data class is used for each Data File in the report editor e CurFile The collection index of the Test Data Class that is actively being reported Return The return value is not used by COMPASS Value Remarks The COMPASSS Report Editor calls any Data File Macros defined in a report template prior to generating a report with that template When multiple Data Files are selected the template macro is called multiple times Each call to the macro will include the collection index of the Data File being reported curFile If the macro will manipulate data from multiple files in a single call use an if statement to prevent the macro from executing redundantly For example if curFile lt gt 1 then Exit Function Page 217 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Example This example determines the applied force on the internal mechan
85. a network To share a COMPASS setup copy the COMPASS database files to the new PC or network location then copy the COMPASS options to the second PC see 2 5 Network Shared Installations The options can be transferred by creating a reg file or by manually selecting the options on the second PC Customize the test report created by COMPASS to my own requirements Modify the report template to reflect your requirements It is best to select an existing template and use the Save As option to create a copy of the template under a different name Then edit the template as required to get the desired report output Drag and drop the insertable fields onto the report template Import COMPASS Data Files into MS Excel Details on how to import data files into MS Excel are explained in section 22 2 Export To Excel 63 APPLICATION EXAMPLES 63 1 OVERVIEW This section contains several generic application examples that cover many common COMPASS setups Using these examples and the How Do I section will greatly simplify the learning process Although each example may not include explicit instructions on all test steps there are three required steps that must always be followed before any test can be run Create or select a DUT Definition O Create or select support devices for the DUT if necessary This includes the pressure reference O Create or select the Test Definition Each of the following examples includes a bri
86. a test custom reports can be generated The execution of Run Test has three main sequential steps Test Initialization Select DUTs support devices verify and select test controllers and references to use for testing Use preferences on the Tools Options Initialize Test tab to impose limitations on devices available for testing Run Test Sequence Runs leak test if included and pressure exercise if included followed by the test points taking data at each point based on the test data selections For details on how a test sequence is defined in the Test Definition Certain aspects of how a test runs can be customized using the Tools Options Run Test and End Test tabs e End Test Presents the Test Notes screen to record test specific notes and the Test Complete screen with various test conclusion options Certain aspects of the test conclusion can be customized using the Tools Options End Test tab see 14 5 End Test tab Page 119 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 73 TESTINITIALIZATION The Run Test Setup dialog is used to initialize COMPASS tests Use the Back Next and or Finish buttons to move through the test initialization steps Each step in the test initialization process requires valid selections to proceed to the next step Press the Finish button to automatically complete the remaining test steps and begin running the test If any user input is r
87. administrative control of the program COMPASS for Pressure is available in Basic and Enhanced versions with different levels of features and functions Both the Basic and Enhanced versions can be purchased with a single user or site license See Section 1 1 for a summary of the difference between the Basic and Enhanced versions and Section 1 2 concerning the rights or single user and site licenses L1 COMPASS FOR PRESSURE BASIC AND COMPASS FOR PRESSURE ENHANCED COMPASS for Pressure is available in Basic and Enhanced versions The COMPASS opening screen the title at the top of the main screen and the Help About menu choice all identify the version of COMPASS that is running Table 1 summarizes the differences between COMPASS for Pressure Basic COMPASS for Pressure Enhanced and COMPASS for PPC RPM In many cases the setup features of COMPASS for Pressure Enhanced are available in COMPASS for Pressure Basic However a test cannot be executed with the devices or tests setup with features that are not supported in COMPASS for Pressure Basic Attempting to use COMPASS for Pressure Enhanced features in COMPASS for Pressure Basic results in an error message Table 1 Features of COMPASS for Pressure Basic and Enhanced Versions COMPASS COMPASS FOR FOR PRESSURE PRESSURE ENHANCED BASIC COMPASS FOR PPC RPM FEATURE DESCRIPTION Create Test Definitions Tests define the detailed test script that COMPASS follows when running a test
88. an auto detected PG7000 and the pressure reference should be lt Manual Entry gt see 7 3 5 Verify Select Test Hardware The remaining initialization test steps do not have any special requirements The key for automatic pressure generation is that the Test Definition specifies automatic pressure generation 6 3 8 EXAMPLE 7 MENSOR PCS 400 How do I setup my mensor PCS 400 pressure controller Use this setup to fully automate the pressure measurement and control with a mensor controller The steps in defining a 3 party controller are the same regardless of the manufacturer Only the specific remote commands and range information are different When the setup is complete any number of Test Definitions can be created to automate calibrations using the controller as a reference or as a DUT COMPASS for Pressure Enhanced is required to use this functionality Only DHI controllers and references are available for use remotely with COMPASS for Pressure Basic e Define a new support device using the Support Device Editor Use the fields on the Header tab to describe the device see Figure 72 The fields on the Calibration tab are not required The fields are available for reporting and can be used to limit device availability based on calibration date and M amp TE see 14 3 Initialize Test Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 114 6 HOW DO I Support Device Editor Support Device Record mensor PCS 400 Label er Cal
89. and final sets on the editors Output and Set tabs All final outputs and final sets are edited using the Output Relationship Editor 4 33 HEADER TAB The Header tab is common to all device and piston gauge metrological element setups in COMPASS This includes DUT Support Device Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell Editors The information on this tab should be used to easily identify a COMPASS setup Selections made on the Header tab can change the options on the remaining tabs of an Editor For example selecting Simple DUT gt as the DUT Type on the DUT Editor prevents the DUT from acting as a controller The DUT Editor Set tab is displayed or hidden based on this selection Not all features of the Header tab are available on all COMPASS editors Table 3 describes the Header tab features The Feature column points out where features are not available Do not use the following characters in any of the Header fields l a comma or tab character These charactere will cause probleme when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention see 14 8 Data File Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 32 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Calibration Communications Read Record Type Profile Manufacturer Pap 3 Aj Model vxK112 Serial Number mae Identification Customer ID 7 DUT
90. are used test execution continues with the first test temperature point Step 4 Leak tests and pressure exercise are not repeated in multiple test cycles 7 4 1 TEST CONCLUSION After run test is complete see Section 7 3 4 test conclusion begins Other than the repeat point option there are two main steps to the test conclusion Test Notes The lt Test Notes gt pop up appears to allow the user to enter notes concerning the test run that has just completed The notes are included in the Data File and can be used in reports In multi cycle tests only one display for the test notes occurs The test notes step can be skipped by selection in the Tools Options End Test tab Test Complete Screen If the auto generate report option is selected on the Tools Options End Test tab the current report template is used to generate a report with the test Data File Regardless of this selection the Test Complete screen displays with the name and path of all test Data Files and offers various post test options Data Files are listed even when the data is automatically added to the COMPASS Tesi Data Database see 24 2 Database Setup Check the Data File s then press the button to execute the desired feature Operation always returns to the Test Complete screen until Exit Test is selected Table 33 lists the Test Complete options 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 136 7 RUN MODES Test Complete Data File s i
91. at the final output This is typically one However some devices may require more than one raw output to arrive at final output A final output of another device may serve as a raw output for a different final output For example voltage output pressure sensors may also output temperature and have a temperature dependency In this case two raw outputs are required one is voltage the other is temperature Temperature is the final output of another COMPASS Support Device When more than one raw output is used a COMPASS Relationship Macro is required to arrive at the final output If the number of outputs is greater than one the Raw Output tab choices no longer include the Minimum and Maximum output values see the figure below Required Raw Outputs to determine Final Output J gt V Output Type 1 Voltage M Output Source 1 R5232 Dutput Type 2 Temperature gt m EE o sce Figure 25 More Than One Raw Output on the Raw Output Tab Page 46 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Select the Output Type and corresponding unit of measure The Output Type is a broad classification of outputs that determines the available Output Sources see Table 12 for a list of Output Types and corresponding Output Sources The selection specifies the Raw Output as a pressure temperature voltage etc The unit of measure specified is the unit in which the Raw Output must be acquired by the selected Sou
92. be accessed with this class Both COMPASS for Pressure and the COMPASS Report Editor use this class to read and write data file information The Test Data Class is used as an argument in Data File and Report Macros Manipulate the properties in the class to calculate new data our outputs for reporting Test Definition Virtually all selections available in a Test Definition are accessible Class using the Test Definition Class This class is most frequently used to change test dwell and averaging times based on test conditions This class is accessed as a property of the COMPASS Class or as a parameter in a Test Macro Device Class Macros do not use this class as a standard argument However the Range Class and Calculation Classes both have properties that provide access to this class All properties of an instrument defined in one of the COMPASS device editors can be accessed with the Device Class Use the Device Class for specific identification information and settings of a device as required by a macro Configuration All instruments setup during the test initialization process are Class maintained and accessed using this class The properties are references to the Calculation Classes used to determine the outputs of the configured instruments Use the Configuration Class to access a specific instrument within a macro Range Class Use this class to access the properties defined in the Output Relationship Editor fo
93. be displayed Only one address per card type is supported This field represents the address of the IEEE 488 card itself and not any specific device Refer to the card manufacturer documentation to determine how to change the address in the card when necessary we The default selections within COMPASS are designed to operate with the default Windows set up of the supported IEEE 488 cards Unless the host PC has multiple IEEE 488 cards or is specially configured a properly installed IEEE 488 card with a default setup will work with COMPASS COMPASS automatically detects the RS232 ports on a host PC However some third party extended RS232 port cards may not be properly detected As a result the expected RS232 port will not be available in the RS232 setup If this is the case uncheck the Only support detected RS232 ports option Page 199 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL COMPASS Options Ambient Conditions Initialize Test EndTes PistonGauge DataGrid DataFile DatalnFile DataHeade Language IEEE 488 Card National Instruments v IEEE 488 Card Address GPIBO Only support detected 5232 Figure 131 lt COMPASS Options Interface Tab 14 12 LANGUAGE TAB The Tools Options Language tab is used to select and edit languages options in COMPASS This release of COMPASS supports English only COMPASS Options Ambient Conditions Initia
94. buttons are used the progress indicator also reflects the current position 5 4 MAIN TOOLBAR The Main Toolbar in COMPASS is used as a shortcut to many menu options and is used to control test execution The options that are visible and enabled on the toolbar vary with the active run mode There are four distinct sections of the toolbar Each of these sections is described in the following tables gt our 5 amp Figure 40 Main Toolbar 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 78 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES 5 41 RUN TEST TOOLS The Run Test Tools section of the Main Toolbar controls test execution The icon selections allow tests to begin end pause and rapidly move through test steps Table 20 lists the run tool icons Table 25 Main Toolbar Run Test Tools ICON DESCRIPTION Run Test This feature is a shortcut to the Run Run Test menu choice When COMPASS is running a test this option is disabled Step Back Causes the current test point to be interrupted and the test point sequence to step back to the most recent target output step Subsequent clicks cause the rr test to step back one point for each click This tool is used to repeat points when needed The tool is enabled only in Run Test mode as manual tests do not have a defined point sequence to skip through Step Back does not step back through temperature and line pressure steps it only allows the setting process to be restarted while it is executin
95. by manual control of a device Read commands to not use this argument The value is always 1 n when used with a multiplexer or valve driver object e chnlSt The activation state of a multiplexer or valve driver channel The value is either TRUE or FALSE This value is TRUE only when the device in requiring the macro is a Valve Driver Controller It is false in all other cases e SetMode TRUE for set commands and FALSE for read commands ParamiD User defined identification value for a device This value can be entered only during test initialization It is used as a flag to handle similar devices differently Particularly when devices require individual command addressing This is frequently the case when instruments are connected using an interface chain e cRange The Range Class of the instrument requesting the remote command A string representing the command to send to an instrument using the instruments remote interface settings If an empty string is returned COMPASS does not send a command Commands that respond are polled by COMPASS Macros created for these commands are called only one time Commands used for control are issued discretely When a macro command is used each new target output automatically calls the selected macro The macro code should use the target information and other arguments to create the desired remote command Although the arguments to this macro allow the set and read command request
96. by the TempeatureDwellTime property TemperatureDwellTime Long The time in seconds to dwell after a test target temperature is set TemperatureRegTime Long The time in seconds between temperature output adjustments when temperature regulation is active TemperatureRegulation Integer Defines the regulation type of temperature 0 None 1 Regulate to the reference TemperatureRun Boolean TRUE when temperature points are defined in the Test Definition TemperatureUnit Integer The test temperature unit identifier TestPrsCycles Integer The number of test pressure cycles to run TestPrsDwell Integer The type of test pressure dwell to use after the target pressure is set 0 Use manual dwell The test operator must respond to a prompt to continue the test 1 Automatic dwell The dwell time is specified by the TestPrsDwellTime property TestPrsDwellTime Long The test seconds pressure dwell time TestPrsMeasMode Integer The pressure measurement mode associated with the test pressure points TestPrsRegTime Long The time in seconds between test pressure output adjustments when test pressure regulation is active TestPrsRegulation Integer Defines the type of test pressure regulation 0 None 1 Regulate to the reference 2 Regulate to the DUT TestPrsUnit 2002 2004 D
97. calculation of Piston Gauge pressure when the selected Mass Bell is used Header Calibration f Mass kg 0 299870014190674 Mass Resolution 0 000001 Average Density kg nv 5058 Mass Bell Tolerance mg p Figure 117 Mass Bell Editor Mass Bell Tab Table 51 Mass Bell Editor Mass Bell Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Mass required numeric entry The true mass of the Mass Bell in kilogram kg Mass Resolution required drop down list selection The resolution with which the mass value is entered in the Mass field The resolution option is necessary to avoid rounding and truncating errors when determining target pressures given a mass load using the Piston Gauge Calculator Average Density required numeric entry The average or apparent density of the Mass Bell The value must be entered in kilogram per cubic meter kg m Mass Bell Tolerance required numeric entry field 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc The tolerance of the True Mass entry in milligram mg The tolerance value is used in calculating the uncertainty of the final output pressure Page 176 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE 16 DHI PG7000 DHI PG7000s must be setup using the Piston Gauge Platform Editor There are two ways to define a DHI Piston Gauge The first method of defining a DHI Piston Gauge is to setup the PG7000 so that its on board pressure calculation capabi
98. calibration Use preferences on Tools Options Initialize Test to prevent devices that are out of calibration from being used as references in tests Calibration Performed By optional text entry Identify the user that performed the calibration of the device Ceritifcation ID optional text entry Enter any relevant document tracking information associated with the Calibration Date The information entered is available on calibration reports Calibration Setting1 optional text numeric entry Enter calibration coefficients or settings specific to the output of an instrument The data can be text or numeric There are no specific formatting requirements The field is frequently used to store adder and multiplier values of a device Both coefficients can be added to one field or added to more than one Calibration Settings field If desired this data can be applied to the device real time by using a Relationship Macro see 18 5 5 Relationship Macros Calibration Setting2 optional text numeric entry See Calibration Setting1 gt Calibration Setting3 optional text numeric entry 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc See Calibration Setting1 gt Page 38 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES FEATURE DESCRIPTION Calibration Setting4 optional text numeric entry See Calibration Setting1 gt M amp TE Device optional check box entry Check this box to ide
99. ccce seen nennen nnns sese sese 208 16 3 MASS LOADING 208 17 TOOLS PG7000 SETUP 209 177 OVERVIEW EE 209 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO 211 181 OVERVIEW Ec 211 18 2 VBSCRIPT ER 212 18 3 USING THE MACRO EDITOR 213 18 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MACROS 214 18 5 MACRO TYPES ans an DANE 215 18 5 1 DATA FILE ftoi OS r xDD 217 18 5 2 GET COMMAND MACROS eeeeeeeeeeenne nnns annes mensas assa asses aaa assa sss sa sa sa asse nass agas aas s anas asas aser nannaa 218 18 5 3 icc ccc 220 18 5 4 INTERFACE MA CR O S cL C E 221 18 5 5 RELATIONSHIP MAG ROS rise a n awe va Dn Dada Dai a S CR E E Gk Ra 223 18 5 6 REPLY PARSER Piel C m P 225 18 5 7 REPORT MACROS 228 18 5 8 gu z
100. controller has achieved its target output see 4 4 2 1 Ready Commands Hold Stability Unit list box selection Select the unit of measure in which the hold and stability settings are defined Hold Setting numeric entry field Defines how close to the target output the controller must be to yield a ready condition Enter a 0 value to ignore the hold limit in the COMPASS ready criterion For DHI PPCx controller the default hold limit is used when 0 is entered in this field Make sure the lt Use Ready Criterion gt option is checked to use the on board Ready Not Ready indication as defined in the controllers Operation and Maintenance Manual In dynamic control mode this value should be set to 5 to 10 times less than the DUT tolerance if the pressure controller is capable of it In static control mode this value is usually set to 10 to 20 times greater than the DUT tolerance The hold limit is always set in selected Hold Stability unit of measure Stability Test and Hold Time required numeric entry fields 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Defines the stability limit to be used to determine a ready condition after a target output is set Enter a 0 value to ignore the stability limit in the COMPASS ready criterion For a DHI PPCx controller the default stability limit is used when 0 is entered in this field Make sure the lt Use Ready Criterion gt option is checked to use the on board Ready Not Ready indicat
101. cylinder as a result of temperature changes Pressure Expansion optional numeric entry The value of the piston cylinder change in effective area with measured pressure in terms of relative change per Mega Pascal relative to zero pressure nn x 10 MPa The 10 exponent is fixed Use the Unit of Measure Converter to convert the coefficient to MPa if needed Pressure Expansion 2 optional numeric entry The value of the piston cylinder change in effective area in terms of relative change per Mega Pascal squared relative to zero pressure nn x 105 MPa The 10 exponent is fixed This second order term is used only when the expansion of the Piston Cylinder due to pressure has a second order relationship Use the Unit of Measure Converter to convert the coefficient to MPa if needed Reference Level Offset optional numeric entry The value of the reference level offset which corrects the piston cylinder reference level for hollow pistons to the reference level marked on the mounting post of the Piston Gauge Platform The value must be entered in millimeters mm This field is used only with DHI Piston Cylinders that have a hollow piston In other cases the value should be zero Surface Tension optional numeric entry 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc The value of the surface tension effect of the pressurized fluid on the piston The value must be entered in Newtons per meter N m The correc
102. data The delimiter is the character that separates data from one another in each line of text If this is set incorrectly the data will not import correctly COMPASS uses a semi colon delimiter by default Options in COMPASS are provided to change the file delimiter see 14 8 Data File Tab When in doubt verify the delimiter by reviewing the Data File in the COMPASS Data Viewer see 21 2 COMPASS Data Viewer After the delimiter is set press the Import button to display the Automated Data Entry form see Figure 167 Two files must be selected in this screen the Definition File and the Source File The Definition file gt dictates how the data will be imported into database tables and fields This file is installed in the root directory of COMPASS for Pressure during installation C Program Files COMPASS for Pressure The filename of the definition file is COMPASSp def The Source file gt is created by following the steps outlined in 22 3 2 Creating a MET CAL Source File This is a specific Data File formatted to support data importing in conjunction with the COMPASS definition file Select OK to complete the setup and import the data Page 259 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL The COMPASSp def should not be edited The file is custom formatted to support the importing of src files created with COMPASS If this file is changed it is up to the user to create source src f
103. device Piston Information Note available with most devices RawOutputMax Maximum raw output value RawOutputMin Minimum raw output value RawOutputRelationship Describes how the raw output becomes the final output RawOutputSpan Difference between the maximum and minimum raw outputs SerialNumber Manufacturer s serial number UserID Operator assigned ID number 28 3 1 2 GENERAL HEADER CLASS The General Header Class contains fields used to describe general test and data file information PROPERTIES Date DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION The date that the data file was created Time The time that the data file was created Delimiter The data file delimiter used to separate data fields in the data file UserID The test operator SoftwareTitle The title and version of the program used to generate the data StationID The station identification value setup in COMPASS see 24 2 Database Setup DLLVersion Page 315 The version of the Test Data Class 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 28 3 1 3 TEST HEADER CLASS The Test Header Class contains fields specific to the Test Definition used to run atest Refer to section 8 Setup Test for more detail on the fields contained in this section PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION String The test record label The text is Manual
104. directly from the PG7000 by using remote commands e Open the Piston Gauge Platform Editor and press the New toolbar option to create a new device e Enter information on the Header tab appropriate for the header information Enter DH Instruments as the manufacturer and the specific PG model PG7601 PG7302 ect e Only when supported manufacturer and model information is entered will the Autodetect Setup option appear Check this box when it displays see Figure 61 Page 105 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Piston Gauge Platform Editor Piston Gauge Platform 5 ample PG7601 Record Label Header Calibration Tolerance Communications Comment Manufacturer DH Instruments Model PG 7601 Autodetect setup Serial Number Identification 5 ample Customer ID This device can be used as a DUT Platform Type Figure 61 Example PG7601 Setup e Enter information on the Calibration tab to track the calibration history of the PG when appropriate see 4 3 4 Calibration Tab e Select the remote interface that COMPASS will use to communicate with the PG on the Communications tab see 4 3 5 Communications Tab In this case assume the PG will use an RS232 By default all DHI products use 2400 baud rate even parity 7 data bits and 1 stop bit unless specifically changed Enter these settings and the proper RS232 port used by the
105. directly impact the calculation of Piston Gauge pressure when the Mass Set is used Typically a pressure span error results Make sure that all values are entered in the proper unit of measure The information on the bottom right of the tab applies to all masses in the Individual Masses list Select a mass in the Individual Masses gt list to view information specific to that mass Changes to each mass must be saved prior to using the inset Editor Toolbar For Piston Gauge Type Mass Sets mass carrying bells have their own setup For Deadweight Tester Type Mass Sets the mass bell or carriage must be set up as an individual mass of the Mass Set For Piston Gauge Type Mass Sets trim mass sets have their own setup A trim mass set is a mass set generally made up of masses of less than 0 1 kg that is used in combination with a mass set to load mass values more precisely than is possible with just the regular mass set Header Calibration Mass Set Individual Masses Individual Mass Settings Mass Name 1 100000 kg Nominal Mass 4 500000 200000 kg 200000 True Mass 4 500035 500000 kg Tolerance Am 000000 kg 000000 kg Makeup Mass Mass Density 2000 g 5 000000 Mass Set Resolution kg 0 000001 5 000000 x Mass Set Total 35 500230 kg Figure 114 Mass Set Editor Piston Gauge Type Mass Set Tab Page 171 2002 2004 DH Inst
106. do not require response manipulation since the response of a set command is ignored by COMPASS Page 226 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR This macro returns a temperature value based on the hexadecimal output string of an instrument The function must assemble the number from different parts of the return string by using string and numeric manipulation functions D HE HD HE This Function must return the fully formatted response a device The output is used as the Raw output in the relationship determination of the Final Output Reply Raw unmanipulated response of a device ParamID Parameter ID of the device cRange Device Range Class that the relationship applies to The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value NH De ee ee E AE E E A E AE E E E ee E Function ParseOutput Reply ParamID cRange sNuml mid reply 3 2 Value left of decimal sNum2 mid reply 5 2 Value Right of decimal sNum cStr cdbl amp H amp sNuml convert hex to a numeric string sNum sNum amp amp cStr cdbl amp H amp sNum2 Add decimal portion of number convert the string to a double and return ParseOutput cdbl sNum End Function This macro returns TRUE when the output of a controller is ready and FALSE otherwise In this examp
107. editing operation within the Report Editor Undo support in the COMPASS Report Editor does not provide the ability to undo all previous steps Only the most recent step is maintained in the undo buffer As a result the first time Undo is activated the last step is undone Redo Redo is provided to reinstate items the undo has just rolled back Redo will not recreate deleted files nor will it create new ones Cut Cut deletes the current selection and copies it to the Windows clipboard This information is pasted into other applications or other locations within the COMPASS Report Editor Copy Copy copies the current selection to the Windows clipboard without first deleting it The information is pasted into other applications or other locations within the COMPASS Report Editor Paste Paste copies the contents of the Windows clipboard to the current cursor location in the document of Pasting a selection which includes data fields will result in the insertion of text only and not the link to the Data File behind the data field 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 268 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR FEATURE DESCRIPTION Delete Delete destroys the currently selected items If items are accidentally deleted undo may restore the information If delete will not remove a table try the delete command under the table menu selection Find Displays the Find option to locate specific
108. expose the old and new pressure controllers Mak kk kk e kk kk kk ek kk kk e kc kk ek ek kde Test Macro do not have a return value Manipulate the test or device collection as desired iT The current temperature point in the test iL The current line pressure point in the test iC The current pressure cycle in the test IP The current pressure point in the test cTest The test class cConfig Configuration Class that holds all active devices HER D ee E FE E ee ee Function TestVent iT iL iC iP cTest cConfig Vent before using the active Reference pressure controller b cConfig SetPrs cConfig ActiveRefSetP ioSetOutput 0 1 1 Delay 60 Wait for the pressure to stabilize With cConfig ValveDriverl Activate Driver 2 to isolate first controller b ioSetOutput 2 1 0 Activate Driver 3 and disable driver 1 to expose new controller b ioSetOutput 3 1 0 b ioSetOutput 1 0 0 End With End Function 18 6 THREADING MODEL COMPASS macros and the COMPASS main program share a common program thread of execution When a macro is actively running there are parts of COMPASS that are not running Particularly code that updates remote interfaces and corresponding object outputs Therefore as a general rule limit the scope of a macro to handle a specific task and exit When COMPASS is running on a PC that m
109. from auto detecting the RS232 ports Port Settings Com Port COME v COMB 2400 E 7 1 Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits 2400 feven ih Cancel Figure 196 lt RS232 Settings gt Panel 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 296 25 REMOTE INTERFACING 25 2 2 DHI DEVICE COM2 Many DHI products support a pass through communications port on the back panel of the product labeled COM2 This feature allows a single PC interface to be used to communicate with 2 instruments The main PC interface RS232 or IEEE 488 will communicate with the DHI product Pass through commands sent to the product will read and write data to the instrument connected to COM2 of the product Only instruments that use an RS232 interface with settings available on the DHI product can use this feature COMPASS automatically handles the setup and use of DHI COM ports when appropriate During test initialization select the COM port that corresponds to the DHI product to use This function is valid only when the parent DHI product is a DUT pressure reference or pressure controller With few exceptions the instrument using the COM2 port can be used for any purpose DUTs that DHI products cannot use the COMZ port of the reference or controller During Test Initialization the reference and controller are selected after a DUT see 7 3 Test Initialization Therefore the remote settings to the reference and or controller are not available w
110. gauge absolute LinePresRegulate Text Line pressure regulation state LinePresSSLimit Text Line pressure stability limit LinePresSSTime Integer Line pressure ready hold time LinePresSSTimeout Integer Line pressure stability timeout LinePresUseReady Text Yes when the line pressure controllers Ready criterion was used remotely and No otherwise LocalGravity Double Value representing local gravity LocalGravityUnit Text Unit of Local Gravity m s MaxTarget Text Maximum target for the test exercise MinTarget Text Minimum target pressure for the test exercise Notes Memo General test notes entered by the user at the end of the test NumLinePresCycles Integer Number of repeated line pressure points NumPresCycles Integer Number of repeated pressure cycles NumPresPoints Integer Number of Individual pressure set points NumTempCycles Integer Number of repeated temperature points PresAvgTime Text Test pressure averaging time PresCtriMode Text Test pressure control mode static dynamic PresDwell Text Test pressure dwell time PresHoldLimit Text The test pressure hold limit PresJog Text Test pressure jog state Yes No PresMeasMode Text Under what condition is the test pressure measurement made gauge absolute ect
111. greater than 1 data points COMPASS is not intended to manipulate such files Lower performance PC s will experience significant delays in generating reporte and plots of very large Data Files Therefore it is not recommended to use COMPASS plotting and reporting functions with very large Data Files Instead export the Data File to a spreadsheet application for further analysis 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 138 8 SETUP TEST 8 Setup TEST 8 1 OVERVIEW Test Definitions are used to define a specific test procedure including the sequence of test points and a large number of operational details DUT s to be tested and a Test Definition are selected during the initialization of COMPASS Run Test Definition mode A pointer to a default Test Definition for a DUT is included in the DUT Definition Calibration tab 8 2 TEST EDITOR Create edit and remove Test Definitions using the Test Editor Access this feature using Setup Test or the Main Toolbar Edit Test icon see 5 4 2 Run Display Tools When the Test Editor is opened the last accessed Test Definition is displayed While in the Editor use the Editor Toolbar options to create edit view and delete tests The Test Editor uses the same editing concepts as the DUT Editor Only one Test Definition can be edited at a time The test scroll bar and the Test Selector are available to make new test selections A flashing indicator displays when a Test Defi
112. have set up and stored in the COMPASS database as sources for that output or set The DUT Editor Support Device Definition Editor and the Piston Gauge Platform Editor each have features to define final outputs and or sets Any device in COMPASS can support multiple final outputs and or sets See Section 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs In general the Final Output selection of any support device determines how the device can be used in COMPASS Specify default source devices on each of the tab of the Default Hardware Configuration If an option is not used select lt None gt The following sections detail the features on the Default Hardware Configuration tabs 12 2 ENVIRONMENT TAB The Environment tab specifies the devices to use to measure and control reference pressure and temperature and measure the ambient conditions The fields of the Environmental tab are described in table below Page 179 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Default Hardware Configuration Environment Electrical Auxiliary Environmenta Output Sources Ambient Pressure 4 anual Entry Ambient Temperature Ambient Humidity Manual Entry Manual Entry NONE PPC2 RPT Measurement NONE NONE PPC2 RPT Control NONE Reference Vacuum Reference Pressure Reference Line Pressure Refer
113. icon Pressure increases as long as the icon is held down Decrease Pressure Decreases pressure at the PPCx s fast or slow down rate based on the lt Fast Slow gt icon Pressure decreases as long as the icon is held down Toggle Fast Slow Slow Changes pressure increase decrease rate from fast to slow to determine which PPOx control rate will be used to change pressure when the Increase Pressure or Decrease Pressure icon is pressed No pressure change occurs when this option is selected alone Page 91 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Abort Control Aborts pressure control if the PPOx is actively controlling a Valve Driver Displays the lt Valve Driver Control gt window Change the state of the PPOx s optional external valve drivers with this function The current driver 1 2 state is automatically displayed on the form when it displays 3 4 5 5 7 DATAGRID RUN SCREEN While in a run mode with at least one Data File open the Data Grid Run Screen is available to display the list of points taken and data associated with each point Every point up to the current point in the current test cycle is displayed in this grid The unit of measure for many data types is specified in the corresponding column header As with the other run screens the grid display is scalable As a test progresses the current point is automatically highlighted an
114. if desired The piston position is used to calculate the pressure head resulting from the piston not being at its reference level 0 position It is also used to provide a display of piston position on the Platform s Device Run Screen optional list box selection Piston Rotation Select the device to use to measure the piston rotation rate During test initialization the Rate selected value is the default Piston Rotation Rate gt selection for the Piston Gauge The selection can be changed if desired The rotation rate is not used in any pressure calculations for the Piston Gauge However it is used to determine the Piston Gauge s Ready Not Ready criterion as defined for the active piston cylinder optional list box selection 112 5 COMMUNICATIONS TAB See section 4 3 5 Communications Tab Page 165 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 1L2 6 OUTPUT TAB See section 4 3 6 Output Tab 1L2 7 SET TAB See section 4 3 7 Set Tab 1L3 PISTON CYLINDER The Piston Cylinder Editor provides features to create edit and remove Piston Cylinders that are used with Piston Gauge Platforms by COMPASS Use the Main Toolbar shortcut or Setup Piston Gauge Piston Cylinder to access the Piston Cylinder Editor Information on metrological elements piston cylinders and masses entered in DHI 7000 piston gauges can be extracted into COMPASS using the 7
115. in the Final Set Labels list Only final sets that use a remote interface require remote commands Commands set up are Set Commands and should be interpreted by the device set point type unit specified in the Output Relationship Editor Raw Set tab Use Ready Status optional check box Check this box to read the ready not ready status of a controller by sending remote commands Many controllers output a specific signal or respond in a particular way when their target output is set within defined limits This condition is considered Ready If the controller does not provide such an output remotely do not attempt to use this feature COMPASS has a built in Ready Not Ready criterion that can be setup in a Test Definition see 3 3 5 3 Ready Not Ready When this feature is checked options in the Test Definition can be used to allow COMPASS to read this status after issuing a target output command to the controller The command is polled on the device and the corresponding ready status displays on the device run screen see 5 5 4 Device Output Run Screen This feature is not available for multiplexer and valve driver set types After each target output Although Ready commands are setup on the Set tab they are defined as Read Commands in the Remote Command Editor The response to a formatted Ready command should yield O when the controller is not ready and a non zero value when the controller is ready see 4 4 Remote Command Ed
116. initialization commands to prepare to the device to set or read properly not needed in all cases but indispensable in some and b the actual read or set commands Read interfaces must always be set up so that the device responds in a specific preplanned measurement unit set interfaces must be structured to allow the current output target to generate a new remote command since the required target of any tests controller changes at different points in a test Most devices that support remote interfacing use a common text command and response format Typically commands are word fragments that resemble the function of the command Responses to numerical query commands frequently output as a direct numerical value or a condensed string with the number embedded Some devices require ASCII control codes as part of the command and include other codes as part of the response Control codes are frequently specified in the device documentation as non printable hexadecimal characters e g 04H or H04 COMPASS is designed to handle all of these cases The Process Response and Command features provide access to COMPASS Macros Using VB Script a COMPASS macro can format commands and responses to conform to almost any device requirement All device commands used by COMPASS are created using the Remote Command Editor The Output and Set device setup tabs provide links to the Remote Command Editor when a corresponding device range uses a remote interf
117. is complete At the end of every test COMPASS rebuilds all data files to insure that repeated test points are not logged in the final data file MainForm MDI Form The property holds a reference to the main MDI Form within COMPASS Options Object All options specified in Tools Options can be accessed by using this object The properties and methods of this object are not available PauseState Boolean Read or set the current program paused state If the value is set to TRUE the current test is paused in the same way as the Pause toolbar button works If COMPASS is paused it must be un paused to continue Page 343 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PROPERTIES RunMode DATA TYPE Intetger DESCRIPTION Holds the current COMPASS run state Use the property to make decisions in a macro that are related to the way COMPASS is running a test The value cannot be changed within a macro The property has the following values e O0 Idle COMPASS is not running a test 1 Run Test is active e 2 Run Manual Test is active SystemAbort 28 9 2 METHODS Boolean Read the current test abort flag If the value is TRUE the active macro code must exit immediately If it does not COMPASS will hang while trying to abort a test The property should be checked when a macro will execute loops that will take an indefinite amount of time To abort a test use the A
118. is not a Piston Gauge COMPASS runs a leak test Pressure is set to the specified leak test pressure and maintained for the leak dwell time If an automated pressure controller is not used prompts to set the pressure display At the end of the leak test dwell time pressure control is aborted in automated controllers A 30s adiabatic delay is imposed before beginning the leak test The starting pressure reference and DUT output is read by COMPASS and logged At the end of the leak test time the final reference and DUT output is again read by COMPASS The difference in pressure divided by the leak test time determines the leak rate If the absolute value of this leak rate is less than the Leak Rate Limit specified in the test definition the leak test passed Otherwise the leak test failed Unless the lt Abort on failure gt option is checked on the Leak Test tab of the Test Definition test execution continues regardless of the leak test results The results of the leak test are logged to the Data File and can be viewed by clicking one of the inset panels on the status bar Run Pressure Exercise f pressure exercise cycles are specified in the Test Definition exercising occurs now Pressure is set to the cycle lt Min pressure gt followed by the cycle lt Max pressure gt then vented for the number of times specified in the test file If the pressure is being set manually consider that there is no reason to set the pressure precisely If cycling fai
119. keep in mind that immediately after setting the leak test pressure the dissipation of adiabatic temperature changes and settling time of the test volume will give the appearance of a leak For this reason Dwell time should be used to allow these effects to dissipate Typical leak test times are from a minimum of about 30 seconds to a maximum of about 5 minutes numeric entry field Abort Test On The selection determines whether test execution will continue if the leak test fails i e a Failure set pressure timeout occurs or the leak rate limit is exceeded If the option is not checked the test will continue if the leak test fails and the failure will be indicated in the test Data File Otherwise the test will abort This option is sometimes disabled when running fully automated unattended tests to attempt to complete the test and gather test data even though the leak test failed Of course if the leak is too large the test may yield invalid test data check box selection 8 5 3 EXERCISE FRAME The Exercise frame is used to specify whether the DUT and test system will be pressure exercised at the beginning a test and to define the exercising parameters Exercising occurs immediately following the leak test if included and just before the test points begin Pressure is set to the Min Pressure immediately followed by the Max Pressure entry for the number of cycles selected After the cycles a vent is execu
120. macro as the pre point macro see Custom Point Operations 8 6 3 After the first pressure cycle is complete the macro will compare the error of the current point on the current pressure cycle to the same point on the first pressure cycle If the change in error exceeds 50 of the tolerance the point is repeated Since this is a pre point macro the previous data point is actually tested The current data point is not valid before the point is set module level variable DIM RepeatPoint The point that was last repeated DIM RepeatCount The number of repeats for that point A AE E AE E ee D Check test points for out of tolerance data If this occurs automatically repeat the points up to 2 times the test or device collection as desired iT The current temperature point in the test iL The current line pressure point in the test ic The current pressure cycle in the test IP The current pressure point in the test eTest The test class cConfig Configuration class that holds all active devices NH E AE E E E E AE E FE E E E E AE ee ee ee ee Function Test22445 iT iL iC iP cTest cConfig Limit 0 5 Limit Relative tolerance if iP lt 1 or iC 1 or RepeatCount gt 2 and iP RepeatPoint then No points have been repeated RepeatCount 0 Exit Function else if iP lt gt RepeatPoi
121. name common dialog box from displaying see Data File Tab 14 8 If this option is not selected a test user must select the file name and location of the new data file Never use this method when running a Test Definition Example None Page 345 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Name Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks Example Name Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc StatusDisplay Change the text displayed on the COMPASS status bar see 5 3 This is a useful way to debug macros and monitor the progress of a macro during a test cCOMPASS StatusDisplayAbortTest Msg sMsg The text to display on the COMPASS status bar None Use this method within a macro to notify COMPASS users of the current macro operation Even when the macro task is relatively small it is good practice to keep users updated Limit the text passed in the sMsg parameter The statusbar can only display 1 line of data at a time and has a limited with Use sentence fragments that include only relevant information When running a Test Definition there are many test based status messages that display In some cases these messages will overwrite the current macro status message It depends on the macro type used to generate the status message Typically messages created within a Test Macro are not interrupted However a status message creat
122. naming and comment the macro to simplify the troubleshooting process Macros can be edited while a test is running This is recommended for troubleshooting purposes only Run a Manual Test or a Test Definition and determine if the desired macro operation is functioning properly Display macro error messages by choosing the Tools Run Test Display macro errors option This may require viewing the Interface Spy window of an output looking at the Device Output window of the instrument or noting the operation sequence in a test Always watch the Status Bar on the bottom of the display and note any error messages that display Use the Tools COMPASS Macro Editor menu choice to display the COMPASS Macro Editor Locate the macro in question and make edits as needed to correct the macro Save the macro and close the COMPASS Macro Editor and again check to see if the macro is operating properly It may be necessary to comment out portions of the macro to find out at what point the macro generates an error or display information on the COMPASS status bar by using the COMPASS object cCOMPASS StatusDisplay Having the macro return a constant value is also useful when trying to find out the point at which the macro fails Macros can be tested within the Macro Editor provided that the macro code does not reference any COMPASS objects These objects are available when running only To get around this issue comment out parts of the code that uses these obj
123. no line pressure cycles were used e iPCy The integer id of the desired test pressure cycle Use 1 in the event that no pressure cycles were used iPt The collection index of the Test Data Class that is actively being reported bReadOnly True to prevent changes the Data Point Class from affecting data stored in the Test Data Class Return Test Data Point Class Value Remarks This method is used to access data in the data file within a macro Report Macros and Data File Macros will most commonly use this method to manipulate data This method is frequently used in a loop determined by the number of points in the data file There are several properties in the Test Data Class that can be used to determine the number of each type of point in the data file For example NumberOfPressureCyclePoints yields the number of pressure cycle points in the data file Page 319 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 28 4 TEST DEFINITION CLASS The Test Definition Class is passed as a parameter to all Test Macros and is a standard property of the COMPASS Class All aspects of a test created with the Test Definition Editor can be accessed with this class Refer to section 8 Setup Test in this manual for details on the individual choices in a Test Definition Use this class to alter test execution The test dwell time averaging time control settings and test points can be manipulated using
124. not change the current reference final output Return None Value Remarks Only DUTs should use this method This function is used to determine errors with data passed to the class or data currently stored in the class The error data is available in the applicable error related properties The error values set are not necessarily used by COMPASS when taking data COMPASS always calls this method with the current DUT and reference output prior to logging a point If the outputs are different new errors will be used Example None Name GetParamData Purpose Read one of 20 double precision values stored in the class by using a COMPASS macro Syntax Function GetParamData iID Arguments e The integer index of the parameter to read The value can be 0 to 20 Return Double precision parameter value Value Remarks This data space is made available to macros to allow data to persist between macro calls The data must be set using the SetParamData method Any desired data can be added to these 20 fields flags intermediate calculation variables etc Example None 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 338 28 COMPASS OBJECTS Name loSendCommand Purpose Send a command to the device supporting any of the Range Classes maintained by the Calculation Class Syntax Function ioSendCommand sCmd bNoResponse iSendTo Arguments e sOmd The exact command to send Special formatting is possible to send commands to a HART instrument see
125. of each individual mass set mass in all lists of mass masses by set masses The mass list displays in the Mass Set Editor and the Piston Gauge Calculator are nominal mass altered by this selection A nominal mass is not a required field for a mass set mass As a result it is possible that a nominal mass value will not be available If this is the case the true mass value is used radio button Page 193 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION List mass set Check this option to display the true mass of each individual mass set mass in all lists of mass set masses by true masses The mass list displays in the Mass Set Editor and the Piston Gauge Calculator are mass altered by this selection radio button Default mass Select the default minimum mass value to be included in mass loading commands The actual loading resolution value can be modified in the Piston Gauge Calculator when running a test list box Local Gravity Enter the acceleration due to gravity at the location in the piston gauge is used The value entered in this field is used as the local gravity when running a test The Local Gravity entry on the Piston Gauge Calculator is disabled when testing This entry has no effect on DHI piston gauges setup using the Auto Detect Setup option In this case the piston gauge will use the gravity entered on the front panel numeric entry
126. of the device Specify a Command Number to define the order in which the command will be issued COMPASS automatically adjusts the numbering order when the command set is saved t is therefore not necessary to remove gaps in the numbering sequence Enter the Command or select the macro that will be used to create the command Use the Delay After Command s gt field if necessary to allow the command to complete a physical process prior to continuing with other commands Check the Read Response option for commands that respond If the Command specifies the command to use for manipulation check the Process Response option and select or enter the appropriate Manipulate Response field Only one command can have the Process Response field specified in a command set Save the command using the Editor Toolbar Save icon Repeat the process as necessary for as many commands as are required to control the device 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 68 E 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Only one remote command can be edited at a time Save changes to each command before attempting to edit a new command s Output Command Editor Period Time Commands Command Global Settings RST READ 1 MEAS VOLT DC Command Type Read Command Number 1 Y Command MEAS VOLT DC Delay After Command 0 Read Response Process Response X Manipulate Response Y Figure 37 Remote Com
127. of the test point in YYYYMMDD format DUTCounts Long The number of samples taken when averaging the DUT DUTDatabaselD Long The database key of the DUT definition DUTDiff Double The error between the DUT and the reference DUT Ref DUTMass Double The total mass on the DUT The value is expressed in kg for piston gauges and in a pressure unit for deadweight testers DUTMassList String List of the individual masses used to obtain the total mass on the DUT Each mass is delimited by a colon For example piston bell 5kg 1Kkg DUTMaxPressure Double The maximum DUT pressure value recorded while averaging DUTMinPressure Double The minimum DUT pressure value recorded while averaging DUTPistonPosition Double The DUTs piston position at the time the point was taken DUTPistonRotation Double DUT piston rotation rate at the time the point was taken DUTPressure Double The DUT pressure DUTRawOutput1 Double The un manipulated raw output of the DUT Page 317 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc PROPERTIES DUTRawOutput2 DATA TYPE Double DESCRIPTION The un manipulated second raw output of the DUT This value is present only when the DUT has more than one raw output DUTRawOutput3 Double The un manipulated third raw output of the DUT This value is present only when the DUT has three raw
128. only with Range Classes used for pressure or temperature control The device setup must include Vent commands for this method to function properly see 4 3 7 None RawUnit Return the text value of the raw output unit Function RawUnit None String Use this function to access the text value associated with the raw output unit None Page 334 28 COMPASS OBJECTS 28 8 CALCULATION CLASS The CalCulation Class is used to control and determine the output of instruments used by COMPASS This class contains a reference to all objects necessary to obtain a single output or control a set for a device Each Calculation Class is centered around the use of a particular Range Class This main class is stored in the RangeMain property The type of output or set provided by the Range Class is the ultimate output of the calculation class For example the output provided by the Calculation Class will be DUT pressure when the RangeMain Class UseAs property is 1 DUT Pressure The Calculation Class uses the final output of all instruments required to obtain the final output of the Range Class If the raw output source is lt Voltage Measurements the voltage measuring device Range Class will be set to the RangeRaw1 class Each voltage update is used by the Calculation Class to determine a new output Range Class Calculation Class A separate Range Class is available for each support device of the output Stores the Range Classes necessary to d
129. other cases it is final output of a test configured device in the configured output unit Out2 Final output of a test configured device in the b configured output unit Out3 Final output of a test configured device in the configured output unit ParamID Parameter ID of the device cCalc Device Calculation Class that the relation ship applies to The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value For example Relationship51602 1 Outl 5 Mk kk kk E E E kk kk ee ok ek ek ke ek ke ee eee Function CalcAdjustPressure Outl Out2 Out3 ParamID With cCalc RangeMain GetParent A Calinfol B Calinfo2 C Calinfo3 D Calinfo4 End With Outl 3 B Out172 C Outl D CalcAdjustPressure P 18 5 6 REPLY PARSER MACROS Reply The response to the remote command that has Manipulate Response selected ParamID Paramter ID value entered during Test Initializ ation Reply Parser Macro cCalc cRange The Range Class associated with the output Manipulate the res ponse to the remote command to obtain a numeric raw output value in the s pecifi ed raw output unit The raw output valueinthe defined raw output unit Figure 147 Reply Parser Macro Prototype Page 225 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks 2002 2004
130. outputs DUTReferenceVacuum Double The residual vacuum around the DUT when the DUT is a piston gauge DUTStnDev Double The standard deviation of the average DUT pressure If the DUT was not averaged this value is not applicable DUTTemperature Double The DUT temperature at the time the point was recorded ElapsedTimeSec Single The test elapsed time ErrorFS Double The span error of the DUT ErrorRdg Double The reading error of the DUT FinalLinePressure Double The line pressure as output by the line pressure reference device FinalTempOutput Double The test temperature as output by the test temperature measuring device MacroDefined1 Macrodefined10 Double Macrodefined data that should be manipulated by macros These fields are not directly used by COMPASS Point String A string representation of the test data point RefCounts Long The number of samples used to average the reference RefDatabaselD Long The database key of the reference device definition RefMass Double The total mass on the reference The value is expressed in kg for piston gauges and in a pressure unit for deadweight testers RefMassList String List of the individual masses used to obtain the total mass on the reference Each mass is delimited by a colon For example piston bell 5kg 1Kkg RefMaxPressure D
131. outputs measurements and final sets controls This is the case with a reference pressure controller that both sets pressure and serves as the reference pressure measurement A device may have one or more final sets Final sets are the ultimate quantity to be set by a device The Raw Set to Final Set Relationship Manipulator processes one or more raw sets into final sets see Set relationship editor Raw sets may originate from the device itself or they may be the final set of another device Target pressure and temperature values are controlled by manual prompts to the test operator or by sending remote commands to the controlling device In the event the controlling device itself is controlled commands are sent to the raw controlling device This example is shown in the figure above A voltage controlled pressure regulator is the pressure controller However the voltage supply device must be controlled by COMPASS to set a pressure 3 3 5 OUTPUT CONTROL Automated control of an output requires COMPASS to format the desired target into a remote command and issue it to the remote device The remote commands are defined in the Remote Command Editor accessed in the DUT Hardware or Piston Gauge Platforms editors Tools in these editors allow commands to be formatted using the lt Remote Command Editor gt see 4 4 Remote Command Editor The lt Remote Command Editor gt Page 13 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S
132. particular cycle or point enter a 0 in the field that you wish to report data on Enter a nonzero value in the other fields To report all test points for a particular temperature line pressure and pressure cycle enter lt Temperature Cycle gt 1 lt Pressure Cycle gt 1 lt Line Pressure Cycle gt 1 lt Individual Data Point gt 0 To report all points for the 4 pressure cycle change the Pressure Cycle entry to 4 To report only the 3 test point change the Individual Data Point gt value to 3 Enter a 1 in cycle fields even when the cycle was not executed during the test For example always enter 1 for Temperature Cycle when temperature points were not defined in the Test Definition see 8 6 Test Point Sequence The default selections report data on all test points in the first cycle Page 282 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR 23 10 4 FIELD BEHAMIOR Data Format Data Source and Cycle Selection Field Length in number of characters 0 indicates no limit Grow and Shrink To Fit C Fixed Length Field C Grow Only C Shrink Only Update Cancel Figure 188 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Source Tab Table 91 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Source Tab FEATURE DESCRIPTION Field Length in Defines the length of the data field on the template Depending on selections below this Number of field may increase or decrease in size to fit th
133. point Force the proper output first cCalc FinalOutput 0 cCOMPASS TakePoints 0 0 0 end if End if PressureSwitch rtv End Function Name TimeDelay Purpose Suspend macro operation for a user specified amount of time Syntax cCOMPASS TimeDelay fDelay Arguments e Delay Single precision number that represents the amount of time in seconds to delay Return None Value Remarks _ It is important to use this function when a macro is executing an indefinite loop or when the macro execution is based on the change in output of a device used by COMPASS see Threading Model 18 6 Actual delay time compared to the fDelay parameter is a function of computer performance and the number of total devices used by COMPASS There is no recommended method within COMPASS or a macro to accurately delay for a specified amount of time Page 349 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Example 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc This example demonstrates how to force data collection when running a test It is similar to the TakePoint example The macro effectively intercepts the test dwell test step and waits for a DUT to transition from closed to open point the actual test dwell step is skipped by using the StepNext method and the test continues with data acquisition It is assumed that the DUT is considered open when the DUT pressure is 100 psi and that the target pressure results in a rela
134. remote device output The piston gauge information displays on the Piston Gauge Calculator see 16 Tools Piston Gauge Calculator However several fields of the calculator are disabled Not only are the Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set Mass Bell and Pressure Medium disabled but any Piston Gauge condition related field that is measured with a remote device For example if the ambient pressure is measured by a barometer configured within COMPASS to output remotely the Ambient Pressure field is disabled and the output of the barometer is automatically updated on the field Page 87 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL s Basic PG Piston Gauge Platform Basic PG Piston Cylinder 107 Mass Set DHI MassSet 2107 Trim Mass Set Mass Bell MB 229 Medium Measurement Mode Ambient Temperature C 77 000 Mass List Ambient Humidity RH 64 0 Ambient Pressure psi 90321 3440 Vacuum Reference Pa 1 2000 Head Height cm 0 Pistan Cylinder Temperature F 25 000 Piston Position mm 0 Local Gravity m s Nominal Mass Loading Resolution 10g Pressure kPa 300 Nominal Mass Load Pressure is Ready Figure 47 Piston Gauge Run Screen When running tests that use a Piston Gauge as the pressure reference the Piston Gauge Run Screen displays with the required mass load selected in the Mass List Physically loa
135. restricted to the user Password Displays the password for the selected Supported User conditional entry 24 4 DATABASE CHANGE CURRENT USER The lt User Login gt dialog is used to allow users to log into COMPASS with specific rights The rights associated with a particular user are defined using the COMPASS Users setup User login can occur during COMPASS startup or by direct user selection in the Database Change Current User option Select or enter a supported User Name gt and enter the Password If the information is valid program control returns to the COMPASS main program with the rights assigned to the user To prevent or force the User Login dialog to display during COMPASS start up use Database Usere User login during COMPASS startup User Login User Name adn v Password Figure 194 lt User Login gt Page 291 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 245 DATABASE COMPASS DATABASE MAINTENENCE TOOL The COMPASS Database Maintenance Tool is provided to copy information from one COMPASS database to another Any COMPASS maintained setup information can be transferred including tests support devices DUTs macros examples and users Additionally tools are provided to clean up the active database and remove unwanted setups Select the type of information to transfer in the Data to View list The information available for the sel
136. sequences the equivalent pressure is the current atmospheric pressure achieved by venting pressure and opening to atmosphere For a temperature controller the equivalent temperature is ambient temperature achieved by stopping temperature control The text displays in the point field when this option is selected Minimum The test target pressure is the minimum DUT pressure or the minimum pressure of the MIN controller for pressure based point sequences For line pressure and temperature point sequences the minimum controller output is used as the test point Minimum controller outputs are defined as the Minimum Set entry on the Final Set tab of the Set Relationship Editor The text MIN displays in the point field when this option is selected Maximum The test target pressure is the maximum DUT pressure or the maximum pressure of the MAX controller for test pressure based point sequences For line pressure and temperature point sequences the maximum controller output is used as the test point Maximum controller outputs are defined as the lt Maximum gt Set entry on the Final Set tab of the Set Relationship Editor The text MAX displays in the point field when this option is selected Vent System This option vents the system pressure or temperature but does not log a test point The Vent commands are sent for automated controllers the user is prompted for controllers that do no
137. settings defined i n the current T est D efinition are accssed using this cl ass Current test pressure point cConfig Current Configuration Class All objects in COMPASS can be accessed using this class Test Macro This type of macro is typicall y used to alter the normal sequence of events when running a test Change valve driver states modify test dwell or averaging time verify data collected ata point ect There is no required functi on of the macro Any return value provi ded is ignored by COMPASS Figure 149 Test Macro Prototype Purpose A Test Macro is used to alter the normal sequence of events when running a Test Definition All devices setup during Test Initialization are available for use within the macro Syntax Function TestMacro iT iL iC iP cTest cConfig Arguments e iT The current test temperature point in the Test Definition When the test does not use a sequence of temperature points the value is always 1 iL The current test line pressure point in the Test Definition When the test does not use a sequence of line pressure points the value is always 1 iC The current test pressure cycle in the Test Definition When the test does specify multiple pressure cycles the value is always 1 e iP The current test pressure point CTest The active Test Definition Class e cConfig Configuration Class that holds all active Calculation Classes within COMPASS Return
138. specified test pressure target SetTime Integer The time required to set the test pressure Status String The status associated with a test point eT The DUT was out of tolerance et The test pressure was not set within the specified pressure set timeout eE An error occurred either in a macro or while reading an instrument TimeofPoint String The time that the point was collected Tolerance Double The DUT tolerance expressed as a pressure for the test point UserDefined1 Double Any one of up to 10 user defined outputs that are UserDefined10 logged as a result of a macro when running a test 28 3 2 METHODS The Test Data Class methods must be used to read and write data to the data class Table 103 Test Data Class Method Summary PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION DataPointRef Data Pont Use this method to access data from a Class specific data point The function returns a reference to a data point class selected by the function arguments 28 3 2 1 DATAPOINTREF Purpose Obtain a reference to a specific Data Point Class This reference allows the data at the point to be read and set Syntax Function DataPointRef iTemp iLinePrs iPCy iPt bReadOnly Arguments iTemp The integer id of the desired test temperature point Use 1 in the event that no temperature cycles were used iLinePrs The integer id of the desired test line pressure point Use 1 in the event that
139. sure the fields that are updated are also included in the report template Up to 5 template macros can be used for any 1 template Field Macro Field macros are provided to create custom calculations with a single return value see 18 5 7 Report Macros The return value of the macro is used as is Therefore any desired formatting must be handled by the selected macro Any number of field macros can be added to a report template When the report is generated the result of the macros will display on the final report 23 12 2 TABLES Tables are required in a template in order to display multiple points of data from a file Data fields should be dragged over and placed in cells of the table As a report is generated cells are filled vertically from top to bottom beginning with the inserted field If an adequate number of rows are not found the report editor may add additional rows in order to show all data see 23 10 4 Field Behavior If this option is enabled it will add additional rows based solely on the requirements of the first column To add a table select the Table Insert menu choice while editing a report template An option to specify the number of rows and columns is provided A table is added at the last cursor position prior to selecting the Table menu option Then drag and drop the desired fields into the table in different columns see Figure 190 Each data field can display all points for a test pressure cycle
140. tab defines Leak Test and Pressure Exercise settings When enabled these operations occur at the beginning of a test Advanced Tests support a Pre Test Macro to use before the leak or pressure cycle tests begin Familiarity with Run Test Sequence section of this manual is useful when modifying a Test Definition see 7 4 Run Test Pre Test Pressure Data Auxiliary Leak Test Exercise Run Leak Test M Run Pressure Exercise V Leak Test Pressure Unit DUTSp Exercise Pressure Unit ZDLITSp v Leak Test Pressure DUT Span 100 Min Pressure DUTSpan 5 Set Pressure Timeout s 360 Max Pressure DUTSpan 10 Leak Rate Limit DUTSpan s 10 005 Dwells B Number Of Repetitions 13 Leak Test Time s 600 Set Pressure Timeout s 89 fron Leste aedy Abort Test On Failure 7 Figure 94 Test Editor Pre Test Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 140 8 SETUP TEST 8 5 1 PRE TEST MACRO A Pre Test Macro is available in Advanced Test Definitions only Use the COMPASS Macro Editor to define a Pre Test Macro that handles test specific operations see 18 5 8 Test Macros The macro can be used to set a specific valve state or purge test devices prior to running a test Instrument data can be queried within the macro and stored in the calibration fields of a Device Class so that the data is logged to the data file see 28 5 Device Class No data is collected nor are any test based decisi
141. the Test Editor With few exceptions the setup of each point sequence is identical However each point sequence is used in a unique fashion as described in the Run Test Sequence section of this manual Familiarity with the Run Test Sequence section of this manual is useful when modifying Test Definition see 7 4 Run Test A point sequence not only defines the points to set during a test it also specifies the reference measurement and control devices to use settings related to how the output will be controlled when to adjust valve driver settings and when to execute a specific Test Macro Page 143 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Pre Test Temperature Test Pressure Points General Set 1110 2120 Unit psi psi X 3 30 zi Measurement Mode Absolute Read PPC2 RPT Measurement Y Set PPC2 RPT Control X Jog Before Dwell Regulate To Reference yjj45 s Dwell Automatic v l45 s fol Pressure Cycles f4 mem Auto Fill Vent After Eacy Cycle v Figure 95 Pressure Point Sequence Tab Each point sequence tab includes child tab buttons to categorize the specific sequence The following sections detail the options available on the Test Editor Temperature Line Pressure and Pressure tabs With certain Test Definition Type selections not all point sequence tabs are available see 8 2 Test Editor The points table displays on th
142. the data file A report that uses the data file will list and not this invalid number flag Absolute As in absolute pressure Pressure expressed relative to vacuum Absolute by ATM Absolute pressure determined by adding atmospheric pressure to gauge pressure Absolute by vacuum Absolute pressure determined by defining pressure relative to vacuum in an evacuated bell jar PG7601 only Adder A value added to internal sensor readings to offset the readings pressure adder temperature adder humidity adder vacuum adder for calibration adjustment Ae Piston cylinder effective area ATM Head Pressure head correction to the barometer measurement to take into consideration the difference between the actual barometer level and the PG7000 reference level Averaging Time The time over which reference and DUT readings are taken at a point in a COMPASS run mode COMPASS makes as many readings as possible during the averaging time and then averages the readings to arrive at the reference and DUT reading for the test point DAQ The short form of Data Acquisition This refers to the method used to gather data from a DUT Data Acquisition Type How data is acquired from a device e g RS232 IEEE 488 manual TCP IP Found on the DUT or Device Editor Communication tab Data File dat Files automatically created by COMPASS to store the data from a test Data Type Fie
143. the desired output relationship from the list The selection determines Set Relationship how COMPASS will manipulate a final setpoint target request into a raw required drop down setpoint to set The choices are listed below list 2 Unlike outputs sets are only converted from the final set value to the raw set value The raw set value is not recorded or used by COMPASS other than to send a remote command to an instrument to achieve the desired set value Same No manipulation is applied to the final setpoint Use this choice for devices that are directly addressed in their final set unit Typically devices that have a remote interface use this selection When this choice is selected the Final Set tab settings are set to be equivalent to the specified Raw Set tab settings Linearly Proportional The final setpoint target is converted to a percentage of its span This percentage is applied to the raw set span to determine the raw setpoint The formula used is described below Fon F F VARIABLE DESCRIPTION Calculated raw setpoint O ina O The minimum raw setpoint in the raw setpoint unit The raw setpoint span in the raw setpoint unit Setpoint target in the lt Final Set Unit gt Final Setpoint span in the lt Final Set Unit gt The Minimum Final Setpoint in the lt Final Set Unit gt Inverse Square Use this selection when the raw setpoint has an inverse square root relationship to
144. the final setpoint 1 y F final On Use a Get Command Macro when manipulation beyond the listed choices is required see 18 5 2 Get Command Macros Use a relationship of lt gt and perform any related calculations within the macro based on the desired target 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 64 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Table 20 Raw Set Type and Possible Set Sources SET TYPE POSSIBLE SET SOURCES OTHER THAN THE DEVICE ITSELF Current A device that controls current Amperes is required to control the output The choices are Current Control Driver Direct remote commands to the device are required for Driver set types Intermediary instruments are not supported Mux Channel Direct remote commands to the device are required for Mux Channel set types Intermediary instruments are not supported Pressure A device that controls pressure is required to control the output The individual choices confine the list of available pressure measuring controlling devices During test initialization the choices are Test Pressure Control The pressure is controlled by the active test pressure controller Line Pressure Control The pressure is controlled by the active line pressure controller General Pressure Control The pressure is controlled by any available pressure controller stored in the COMPASS database Temperature A device that controls temperature is required to co
145. the left indent Right Indent Sets or displays the right indentation point of a paragraph Unlike the left indent properties the right indent affects the entire paragraph The ruler location of this indent always displays as the number of inches from the left margin Sets or displays the locations of all tabs that effect the current insertion point To add a tab click the ruler where you want the tab to be located an arrow appears indicating the new tab location Adjust tab locations by using a mouse drag and drop operation A maximum of 15 tabs are used to affect a single range of text 23 8 STATUS BAR Displays status messages about the operations performed in the Report Editor These messages clear after thirty seconds or when a new message is displayed 23 9 OPTIONS The Tools Options dialog provides access to features that manage preferences specific to the COMPASS Report Editor The options specify default locations and determine how the Report Editor behaves under different report generation conditions Change the options by selecting the appropriate tab and entering or selecting the desired option values Press Save to save the changes or Exit to close the Options form without saving Page 275 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Options Reports Report Generation Templates General Report File Options Root Directory for Reports C Development Current Project
146. third party reference and a wider range of DUT and support devices a new approach was developed that supports multiple output types from the same device Even experienced users of previous versions of COMPASS should familiarize themselves with this section to gain an understanding of this powerful new device handling scheme Setting up and using devices devices is central to the design and operation of COMPASS Most automated testing consists of sending instructions reading and sometime manipulating data from devices interfaced to the computer that is running COMPASS In COMPASS individual devices are set up by manufacturer model and other identifying information For each device one or more final outputs and or final sets are created Final outputs and final sets are the ultimate quantity to be measured or set by a device The Raw Output to Final Output Relationship Manipulator processes one or more raw outputs into a final output see 4 3 6 2 Output Relationship Editor Raw outputs may originate from the device itself or they may be the final output of another device COMPASS supports a specific list of raw outputs and sets and final outputs and sets See Figure 1 for schematic examples of how device raw outputs and final outputs are set up 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 10 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 3 3 2 BAROMETER AND MONITOR FOR GAUGE AND ABSOLUTE PRESSURE FINAL OUTPUTS Barometer with RS 232 Communications and Ambient Pr
147. this selection requires the use of a COMPASS Relationship Macro COMPASS does not perform unit conversions with the outputs of source instruments used with an instrument that has a User Defined raw output type The choices are Auxiliary Device Voltage A device that measures voltage is required to measure the output The choices are Voltage Measurement 4 3 6 2 2 Final Output Tab Setup procedure This section describes the features associated with the Output Relationship Editor Final Output tab A step by step tab completion process is detailed below Table 14 provides detailed information on the tab fields and options See 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic is critical to proper use of the Output Relationship Editor Output Relationship Raw Output Final Output Tolerance Label Pressure Output Type Pressure SA Final Output DUT Pressure x Pressure Measurement Mode Absolute gt Minimum go00 7 Maximum 100 000 Resolution g om Use Multiplexer Figure 26 Output Relationship Editor Final Output Tab Open the Output Relationship Editor from the Device Editor Output tab and select the Final Output tab Enter the Final Output Label gt Features on Tools Options Initialization allow final outputs to be selected as identifie
148. to all fields of the selected element Right Click the field to display the selected element in it s corresponding editor Piston Gauge Platform Pistongcylinder DHI P C 107 X Fa Trim Mass Set TestTrimMass X geil Mass Bell MassBell 223 Y Figure 135 Display Piston Gauge Calculator Setup Options in COMPASS are available to alter how the list of Mass Set masses display See section 14 6 Piston Gauge Tab for details on these features 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 204 s Piston Gauge Calculator Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set Trim Mass Set Mass Bell Medium Measurement Mode 16 TOOLS PISTON GAUGE CALCULATOR PG 102 7202 Exmple Piston Cylinder Masses To Load Example DHI MassSet Trim Set Example Mass Bell Absolute Piston 0 200000 kg Bell 0 300000 kg 1M 4 500036 kg Trim Mass 21 g Ambient Temperature 20 Mass List Ambient Humidity RH 0 Ambient Pressure kPa 101 325 Vacuum Reference Pa 0 Head Height cm 0 Piston Cylinder Temperature 20 Piston Position 0 Local Gravity m s 9 80665 Trim Mass g Pressure kPa 50 500035 True Mass Load kg Close Figure 136 Piston Gauge Calculator Nominal Mass Loading Resolution 1g Table 62 Piston Gauge Calculator Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Piston Gauge Press the button next to this field to ge
149. to create custom pressure units On line help is available in the Unit of Measure Converter by accessing the Help menu within the tool Using the Piston Gauge Calculator feature Piston Gauge pressure is determined for a specified Piston Gauge platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell see 16 Tools Piston Gauge Calculator Download Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell information from a DHI PG7000 piston gauge The extracted information is added to the COMPASS database and is available for use Downloading this information is necessary only if the Piston Gauge Calculator is to be used to solve the pressure equation see 17 Tools PG7000 Setup Extractor Create edit view and delete COMPASS Macros using the COMPASS Macro Editor see 18 Tools COMPASS Macro Editor Page 76 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES 5 2 4 DATA View Data File View a COMPASS Data File using the Data File Viewer see 19 Data View Data File The ASCII text file and a data grid is used to display the information in the Data File Plot Data File Plot information from COMPASS Data Files using the COMPASS Plot Tool The Plot Tool provides features to create custom 2D and 3D plots see 20 Data Plot Data File Database Data Viewer Sort plot and display test data stored in the COMPASS Test Data Database see 21 Data Database Data Viewer Write Data File to Database Add an existing test Data File to the Test
150. to prevent edits to the test selections during test initialization This is a useful security option to prevent users from changing references and controllers during test initialization Local Test check box Check this option to prevent users on other COMPASS stations from accessing this test in a network environment Use this feature if selections in the test are not valid for other stations Test Event Macro list box selection Advanced Tests only The selected macro is called prior to each set pressure test dwell and data collection step in a test sequence The macro code can be used to alter the sequence of a test in any way desired For example the macro can repeat test points alter the test dwell and averaging times or communicate with other devices in the system based on the current test point and status In many cases it is more efficient to use this macro selection instead of multiple pre point macros Use the cCOMPASS CurrentTestStep property as needed in the macro code to determine the current step in a test see 28 9 1 Select None if a macro is not desired This option is available in Advanced Tests only see Test Editor 8 2 Post Test Macro list box selection Advanced Tests only The selected macro is called at the end of a test after all test points are complete and before any test notes are entered by the user The macro is not called if a test is aborted early for any reason This macro
151. toolbars and allow manual input of output information Others are simple displays of device raw and final outputs Most numeric outputs support unit and resolution changing as well as strip charting Access these features by clicking any of the numeric displays 5 5 2 DUT REFERENCE COMPARISON RUN SCREEN This run screen contains a simple display of errors of all DUTs compared to the active reference The comparison run screen is considered to be the COMPASS main run screen The most common output information is available on this display The information on the display is organized into rows and columns The columns separate different pieces of information The rows separate the different devices The first row is a label that describes the output The second row is always the Reference output information All subsequent rows are for the number of DUTS in use Change the unit of measure and resolution of reference and DUT outputs by right clicking the output and selecting the desired function Right click any output and select the Strip Chart option to create a strip chart using the selected output The triangular indicator next to DUT output is green when the DUT is in tolerance and red when it is out of tolerance No indicator appears when the DUT does not use a tolerance All DHI devices support a ready indicator that is green when the device is ready according to the active ready criteria and red otherwise Error Comparison 4
152. valid output of these devices When instantaneous points are logged in a Manual Test or the averaging time is O this option has no effect on data acquisition If pressure Not Ready occurs while averaging dropdown selection list Determines what action to take if a Not Ready condition occurs while reading and averaging data at a test point In all cases an R is logged in the test Data File for the point whenever a Not Ready condition occurred while averaging test data and the point was not repeated see 3 3 5 3 This feature has no effect if the reference is not set up for remote communication The options are No Action gt An lt R gt displays in the Status column of the test Data File but there are no associated prompts or messages during the test The test continues normally Prompt to repeat gt A message allowing the point to be repeated or to continue with data collection displays if a Not Heady condition occurred repeated point begins with the set pressure step of the test Do not use this selection when running automated unattended tests as COMPASS will wait indefinitely for a response to the prompt causing the test to hang Auto repeat 3 times The test set pressure step is automatically repeated up to 3 times when a Not Ready condition occurs during averaging This selection can be used when running automated unattended tests as the test will proceed This selection is intended for use with
153. window see 0 Window Help Help displays general information about the COMPASS Report Editor see 23 4 9 Help 23 4 1 FILE The File section of the menu bar contains options that deal with files as a whole This includes open save and print options This menu also contains Exit in order to close the COMPASS Report Editor Many of the File menu options enable multiple files to be selected specifically when selecting dat files to generate a report or viewing rpt or doc existing reporte Use the Shift and arrow keys or the Ctrl and left mouse button to highlight the desired files within the window to make a multi file selection For example when generating reporte selecting several dat files will generate a separate report for each file selected provided that the template requires only one Data File 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 266 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR Generate Report Ctri R Open Report Create Template Ctrl T Open Template Save Ctrl s Save As Save All Page Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Print All Close All Exit Figure 171 COMPASS Report Editor File Menu Table 76 COMPASS Report Editor File Menu Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Generate Report Generate Report opens the Data File Selection window and prompts the user to select a template and Data Files prior to generating reports Open Report Open Report v
154. with the report editor All other report types may be viewed with other word processors 23 12 TEMPLATE CREATION PROCESS A template is required to create a report A template acts as the foundation of a report While a template may include text images and other objects the main feature of the template is the data field During report creation data fields are replaced by actual data from the selected data source s see 23 11 1 Selecting Template and Data To create a report template follow the procedure outlined below Press the Create Template toolbar option All open files must be closed or saved prior to editing a new template A blank template will display on the right and the Available Data Fields panel will display on the left Several default templates are installed with COMPASS These templates provide simple common reports Use these templates as examples to create custom templates Start by opening an existing template Edit the template as desired then save the template with a different name Format the template to look like the desired end report add graphics header footer information tables labels various fonts etc In general the final report looks just like the template To separate tables with a carriage return line feed and epace Add fields from the Available Data Fields panel to the template at locations in which the actual data is desired To add data fields to the template either drag and d
155. 0 GENERIC PISTON GAUGE sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessesssssseessesssssueesessssssecess 108 6 3 7 EXAMPLE 6 PG7000 AMH PPC3 sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssseessssseessssneesssssesssssneessesseeessaneeeesens 112 6 3 8 EXAMPLE 7 MENSOR PCS 400 mms 114 fo RUN MODES ccena a CR Y xa e a nale oe accu b a a a c ua Ducati B D 7 4 OVERVIEW 7 2 RUN RUN TEST 7 3 TEST INITIALIZATION iecit acturi aereas dons as ta dune duo aura anse 73 1 SELECT UNITS OF MEASURE 7 3 2 SELECT 7 3 3 CONFIGURE DUT S DEVICES 7 3 3 1 MULITPLE RAW OUTPUT 124 7 3 3 2 CONFIGUR DHLDEMICEL X osito teer rtc ena dob An en ett 124 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page Il 10 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 3 3 3 CONFIGURE PISTON GAUGE DEADWEIGHT TESTER 125 7 3 4 SELECT anna ue don 7 3 5 VERIFY SELECT TEST HARDWARE 7 3 6 CONFIGURE TEST HARDWARE 7 3 7 ia P iMudlildewie c H TAs RUN TES Tanen ct nn nant 7 4 1 TEST CONCLUSION 7 5 RUN RUN MANUAL TEST ssssssccosssssssccsssssssscsssssssesssssssssssessssssscesssssnssessssssnsecesssssnscesessssnseceseeess PS ERUPT 139 B4 OVERVIEW aae 139 B2 TEST EDIT
156. 0131r 040719 Printed in the USA 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS eicere tee er A asie TABS M UN IX FIGURES XII ABOUT THIS MANUAL XVII i HINT RODUGTION d p pietre Sani 1 1 1 COMPASS FOR PRESSURE BASIC AND COMPASS FOR PRESSURE ENHANCED 1 1 2 COMPASS SINGLE USER AND SITE 4 2 INSTALLING COMPASS sssess ener 5 2 1 OVERVIEW 5 2 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ritenere tr raro arti nta ere rans aka od ca kan Rr a asa or yan CH Rao c rH ava Er 6 2 3 UNINSTALLING COMPASS FOR PRESSURE 6 2 4 UPGRADING FROM COMPASS FOR PPC RPM eene nennen nnnm 6 2 5 NETWORK SHARED 6 2 6 UPDATING EXAMPLE SETUPS i vccccccvcscnseccsscscssiesscusscsacscersecceveschocerdsecusussaterssecndereanssecersusctexsansersasnoseeas 8 OPERATING PRINCIPLES ccccccccceceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeess 9 3 1 OVERVIEW percc 3 2 eii 3 3 DEVICE INSTRUMENT SUPPORT CONCEPT e eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenn nne nnn etna nennt nnns nit n nsns nnn nnne 3 3 1 MEASUREMENT DEVICES
157. 1 1 1 1 TEST DATA TEST TEMPERATURE 39 110100001 1D100003 10100005 10100010 10200002 10300002 10300007 10301004 10301002 10301003 10100011 10100012 10100013 10300003 10300004 10300006 10300005 102000 Point Time Status Pt Tes Ref Press DUT Press DUT Raw Tolerance Span Error Rdg Error Amb Pres Amb Temp Amb RH DUT Press DUT Press DUT StnDeDUT Count Ref Pre DUTSpa kPa kPa kPa kPa kPa RH kPa kPa kPa kPa 2 TEST LINE PRESSURE 1 lt i DIR Figure 161 Export To Excel Data File displayed in Excel Page 255 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 22 3 EXPORT TO MET CAL MET CALO is a popular calibration data acquisition and tracking application Features in MET CAL allow data acquired from other sources to be manually or directly imported The Data menu option in the COMPASS main program and the Export option in the COMPASS Data Viewer include features to assist users who wish to import data generated by COMPASS into MET CAL This document assumes that the user is familiar with MET CAL and its operation This document is not intended to be a replacement for the MET CAL User s Manual The information contained in this section specifically describes how data generated by COMPASS can be added to MET CAL COMPASS was specifically tested with MET CAL 7 01 This procedure may require changes to wor
158. 11 TCP IP Read and or set values will be communicated remotely using a TCP IP interface Remote commands to read and or set with the device are setup on the Output and or Set tabs Refer to section 25 4 TCP IP for details on the TCP IP remote settings Measurement and or control aspects of the device are accessed using an Interface Macro selected on the Output and or Set tabs see 18 5 4 Interface Macros Macros used to read the instrument are called at the rate specified by the lt Poll Interval gt Set macros are called for each new set command The macro should communicate with the instrument by accessing interface code directly entered into the COMPASS Macro Editor or by calling other ActiveX programs Other Device A separate support device such as a DMM will be used to obtain the output of the device No further selections on the Communications tab are necessary Poll Interval ms conditional numeric entry The value entered This field is available for lt Macro gt data acquisition types only represents the time interval between COMPASS calls to the selected Interface Macro Although the entry is in ms an effective time resolution of 250 ms is used by COMPASS to prevent degradation in COMPASS performance Every 250 ms checks to see if the interval has been exceeded Therefore a 0 entry is valid Handshaking conditional listbox selection This feature is available for RS232 interfaces only
159. 11 3 4 CHARACTERISTICS cescsssccsesennesssarssseesenssnaeenenseensenseseaneenseeseasenseesenssanessenseaneensaseneanensensasens 167 11 3 4 1 PISTON GAUGE TYPE PISTON CYLINDER esses enne nennen nennen 167 11 3 4 2 DEADWEIGHT TESTER TYPE PISTON CYLINDER sss netten nennt tnn nnne 169 TES MASS BETI Lu NU 169 11 4 1 HEADER e D 170 11 4 2 CALIBRATION TAB E niet ten en net ani 170 11 4 3 MASS SET TA B HG 170 11 4 3 1 PISTON GAUGE TYPE MASS SET ite er eene enter ie e eren 171 11 4 3 2 PISTON GAUGE TRIM MASS TYPE MASS SET iii 172 11 4 3 3 DEAWEIGHT TESTER TYPE MASS SET iii 173 11 5 MASS BELE iet etes 11 5 1 HEADER TAB Page III 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 11 5 2 CALIBRATION TAB 175 11 5 3 MASS BELL TAB DD 176 11 6 7000 1 a aa aa aaa aaan 177 12 SETUP DEFAULT HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 179 12 1 OVERVIEW EET 179 122 ENVIRONMENT TAB aa ar e ES p aaa A aa aa a aeia 179 12 3 ELECTRICAL
160. 11 OVERVIEW The COMPASS Data Viewer is a simple easy to use interface with which to view add and remove COMPASS data in the Test Data Database Basic sorting and searching functionality are provided to quickly locate specific test records By default COMPASS logs all test data to a delimited text data file At the end of a test the data can be added to the database by using the Add To Database button on the lt Test Complete gt dialog at the end of a test see 7 4 1 Test Conclusion In addition the Tools Options Data File tab contains an option to allow test data to be added to the database automatically see 14 8 Data File Tab In general only data from valid and complete tests should be added to the database The data is stored an Access database common format enables easy manipulation and integration with other databases Users are welcome to add fields and customize the database as desired However if the fundamental structure of the database altered the Data Viewer will no longer work properly 21 2 COMPASS DATA VIEWER The main window of the COMPASS Data Viewer is divided into three main sections Data Viewer Toolbar Record Navigator and Test Record Information The Data Viewer Toolbar contains all icons required to view store select and manipulate data in the Data Viewer see Figure 155 Refer to Table 69 for details on the functions for each icon The Record Navigator is located just beneath the Data
161. 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 320 PROPERTIES CompleteTestCycles DATA TYPE Integer 28 COMPASS OBJECTS DESCRIPTION The number of Complete Test Cycles specified in a Test Definition CycleAbortonFailure Boolean TRUE to abort a test when a timeout occurs setting the cycle pressure CycleMaxPressure Double The maximum target pressure to set when cycling pressure The value is in the unit specified by CycleUnit CycleMinPressure The minimum target pressure to set when cycling pressure The value is in the unit specified by CycleUnit CycleReps Integer The number of times to set the maximum and minimum cycle pressures CycleRun Boolean True when pressure cycling is active CycleSetTimeout Long The maximum amount of time in Seconds to set a target pressure CycleUnit Integer The unit of measure specified for the pressure cycle Label String The label Definition assigned to the Test LeakAbortOnFailure Boolean TRUE to abort a test if a timeout occurs when setting the leak test target pressure LeakDwell Long The amount of time in seconds to wait after setting the leak test target pressure LeakDwellTime Long The leak test time in seconds LinePrsMeasMode Integer The test line pressure measurement mode 0 Absolute 1 Gauge LinePrsRegTime Long The time interval in seconds b
162. 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Raw Output Final Output Output Type Curent Final Output Label Pressure Source Current m Measurer Measurement Mode Absolute J Output Unit m amp i Unit jinwa 20c Minimum Minimum 0 00000 Maximum 59 900 M aximum 60 00000 Resolution 0001 ES Resolution 5 000001 Tolerance Spn Span 0 020 s N Required Raw Outputs to determine Final Output 4 Output Type Current x m z Dutput Source HART viaRS232 Minimum ion Maximum Resolution oni Raw Output to Final Output Relationship Linearly Proportional Figure 202 HART Relationship settings for current outputs Any raw output type that is not current or voltage is assumed to be the Primary Variable of the device when the output source is HART via RS232 The raw output type must be the output type of the Primary Variable of the HART device COMPASS supports Primary Variable outputs of pressure temperature length and mass only In this case COMPASS polls Universal HART Command 1 to obtain the output value COMPASS automatically performs the necessary unit conversion from the unit output by the device to the selected unit of the raw output when necessary For example the HART device may output a pressure in inches of water yet the setup in COMPASS specifies a unit of psi COMPASS will convert the inches of water output to psi Again all relatio
163. 282 OBJECT GONSTANTS uctor nn tremulis afin lodos a dade 310 28 2 1 PRESSURE UNIT CONSTANTS e eeeeeeeee essen 310 28 2 2 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT MODEL cccsssscessseeeesseeeensseeeenseneeenseeeessseeeessaeeeessaeeessasenssaesenseasenseaae 311 2823 TEMPERATURE UNITS eee 311 28 2 4 5 NE 311 28 3 TEST DATA CLASS aede toti E EAR 312 28 3 1 PROPERTIES viziriai neaga ne Gran ester nette tree 312 28 3 1 1 DEVICE HEADER CLASS ER Sn ete n iti esi mated Me ea nr Me asin tie nes 314 28 3 1 2 GENERAL HEADERGLASS 5e Len eee Pt ees A es ee E R 315 28 3 1 3 TEST HEADER GLEASS 1 eee tendit e oe eei pe tb audi te t resti eere Ne ese DE V NE ats 316 28 3 1 4 TES DATA POINT GLASS sans act eet bert eec DM nas te det ee 317 28 3 2 l appel 319 28 3 2 1 DATAPOINTBREE er easet he Ged See 319 28 4 TEST DEFINITION CLASS a qnin to cuadro d didi ond 320 28 4 1 PROPERTIES oes cn ccs Lc 320 28 4 2 TES POINT CASSER ed tan den eee Se 323 28 4 3 CONTROL SETTINGS CLASS peus esce saga casar Cor vase ca soon
164. 351 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL VARIABLE DESCRIPTION Current DUT final output Current reference final output Oourspan DUT span as determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum final output values in the DUT Definition E DUTFS DUT percent of full scale error DUT percent of reading error Os Test target in DUT final output unit Ewputrs Set DUT percent of full scale set point error E vrag _ Set DUT percent of reading set point error 29 2 TOLERANCE The determination of whether a point is in or out of tolerance depends on the type of tolerance selected and Tolerance values may be specified in multiple units Tolerance Choices 4 3 6 2 3 1 COMPASS first determines the tolerance value in DUT final output unit and then compares the value to the current DUT error to determine if the error is smaller in or larger out than the tolerance When the DUT tolerance selection is DUTspan Reading the tolerance is the sum of the two values If the selection is DUTspan or Reading the tolerance used is the greater of the two values Tolerances that are defined in DUT final output set or output units are also compared directly in the the DUT and reference pressures test unit of measure T DUTspan OT ovron _ X Oourspan 100 Ta reading OT s uin X Q Re f 100 VA
165. 6 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Table 82 Table 83 Table 84 Table 85 Table 86 Table 87 Table 88 Table 89 Table 90 Table 91 Table 92 Table 93 Table 94 Piston Gauge Platform Editor Sources Tab Fields 165 Piston Cylinder Editor Piston Gauge Type Characteristics Tab Fields 168 Piston Cylinder Editor Deadweight Tester Type Characteristics Tab Fields 169 Mass Set Editor Piston Gauge Type Mass Set Tab Fields 172 Mass Set Editor Piston Gauge Trim Mass Type Mass Set Tab Fields 173 Mass Set Editor Deadweight Tester Type Mass Set Tab 174 Mass Bell Editor Mass Bell Tab Fields 176 Default Hardware Configuration Environment Tab Fields 180 Default Hardware Configuration Electrical Tab Fields 181 Pressure Media Editor Fields 184 COMPASS Options Ambient Conditions Tab S lections 186 Options Initialize Test Tab Fields 187 Options Run Test Tab Fieldsa ie Rf et tbe e dg 188 Options End Test Tab Flelds iot tn e ibo lae n 192 Options Piston Gauge Tab
166. 7 da Eanan baadae LEESE ereraa RNE E es 3 3 2 BAROMETER AND MONITOR FOR GAUGE AND ABSOLUTE PRESSURE FINAL OUTPUTS 3 3 3 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER WITH VOLTAGE RAW OUTPUT READ BY DMM AND CONVERTED TO PRESSURE FINAL OUTPUT 3 3 4 CONTROL DEVICES 3 3 5 OUTPUT 3 3 5 1 REGULATION ttt ettet 3 3 5 2 Noc 3 3 5 3 READY NOT 3 3 5 4 PISTON GAUGE READY NOT READY nennen ennemi tne nnne nre nne trennen 3 4 USING A MULTIPLEXER c E 3 4 1 SWITCHING MULTIPLEXER eere nennen 3 4 2 MULTIPLEXERS WITH INTERNAL DMMS 3 4 2 1 DIRECT OUTPUT 1 norton 3 4 2 2 SWITCHED OUTPUT 3 4 2 3 SCANNED OUTPUTS 4 COMMON TOOLS AND 29 SETUP iae e c aded ainsi ere tennis eee en UE 29 42 EDITOR TOOLBAR 22 29 4 3 DEVICE EDIT ORS ste n an n s eue 32 4 3 1 OVERVIEW eI E 92 4 3 2 CREATING AND EDITING DEVICE DEFINITIONS WITH DEVICE EDITORS 32 4 3 3 HEADER 32 4 3 4 CALIBRATION TAB m m m EE m 36 4 3 5 COMMUNICATIONS
167. 7 mensor PCS 400 Initialization Command Setup 117 mensor PCS 400 Set Command sis 117 mensor PCS 400 Vent Command Selection 118 mensor PCS 400 Vent Command Setup sis 118 Run Test Setup Select Units of Measure ssssssssssseeseeeeeen nene 121 Run Test Setup Select DUTS iii 122 Configure DUT Step Profile DUT eee ener inneren 123 Configure DUT Step Mulitiple Raw Output DUT 124 Configure DUT Step DHI Device sisi 125 Gonfig re Pistori Gauge i deri can net ecd Le dade 126 Select Test Definition eiie Ha d Ier eee 127 Select Test Definition using Views sisi 127 Test Hardware Configuration sir 129 Test Definition Flow Chart it e e bte a teta tie 131 Set Pressure with Non DHI Piston 134 Set Pressure with DHI Piston Gauge ssssesssssssesesee ener entente enne 135 Test Completes Panel prete eee UO Ia 137 Test Editor Pre Test Tab sure 140 Page XIII 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114
168. 8 Auto Fill Points Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Ascending Descending Points check box Selects whether the Auto Fill point sequence will run from starting point to ending point only or from starting point to ending point and back to starting point If checked the test point sequence is from starting point to ending point and back to starting point Making a selection has no effect until Fill Points is pressed Repeat Maximum Point check box Check this option to repeat the maximum point when the Ascending Descending Points option is used Repeating the maximum point is used to properly weight test data when a linear regression will be applied to determine new calibration coefficients for a DUT In many cases the error associated with the incorrect point weighting is beyond the resolution of the device and is therefore not necessary Starting Point numeric entry field Defines the first point of an Auto Fill test point sequence Entering a value in this field has no effect until Fill Points is pressed Ending Point numeric entry field Defines the last point of an Auto Fill test point sequence Entering a value in this field has no effect until Fill Points is pressed Step Value numeric entry field Defines the increment used by Auto Fill to determine test points between the starting point and ending point Entering a value in this field has no effect until Fill Points is pressed F
169. 9 CALCULATIONS 29 CALCULATIONS COMPASS operation includes many internal calculations Most of these calculations are related to analyzing the data taken during a test run The internal calculations performed by COMPASS are documented in the sections that follow The calculations have been verified both by comparison of the program code content to the defined formulas and by parallel manual calculation All unit conversions and associated calculations are performed by the Unit of Measure Converter Use this tool to verify unit conversions as necessary 29 1 ERRORS The DUT error expresses the difference between the DUT reading and the reference reading at a particular point in a test Errors are calculated in four different ways Reading DUTFS 9eReading Set Point and DUTFS Set point Reading and DUTFS errors express the difference between the DUT output and the reference output or the DUT span The Reading Set Point and DUTFS Set Point options express the difference between the reference output and the set point or the DUT span Reading errors are undefined near zero reference outputs Set point errore are determined using the measured DUT set point whenever possible If a measured value ie not available the nominal value ie used as the set point E putes Qo Quer Q x 100 Q UTspan Enua 272 109 Re f Qser Ose 100 DUTspan Eaputrs _Set Qv Ce 100 rag _ Set set Page
170. AW OUTPUT TYPE Current POSSIBLE OUTPUT SOURCES OTHER THAN THE DEVICE ITSELF A device that measures current Amperes is required to measure the output The choices are Current Measurement Frequency A device that measures frequency is required to measure the output The choices are Frequency Measurement Humidity A device that measures humidity is required to measure the output The choices are Ambient Humidity Period Time A device that measures period time is required to measure the output The choices are Period Time Position A device that measures piston position is required to measure the output The choices are Piston Position Pressure A device that measures pressure is required to measure the output The individual choices confine the list of available pressure measuring devices during test initialization The choices are Ambient Pressure The raw output is the final output of a device whose final output is ambient pressure Reference Pressure raw output is the final output of a device whose final output is reference pressure DUT Pressure The raw output is the final output of a DUT Reference Vacuum The raw output is the final output of a device whose final output is reference vacuum Line Pressure The raw output is the final output of a device whose final output is line pressure General Pressure The raw output is the final output of a device whose
171. Ambient Pressure Sample PG7601 Ambient Temperature Sample PG7601 Le Led Le Ambient Humidity Sample PG7601 Reference Pressure Sample PG7601 Reference Line Pressure NONE Reference Temperature NONE Le Let Le Pressure Control Manual Control Line Pressure Control NONE Temperature Control NONE Multiplexer NONE dil id Valve Driver Controller NONE Default Hardware Setup Cancel Einish Figure 89 Test Hardware Configuration 7 36 CONFIGURE TEST HARDWARE Configuring test hardware is identical to configuring DUTs The exception is that non DUT hardware does not include a DUT Temperature selection Since DUTs are the only devices that can be setup as profiles non DUT devices will never support or require the entry of identification and range characteristics during initialization This configuration step supports the setup of all instruments including DUTs This includes any support instruments such as DMMs and multiplexers as well as test reference and control devices The process begins with the first non DUT device Make selections appropriate to the device and press Next to proceed with the setup of the next device Repeat these steps until all devices have been configured When Next is pressed on the last device the test initialization will continue to the final verification step 7 3 7 FINAL VERIFICATION The final verification step displays the curren
172. Any return value provided is not used by COMPASS Value Remarks Test Macros are called prior to setting a test temperature line pressure or pressure point and before changing the active test reference or controller The macro must be selected in Test Definition of an advanced test see 8 1 PAN There is no time out imposed on Test Macros If the macro code creates an infinite loop the active Test Definition will hang until the user aborts the test Review the properties and methods of the Configuration Class and the COMPASS Class prior to creating a Test Macro Use the Configuration Class properties to control various test instruments This class allows the macro to change the test pressure send commands directly to any configured test instrument and view the output of any test instrument The COMPASS Class should be used to repeat test points and pause system operation as required by a macro 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 230 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR Example This example macro is used to change the pneumatic connections of a test prior to changing test controllers In many occasions changing a test controller or reference requires isolating one device from the test pressure and exposing another device to the test pressure To safely make this transition the test pressure must be vented This macro vents the test pressure and delays 60s using a Global Macro function The valve driver channels are then set isolate and
173. BJECTS 28 6 CONFIGURATION CLASS The Configuration Class contains a reference to the Calculation Classes of all instruments controlled by COMPASS during a test Refer to section 28 8 for details on the Calculation Class All instruments in this object are selected during the Test Initialization process Use the properties of this class to control and access instruments as required by a macro Calculation Class A separate Calculation Class is used to store information for each test device This class provides a link to the Range Class of any support devices used to deterrrine the final output of the Calculation Class Configuration Class Used to access the Calculation Class cf all active Classes when Range Class runninga test The specific details of an output are stored in this class There is a separte Range Class for each support output in a Calculation Class The parent device information is obtained by using the GetParent property Device Class Access settings stored in a DUT support device ar piston guage platform Figure 207 Configuration Class Object Model 28 6 1 PROPERTIES PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION ActiveRefLP Integer The collection index of the active reference line pressure device The value should be used with the RefLinePrs collection to access the calculation class of the active line pressure reference ActiveRefP Integer The collection index of the active reference pressure device T
174. COMPASS FOR PRESSURE Calibration Software User s Manual 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc All rights reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of DH Instruments Inc 4765 East Beautiful Lane Phoenix AZ 85044 5318 USA DH Instruments Inc makes sincere efforts to ensure accuracy and quality of its published materials however no warranty expressed or implied is provided DH Instruments Inc disclaims any responsibility or liability for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of the information in this manual or products described in it Mention of any product does not constitute an endorsement by DH Instruments Inc of that product This manual was originally composed in English and was subsequently translated into other languages The fidelity of the translation cannot be guaranteed In case of conflict between the English version and other language versions the English version predominates DH Instruments DH DHI COMPASS COMPASS for Pressure COMPASS for Pressure Basic COMPASS for Pressure Enhanced PG7000 PPC PPC2 PPC3 RPM RPM3 and RPM4 are trademarks registered and otherwise of DH Instruments Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Document No 55
175. COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 28 4 5 CONTROL SETTINGS CLASS The Control Settings Class is a collection of control settings for all points in a test Edit the properties in this class to change control settings during a test See section 3 3 5 Output Control for details on how control settings are used Control settings are selected on the Set tab in a Test Definition Table 106 Test Point Class PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION AutoGenDeadBand Single The automatic pressure generation deadband AutoGenerate Boolean TRUE when automatic pressure generation for a piston gauge is enabled AutoRotate Boolean TRUE when auto rotate is enabled for a PG7000 and FALSE otherwise HoldUnit Integer The unit of measure associated with the hold and stability limits HS Single Control hold setting in the defined HoldUnit SetMode Integer Determines whether Static or Dynamic pressure control is used ss Single The stability setting in the defined HoldUnit SSTime Integer The stability hold time in seconds Timeout Integer The stability timeout value in seconds UseReady Boolean TRUE when the Ready response of the active controller is used to determine when the output is set 28 5 DEVICE CLASS The Device Class stores information setup by users in any of the COMPASS device editors DUT Editor Support Device Editor and Piston Gauge Platform Editor Use this class in macro
176. Class of the instrument used to provide the third raw output value when at least 3 raw outputs were specified in the Output Relationship Editor When the RangeMain class is for a non DHI piston gauge this class represents the piston rotation rate measuring device output specified during test initialization RangeRaw4 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc The Range Class of the instrument used to read the DUT temperature when the RangeMain class is a DUT and a DUT measuring device was selected during test initialization 7 3 3 When the RangeMain class is for a non DHI piston gauge this class represents the reference vacuum measuring device output specified during test initialization Page 336 28 COMPASS OBJECTS PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION RawOutput1 Double The output of the instrument setup to provide the first raw output value Changing this property value automatically triggers a new calculation update Only set this property to a value that is already in the proper unit of measure To avoid setting the value in the same unit of measure use the RangeMain or the RangeRaw1 classes and set their RawOutput property to the desired value The normal unit conversions between the output source device s final output unit of measure and the requested raw output unit of measure happen automatically When the RangeMain class is for a non DHI piston gauge this value represents the piston cylinder temperature measur
177. Configure Device 1 of 1 Example PPC3 Manufacturer DH Instruments 7 Model PPC3 Serial Number 1234 Identification Customer ID s RS232 Settings COM1 2400 E 7 1 Parameter ID D Load Settings Reference Pressure Output Label RPT Measurement Min psi fo Max psi ao Measurement Made A1000 G0050 Ranges Auto Range Enable Auto Zero Head Height 12 3 cm Medium Air Y Cancel Next Einish Back Figure 59 Example PPC3 Device Configuration e Press Finish to complete the initialization process and begin polling the PPC3 Use the features on the toolbar to display the PPC3 Run Screen see sections 5 4 2 Run Display Tools and 5 5 6 2 PPC Run screen View and change PPC pressure by accessing the tools on the run screen see Figure 60 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 104 6 HOW DO I PPC3 A1000 G0050 SN 289 Hold Limit 006 psi Figure 60 Example PPC3 Run Screen 6 3 5 EXAMPLE 4 PG7000 How do I setup my PG7000 for use as a pressure reference Use the Piston Gauge Platform Editor to create a new device Like any other DH Instruments product select the lt Autodetect Setup option to avoid specifically defining all options available on the PG When Autodetect Setup is checked the piston cylinders mass sets and mass bells setup on the PG7000 terminal are available for selection during Test Initialization The final calculated pressure is read
178. DEVICES TABLE All devices used in a test can be recorded in the data file and the devices table The role each device played in the test is identified as the Device Type Only devices specifically added to the data file will be added to the Devices table in the database see 14 10 Data Header Tab Table 72 describes the different device types Table 72 Device Type Descriptions DATABASE CONSTANT DESCRIPTION Ambient Pressure Ambient Relative Humidity Ambient Temperature Auxiliary 1 Auxiliary 10 Auxiliary 2 Auxiliary 3 Auxiliary 4 Auxiliary 5 Auxiliary 6 Auxiliary 7 Auxiliary 8 Auxiliary 9 Device Under Test DUT Raw Output 1 DUT Raw Output 2 DUT Raw Output 3 Reference Page 247 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL DATABASE CONSTANT RefR1 DESCRIPTION Reference Raw Output 1 RefR2 Reference Raw Output 2 RefR3 Reference Raw Output 3 rLPres Read Line Pressure rTemp Read Temperature sLPres Set Line Pressure sPres Set Pressure DATABASE FIELD CalDueDate sTemp DATA TYPE Date Time Set Temperature Table 73 Description of fields in the Devices Table DESCRIPTION Date next calibration is due after current calibration is completed CalibrationCoefficient1 Text User calibration correction applied last time CalibrationCo
179. DH Instruments Inc This type of macro is used to manipulate the raw remote response of an instrument into a numerical value that can be used by COMPASS The response should be the instruments raw output in the selected raw output unit Whenever possible use the built in parsing functions instead of a macro Function ParseOutput Reply ParamID cRange e Reply The unmanipulated response from the remote interface of the device The command that has the Process Response value checked is used to generate the response User defined identification value for a device This value can be entered only during test initialization It is used as a flag to handle similar devices differently Particularly when devices require individual command addressing This is frequently the case when instruments are connected using an interface chain e cRange The Range Class of the instrument requiring manipulation The return value must be the raw output of the instrument in the raw output unit specified in the Output Relationship Editor see 4 3 6 2 Return an empty string when a value cannot be determined COMPASS will not abort or display an error message The return value is simply ignored The remote response of instruments varies dramatically with manufacturer and industry As a result a standard scheme to obtain a numerical output from a remote command is not possible However in many cases the standard COMPASS ma
180. Data Database This is a shortcut to the feature available in the Database Data Viewer see 21 2 COMPASS Data Viewer Export Data File to MET CAL Add an existing test Data File to the Test Data Database This is a shortcut to the feature available in the Database Data Viewer see 22 3 Export to MET CAL Report Editor Run the COMPASS Report Editor to generate a report from a COMPASS test Data File or data stored in the COMPASS Test Data Database see 23 Data Report Editor 5 2 5 DATABASE Setup Setup options specific to the COMPASS database Including the location and file name of the configuration and Test Data databases see 24 2 Database Setup Users Maintain COMPASS users and the rights associated with the users see 24 3 Database Users The features in this option are available only to users with administrator level access Change Current User Activates the lt User Login gt dialog to login as a different user This is necessary at times when the current user access restricts features required to complete a specific task see 24 4 Database Change Current User 5 2 6 WMNDOW Options to select tile or cascade active COMPASS run screens are provided by this menu choice Use the Main Toolbar display icons display run screens that are not already active 5 2 7 HELP Access on line help and the lt COMPASS About dialog for version information Page 77 2002 2004 DH Instrument
181. Definition SetPointPressure Double Test pressure set point specified by the Test Definition SetPointTemperature Double Temperature set point specified by the Test Definition SetTime Integer Time required to achieve a ready condition when setting the test pressure Status Text Text flags that describe the test point T The DUT was out of tolerance t The test pressure was not set within the specified pressure set timeout E An error occurred either in a macro or while reading an instrument TempCycle Integer Temperature Cycle Used to Import Data into Test Data Class DataPointCollection clsDataPoint Time Text Time the data point was recorded Tolerance Double The tolerance of the DUT in pressure units at this reference pressure UserDefined1 UserDefined10 Double Special value created as a result of a COMPASS macro VentPoint Page 251 Indicates if the value of a given test point was defined by a vent 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 252 22 EXPORTING COMPASS DATA 22 ExPORTING COMPASS DATA 22 1 OVERVIEW Data generated by running tests in COMPASS for Pressure can be used in other applications if desired In most cases the external application will include features necessary to import ASCII data or data stored in a database Knowin
182. Device Output FS Err Rdg Err Tol RPM3 501 DE VXK112 222 PPC 1111 1 785 Figure 43 DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen Page 83 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL The display features of the DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen are listed in the table below Table 28 DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen Fields LABEL DESCRIPTION Red or Green Use only with DHI devices when they are the pressure reference The circle is green Circular Indicator when the output is Ready and red when Not Ready see 3 3 5 3 Ready Not Ready The Ready Not Ready criteria values are specified in the Test Definition See the DHI product Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on the Ready Not Ready function Red or Green DUT in or out of tolerance indication The triangle is green only when the instantaneous Triangular output error is within the tolerance specified in the DUT Definition Otherwise the Indicator indicator is red DUTs that do not have a tolerance specified do not display this indicator Device The Model Serial Number of the configured device Output The output of the device in either the current test unit of measure or the most recently selected display unit Right click any output field and select the Change Unit option to change the displayed pressure unit of measure for all Outputs This does not affect the unit of measure that data is logged in COMPA
183. Dwell String The line pressure dwell time The value is either Manual or the numeric dwell time value LinePresHoldLimit String The line pressure hold limit and unit LinePresSSLimit String The line pressure stability limit and unit LinePresSSTime Integer The line pressure ready hold time LinePressSSTimeout Integer The pressure ready time out LinePresUseReady String Yes or No depending on the line pressure controller Use Ready Test Definition selection NumLinePresPnts Integer The number of line pressure points defined in the Test Definition LinePresJog String Yes when the line pressure jog function was enabled and No otherwise LinePresRegulate String The time in seconds between line pressure regulation updates or No LinePresCtrlMode String Pressure control mode used for DH Instruments pressure controllers Static or Dynamic LinePresMeasMode String Line pressure measurement mode TempDwell String The test temperature dwell time The value is either Manual or the numeric dwell time value TempHoldLimit String The test temperature hold limit and unit 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 316 28 COMPASS OBJECTS PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION TempSSLimit String The test temperature stability limit and unit TempSSTime Integer The test temperature ready hold time TempsSSTimeout Integer The pressure ready time out
184. EE 488 address Refer to the device documentation for more information on how to determine the device s IEEE 488 address Data Acquistion Type 9312 Y IEEE 488 Address 10 Figure 198 IEEE 488 Settings 25 4 TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is an industry standard communication protocol that defines methods for packaging data for transmission between computing devices on a network TCP IP is the standard for data transmission over networks and is becoming a common device interface protocol TCP establishes a connection for data transmission and IP defines the method for sending data packets COMPASS provides communications with host TCP IP devices by using the host PC s network interface card COMPASS can communicate with the device at any point on the physical network To use this protocol the devices TCP IP address must be available Enter the address in the lt TCP IP Host IP field The address can be a text host name value or in the numeric IP address format 102 168 200 200 The TCP IP Port is the mechanism that allows a computer to simultaneously support multiple communication sessions with computers and devices on a network A port is basically a refinement of an IP address a computer that receives a packet from the network can further refine the destination of the packet by using a unique port number that is determined when the connection is established By default COMPASS uses 1001 as the port valu
185. ELECTION Data Format Data Source Data Source 1 ml Reset number of data sources for use with template to 1 Data Cycle Information 1 Temperature Cycle 11 Pressure Cycle o Individual Data Point Cancel 1 Line Pressure Cycle Update Figure 187 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Source Tab Table 90 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Source Tab FEATURE DESCRIPTION Data Source Reset number of data sources Use this field to generate a report that includes data from one or more Data Files Up to five files can be selected The source file for the data is selected here The Data File number corresponds to the order that individual Data Files are selected in the lt Data File Selector gt see 23 11 1 Selecting Template and Data Reset number of data sources for use with template to 1 will do just that Selecting this option resets the number of required data sources to one All data from other data sources will no be ignore if required by other fields This is included as a method to correct the number of data sources required in a template after fields with a data source greater than one have been deleted This helps to ensure that templates behave correctly when creating reports Data Cycle Information 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Select cycle and point values as required to display a single test point in a report To return all information for a
186. ETUP ccceceececceceececceceeceeeeceeceeeeceeees 289 244 OVERVIEW na dept tat dme P AT LM RA safe sta Mentis 289 24 2 DATABASE SETUP i aider ter area ut 289 243 DATABASE USERS a ud 290 24 4 DATABASE CHANGE CURRENT USER 291 24 5 DATABASE COMPASS DATABASE MAINTENENCE TOOL se 292 25 REMOTE INTERFACING esee nm n enne nnns 295 25d OVERVIEW iocis en a tid ot ac AR ra ad ERE D QS 25 2 RS232 INTERFACE 25 24 5232 SETUP 25 2 2 DHI DEVICE COM2 256 5 EEE AGG INTERFACE te oiu cq Aud 25 4 TCP IP 298 25 5 MART dara diu ar eI d 298 25 5 1 HART OUTPUT enne snas essa anna asas nasa assa saa s DER sas I Essa ss DR asas Ima asas Ims s amas 299 25 6 TERMINATION AND TIMEOUT mme 301 26 UNIT CONVERSIONS unies cron ccs es cO cC CE c en 303 21 DATA PIEES tux ue a EE vius OU aaa do 305 274 DATA FILE CREATION en ein p RS m Cet dad adum CR ARA A 305 27 2 NAMING AND STORING DATA FILES sscssssssssssssssssecssseesssneesssneesssseesssseessneesssneeessneesssseessnsesseneeesens 305 273 DATA FILE STRUCTURE d audi 306 28 COMPASS OBJEGCTS nde RR nn ER RUP OR E ERR DR trs 309 ond OVERVIEW utis E au 309
187. F gt Figure 20 Common Read and Set Interface Setups on the Communications Tab Header Calibration Communications Output Set Common read and set interface Dutput Interface Set Interface Data Acquistion Type R5232 Y SetType IEEE 488 Y RS232Pot Pets IEEE 488 Address ho RS232 Settings Handshaking None Binary Commandset 7 Command Timeout s 8 Command Timeout s g Command Terminator CR L F E Command Terminator CR L F Response Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt E Response Terminator LF E Figure 21 Individual Read and Set Interface Setups on the Communications Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 40 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Table 10 Device Editor Communications Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Common Set and Read Interface conditional check box selection Un check if a device has both output and set capabilities AND the two capabilities are addressed on different interfaces If this feature is not checked independent Output and Set interfaces must be completed By default this feature is checked This feature is not available with simple type DUTs and when the Autodetect setup feature ie checked on the Header tab Data Acquisition Type required drop down list selection Defines how read and or set values will be communicated to and or from the device Each choice requires unique settings to be entered S
188. Fields ss 193 Options Data Grid Tab Selections ss 195 Options Data File Tab Fields nennen nnne nenas 196 Piston Gauge Calculator Fields ss 205 COMPASS Macro Types Summary sss enne enne sns 215 Data File Viewer Options iii 234 Data Plot loolDar 3 5 eade Eo RE E ded ERE nn EE Deed eg 236 Custom Plot Editor iod eI ie d ee eade ees nee tem rente 238 Plot Points Genera Tab Fields 239 Plot Points Best Fit Tab Fields ss 240 Data Viewer Toolbar aire tet m eee e I eret P ens 242 Test Record Information Fields 243 Description of fields in the Test Table 245 Device Type Descriptions sise 247 Description of fields in the Devices Table 248 Description of fields in the Data Table 250 Data Imported into MET GAL nce nude hederae n denen 260 COMPASS Report Editor File Menu Fields 267 COMPASS Report Editor Edit Menu Fields 268 COMPASS Report Editor View Menu Fields sseseeeeeneennnnns 269 COMPASS Report Editor Insert Menu Fields 270 COMPASS Report Editor Tools Menu Fields 271 COMPASS Report Editor Main Toolbar Fields nennen 272 COMPASS Report Editor Format Toolbar Fields 273 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler Options us 275 COMPASS Report Editor Optio
189. File DatalnFile DataHeader Interface Language i Initialize Test RunTes EndTest Piston Gauge Ambient Pressure 131 psi Ambient Temperature 25 Ambient Humidity 64 Reference Vacuum 1 2 Y Pressure Medium Air 20C Sd odes Figure 122 Options Ambient Conditions Tab Page 185 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 55 COMPASS Options Ambient Conditions Tab S lections FEATURE DESCRIPTION Ambient Pressure numeric entry Enter the default ambient pressure value and select the corresponding unit of measure When running tests if ambient pressure is entered manually the value specified is used by default Ambient Temperature numeric entry Enter the default ambient temperature value and select the corresponding unit of measure When running tests if ambient temperature is entered manually the value specified is used by default Ambient Humidity numeric entry Enter the default ambient humidity value and select the corresponding unit of measure When running tests if ambient humidity is entered manually the value specified is used by default Reference Vacuum numeric entry Enter the default value of residual pressure under a piston gauge bell jar in absolute measurement mode When running tests if reference vacuum is entered manually the value specified is used by default Pressur
190. For example Enter user ID gt File names are designated in quotation marks when they do NOT include a file extension For example dat file or dat COMPASS functions and features are identified in bold and capitalized for example General Toolbar or DUT Definition Editor A CAUTION is used in manual to identify user warnings and cautions NOTE is used in the manual to identify operating and applications advice and additional explanations Page XVII 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page XVIII 1 INTRODUCTION 1 INTRODUCTION Welcome to COMPASS for Pressure the complete pressure calibration software package COMPASS for Pressure is designed to supply the missing link needed to get from individual automated hardware components to a complete automated pressure calibration system Using COMPASS FOR PRESSURE you can define characteristics of various devices under test DUT create any number of calibration scenarios run tests analyze test data and generate reports without ever leaving the program or you can export test data for analysis using other applications COMPASS s flexible approach makes it easily adaptable to a wide variety of hardware and allows you to adjust the level of automation for the level of automation supported by your hardware and for many different tasks In addition the access level of users can be adjusted to support
191. General Pressure gt Ambient Pressure The device is used to measure atmospheric pressure Reference Pressure The device is used as the source of reference pressure values in a test or calibration DUT Pressure The device is aDUT This selection is not available on support device setups that do not have DUT support enabled see 4 3 3 Header Tab This selection makes a device a DUT Reference Vacuum The device is used to measure reference vacuum usually under a piston gauge bell jar Line Pressure The device is used to measure line pressure during a calibration or test General Pressure The device can be used in any and all pressure measurement roles Resistance Resistance The device is used to measure resistance Rotation Piston Rotation The device is used to measure rotation Temperature The device can be used in any of several temperature measuring roles If the device is frequently used for different types of temperature measurement choose the General Temperature option Ambient Temperature The device is used to measure ambient temperature Reference Temperature The device is used as the source of reference temperature values in a test or calibration Piston Cylinder Temperature The device is used to measure the temperature of a piston gauge piston cylinder General Temperature The device can be used in any and all temperature measurement roles Voltage Voltage Measurement The
192. H Instruments Inc Integer Page 322 The unit of measure of the test pressure points 28 COMPASS OBJECTS 28 4 2 TEST POINT CLASS The Test Point Class is a collection class that stores information on all test points Edit the properties in this class to change the target point values in a test Table 105 Test Point Class PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION Count Integer Read only property that returns the number of points DriverState Long The bitwise state of any valve drivers assigned to the current test point If valve drivers 2 and 3 are active the value will be 2 2 12 LastSetDevice Control Settings A collection of control setting Class information The property requires a test point argument and returns a single Control Settings Class example object LastSetDevice 1 HS will return the current hold setting ReadChange Boolean TRUE when the controller will change prior to setting the target output of the specified test point SetChange Boolean TRUE when the controller will change prior to setting the target output of the specified test point Target Double The target output for the test point The units are specified in by the properties in the Test Definition Class TargetText String The text description of the target Other than the numeric value of the target Min Max or ATM may be returned Page 323 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc
193. HP3497014 MUX Hewlett Packard HP349704 Current Voltage Voltage Hewlett Packard HP34401a Current Resistance El Temperature Lab Oven Despatch Ecosphere Temperature PPC2 PPC2 PPC3 PPC3 E RPM3REF HI RPT Pressure m he gt v Figure 10 Setup Selector 4 2 EDITOR TOOLBAR All editors in COMPASS use the Editor Toolbar This includes the DUT Support Device Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set Mass Bell and Pressure Media Editors In the editor all features not on the tables are considered part of the Editor Toolbar The toolbar identifies the definition that is active in the editor provides tools to create delete save restore and select a definition to edit Use the scrollbar or the Select from List toolbar icon to pick a setup to edit A label flashes Editing when any changes to an existing setup are made or a new setup is created Use the Restore toolbar icon to undo undesired changes Page 29 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Changing the lt Record Label gt does not create a new instance of a device setup The New or Copy toolbar functions must be used to create a new device setup Record Label Auto PG 1711 xd x Figure 11 Editor Toolbar Test Record Label BG Standad Cal 5 11 Test Definition Type Simple Test d gt Editing Record Figure 12 Test Definition Editor Toolbar T
194. ICI k Function GetCommandMacro Target ChnlSt SetMode ParamID cRange if ParamID 9 then cmd amp ParamID amp 00P3 else cmd 0 amp ParamID amp 00P3 end if GetCommandMacro cmd End Function Page 219 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 18 5 3 Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc This example creates a command to change the multiplexer channel The Target value is always 1 n when used with a multiplexer or valve driver object In this particular example channels on 2 banks on the multiplexer must be closed If one channel were required and more than 9 channels would not be used a macro would not be necessary Mak kk kk ek kk kk ek kk kk ek oko kk ek ke ek ke kde Close the multiplexer channel for the HP3488 multiplexer Target Target value when the SetMode is True Valve Driver Chnl Chn1lst True False to activate or de active a valve driver SetMode True for Set commands False for all other commands ParamID Parameter ID of the device cRange Device Range Class that the relation ship applies to NH RD Function SetMux2Channel Target ChnlSt SetMode ParamID cRange if Target 9 then cmd ROUTE CLOSE 810 amp target amp 020 a
195. IPLES 3 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS for Pressure is an application program intended to automate pressure test and calibration processes to the extent supported by the available calibration data acquisition and support hardware and appropriate for the DUT s being tested COMPASS operations follow conventional Windows protocol for file management menu and message formatting graphics and editing Pressure standards controllers piston gauges temperature controllers and other controlling and measuring devices are set up in COMPASS Support Device Definitions see 4 3 Device Editors COMPASS supports automated operation of most remotely enabled measuring and controlling devices There is built in support for all DHI products so a remote command setup is not necessary Users can create the remote communications profiles necessary to control and read other device In addition a database of communications protocols for many controlling and measuring devices is included in COMPASS Visit www dhinstruments com for updates to the database All devices set up in COMPASS DUTs Support Devices and Piston Gauge Components can be configured to provide multiple outputs For example a DUT can be setup to not only provide DUT pressure but to also supply temperature humidity and pressure control Throughout COMPASS devices are selected by the measurement or control function they accomplish rather than by the specific device Devices to be tested are set up in D
196. Information stored in the test Data File should be manipulated by accessing the properties in the Test Data Class Function ReportMacro colData curFile e colData A collection of all active Test Data Classes A separate data class is used for each Data File in the report editor e curFile The collection index of the Test Data Class that is actively being reported Return a string value to include in a report An empty string is treated no differently that a populated string Report Macros are frequently used to perform high level calculations with Data File data Before creating this type of macro make sure that the desired output is not already in the list of Available Data Fields when creating a report template To use a Report Macro create or edit a report template and insert the desired macro in the template During report generation the macro is called and the return value is added to the report in place of the field added in the template Do not use a Report Macro to manipulate the macro defined data in the Data File in the same manner as a Data File Macro A Report Macro is called during report generation There is no guarantee that data manipulated by the macro will be reported correctly Data File Macros are called before a report is created thus guaranteeing that modified data is available for reporting Page 228 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR This macro returns
197. LE 158 SETUP SUPPORT 159 1071 20 VERVIEW ne re ae de d e cric 159 SETUP PISTON GAUGE nme 161 Viri OVERVIEW sciret C destaca ME LI DS A nU edunt 161 11 2 PISTON GAUGE PLATFORM ssssssssssssssssssscssssesssssssssssssssssssscessssssssssssssusesesssssussseessssnsecessssnnecces 161 11 2 1 HEADER aaea a Seiad 163 11 2 2 CALIBRATION TAB ox csscicescecsdesdeccessessceccazesviucenscesecestassnsecvcearecateuteveustsveessecesendsvensceteesetavanedsctenstsseeecaveanes 163 11 2 3 P C MS TAB a Corea rne ee eue nn spen eee xm rr Rome ee epe sx ee gU Lev gue ge enr eee ren de 163 11 2 4 SOURCES TAB 164 11 2 5 COMMUNICATIONS TAB nsnssecsessotenesassesencsscnsnacesnerssstsansesssseaseesessestesnonssuscssoeteninsusesensentecsuetesersursanseres 165 11 2 6 OUTPUT ui 166 11 2 7 SETI TAB 166 11 3 PISTON CYLINDER area et ninia tn 166 11 3 1 HEADER E 166 11 3 2 CALIBRATION A E aaa Ee aaraa SAAE et ep 167 11 3 3 LOLERANCE ex 167
198. MPASS s facilities for interfacing with remote devices This includes how commands are sent to devices the formatting of responses troubleshooting tips and overall interface timing COMPASS supports remote communications over RS232 TCP IP and IEEE 488 interfaces In general initialization set and read command sets with multiple discrete commands per set can be issued to complete a desired function In many cases multi command sets are not needed COMPASS s highly versatile command structuring support and the near universality of RS232 and or IEEE 488 interfaces on today s computers and test devices make it possible to use just about any test device with remote communications capability with COMPASS COMPASS also supports a macro based interface In this mode COMPASS calls an Interface Macro at timed intervals see 18 5 4 Interface Macros The code within the macro can communicate with an instrument using any desired protocol Most frequently this type of interface is used to allow existing code to work the COMPASS user can compile an ActiveX control from existing code and access it within the macro There are two main interface types set up in COMPASS Read interfaces are used when COMPASS must acquire data from a device such as a digital multi meter used to read a DUT s output Set interfaces are used to send control related commands directly to a controlling device Each of these command sets usually include two types of commands a
199. MPASS When running a test COMPASS will therefore prompt the user to set the output at each point Mass Bell The sleeve loaded onto the piston to carry other masses Mass Set MS A group of masses composed for use with a PG7000 piston gauge Mass Entry Mode mass to pressure Operating mode in which the user enters the mass loaded on the piston and COMPASS calculates the defined pressure See also Pressure Entry Mode Measurement Mode Mode in which pressure is defined These include gauge pressure relative to atmospheric pressure absolute by atmosphere pressure relative to vacuum determined by adding atmospheric pressure to gauge pressure absolute by vacuum pressure relative to absolute vacuum determined by establishing a vacuum around the mass load differential PG7601 only pressure relative to atmospheric or another static pressure determined by subtracting the static pressure from absolute by vacuum Medium pressurized The pressurized fluid Module Variable Variable declared before the first function in any macro All macros of the same macro type can use this variable A value by which internal sensor readings are multiplied to change their slope pressure multiplier temperature multiplier humidity multiplier vacuum multiplier for calibration adjustment Multiplexer 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Device that handles signal switching for a measuring device The multipl
200. MPASS use and take full advantage of its many features and functions Before using the manual take a moment to familiarize yourself with the Table of Contents structure Sections 3 4 and 5 should be read by all first time COMPASS for Pressure users Certain words and expressions have specific meaning as they pertain to COMPASS The Glossary Section 6 is useful as a quick reference for exact definition of specific words and expressions as they are used in the manual Cross references are used extensively to direct you towards additional information on a topic Cross references are generally placed next to the subject they reference to in parentheses with the reference s section number alone or with Table or Figure For example 11 3 2 references a section Table 4 references a table and Figure 2 references a figure For those of you who don t read manuals go directly to Installing Section 2 to install COMPASS then Section 2 to get started and Section 5 for a summary of operating principles Later when you have questione or start to wonder about all the great features you might be missing get into the manual indicates COMPASS menu tab or button selections for example Data Menu or tab selection paths are always described hierarchically from highest to lowest level For example Tools Options Piston Gauge indicates COMPASS text displays such as screen names field names prompts warnings and instructions
201. N This device can be used as a DUT optional check box non DUT device editors only Check this option to allow the final output of a device to be used as a DUT output This will allow the device to be the device under test when a test is run In some cases this is desirable for example a pressure reference needs to be a DUT when it is calibrated To allow the device to be used as a DUT check this option and create a second final output specified as DUT Pressure During Test Initialization the output specified for DUT Pressure will be listed along with other DUTs in the database Platform Type required drop down list selection Piston Gauge Platform editor only Select the type of Piston Gauge Platform There are two choices Piston Gauge When this platform is used the pressure output will be will be calculated from mass load and piston cylinder effective area using the complete pressure equation Platforms of this type can only be used with Piston Cylinders and Mass Sets that are also defined as Piston Gauge Type Deadweight Tester When this platform is used the pressure output is calculated using the pressure values specified for the piston cylinder and the masses in their definitions gravity correction for the difference between the gravity specified in the element definitions and the local gravity is also applied Platforms that are specified as Deadweight Tester can only be used with Piston Cylinders a
202. None None Unlike the StepBack method StepNext has the identical function as the button on the toolbar each call to this method increments the current test step see Run test Tools 5 4 1 There are 3 test steps set pressure dwell and data acquisition In a pre point macro the current test step is set pressure One call to StepNext will skip pressure generation and continue with the test dwell A second call will skip the dwell and resume operation with data acquisition f called a third time test operation resumes with the set pressure step of the next test point This process will continue up to the data acquisition step of the first point following the maximum test point completed See StepBack TakePoints Programmatically press one of the Manual Test data acquisition buttons to collect data within a macro see Data Acquisition Tools 5 4 3 cCOMPASS TakePoints iMode iAvgTime lInterval iMode Integer value that represents the individual take point button to press o 0 Single point o 1 Average then take a point o 2 lIndividual points at an interval o 3 Averaged points at an interval e iAvgTime Integer value that represents the averaging time in seconds The value is used only when iMode is 1 or 3 Manual averaging is not supported by this function e l lterval Long integer that represents the interval between collected data points The value is used only when iMode is 2 or 3 None This func
203. OMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL User selects report Data from the data file template and data files and many common data calculations Report generation proceeds by replacing template fields w ith the Data File data Data File Macro Manipulate data in a Data File Completed report Report Macro Manipulate Data File data and return a field for the report Figure 168 Report Generation Process The default directory locations for dat rpt and tpl are flexible and specified in Options Each file selection within the report editor defaults to one of these directories depending on the type of file required Unless changed by the user all report templates are stored in the template sub directory of the COMPASS Report Editor root directory This current template defaults to the last accessed template The COMPASS Report Editor supports Windows drag and drop functionality All supported files of the report editor can be dragged on to the COMPASS Report Editor from Windows Explorer Depending on the type of file the report editor will either generate a report or display the file 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 264 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR 23 3 DISPLAY The Report Editor is essentially a customized word processor and as such functions like any other word processor The main display contains documents and toolbars as well as a special window used to p
204. OR en nn 139 8 3 CREATING TEST DEFINITIONS cccsssssssscssssssssscssssssssssssssssesssssssssscsessssnsscesssssnssceessssnseesessssnseceessees 139 84 EDITING TEST DEFINITIONS ei 140 8 5 5 8 5 1 PRE TEST MACRO 8 5 2 LEAK TEST FRAME 8 5 3 EXERCISE FRAME rere Oa evo esc y eme o ea cce en Aeneas 8 6 TEST POINT SEQUENCE ho pete etate albido 8 6 1 OVERVIEW 2 mc exercere acre pec cca anne ease Saian 8 6 2 TEST POINT SEQUENCE INSERT OPTIONG c ccsssceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeenaeeeseeeneeenseesseeeeseeenaeeeaes 8 6 3 CUSTOM POINT OPERATIONS c cccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeeenenseeeeaeeeseneneeesaeesenensaeseaeeeseeenaeeeeneeeeneesaeeseees 146 8 6 4 AUTO 147 8 6 5 TEST POINTS SEQUENCE GENERAL CHILD TAB iii 148 8 6 6 TEST POINTS SEQUENCE READ CHILD TAB eeeeseeesesseeeeeeeene nenne nnne tnnt nn 150 8 6 7 TEST POINTS SEQUENCE SET CHILD 151 B DATA ne IUe 154 CT AUXILIARY 156 MR UT 157 93 OVERVIEW citet nd B ode Dabei opua a eee eL a aie aed 157 B2 DUTEDITOR E a ae a a i fa eed DE
205. PC2 Driver Control 4114 Cancel Figure 119 Default Hardware Configuration Electrical Tab Table 53 Default Hardware Configuration Electrical Tab Fields OUTPUT SET TYPE OUTPUT SET SOURCE CHOICES Voltage The list includes all devices setup with a final output of Voltage Measurement Select the default voltage measurement source device Current mA The list includes all devices with a final output of Current Measurement Select the default current measurement source device Resistance The list includes all devices with final output of Resistance Measurement Select the default resistance measurement source device Frequency The list includes all devices with final output of Frequency Measurement Select the default frequency measurement source device Voltage Supply The list includes all devices with final set of Voltage Supply Select the default voltage controller Current Supply The list includes all devices with a final set of Current Supply Select the default current controller Multiplexer The list includes all devices with a final set of Multiplexer Channel Select the default multiplexer Valve Driver The list includes all devices with a final set of Valve Driver Control Select the default valve driver controller 12 4 AUXILIARY TAB The Auxiliary tab specifies the devices to use for auxiliary measurement An auxiliary output is the output of a devic
206. Page 272 23 6 gt Arial 2 z u 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR FEATURE DESCRIPTION Header and Footer Properties In order to access the header and footer properties of a document the report editor must be in lt Page Layout gt or lt Centered Page Layout gt viewing modes and then select lt Headers and Footers gt from the lt view gt menu Headers and Footer Properties Distance from page border 7 Header 10 zl mm Ero Footer 10 mm First page different Switch Between Header and Footer L3 b Toggles between the header and footer sections of the current page Go to First Page Header or Footer If First page different gt is selected in Header and Footer Properties then selecting this icon move the cursor to the header of the first page Go to Default Header or Footer B If First page different is selected in Header and Footer Properties then selecting this icon move the cursor to the header of the second and subsequent pages FORMAT TOOLBAR The Format Toolbar provides access to standard font and paragraph formatting options The purpose and use of each option on this toolbar are summarized in Table 82 Each selection on the Format Toolbar is used to affect a range of text by highlighting the desired text then making a selection When a text range is not selected any Format Toolbar selection will effect all text entered at the c
207. Piston Gauge All elements whose characteristics have been extracted from COMPASS using the PG7000 Setup Extractor will be in the COMPASS database available for selection Again use the Editor toolbar Save icon to save the PG7000 The setup is complete Page 177 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 178 12 SETUP DEFAULT HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 12 SETUP DEFAULT HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 121 OVERMEW The Default Hardware Configuration is accessed using Setup Default Hardware Configuration The choices made on this form specify the default data acquisition and control hardware that COMPASS uses to accomplish specific data acquisition and control tasks Task are organized by measurement and set functions that correspond to device final outputs and final sets The actual measurement and control devices to use can be modified during Test Initialization if desired The actual test measurement and control devices are specified in the Test Initialization Choices made on Default Hardware Configuration form can reduce the number of device selections required to initialize a test This makes it possible to use the Finish initialization option to reduce initialization time see 7 3 Test Initialization The list of choices available as source for each final output or final set in the Default Hardware Configuration includes all the devices that
208. Plot Editor Etror vs Temperature and Pressure Plot Dat Reading Error vs Reference Pressure Span Error vs Reference Pressure DUT Pressure vs Points Error vs Pressures Exit Output vs Points taken Pressure vs Points Extended Test Plot Edit Plot Description Span Error vs Reference Pressure Data File Macro None 3D Plot Include Unit x Axis Data Ref Pressure Max ES Y Axis Data Span Error fest p Y2 Axis Data None vi Figure 152 Custom Plot Editor Page 237 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 66 Custom Plot Editor Fields FEATURES DESCRIPTION Existing Plots list box The list box displays all plots stored in the COMPASS database The plot axis data at the bottom of the display always corresponds to the plot selected in this list Plot Data button Use this button to plot the currently selected data plot Exit button Closes the Custom Plot Editor Edit button Begins the editing the currently selected plot Only when this button is pressed can changes be made to a custom plot Properties button Displays the plot properties dialog to allow non data related plot properties to be edited Plot Description required text entry Displays the text used select plots and to use as the plot title Make sure the text in this field accurately represents the selected plot Data File Macro
209. PresRegulate Text Test pressure regulation state PresSSLimit Text The test pressure stability limit PresSSTime Integer Test pressure ready hold time PresSSTimeout 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Integer Page 246 Test pressure stability timeout 21 DATA DATABASE DATA VIEWER DATABASE FIELD DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION PresUseReady Text Yes when the controllers Ready criterion was used remotely and No otherwise PreTestUnits Text List of units that correspond to leak test values StationID Text Identifies the station location where the test was performed TempDwell Text Test temperature dwell time TempHoldLimit Text The temperature hold limit TempJog Text Temperature jog state Yes No TempRegulate Text Temperature regulation state TempSSLimit Text The temperature stability criterion TempSSTime Integer The temperature ready hold time TempSSTimeout Integer The temperature stability timeout TempUseReady Text Yes when the temperature controller s Ready criterion was used remotely and No otherwise TestDate Date Time Date when the test was started TestKey Long Integer Primary key identifying individual tests TestLabel Text Test Definition Record Label Time Date Time Time when the test was started UserlD Text Individual technician performing the test 21 5 2
210. Pressure DUT Pressure Vacuum Pressure General Pressure Humidity is an output type Humidity can only be Humidity Final Set Set equivalent of Final Output FS Full Scale The full scale value is the maximum value or the span of a measurement range Limits and specifications are often expressed as FS 9 gl Acceleration due to gravity g Acceleration due to gravity at location of use gl Gauge As in gauge pressure Pressure expressed relative to atmospheric pressure Global Variable Variable declared before the first function in any Global Macro All functions within any macro type can use this variable Acronym for Highway Addressable Remote Transducer This is a popular communications and hardware protocol developed by Rosemount in 1986 This command protocol modulates a frequency signal on top of a 4 20mA current output A series of standard command are defined for all devices that support this protocol Many of these commands can be used by COMPASS Visit www Hartcomm org for details on this protocol Hardware Component Or Device Device or Support Device Head Fluid head correction to the pressure defined by a reference to predict the pressure at the level of the DUT which may be different from the pressure reference As in high line differential pressure measurement mode Pressure expressed relative to a line pressure greater than atmospheric pressure Defined by using two p
211. R PRESSURE BASIC COMPASS FOR PPC RPM Network Support Multiple COMPASS users can simultaneously share the COMPASS configuration database Tests and Device Definitions created on one PC can be accessed on all other PCs User Rights Management Rights can be assigned to different users in COMPASS to prevent access to portions of the program This allows a user with administrator rights to setup the metrological aspects of COMPASS and restrict access to these setups For example an administrator can change the effective area of a piston cylinder after recalibration All COMPASS users can use the changed piston cylinder setup but not be able to change the setup themselves Calibration Tracking Calibration date information is available in reports for all devices setup in COMPASS Options in COMPASS prevent devices that are out of calibration from being used in tests Automated Support of non DHI Devices References Any pressure controlling or measuring device with a remote interface supported by COMPASS can be used to automate the testing process This includes non DHI pressure references Advanced DUT Support DUTs that support outputs other than DUT pressure can be setup and used to supply other outputs and control in different parts of COMPASS This is useful for DUTs that output temperature or can control pressure Advanced DUTs can also be configured to provide reference pressure Consequently a DUT can be setu
212. R PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Press Finish to complete the initialization process and begin polling the PG7000 Use the features on the toolbar to display the PG7000 Run Screen see sections 5 4 2 Run Display Tools and 5 5 6 1 PG7000 Run screen View and change the PG pressure by accessing the tools on the run screen see Figure 64 e PG7601 SN 512 Pressure Figure 64 Example PG7000 Run Screen 6 3 6 EXAMPLE 5 PG7000 GENERIC PISTON GAUGE How do I setup my PG7000 provide sensory output information but use COMPASS to calculate the reference pressure This setup is useful when there are several piston gauge platforms or piston cylinders available at any given time Allowing COMPASS to perform the calculations prevents the need to setup each PG7000 terminal with the proper information each time an element is re calibrated Only the COMPASS setup requires and update The Test Initialization time is also reduced since the elements do not have to be re loaded from the PG70000 base prior to running each test To begin create a PG7000 as described in 6 3 5 Example 4 All outputs provided by the PG7000 can be used individually by COMPASS Use the PG7000 setup extractor to update the COMPASS database with all piston cylinders mass sets and mass bells currently defined in the PG7000 see 17 Use the Piston Gauge Platform Editor to create a new device Do not check the lt Autodetect Setup gt option Enter calibratio
213. RIABLE DESCRIPTION T DUTspan DUTFS tolerance value defined in the DUT definition Oourspan DUT span as determined by the difference between the maximum and minimum final output values in the DUT Definition T DUTspan Maximum allowable DUT reference deviation based on a DUTFS tolerance Qu Current reference final output fimm Reading tolerance value defined in the DUT definition 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Maximum allowable DUT reference deviation based on a Reading tolerance Page 352 29 CALCULATIONS 29 3 BESTFIT All best fit values in COMPASS are determined using the least squares method This defines a selectable order polynomial equation that defines a line or curve that minimizes the sum of the squares of the distances from the calculated line or curve to the actual line or curve A set of general equations is described below Based on the order of the polynomial fit a system of equations is described Solving these equations for each of the polynomial coefficients determines the resultant polynomial equation bush shi m he X j l jel b XX b os bbs po ex 1 j l j l jel b ne b 2a ap Y xta E horas j j l j Number of X and Y points taken The order of the polynomial to fit First order m 1 second order m 2 and so on Polynomial fit coefficients X axis data This may be either the DUT or r
214. RS232 Settings Only 1 HART device is supported for each converter The hardware should be connected as described by Figure 201 unless otherwise specified by the converter documentation Current Sense Power Suppl Resistor HART Device Figure 201 HART DUT to PC Connection 25 5 1 HART OUTPUT REQUIREMENTS Creating a device that uses the HART via RS232 interface option is no different than creating any other device in COMPASS However COMPASS makes a few assumptions based on the raw output type of the device All relationship selections between the raw output and final output still follow the relationship rules of COMPASS see 4 3 6 2 Output Relationship Editor It is up to the user to provide the proper settings for the device just like any other remote device used by COMPASS When the raw output type is current or voltage and the output source is HART via RS232 COMPASS uses Universal HART command 2 to obtain the device output Reading the loop current is required when calibrating the loop current of the HART device or when the process monitored by the HART device uses the loop current as the reference Most transmitters use a 4 20mA raw output that is linearly proportional to the final output pressure range The range entered should correspond to the range of the device The loop current to range configuration of the device must be set to the configuration used by COMPASS prior to starting at test Page 299 2002
215. RT commands and a second for non COMPASS supported HART commands COMPASS supports the following Universal and Common Practice HART commands 0 1 2 3 8 14 15 40 45 and 46 The format for any of these commands is colon delimited as follows HART cmd Parameter1 Parameter2 For example read the loop current by sending Universal Command 2 HART 2 0 0 The return value is the formatted HART response comma delimited 16 234 mA 76 23495 Non COMPASS supported HART commands must specify not only the command but also the command bytes to send and the discrete decimal value of each of the data bytes to pass to the remote device COMPASS formats this information along with the command preamble delimiter unique address and check sum to create the final HART command These commands are formatted as follows HART BYTES cmd BYTES BYTE1 BYTE2 BYTE3 BYTE4 ect A discrete colon delimited byte value is required for the number of bytes specified by the BYTES field For example to set the primary variable unit of measure to kPa HART unit code 12 use command 44 HART BYTES 44 1 12 The return value is not formatted as in the case for supported HART commands A comma delimited string containing all data bytes in the response following the HART command number is returned The data bytes are in decimal format Use the VB Script functions split or the Global Macro function qextract to remove the individual decimal values from t
216. Remarks bNoResponse Use TRUE to prevent COMPASS from reading a response and FALSE to allow COMPASS to read the response iSendTo Optional integer indicating which Range Class to use to send the command o 0 RangeMain o 1 RangeRawi o 2 RangeRaw2 o S RangeRaw3 o 4 RangeRaw4 o 5 RangeRaw5 Return String value representing the return value of the command An empty string is Value automatically returned when bNoResponse is TRUE Remarks Use this method only when a DH Instruments interface is used to communicate with the device RS232 HART via RS232 IEEE 488 and TCP IP This function is simply calls the ioSendComand of the appropriate Range Class 28 7 2 Remote commands can be sent to an instrument for any reason desired Data can be read from the instrument and stored in the class For example calibration information of a device can be read by using this method The data retuned can then be set to the Device Class Callnfo properties If the macro is called using a Pre Test Macro selected in the Test Definition the data will be stored in the data file and available in reports as well as other macros Special functionality is provided for devices that use a HART interface see 25 5 HART via RS232 A thorough understanding of the HART command structure is required to use this functionality HART commands can be used by formatting the sCmd parameter in a specific way There are 2 methods 1 for COMPASS supported HA
217. SS automatically converts from the device s Final Output Unit to the selected display unit of measure There is no need to configure a device to use a specific Final Output Unit gt Error DUTFS DUT percent of full scale error Difference between the DUT and the reference output in FS of the DUT Error Rdg DUT percent of reading error Difference between the DUT and the reference in of reading of the reference Tol The DUT Tolerance in the selected display DUT lt Output gt unit 5 5 3 TEST CONDITIONS RUN SCREEN The Conditions Run Screen combines all active reference controller and ambient conditions into a single display This is a convenient means of checking the state of several devices without having to view multiple run screens Change the unit of measure and resolution of an output by clicking the output and selecting the desired function Click any output and select Strip Chart to create a strip chart using the selected output Right click target fields that have a white background to enter a new target Always enter the target in the target output unit of measure COMPASS automatically sets the entered target with the test controller Use this feature when running Manual Tests Run Manual Test mode to control the state of the test devices see 7 5 Run Run Manual Test When running a Test Definition Test mode this feature can be disabled to prevent usere from alteri
218. Segments Segment Tolerance 7 Span Reading n 500 Tolerance Segment Definition AI Final Outputs Cancel Figure 28 Output Relationship Editor Tolerance Tab TOLERANCE TYPE Reading Table 17 Tolerance Type Choices DESCRIPTION The tolerance is calculated as the current reading of the output times the tolerance value This tolerance is not defined at zero Never use a Reading tolerance when the output will reach 0 In this case use a compound tolerance such as Span Reading Figure 29 Reading Tolerance The tolerance is a constant value calculated as the final output span times the tolerance value Figure 30 Span Tolerance The tolerance is a constant value calculated as the lt gt final output times the tolerance value This tolerance is graphically equivalent to Span Const in Final Unit The tolerance is a constant value entered in terms of the final output unit of measure This tolerance is graphically equivalent to Span Const in Raw Unit The tolerance is a constant value entered in terms of the raw output unit of measure This tolerance is graphically equivalent to Span Page 57 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL TOLERANCE TYPE Span or Reading greater of DESCRIPTION The tolerance is calculated at each point as both Span and Reading The tolerance used is the gr
219. Select the devices handshaking protocol to use with the interface Handshaking refers to the internal communications protocol by which data is transferred from the hardware port to the receive buffer The default selection is lt None gt This selection is valid for the majority of remote devices None RTS CTS XON XOFF RTSXON XOFF RTS ON OFF There is no RS232 handshaking required Request to Send Clear To Send handshaking XON XOFF Handshaking Both Request to Send Clear To Send and XON XOFF Handshaking The PC RTS output is set to HIGH while sending data and set to low when the data transmission is complete This handshaking option is required by some RS232 to HART converters Page 41 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION RS232 Port button Option The RS232 port that the PC will use to communicate with the remote device Change the Selection by pressing the Ports button Do not confuse this port selection with the ports available on a remote device For example a PPC3 has and a COM port This port selection does not refer to either of these ports It refers only to the port on the HOST PC that will be used to communicate with the PPC3 This option is available only when the Data Acquisition Type is RS232 or HART RS232 The RS232 Settings button Option The RS232 settings of the remote device The value is listed as Baud Rate Parity Data Bits and
220. Setup Extractor This avoids having to manually enter existing Piston Cylinder information A Piston Cylinder setup in COMPASS is not necessary when direct remote pressure access of DHI PG7000 is used with the Autodetect Setup option see 4 5 5 Header Tab The remote pressure output of the PG is fully compensated for all conditions and is not modified by COMPASS Features are provided during test initialization to pick the current Piston Cylinder setup inside the PG7000 A Piston Cylinders setup is required by a Piston Gauge Platform to be used in COMPASS There are two types of Piston Cylinders lt Piston Gauge gt and lt Deadweight Tester gt The difference is that lt Piston Gauge gt Piston Cylinders require the entry of fundamental effective area information on the piston cylinder to solve the pressure equation lt Deadweight Tester gt Piston Cylinders simply require the entry of their corresponding pressure Select the lt Piston Gauge Type gt using the Header tab of the Piston Cylinder Editor 4 3 3 Header Tab There are two types of piston cylinders Piston Gauge Type and Deadweight Tester Type The selection is made on the Header tab of the Piston Cylinder Editor Piston Gauge Type Piston Cylinders are used with Piston Gauge Type Platforms and output pressure is defined by solving the pressure equation using the effective area of the piston cylinder and the force applied by the mass load Deadweight Tester Type Piston
221. TEST when a manual test was executed to generate the data file DatabaseKey Long The database key of the test definition used CompleteTestCycles Integer The number of complete test cycles specified in the Test Definition PresDwell String The test pressure dwell time The value is either Manual or the numeric dwell time value PresHoldLimit String The test pressure hold limit and unit PresSSLimit String The test pressure stability limit and unit PresSSTime Integer The test pressure ready hold time PressSSTimeout Integer The pressure ready time out PresUseReady String Yes or No depending on the test pressure controller Use Ready Test Definition selection NumPresPnts Integer The number of test pressure points defined in the Test Definition NumPresCycles Integer The number of test pressure cycles defined in the Test Definition PresAvgTime Integer Test pressure averaging time PresJog String Yes when the test pressure jog function was enabled and No otherwise PresRegulate String The time in seconds between test pressure regulation updates or No PresCtrlMode String Pressure control mode used for DH Instruments pressure controllers Static or Dynamic PresMeasMode String Test pressure measurement mode LocalGravity Double The configured local gravity value in Tools Options Piston Gauge see 14 6 Piston Tab LinePres
222. Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Piston Name optional numeric entry The name to associate with the Piston Cylinder The name displays next to the corresponding Piston Cylinder pressure in the Mass List of the Piston Gauge Calculator Corresponding Pressure required numeric entry The pressure at which the piston floats in the unit of measure specified in the Pressure Unit field The value is added to the total pressure defined by the masses loaded Note that COMPASS assumes the piston mass is adjusted to float the specified pressure when at the same local gravity that is specified in the mass set being used with the Deadweight tester Pressure Unit required drop down list The pressure unit of measure in which the value in the Corresponding Pressure field is expressed Use the Unit of Measure Converter to convert pressure units if needed Pressure Resolution required drop down list selection The resolution to use for the Corresponding Pressure entry 114 MASS SET The Mass Set Editor provides features to create edit and remove Mass Sets that are used with Piston Gauge Platforms by COMPASS Use the Main Toolbar shortcut or Setup Piston Gauge Mass Set to access the Mass Set Editor Page 169 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Information metrological elemente piston cylindere and masses entered in DHI 7 pis
223. Test Define the test points dwell averaging time and any other test specific settings Select the PG7000 as the reference The controller will display as Manual Control This is the default selection for a piston gauge and the selection used even when automatic pressure generation is active On the Set child tab check all of the generation options and enter a generation deadband suitable for the test see Figure 71 A deadband of 1 5mm is the default value and suitable for most applications When all entries are complete save the Test Definition Page 113 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Test Editor Test Record Label 700K 100 psi RPT Characteization 30 121 Test Definition Type Simple Test xl Editing Record Pre Test Pressure Data Auxiliary Comment Test Pressure Points ZDUTS est Pressure Points pan Esai Se MIN Pressure Control Use Ready Criterion V Auto Rotate Mass 4 Auto Generate Pressure Generation Dead Band mm 1 Ready Hold Time s Control Timeout s Insert Auto Fill Close Figure 71 PG7000 AMH Test Definition Set Requirements e Run the Test Definition by using the Run Run Test menu choice Complete the Test Initialization process by selecting DUTs and the Test Definition when prompted On the Test Hardware Verification step the selected pressure reference should be
224. Test Hardware Initialization step Run Manual Test Setup Configure DUT 1 of 1 Raw Paros RPT Manufacturer Instruments Customer ID Model Read Interface 1 2400 7 1 Serial Number 2112 Parameter ID Identification DUT Pressure Output Label BGRPT DUT Temperature Measurement Min psi 2 2 Mex psi 22 Measurement Mode i Output Source 1 HP53132A Period Chnl Use Multiplexer r Output Source 2 HP53132A Period Chn Channel Output Source 3 Line Pressure Cancel Back Next Finish Figure 84 Configure DUT Step Mulitiple Raw Output DUT 7 3 3 2 CONFIGURE DEVICE When a DH Instruments product that is setup with the Auto Detect Settings option is configured a Load Settings button is included at the top of the dialog see Figure 85 Press this button to load the range information of the product When the settings are successfully loaded the display changes to allow selection of the range to use for the test Select the measurement mode range and Auto Zero state when applicable In all products except the PPC3 the Min and Max final outputs are used for full scale and span based calculations only The test range of the controller is always specified by the range selected from the list of ranges When a or is configured and Auto Range is selected the Min and Max entries are also used to
225. URE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Log 1 point at Logs an instantaneous data point at fixed time intervals When the icon is fixed intervals pressed an input box displays to allow entry of the time interval COMPASS will automatically log a data point when the option is pressed and repeatedly 3 log data points at the specified time interval until the Abort Data QJ Acquisition button is pressed or the test is aborted Taking data in this manner can be convenient when trying to monitor slowly evolving processes e g the effect of temperature on a DUT The output of all manual entry devices must be entered for every data point logged This minimizes the automation provided by this function Taking data at short time intervals can quickly result in a very large Data File Average and log Averages all device outputs and logs the results at fixed time intervals When points at fixed the icon is pressed the Average Setup window displays to allow entry of intervals the averaging time and the interval between averages After the entry COMPASS automatically begins averaging data When the average is 7 complete the results are logged and the countdown to the next average begins When the time specified as the lt Timed Point Interval s gt has been reached another averaging cycle begins This process is repeated until the Abort Data Acquisition button is pressed or the run mode is closed Taking data in this way can b
226. UT Definitions and test procedures are set up in Test Definitions Test Definitions can be associated with DUTs so that when the DUT is selected the test procedure that goes with it is automatically identified Tests are executed using the pressure measurement control and data acquisition devices specified in the Test Definition and or in the Default Hardware Configuration Tests execute with the level of automation supported by the available hardware Test data is acquired and stored in a delimited Data File and may be added directly to a database Within COMPASS Data Files may be viewed used to generate plots and used to generate reports that can be customized with user editable templates see Many operational aspects of COMPASS are configurable with user options The use of these configurable preferences results in a customized test environment to meet a very wide variety of testing requirements User access to various parts of COMPASS can be restricted to prevent confusion or corruption of existing setups see 24 3 Database Users An administrator can create and maintain device definitions that cannot be modified by other users All device definitions are tagged with the last edit date and the user that saved the edit This helps to maintain the metrological integrity of COMPASS Running a test sequence requires e A DUT Definition to define the device s to be tested e Support Device Definitions for all hardware to be used refere
227. UT Pressure Final Output Using from Voltage Measurement From the DMM DUT Raw Output 1 Output Source Manipulator Final Output 1 Voltage Output Voltage Linearly Transducer Type Voltage Measurement Proportional DUT Pressure Note This is Final Output 1 of DMM Figure 1 Device Setup Raw Output and Final Output Examples Page 11 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Devices are set up in Devices Definitions Devices Definitions are divided into three different types three types of device definition are DUT Definition Defines devices that will be tested Must provide a DUT Pressure final output Advanced DUT Definitions can provide multiple DUT outputs as well as other non DUT outputs Support Device Defines devices used for reference pressure measurement Definition control and other support devices such data acquisition devices and temperature controllers and data acquisition devices Support devices are not normally DUTs though they can be made to act as DUTs by selecting lt This device can be used as a DUT gt in the Support Device Editor Piston Gauge Defines piston gauges and deadweight testers Does not require Platform Definition a final output By default a Piston Gauge provides a reference pressure final output All situations that require a reference pressure device include all available Piston Gauge Definitions To use the Piston Gauge as a DUT use the This devi
228. Viewer Toolbar Use this tool to scroll through available data records Simply click on the arrow for the direction to advance and scroll through the list of records one at a time The display updates based on the information in the database corresponding to the selected record To quickly move to the beginning or end of the record set press the corresponding arrow and slash button The records available are only those selected by the current query To view all records use the All toolbar function Searches return only records that fit the search criteria and may be zero in size if no matching records are identified Data values of 9999 represent data that was not logged in the Data File when imported into the database Ignore these fields Page 241 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL COMPASS Data Viewer Plot Import Export Delete Dg Test 1 of 3 nu Test Record Information Test Label Date of Test Data Filename User Identification Station Identification BG Standad Cal 2002 12 31 sample dat Admin Device Information DeviceType Label Manufacturer Model SerialNumber LastCalDate DH Instruments PPC3 2002 12 14 DH Instruments FPG8601 1980 01 0 DH Instruments PPC3 15 0001 15 00002 7 50011 7 50003 0 07512 0 07498 7 50022 7 49998 15 00017 1499999 7 50005 7 49995 0 07495 0 07498 7 50019 7 50002 15 00004 15 00003
229. a a CREER a a A a Pa raa Aaaa AERA KAUAA 244 21 5 DATABASE TABLES AND FIELDS nnne nnn nnns nana 245 21 5 1 TEST TABLE 2 2 22 21 5 2 DEVICES TABLE Vend Ve eed 21 5 3 DATA naar nnn nean ran nno rn He cR Or c e n o a rn D D ect van EXPORTING COMPASS 22 4 COVER VIEW 22 2 EXPORT TO EXCELO Nakden 22 3 EXPORT TO MET CAL a a ae 22 3 1 CREATING THE CALIBRATION RECORD 22 3 2 CREATING A MET CAL SOURCE FILE 22 3 3 IMPORTING COMPLETE TEST RECORD six xiva dues 22 3 4 IMPORTING SPECIFIC DATA INTO RESULTS TABLE eene nennen nnne nnnnmnn nana nane nasa nana nnn 259 DATA REPORT EDITOR eene 263 ARMOIRE ROPEREE 263 23 2 REPORT PRINCIPLES 2 2 naa aape ceu kx pra cur RR dite 263 23 3 MAIN DISPLAY aaa cn a e Ce Cn euo aa 265 23 4 MAIN MENU BAR 2 2 inae FE ka uu cuiu nn a n ku uia iu B cu Rx uuu nu Ro aikani Adaiwa Na a m NK Ru 265 2394 FILE mile LA metet ied boe 23 4 2 EDIT PE 23 4 3 VIEW 23 44 INSERT eee E NORD 23 4 5
230. a drop down list of devices per final output Which way of selecting devices is used depends on the current COMPASS context The Setup Selector provides multiple fields of information on each device This makes it easy to discriminate between different devices providing the same final output The drop down list of devices displays a more limited set of information identifying the device Use the Options Initialize Test tab to customize the information displayed in the list see 14 3 Initialize Test Tab Device selection can be made e Automatically by specifying the device in a Test Definition The Test Definition selection takes precedence over the Default Hardware Configuration e Automatically during Test Initialization by specifying the device in the Default Hardware Configuration e Manually during Test Initialization by making an alternate selection 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 12 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES s Devices that have more than one defined final output of a given type are listed more than once when selection of that final output type ie being made For example a reference pressure controller may have multiple reference pressure final outputs corresponding to multiple ranges In this case the pressure controller should be set up with multiple final outpute that should be distinguished one from the other using the final output label The same controller will appear several times when making a selection of a sou
231. a profile DUT that ie identified during the test initialization process Profile DUTs allow one DUT Definition to represent any number of like Model devices from the Manufacturer Select the Manufacturer and Model on the Header tab If the desired selections in the drop down list press the Find Previous Setup button to search for previous setups or examples of the DUT If the Manufacturer and Models are not in the list enter them 9 Enter relevant information on the Calibration tab Select the appropriate Data Acquisition Type and corresponding settings using the Communications tab f applicable select the Output tab Simple DUTs allow direct entry of all relevant final output information To create a final output for advanced DUTs press the Add button and edit the information on the Output Relationship Editor see 4 3 6 2 Output Relationship Editor If the final output requires remote commands to read the Raw Output gt press the Edit Commands button to launch the Remote Command Editor see 4 4 Remote Command Editor Simple DUT remote commands are accessed on the Communications tab Specify the commands required to interface with the device Press the Add button to add as many final outputs as are supported by the DUT Advanced DUTs can be used as controllers If this is the case select the Set tab To create a final output for advanced DUTs press the Add bu
232. ab is Deadweight Tester there is no tolerance information for the piston cylinder The tolerance in pressure is giving in the deadweight tester mass set 1L3 4 CHARACTERISTICS TAB Refer to section 29 8 Piston Gauge Pressure Calculations for details on how the fields on the Characteristics tab are used to solve the pressure equation 11 3 4 1 PISTON GAUGE TYPE PISTON CYLINDER When the Piston Cylinder Type specified on the Piston Cylinder Editor Header tab is Piston Gauge the Piston Cylinder Editor Characteristics tab displays the fields listed below The Piston Cylinders Characteristics tab provides the piston cylinder specific variables necessary to solve the pressure equation when the Piston Cylinder is used with a Piston Gauge Platform Entries that have an asterisk next to them are required Generally the necessary values are listed in the Piston Cylinder s calibration report and or the Piston Gauge or Deadweight Tester s Operation and Maintenance Manual Errore in values entered into the Piston Cylinder Characteristics tab directly impact the calculation of Piston Gauge pressure when the Piston Cylinder is used Typically a pressure span error results Make sure that all values are entered in the proper unit of measure Header Calibration Tolerance Effective Area mmf 4 902397 Piston Thermal Expansion 4 5 E 6 Mass ka 0 200007 Cylinder Thermal Expansion C 4 5 E 6 Mass
233. abase of device setups for COMPASS are maintained by DHI Periodic updates of this database are available for download As a result adding a new device does not always require setting up remote commands to allow complete automation of the device In many cases only the device s unique identifying information serial number and interface settings IEEE 488 address are required to setup the device Device Macro Access Macros can be used to manipulate the fundamental output of devices as needed to achieve the desired final output This feature is provided to manipulate outputs that do not conform to one of COMPASS s built in raw output to final output conversions Macros can also be used to create and manipulate remote commands for devices Not all devices use simple ASCII commands Some devices require special formatting with non printable characters This type of device would require a macro Enhanced Remote Interface Support Interfaces other than RS232 and IEEE 488 are available to increase the support of automated control and measurement equipment Multiple commands are available to separately initialize read and control a device 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 2 FEATURE DESCRIPTION Tracking of Setup Changes All device and metrological element setups are tagged with the date of the last edit and the user logged in at the time of the edit COMPASS FOR PRESSURE ENHANCED 1 INTRODUCTION COMPASS FO
234. able 7 Editor Toolbar Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Record label This field identifies a unique setup It is analogous to a file name The text entered should make the ied setup easily distinguishable from other setups of the same type Up to 40 characters can be entered Viera During Test Initialization devices are selected and displayed using their lt Record Label gt Use a field Tools Options Initialize Test preference to list devices by the lt Record Label gt see 14 3 ield initialize Test Tab A Do not use the following characters in this field V lt gt a comma or tab character These characters will cause problems when importing the Data File or creating the Data File directory based on the data directory naming convention selected using the Tools Options Data File tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 30 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES FEATURE DESCRIPTION Test Definition Type required drop down list selection for Test Definitions only Defines the type of Test Definition Basic test that defines a list of pressure points only No macros or reference changes are permitted Simple Test Pressure and Temperature points can be defined macros or reference changes are permitted Simple Test w Temperature Simple Test w Temperature and Line Pressure Pressure Temperature and Line Pressure points are definable No macro or reference changes are permitted
235. ace Page 295 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL It ie critical to check the No Response option for commands that do not respond This will prevent COMPASS from timing out while waiting for a response 25 2 RS232INTERFACE RS232 is one of the most widely used interface standards Until the recent proliferation of USB at least one RS232 port was built into every IBM compatible computer The interface connects two devices in a full duplex fashion so that both devices can talk simultaneously The connection requires that the RS232 receive line of one device is connected to the transmit line of the second device and visa versa In addition to this connection some devices require the connection of handshaking lines to signal the beginning and the interface conversation To set up an RS232 device an RS232 cable must be connected between the device and the computer The port on the computer must be specified along with the settings of the remote device The computer s RS232 port must be specified and the settings of the port must be adjusted to the settings of the remote device COMPASS provides setup features to facilitate this step Refer to the device s manual to determine how to retrieve the RS232 settings 25 2 1 RS232 SETUP If the remote interface selection is RS232 the RS232 Settings screen must be used to specify the specific RS232 setting information Refer to section 4 3 5 for inform
236. al Number b12 Parameter ID Identification Sample Load Settings Output 1 of 7 Ambient Pressure Output Label Amb Pressure Change Display Min kPa 70 Max kPa 110 Measurement Mode Raw Output Type Pressure Output Source R5232 Cancel Back Next Einish Figure 68 PG7000 Base used for sensory output Press Finish to complete the initialization process and begin polling the PG7000 outputs The PG7000 Run Screen should not be used as the main interface The pressure on this form and on the PG7000 terminal is not valid This setup uses the PG7000 for sensory output only Instead the Piston Gauge Device Output Run Screen should be used to view and change the current pressure see 5 5 5 Notice that outputs that are read remotely by the PG7000 are displayed in black and updated automatically see e Figure 69 Use the features on the toolbar to display the various output screens when they are not visible see sections 5 4 2 Run Display Tools Page 111 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL COMPASS for Pressure Enhanced DEBUG DBK Tools Data Window Help em f gt Non Auto Piston Gauge RE s PGZ601 SN 635 Piston Gauge Platform Non Auto Piston Gauge 4d Piston Cylinder Exmple Piston Cylinder Mass Set DHI MassSet 2012 Trim Mass Set Mass Bell Example Mass Bell Medium Measurement Mode Ambient Temperature C M
237. amed and stored automatically The default directory for COMPASS Data Files is data DUTIDinfoV dat The DUTIDinfo sub directory is created automatically by COMPASS using the DUT information selected on the Tools Options Data File tab see 14 8 Data File Tab By default the DUT serial number is used specified in the DUT Definition The DUT based sub directories are automatically created by COMPASS at the designated location The automated Data File name follows one of two formats determined by the Tools Options Data File tab preference Realize that this is a default file name and that all complete Data Files can be renamed using the Re Name option on the Test Complete dialog at the end of a test Long Data File naming is used by default This name is formatted as YYYY ddd rrr where YYYY Is the four digit year ddd Is the three digit day of the year Julian date e g 001 for January 1 and 365 for December 31 rrr Represents the test run number on the DUT being tested for the current day This indicator increments from 000 to 999 Short Data File naming displays as YYdddrrr where YY Is the two digit year ddd Is the three digit day of the year Julian date e g 001 for January 1 and 365 for December 31 rrr Represents the test run number on the DUT being tested for the current day This indicator increments from 000 to 999 Page 305 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL E
238. ample DMM Output Tab There are no required selections on the Set or Comment tabs for this device Press the Save toolbar option to store the settings in the database The DMM is completely setup During Test Initialization a DMM output will be available for use with any device that has a raw output source that corresponds to any final output of the DMM For example a voltage output pressure transducer could select this DMM as the actual voltage source device during test initialization 6 3 3 EXAMPLE 2 DMM VOLTAGE OUTPUT DUT How do use my HP34401A DMM setup in example 1 to measure the output of my DUT The DUT outputs 0 to 5 V corresponding to 0 to 100 psi Assume the DMM setup in Example 1 is complete The task is to setup a DUT with the appropriate output source so that the DMM can be used with the DUT Open the DUT Editor and press the New toolbar option to create a new DUT Enter information on the Header tab appropriate for the DUT see 4 3 3 Header Tab Select lt Simple DUT gt as the DUT Type Enter information on the Calibration tab to track the calibration history of the DUT see 4 3 4 Calibration Tab Select the remote interface that COMPASS will use to communicate with the DUT on the Communications tab see 4 3 5 Communications Tab In this case the DUT outputs a voltage that is read by another instrument Select lt Support Device gt as the lt Data Acquisition Type gt type There are no oth
239. and Model on the Header tab If the desired selections are in the list press the Find Previous Setup button to search for previous setups or examples of the Support Device Definition If the lt Manufacturer gt and Model not in the list enter them Enter relevant information on the Calibration tab Select the appropriate Data Acquisition Type and corresponding settings using the Communications tab If applicable select the Output tab Press the Add button to create a final output and edit the information on the Output Relationship Editor If the final output requires remote commands to read the raw output press the Edit Commands button to launch the Remote Command Editor Specify the commands required to interface with the device Press the Add button to add as many final outputs as are supported by the device If applicable select the Set tab to define controllable outputs Press the Add button and edit the information on the Set Relationship Editor If the final set requires remote commands to control the device press the Edit Commands button to launch the Remote Command Editor Pressure and temperature controlling sets can optionally use remote Heady Not Heady indication Control Abort and Vent commands Press the Add button to add as many final sets as are supported by the device Press the Editor Toolbar Save option to save all changes Any errors in the setup must be remedied before the Supp
240. and Cons of Multiplexer Setups with Internal DMMSs seen 21 Common Multiplexer Channel and Measurement 23 Multiplexer Scanned Output Macros iii 25 Editor Toolbar Features toii et dtt ae hel ieee de odo de ides 30 Device Editor Header Tab Fields 34 Device Editor Calibration Tab Fields 38 Device Editor Communications Tab Fields 41 Device Editor Output Tab Fields 44 Output Relationship Editor Raw Output Tab Fields 48 Raw Output Type and Possible Output Sources ss 50 Output Relationship Editor Final Output Tab Fields 53 Final Output Types and Possible Final Outputs ss 54 Output Relationship Editor Tolerance Tab Fields 55 Tolerance Type Cholces ice Tee sicot et eie itt ede ed Eo equ le iL aedes 57 Device Editor Set Tab Fields sus 60 Set Relationship Editor Raw Set Tab Fields 63 Raw Set Type and Possible Set Sources sssssssssssssseeeeeee enne 65 Set Relationship Editor Final Set Tab Fields 67 Set Types and Possible Final Sets ss 67 Remote Command Editor Command Tab Fields 71 Remote Command Editor Global Settings Tab 73 Main Toolbar Rum Test To0ls 2 es entr ee nen e eee ceo Ded eeu 79 Main Toolbar Run Display Tools
241. and the calibration time should correspond to the date and time entered when creating the MetCal Calibration record MetCal uses the calibration date and time along with the DUT Identification to link the results to the calibration record If either of these fails to match or the calibration record has not yet been created this data will not be imported correctly Date of Calibration Time of Calibration 3 3 Export Cancel Figure 163 Export to MET CAL form Page 257 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Press the Export menu option to create the MET CAL Source file By default the file is saved with the same name and location as the original data file with a src file extension This file must be created prior to importing data into the Results table of the MET CAL database Select the newly created file when prompted by the MET CAL Import Tool when importing data see 22 3 4 Importing specific data into Results table 22 3 3 IMPORTING COMPLETE TEST RECORD A copy of the complete COMPASS Test Data File can be saved as an archive in the MET CAL database Data imported with this method will not be available for use in MET CAL reports It is merely an archiving procedure The data can easily be extracted at a later date if desired Follow the steps below to import a complete Data File e Open or edit a Calibration Record by using the Add Calibration Record or Edit
242. are comma tab or semicolon The semicolon delimiter is the default The choice can be useful to assure compatibility when COMPASS Data Files will be exported to another program The COMPASS internal data and report functions automatically detect and handle which delimiter was used in the Data File so the choice can be changed occasionally without affecting COMPASS operation Be sure that the selected delimiter is not used as a character in any entry field or file delimiting will be incorrect Root Data File directory text entry field 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Defines the root directory to use when creating new DUT based sub directories and copying Data Files The selected directory can be on a network or on an internal hard drive Any directory selection can be used provided there is enough room to store test Data Files and that the location is not write protected Use the lt Browse gt button next to the entry field to select a new or existing directory using a directory browsing tool Page 196 14 TOOLS OPTIONS FEATURE DESCRIPTION dropdown selection Major sub COMPASS generates default file names for the Data Files dat it creates when a test is run It directory named also creates and uses default directories for the Data Files based on the DUT on which the test by was run This DUT dependent data directory is created as a subdirectory of the Root Data File directory This feature auto
243. are available during tests Each point taken during a test causes the graph to update with the current test point information If the lt Force grid selection gt option on the Tools Options Grid tab is not selected the current cycle test data is not automatically displayed on the plot unless that cycle is specifically selected for plotting For example if cycle 3 of a 10 cycle test is currently plotted and the test is executing cycle 7 the results of cycle 7 do not appear in the plot unless cycle 7 is selected using the Plot Properties toolbar option EZ COMPASS Plot ele SES pan Ero ve Reerence Presoue Span Error vs Reference Pressure a o c 0 ERED REECE Ue CGE Ee Figure 51 Data Plot Run Screen Page 93 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 94 6 HOW DO I 6 How Dol 6 1 INITIAL SETUP The following steps and sections should be referred to when setting up and running a test for the first time As the user of COMPASS becomes more familiar other customization options should be explored to take advantage of the program s extensive capabilities Several COMPASS examples and frequently asked questions are in the Quick Tips section of this manual These sections are also very useful when learning about COMPASS Follow the steps below to setup and run a test Select Se
244. ass List Ambient Humidity RH Piston 0 199946 kg Ambient Pressure kPa Ium ne g gt g Prs Vacuum Reference Pa ETE 099999 kg E M mes CE Head Height 12 5 10 199999 kg Piston Cylinder Temperature C 000000 2 0 200000 kg 2 Non Auto Piston Gauge SN DER i Piston Position mr i 0 499997 ko 4 1 1 000015 kg Local Gravity m s 1 2 000035 kg Pressure Display Resolution Pressure kPa Figure 69 Manual Piston Gauge with autodetect PG7000 Base 6 3 7 EXAMPLE 6 PG7000 AMH PPC3 How do I setup my PG7000 for automatic pressure control using an AMH and a PPC3 This setup makes it possible to run fully automated tests with a PG7000 The specific controller used is not important from a COMPASS perspective The COMPASS setup is the same whether a PPC2 PPC3 or a PPCH is used to control the pressure It is up to the user to setup the PG7000 AMH and PPC3 as described by the PG7000 operation and maintenance manual The typical RS232 connections are described in Figure 70 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 112 6 HOW DO I Only 1 PC COM required COM2 1 2 9600 7 1 1 9600 7 1 9600 N 8 1 COM3 9600 E 7 1 COM1 COM2 Figure 70 PG7000 AMH PPC RS232 Connections Setup the PG7000 PPC3 and the AMH as described by the PG7000 Operation and maintenance manual Automatic pressure generation should be fully functional from t
245. ass of the instrument requiring manipulation Use the properties of the Calculation Class to access the necessary Range and Device Classes The return value must be the final output of the instrument in the final output unit specified in the Output Relationship Editor 4 3 6 2 Return 9999 to prevent COMPASS from using the response COMPASS will not abort or display an error message The return value is simply ignored Almost any level of mathematical manipulation can be performed on the output s of an instrument Anytime an output is defined with more than 1 raw output a Relationship Macro is required Use this macro in conjunction with the Callnfo properties of the COMPASS Device Class to apply a calibration to an output For example when an adder and multiplier are specified for Callnfoi and Callnfo2 respectively a Relationship Macro can multiply the raw output by the multiplier and add the adder to yield a calibrated final output value The calibration coefficient properties can be entered manually when a device is defined or populated by a macro This macro returns a gauge pressure from an absolute pressure In this example the output was setup such that the first raw output is the RS232 output of an absolute pressure transducer The second raw output is ambient pressure COMPASS passes these values to the macro in arguments Out1 and Out2 respectively HER D ee
246. at include Vent commands are vented at the end of tests sequences only regardless of this choice see 4 4 3 1 Abort Vent Commands 8 6 6 TEST POINTS SEQUENCE READ CHILD TAB The Test Definition Point Sequence Read button tab is used to specify references in multi reference tests Only Advanced Test Definition Type tests support this option The point that the reference change will take place and the macro associated with the reference change are updated on the right side of the tab Use the Add Remove and Edit buttons to change a reference remove a reference or edit the reference settings see Figure 102 General Read Set Test Pressure Reference Direct Remote PG Pressure Change Before Point 1 Mess T Add Remove Edit Figure 102 Test Definition Editor Point Sequence Tab Read Child Tab When the Add or Edit buttons are pressed the Configure Device dialogue displays see Figure 103 Use this form to select a specific reference enter the test point for the reference and select or edit a macro to execute before using the reference Press the Configure Device button to completely configure the reference gt Configure Device Reference Pressure PPC2 D 40050 G0015 Pressure PPC2 Line Pressrue RPT Measurement PPC3 RPT Measurement PPC3 Specific RPT Measurement PPCH RPT Measurement PPCH via PG Abs Pressure Change Before Point Macro None Prompt before changing d
247. at which piston rotation rate is decreasing rpm min Piston The temperature measured by the piston cylinder platinum resistance Temperature thermometer C Page 89 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Pressure The fully compensated PG7000 defined pressure Right click this field to change the pressure unit of measure The unit of measure of the PG Terminal display does not change COMPASS performs the unit conversion and displays the resultant value This value only displays when the PG7000 s Ready criteria are satisfied Target Pressure The nominal pressure the PG7000 is setting Enter a value in this field to set a new pressure target Make sure that the value entered is in the same unit of measure as the pressure display Nominal Mass Load The nominal mass load required to achieve the lt Pressure gt value kg True Mass Load The total true mass loaded to achieve the lt Pressure gt value kg Vacuum Pressure The output of the PG7601 or PG7607 vacuum reference sensor Pa Temperature The ambient temperature measured by the PG7000 C Ambient Pressure The ambient pressure measured by the PG7000 kPa Humidity The relative humidity measured by the PG7000 RH Automatic Pressure Generation Prs Toggles the use of the automatic pressure generation function of the PG7000 when available see t
248. ata File is being viewed from the Test Complete Screen E Print Data File Used to print the Data File that is being viewed using the standard Windows print function and the current default printer Toggle Grid Toggles the display of the Data Grid inside the data viewer If the Data File is incomplete this option is disabled The data in the grid is equivalent to the data that would be displayed in MS ER Excel if the proper Data File delimiter were selected Plot Data Plot the current Data File Refer to section 20 Data Plot Data File for details on how to use the plot tool 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 234 20 DATA PLOT DATA FILE S N m m B P 20 DATA PLOT DATA FILE P d 20 1 OVERVIEW Data Plot Data File is used to generate plots using data stored in Data Files dat Use the COMPASS Data Viewer to plot data stored in the database The plots generated may be viewed and or printed This function is useful to quickly analyze data The plots may also be selected for inclusion in COMPASS reports There are several default plots that are installed with COMPASS However any number of custom plots can be created to analyze any data logged by COMPASS Use the toolbar on the plot form to include a tolerance bar legend or best fit error data When Data Plot Data File is selected a standard Windows file bro
249. ata type Most but not all fields in the Test Data section are dynamic data fields These are fields that have a different value for each point in a test Dynamic data fields should be placed in a table see 23 12 2 Tables When placed in a table and the Individual Point is set to the default value of 0 all points for that particular cycle are inserted into the table beginning at the current cell and continuing down the column Dynamic data fields that are not included in a table report a single value regardless of the number of points taken during a test All plots defined by the COMPASS Plot Tool can be used for reporting see 20 Data Plot Data File When a plot is inserted the plot properties can be altered to include tolerance bars and limits Custom plots can also be edited at this time 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 286 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR DATA FIELD DESCRIPTION TYPE There are two types of macros used in the Report Editor Template and Field Macros Both types of macros are created and maintained with the COMPASS Macro Editor see 18 Tools COMPASS Macro Editor Template Macro All Template macros are executed 1 time when a template is first used to generate a report see 18 5 1 Data File Macros Any return value from these macros is ignored The macros are typically used to update macro and user defined data in the Test Data Class see 28 2 Test Data Class If this is the case make
250. ately Return Boolean value that is TRUE if the test is aborted and FALSE otherwise Value Remarks Always use TRUE for the bSilentAbort parameter if a user will not be present when the macro aborts the program Otherwise COMPASS will hang waiting for a response to the abort test prompt A macro may need to abort the test if there is an error or of the necessary data has already been collected Example None Name CurrentPoint Purpose Read the current test point information when running a test definition Syntax cCOMPASS CurrentPoint iT iL iPC iP Arguments iT The current test temperature point iL The current test line pressure point IPC The current test pressure cycle e iP The current test pressure point Return None Value Remarks This function can be used with a manual test In this case the only value that will change is the iP parameter It will increment for each test point logged All other parameters will return 0 This function cannot be used to set the current test point The only way to navigate between points in a test is to use the StepBack and StepNext methods of the COMPASS object Example None Name OpenNewDataFile Purpose Programmatically press the Open File toolbar button to log data when running a Manual Test see Data Acquisition Tools 5 4 3 Syntax cCOMPASS OpenNewDataFile Arguments None Return None Value Remarks Always use the COMPASS default naming convention to avoid the file
251. ation of reading the final output to the state of a multiplexer The choices are Always During test initialization the device must specify a multiplexer to use and a corresponding multiplexer channel Sometimes An option to use a multiplexer is provided during test initialization The selection is not required Never There is no choice to use a multiplexer during test initialization If a multiplexer is used COMPASS does not attempt to read any of the raw outputs required to obtain the final output of the device until the selected multiplexer channel is activated This feature is commonly used when defining a voltage pressure transducer Page 53 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Table 15 Final Output Types and Possible Final Outputs FINAL OUTPUT TYPE Current Current Measurement The device is used to measure current Amperes FINAL OUTPUT CHOICES Frequency Frequency Measurement The device is used to measure frequency Humidity Ambient Humidity The device is used to measure ambient humidity Period Time Period Time Measurement The device is used to measure period time Position Piston Position The device is used to measure piston position Pressure The device can be used in any of several pressure measuring roles If the device is frequently used for different types of pressure measurement choose lt
252. ation on the RS232 Settings and their meanings The RS232 Settings screen is called in COMPASS by clicking any of the RS232 settings displayed Select the correct settings for the device from the drop down lists and click OK when ready All settings with the exception of the COM are defined by the device that will use the interface Refer to the instruction manual of that device to determine these settings and make any necessary selections for the interface to function RS232 The COM Port selection should represent the physical connection of the device and an RS232 port on the host computer or the currently configured reference device Use the Ref Com2 selection found at the end of the COM Port drop down list to access the currently configured reference COM2 port rather than a standard communications port on the host PC Ref Com2 gt is usually COM2 of a PPC pressure reference or controller If the reference device does not have a valid COM2 port COMPASS will generate an error when trying to access the port No special command setup is required to use the Ref Com2 option Select this option just as any other COM port selection COMPASS will set up the reference device COM2 port and modify the commands as needed to send and receive commands using this interface If the desired communications port is available on the PC but not listed as an available RS232 port use Tools Options Interface to prevent COMPASS
253. auto range the device refer to the PPC3 and RPM4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals for further instructions Page 124 7 RUN MODES Run Manual Test Setup Configure DUT 1 of 1 PPC3 Manufacturer DH Instruments Customer ID Model PPC3 Read Interface COM4 2400 E 7 1 Serial Number 1111 Parameter ID Identification Use the Load Settings Button to load the range information Cancel Ni Einish Run Manual Test Setup Configure DUT 1 of 1 PPC3 Manufacturer DH Instruments Customer ID Model PPC3 Read Interface COM4 2400 E 7 1 Serial Number 1111 Parameter ID Identification Load Settings DUT Pressure Output Label RPT Measurement DUT Temperature Measurement Min kPa 15 000 RENE Max kPa 15 0000 Measurement Mode Gauge A1000 G0050 Auto Range Ranges Enable Auto Zero Cancel Figure 85 Configure DUT Step DHI Device 7 3 3 3 CONFIGURE PISTON GAUGE DEADWEIGHT TESTER To configure a Piston Gauge or Deadweight tester the Piston cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell must be specified to complete the setup The nominal pressure range of the selected metrological elements displays at the bottom of the form When setting up a non DHI Piston Gauge the choices available in the Piston Cylinder Mass Set Mass Bell and Trim Mass Set lists are limited to those defined in the Piston Gauge Platform setup In addition piston sensing ins
254. ays load the masses that are selected in the Mass List or displayed on the Masses to Load panel when prompted Failure to load the correct masses will cause a disagreement between the pressure displayed on the Piston Gauge Calculator and the actual piston gauge pressure Deadweight Tester Piston Gauge Platforms use the same protocol However the calculations are simplified because the mass values are already specified in a pressure unit 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 208 17 TOOLS PG7000 SETUP EXTRACTOR DHI 17 Toots PG7000 SETUP D EXTRACTOR 17 1 OVERVIEW The PG7000 Setup Extractor is used to read Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell setup information from DHI PG7000s and write the results to the COMPASS database The information in the database can also be written to the PG7000 Use this tool to load PG7000 metrological information into the database to allow COMPASS to solve the pressure equation instead of the PG see PG7000 To use this tool the first step is to select the remote interface to use to communicate with the PG7000 Select the lt Interface gt type and enter the corresponding settings Press the Load PG Information button to read all metrological information from the PG Select the lt Element Type gt to update the available Piston Gauge Settings on the left of the form On the right side of the form the corresponding elements in the COMPASS database display To write informat
255. base Settings sn 289 lt COMPASS Us rS silent Men d eai ttu M ee rrt den ete 290 COMPASS Users in Edit Mode 290 lt User Logins M 291 Page XV 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Figure 195 COMPASS Database Maintenance Tool 292 Figure 196 RS232 Settings Panel iii 296 Figure 497 DHIGOM2 POILIS tate si eee ut 297 Figure 198 IEEE 488 Settings iii 298 Figure 199 TCP IP Settings usine 298 Figure 200 Typical HART via RS232 Settings 299 Figure 201 HART DUT to PC Connection 299 Figure 202 HART Relationship settings for current outputs 300 Figure 203 Command Termination and Timeout entente 301 Figure 204 Test Data Class Object Model ir 312 Figure 205 Test Definition Class Object Model ss 320 Figure 206 Device Class Object Model sise 324 Figure 207 Configuration Class Object Model 327 Figure 208 Range Class Object Model sir 329 Figure 209 Calculation Class Object 2 ie 335 Figure 210 COMPASS Class Object iii 342 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page XVI ABOUT THIS MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL Manual Conventions This manual provides the user with the information necessary to set up and run COMPASS for Pressure It also includes a great deal of additional information provided to help you optimize CO
256. be necessary to set pressure faster when a large volume is used in the test system Set Pressure fast to 95 psi b cCalc ioSetOutput 95 1 6 Delay 45 Set 100 psi with using the normal pressure b cCalc ioSetOutput 100 1 0 ManualOutputUpdate Manual set the raw output information for an instrument Sub ManualOutputUpdate dRaw1 dRaw2 dRaw3 dRaw4 e Optional double precision value representing the first raw output of an instrument e dRaw Optional double precision value representing the second raw output of an instrument e dRaw3 Optional double precision value representing the third raw output of an instrument None Page 340 28 COMPASS OBJECTS Remarks This method automatically updates the output information of a measuring device in COMPASS When a required calculation argument is not passed to the method COMPASS will use the most recent data average if available otherwise the last instantaneous output is used This method should be used to automatically update the output of an otherwise manual device All errors and corresponding final output information is updated in the class Example None Name SetOutputRegulation Purpose Enable or disable output regulation in controlling instruments Syntax Sub SetOutputRegulation iMode iTime Arguments e iMode An integer representing the type of output regulation o 0 Disable regulation o 1 Regulate to the reference output
257. ber of the first DUT setup is incremented to create the DUT of the second DUT If the DUT is not a profile or the serial numbers are not sequential do not use this option Skip Auxiliary Device test setup check box Check this option to skip the selection of auxiliary data devices during test initialization If a Test Definition contains auxiliary devices the test initialization step is not skipped Select enter user name check box When checked the user name can be changed during Test Initialization Otherwise the active user login determines the user name for any given test Select support devices by check box Select the device header fields to use to list devices Any two of the following fields can be used in any order Label Manufacturer Model Serial Number Identification Customer ID and Final Output Label Field 1 Field 2 All device lists in the COMPASS will display devices according to the format selected It is best to use unique characteristics of a device to allow easy selection In most cases the Label should be used in the first position Page 187 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 14 4 RUN TEST TAB The Tools Options Run Test tab is used to set user preferences affecting the run test part of test execution Various aspects of run test behavior can be changed using this feature When selections are complete click OK to save change
258. bjects These fields exist when the macro is not being used As a result an OLE object can be created and stored in a COMPASS object and used each time the macro is called This is a logical scenario assuming one instance of the OLE object is required to read one device If one OLE object can read multiple devices store the object in the clsCOMPASS COMPASS defined object When the OLE object is not created by the macro code there is no reason to store the object within a COMPASS object This is assuming that there is not a situation in which the OLE object can be destroyed by an outside program This is typically the case when an existing program will run in parallel with COMPASS COMPASS automatically removes the reference to any objects COMPASS imposes no limit on the parameters or function names for an OLE object used within a macro It is recommended that any required arguments to the OLE object be the output of data members of the cParent Class In particular the ParamID property This method allows a COMPASS user to alter the behavior of the macro by changing a setup value during test initialization This example creates an instance of the clsExample data acquisition object to read the output of a device The object is stored in the Calculation Class to prevent the object from being destroyed when the macro code looses scope A flag is set in the Calculation Class when the clsExample is loaded This allows the macro to create the object one ti
259. bortTest method METHOD DESCRIPTION AbortAutoPointCollection Programmatically press the Abort Autopoint Collection toolbar button see 5 4 3 This stops all active automatic point collection if it is active Use the TakePoints method to enable automatic point collection AbortTest Programmatically press the Abort button on the main toolbar There is an option abort immediately without a prompt CurrentPoint Read the current test point information when running a test definition OpenNewDataFile Programmatically press the Open File toolbar button Use the COMPASS default naming convention to avoid the file name common dialog box from displaying see Data File Tab 14 8 This option can be used with Manual Tests only StatusDisplay Change the text displayed on the COMPASS status bar see 5 3 This is a useful way to debug macros and monitor the progress of a macro during a test StepBack Programmatically press the Step Back button Just like the button on the toolbar this method must be called multiple times to step back through the various steps in test see Run test Tools 5 4 1 StepNext Programmatically press the Step Next button Just like the button on the toolbar this method must be called multiple times to step skip through the various steps in test see Run test Tools 5 4 1 TakePoints Programmatically press one of the Manual Test data acquisition buttons The a
260. box selection Table 22 Set Types and Possible Final Sets OUTPUT TYPE FINAL OUTPUT CHOICES Current Current Supply The device is used to control current Amperes Driver Output Driver Control The device is used to control valve driver channels as defined by a Test Definition Mux Channel Multiplexer Channel The device is used as a multiplexer to change channels for data acquisition purposes The channels are selected during Test Initialization Pressure The device is a pressure controller If the device is frequently used for different types of pressure control choose the General Pressure option Test Pressure Control The device is used to control the test pressure when running tests Line Pressure Control The device is used control line pressure when running tests General Pressure Control The can be used for any type of pressure control required by a test or another device Temperature Test Temperature Control The device is used to control the test temperature Voltage Voltage Supply The device is used to supply voltage to other controlling instruments Page 67 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 4 3 8 COMMENT TAB The Comment tab is common to the all Device Definition and Test Definition editors in COMPASS This includes DUT Support Device Piston Gauge Platform Editors and Test Definitions The only option on this tab is a 255 chara
261. c A list of all support devices appropriate for the selected point sequence and Measurement Mode see 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept Select the item to use as the source of reference values for the given point sequence The different point sequences use support devices that have the Final Output selections described below Test Pressure Lists support devices that have Final Output of Reference Pressure and General Pressure Line Pressure Lists support devices that have Final Output of Line Pressure and General Pressure Temperature Lists support devices that have Final Output of Test Temperature and General Temperature For Advanced Test Definitions the option selected in this field is always assumed to be the first reference if there are multiple references The Output child tab species all references and indicates the order in which they are used Page 148 8 SETUP TEST FEATURE DESCRIPTION Set required list box selection A list of all support devices appropriate to provide control for the selected point sequence and Measurement Mode gt Select the device to use as the controller for the particular point sequence The different point sequences use support devices that have the Final Set selections described below Test Pressure Lists support devices that have Final Set of Test Pressure Control and General Pressure Control Line Pressure Lists support devices that have Final Set of
262. ce In this example assume that the function below is called as part of the relationship macro of a pressure switch type DUT Each new output for the DUT will call this macro code The idea is to log the pressure at which the DUT transitions from open to closed If a manual test is executed a test operator must change the test pressure force data to be logged A AE E AE D ee ee ee Return the pressure as 100 15 or 0 depending out the output value Outil By default this is the raw formatted output of a device In other cases it is final output of a test configured device in the configured output unit Out2 Final output of a test configured device in the x configured output unit Out 3 Final output of a test configured device in the configured output unit ParamID Parameter ID of the device eGale Device Calculation Class that the relation ship applies to The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value For example Relationship51602 1 Outl 5 NH RD ek KK kk ee kk ek ee ee eek Function PressureSwitch Outl Out2 Out3 ParamID cCalc If Outl 4 9 then The switch is Open rtv 100 if cCalc FinalOutput 0 then A transition occurred so log a point Force the proper output first cCalc FinalOutput 100 cCOMPASS TakePoints 0 0 0 end if Else rtv 0 if cCalc FinalOutput 100 then A transition occurred so log a
263. ce can be used as DUT gt on the Piston Gauge Platform Editor Use the lt M amp TE gt choice on the Calibration of the Piston Gauge Platform Editor see 4 3 4 Calibration Tab and an Options Initialize Test choice see 14 3 Initialize Test Tab to segregate reference and DUT piston gauges Device Definitions are created and edited in Device Editors Each Device Definition Type has its own Device Editor DUTs are setup in the DUT Editor Piston Gauges Deadweight Testers are setup in the Piston Gauge Editor all other devices are setup in the Support Device Editor The editors all provide features to view create and remove final outputs and final sets on the editors Output and Set tabs Piston cylinders mass sets and mass bells are setup separately from Piston Gauges and Deadweight testers in the Piston Cylinder Editor Mass Set Editor and Mass Bell Editor respectively The creation of a Test Definition and or the process of Test Initialization require the selection of devices to perform the reference pressure measurement control and other functions that may be needed in the test For selection purposes devices are sorted and offered by the final output s they support For example when testing a DUT whose output is Volts COMPASS uses a device that has been set up with Volts as its final output COMPASS provides two ways to select devices organized by the final output the devices support a the Setup Selector and b
264. ce output e 2 Regulate to the DUT output RegulationTime Integer The time interval in seconds between output regulation updates Double Double Target The last set target output ToleranceValue The tolerance value in the final output unit associated with the current final output value is 9999 when no tolerance is specified 28 8 2 METHODS CalcErrors Trigger an update to the error calculation GetParamData Read one of up to 20 double precision values set by a macro ioSendCommand ioSetOutput Send a command using the device interface Set a net target output in a controlling device ManualOutputUpdate Trigger a new output calculation given all necessary raw output data SetOutputRegulation Change the state of the current output regulation Used for controllers only SetParamData Set one of up to 20 double precision values available for use in macros Name CalcErrors Purpose Force a new error calculation of existing reference and DUT data or reference and DUT data passed as arguments Syntax sub CalcErrors dDUT dReference Arguments e aDUT Optional double precision DUT final output value If a value is not specified the current final output is used This argument does not change the current DUT final output e dReference Optional double precision reference final output value This value must be in the DUTs final output unit This argument does
265. ce tab Output child tab This feature is only available in Advanced Test Definition Type The reference change can use it s own Test Macro The pressure or temperature controller will change at the test point The controller is defined on the point sequence tab Set child This feature is only available in Advanced Test Definitions Type The controller change can use it s own Test Macro A valve driver state will change A system vent will execute Right click the label next to a test point to remove custom point features 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 146 8 SETUP TEST 8 6 4 AUTO FILL Use the Auto Fill button on the Point Sequence tab lt Test Points gt Panel as a shortcut to entering evenly spaced or symmetrical test points When the button is pressed the lt Auto Fill Test Points gt form displays Enter the lt Starting Value gt and lt Ending Value gt along with the appropriate lt Step Value gt and press the Fill Points button to automatically update the test points f To enter a single point repeatedly enter the value in the lt Starting Value gt and lt Ending Value gt then enter the number of times to repeat the point in the lt Step Value gt field Auto Fill Pressure Points Ascending Descending Points Repeat Maximum Point Starting Value Step Value Ending Value 0 20 100 Eill Points Clear Points Cancel Figure 100 Auto Fill Pressure Points Table 3
266. ce that uses the multiplexer Switched Output Supports multiple channels with only 1 output and set definition per electrical output used Easy to setup during a test initialization Each defined output only works with the corresponding multiplexer set Data acquisition degrades when more than 10 channels are used Most difficult setup of the three Remote commands must be created by using COMPASS Macros Scanned Output Fastest data acquisition when many channels are used Only 1 multiplexer Set definition is required for all electrical outputs Easy to setup during a test initialization Although the commands defined in this section are common they are not guaranteed to work for all multiplexers Special commands may be required to put the device in remote mode prior to sending the other commands It is important to refer to the product specific documentation for details on using the remote interface of any remote device used by COMPASS 3 4 2 1 DIRECT OUTPUT The direct output method of reading electrical output values from a multiplexer is very similar to setting up any other DMM The key difference is that each supported output should use a remote command to set a specific channel and return the output value opposed to simply returning the output value This setup does not require the definition of a multiplexer Set since each read output automatically changes multiplexer channels To use a multiplexer w
267. ces and execute a test without a Test Definition This run mode is useful for running devices without following a predefined test sequence Although data acquisition is supported it is not a required part of a manual test During the test initialization process the last Manual Test selections display These selections can be changed if desired There are no requirements to use any specific combination of devices For example a Manual Test can be executed using a temperature controller only Manual Tests should be used for trouble shooting device final output setups and running specialized tests Run a Manual Test to verify that a device is working properly with COMPASS or to log drift data of a device over time To run a Manual Test the Test Initialization is required The only difference between the initialization of a Manual Test and a Test Definition is that there is no Test Definition selection step After initialization all remote devices are automatically polled by COMPASS and output information is displayed on their respective run screens Use the features on the Data Acquisition section of the Main Toolbar to create a Data File and log test points Use features on the Test Conditions Run Screen as well as the individual run screens of the testing devices to change the state of any test controllers Using any of the Control Toolbar automatic data logging options can result in very large Data Files These are files with significantly
268. ch plot and is used to select plots Select the type of plot by changing the state of the lt 3D Plot gt check box Select the data to include on each axis by using the drop down list box next to each axis label All numeric data logged for each point in the Data File can be used on any plot axis 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 236 20 DATA PLOT DATA FILE Press the ellipsis button next to the list box to edit the axis text Make plot property selections at the bottom of the display then press the Save toolbar button to save the plot Prior to saving the plot the color scheme line type fonts and many other aspects of the plot can be modified by pressing the Properties button This displays the plot properties dialog that allows customization of the non data related plot features 3D plots cannot be used for any combination of data in the Data File The data plotted must be related such that one axis value is fairly constant while the other axis values change This is only possible when accessing Data Files that include multiple cycles For example a test that executes temperature and pressure points will yield a Data File that can be used to crate an Error pressure and temperature plot Data from a single cycle test cannot be used on a 3D plot In this case use the secondary Y axis on a 2D plot Figure 152 shows the Custom Plot Editor loaded with several plots Table 66 explains the features available on the form Custom
269. chosen a maximum of five may be used for a single template Manipulate the fields property of Test Data template fields to report multiple data sources on a single report see 23 10 3 Data Source and Cycle Selection If the number of data sources chosen exceeds the data source requirement for a template the extra data sources are discarded For example if 4 data sources are selected and used with a template that supports 3 data sources the 4 data source is not reported in any way On the other hand if a template requires more sources than selected data fields requiring the missing data are removed and not replaced If multiple Data Files where chosen and the template requires only a single Data File multiple reporte are generated all based on the same template If a data source consiste of multiple cycles a separate report will be generated for each cycle The order from top to bottom in which data sources appear in the Data Source list corresponds to the numeric id of each data source The first or top source is considered to be Data Source 1 To edit the order of files in the list the user should highlight the file they wish to move and then use Shift 1 or Shift to adjust the position of the file After source selection is complete press Create Reports to initiate the loading of files and creation of reports The Report Editor will merge the source data with the template to create a report 23 11 2
270. cmd then There is no scan list in this case Flash a status bar message cCOMPASS StatusDisplay There are no DUTs that use a multiplexer exit function end if Determine what output to read The Range Class typeFinal definition lists these constants select case outputType case 2 Voltage CreateScanList MEAS VOLT DC amp cmd amp case 1 current CreateScanList MEAS CURRENT DC G amp cmd amp case 8 Frequency CreateScanList MEAS FREQ amp cmd amp case 9 Resistance CreateScanList MEAS RESISTANCE G amp cmd amp 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 26 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES MACRO CODE TO CREATE A SCANLIST FOR AN AGILENT 34970A case else The output type is not supported cCOMPASS StatusDisplay There are no DUTs that use a multiplexer exit function end select End Function TOI Return the fully qualified channel ID assument that channels are in order from 1 to 60 corresponding to This function can and should be defined within the same Get Command macro 1 20 BANK 1 channels 1 20 21 40 BANK 2 channels 1 20 41 60 BANK 3 channels 1 20 TIO IO III IO I ICI IO Function GetCahnnelID chnl if chnl 1 and chnl 21 then BANK 1 chnl 1 20 tBase chnl
271. command does not have a response or the target communications device does not normally respond to commands click the Send Only check box or COMPASS will expect a response and time out if none is received Commands sent are automatically added to the drop down Command list the list is cleared each time COMPASS is restarted Some RS232 devices automatically output data without requiring a command response pair To test these interfaces check the Poll Interface option When active this feature causes COMPASS to poll the selected RS232 port and automatically log any response After a command has been issued the selection can be toggled without any other required actions A mechanism is provided to send specific data bytes to a device Enter the text BYTE z followed by a series a data bytes 0 255 separated by spaces The numeric values are converted to a sequence of characters and sent to the remote device Make sure that decimal values are entered and not hex 255 not FF For example enter the command BYTE 2 27 to send the characters 2 and 27 Hex 02 1B Most devices that require specific byte data in this way do not use command or response terminators 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 202 16 TOOLS PISTON GAUGE CALCULATOR 16 Toor s PISTON GAUGE CALCULATOR 161 OVERVIEW The Piston Gauge Calculator is accessed using Tools Piston Gauge Calculator The features on this form allow any COMPASS sup
272. create and use a macro Before using a macro make sure that the desired operation is not a standard COMPASS feature In most cases a macro is not necessary a COMPASS does not halt test operation in the event of a macro error Make sure that a macro is functioning properly before running an unattended test 3 COMPASS Macro Editor DataFile GetCommand E SetMuxChannelNEW SetPPCPressure This Function must return the command to be sent to a remote c SpecialMuxReady to obtain the desired output GlobalCode Globals Target Target value when the SetMode it True RelationShip True for Set commands False for all other command ReplyParser ParamID Parameter ID of the device Report colRange Device Range class that the relation ship applies t TestMacro The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value For example GetCommand44883 val mid rawReply 5 Function SetMuxChannel Target Chnl SetMode ParamID colRange SetMuxChannel ROUTE CLOSE 1 amp format target 00 Debug Window z Execute Close Figure 138 COMPASS Macro Editor Page 211 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Macros are VB Script functions that are called by COMPASS at specific times during test execution One macro can represent many individual functions Each macro type uses different arguments Using these arguments the code d
273. cro In general a Test Macro should alter the normal sequence of a test A few common Test Macros may do the following control valves in a timed sequence repeat test points if the error exceeds a certain limit load calibration data from instruments in the test A high level of understand of the COMPASS object model is required to properly execute a Test Macro All objects are available for use within the macro The following sections detail each macro type and include an example of use Realize the function names are user defined Function names should resemble the use or output of the function Always use comments to document the steps of a function Refer to section 25 for details on COMPASS objects when interpreting arguments to the macro functions Reply Parser Macro Convert remote response to a number Relationship Macro Determine the final output of a device Get Command Macro Get remote command Relationship Macro Determine the final output of a device Interface Macro Get the raw output Figure 141 Device Output Macro Sequence 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 216 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR 18 5 1 DATA FILE MACROS Collection of Test Data Classes Current File Increment Terum Data File Macro Manipulate the dataina Test Data class Typicall y the MacroDefin ed data fileds ar e modi fied to obtain a newcolumn of data
274. cter text entry field Enter text that describes any special setup or notes to associate with a setup This information is not stored in the data file nor is it available in reports The comment is intended to allow an operator to quickly determine special setup or use characteristics of a COMPASS setup Pre Test Pressure Data Auxiliary Comment Test Comment Demo PPC3 Test The point sequence is shortened for quilker demonstrations EE aA Figure 36 Test Definition Editor Comment Tab 4 4 REMOTE COMMAND EDITOR The remote command editor is used to define commands issued using a remote interface All COMPASS device definitions that use a remote interface use the Remote Command Editor A separate command set is required for each unique read output and set Therefore there are two types of command sets Read and Set The key difference is that Read commands are issued continuously and Set commands are only used to set an output To create a remote command set for a specific device output choose the Edit Commands option on the appropriate Device Editor Output or Set tab and use the following procedure Use the Editor Toolbar New icon to create a new command or select an existing command from the list of commands Select the Command Type Initialization and Read for measurement based outputs or Set for controlling outputs It is not necessary to use initialization commands It depends on the requirements
275. ctive run mode In addition a head correction may be applied to the output indicated by an H next to the tolerance indicator For this reason the output displayed in COMPASS will not necessarily match the output displayed on the device Example Voltage DUT E EX x A Pressure 870229 959 psi Voltage Figure 45 Device Output Run Screen 5 5 4 1 SPY MNDOWS A Spy Window exists for each device output that requires remote commands Spy Windows are accessed by right clicking a lt Final Output gt on a Device Output Run Screen and selecting the Spy Window menu choice This feature is provided by COMPASS to troubleshoot or analyze remote communications The caption of the Spy Window contains the device name and interface being spied on Use the information in the Command Raw Response and COMPASS Uses fields to determine if COMPASS is properly configured for the remote device The command response information is updated real time as long as the interface is active and COMPASS is not paused 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 86 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES 35 PPC2 RS232 COM5 19200 E 7 1 Do not auto scroll lists on new commands Figure 46 Spy Window Screen Pay close attention to the device interface in the epy window caption If the interface displayed does not correspond to the actual device interface there is a configuration problem in COMPASS or the wrong Spy Window is being viewed The a
276. ctual device interface used can be modified during Test Initialization see 7 5 5 Configure DUT s Devices Table 30 Spy Window Information FRAME LABEL DESCRIPTION Command The exact command sent by COMPASS over the device interface The command terminator is the only portion of the command that is typically not visible For set commands make sure the command and set value are properly formatted Raw Response The unmanipulated response to the Command value issued This field should always be blank if the command does not have a response COMPASS Uses The Manipulate Response option setup in the Remote Command Editor is used to format the Raw Response see 4 4 4 Editor Options The numeric result is displayed in this field and logged as COMPASS data Responses not specifically used by COMPASS do not have a value in this field When troubleshooting make sure the value displayed includes the correct device output information 5 5 5 PISTON GAUGE DEVICE OUTPUT RUN SCREEN Non DHI Piston Gauges that use piston cylinder temperature piston position piston rotation rate or a vacuum reference require two run screens The first is very similar to the Device Output Run Screen The key difference is that the first four rows of information correspond to the configured piston cylinder temperature piston position piston rotation rate and reference vacuum All other active Piston Gauge outputs display just as any other
277. culated The mass list and nominal mass are not used Entering a value in this field puts the editor into Mass Entry Mode In this state there are two Mass Load fields one has a white background and the other has a black background Use the white background field to enter a mass target COMPASS selects masses to load the actual mass as close to the target value entered as possible The Mass Loading Resolution gt and Mass Set ultimately determine how close to the target the final value will be In most cases the exact target will not be achieved The actual final output mass load always displays with a black background Nominal Mass Load conditional numeric entry Entering a value in this field puts the editor into Mass Entry Mode In this state there are two Mass fields one has a white background and the other has a black background Use the white background field to enter a mass target COMPASS selects masses to load the actual mass as close to the target value entered as possible The Mass Loading Resolution gt and Mass Set ultimately determine how close to the target the final value will be In most cases the exact target will not be achieved The actual final output mass load always displays with a black background Page 207 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 16 2 CALCULATION MODES There are 4 different pressure calculation modes Each determines pr
278. current test status and to to programmatically access the main toolbar Configuration Class Access the Configuration Class to obtain output information on any test device Test Data Class Use the DataCollection property of the COMPASS Class to access data in any active Test Data file Test Definition Class Use the cCurTest property of the COMPASS Class to access the current Test Defintion Figure 210 COMPASS Class Object Model 28 9 1 PROPERTIES PROPERTIES cConfig DATA TYPE Configuration Class DESCRIPTION The property holds a reference to the current Configuration Class see 28 6 Uses this property when a macro function does not include the desired data as one of its parameters AmbP cCOMPASS cConfig AmbPrs FinalOutput cCurTest 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Test Definition Class The current Test Definition Class when a Test Definition is running Use this class to change test specific properties If desired the test dwell time can be changed for each point or based on test conditions within a pre point macro For example cCOMPASS cCurTest TestPrsDwellTime 500 Page 342 28 COMPASS OBJECTS PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION CurrentTestStep Integer This property determines the current step in a test Although it can be used in any way desired it is intended to work with Test Event macros By checking the value of this property a Test Event macro can take specif
279. d by the value entered in this field see 14 3 Initialize Test Tab This label may also be used in Test Initialization The label should clearly represent a specific final output in a device that has multiple final outputs In many cases a useful label is one that is equivalent to the Output Type Page 51 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc e Select the Output Type The Output Type is a broad classification of outputs that determines the available Final Output selections Select the Final Output to define for what function s the output will be used by COMPASS The Final Output selection ultimately determines for what purposes the device will be available when setting up and running teste Table 15 lists the supported final output types Select the lt Unit gt in which the final output is defined COMPASS automatically converts from this output unit of measure to any required display or test unit of measure Pressure final outputs also require a Pressure Measurement Mode selection Enter the Minimum and Maximum output values These determine the span and full scale of the final output Select the Resolution to apply to the Final Output The selection determines the resolution with which the final output is displayed and logged in the test Data File Use a resolution appropriate for the device and its tolerance Ch
280. d density These media use the lt Dynamic Density Compensation option When selected the Density field is disabled COMPASS will calculate the density based on the current ambient conditions When the field is not selected the lt Density gt value entered is directly used without manipulation To edit a pressure medium use the features on the lt Editor toolbar to copy or create a new pressure medium Select or enter a lt Medium Label gt The Unit of Measure Converter supports most items in the list These media can use the lt Dynamic Density Compensation gt option This feature is enabled only when a COMPASS supported medium is selected When available it is desirable to use this feature as it results in the most accurate density value The ability to use a constant density value is still provided The table below describes the features of the Pressure Media Editor Pressure Media Editor Medium Label Air AIR Dynamic Density Compensation Density kg m Figure 121 Pressure Media Editor Page 183 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 54 Pressure Media Editor Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Medium Label Select or enter a pressure medium label Many pressure media included in the list support the Dynamic Density Compensation option The pressure medium is selected during Test required drop Initialization using the value entered in this field down list selectio
281. d for calculation purposes Resolution required list box selection 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Set the resolution with which the Minimum and Maximum output entries display This selection also determines the default resolution used in the run screens logged to data files and reported in the COMPASS Report Editor Page 48 Raw Output to Final Output Relationship required drop down list 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Select the output relationship from the list The selection determines how COMPASS will manipulate the raw output s to obtain the final output There are several standard choices In addition all COMPASS Relationship Macros are included in the list The choices are Same No manipulation is applied to the raw output value Use this choice for devices that directly output in their final output unit of measure Typically devices that have their own remote interface as the lt Output Source gt on the Raw Output tab use this selection When this choice is selected the Final Output tab settings are automatically set to be equivalent to the specified Raw Output tab settings Linearly Proportional The measured raw output is converted to a percentage of the raw output span This percentage is applied to the final output span to obtain the final output Many pressure transducers that output in voltage use this selection for example 0 5V raw output corresponds to 0 to 100 kPa
282. d if Must be a 3 digit value 101 not 11 if tbase lt 10 then cmd BANK amp 0 amp tBase else cmd BANK amp tBase end if SetMultiplexerChannelEXT ROUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE End Function 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 20 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 3 4 2 Multiplexers with internal DMMs can be used to change channels and read the output of a DUT In most cases these multiplexers are setup with multiple outputs to read the supported electrical signals voltage current ohms frequency ect and a controlling output to change multiplexer channels The selection and use of the individual outputs and the channel switching are no different than in the case of any other device in COMPASS There are 3 common methods of setting up the remote commands to change channels and read the output Direct Output Switched Output and Scanned Output The pros and cons of these methods are summarized in Table 4 MULTIPLEXERS WITH INTERNAL DMMS Table 4 Pros and Cons of Multiplexer Setups with Internal DMMs METHOD Direct Output Easiest method to use to get started when 5 or fewer channels will be used This setup works independently of a multiplexer A unique output definition is required for each specific electrical output and channel used Should not be used when more than 5 channels so a multiplexer channel definition is not required are used at a time A channel specific output must be selected for each devi
283. d is frequently used to store internal tracking information for a specific device The value entered is included in the Test Data Files and can be included in reports DUTs whose record type is Profile do not include an identification field in the DUT Editor Instead the identification can be entered during test initialization The default Data File directory naming preference can use the DUT Identification to create the data directory for date files when running tests The DUT UUT asset number must be entered in this field to import a COMPASS data file into MET CAL The value is used to synchronize MET CAL DUT information with COMPASS DUT information see 22 Export to MET CAL Customer ID optional text entry field Write in the device customer identification The field can contain any combination of characters and numbers to represent a specific device This field is frequently used to store customer specific product information The value entered is included in the Test Data Files and can be included in reports DUTs whose record type is lt Profile gt do not include a customer ID in the DUT Editor Instead the identification is entered during test initialization The default Data File directory naming preference can use the DUT lt Customer ID gt to create the data directory for date files when running tests Page 35 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTIO
284. d on all devices that use that channel This process is repeated for all channels specified for use during test initialization Poll Frequency Specifies the delay interval between sending consecutive command sets Typically this ms value is 0 This allows COMPASS to send commands in a loop to the remote device as fast as possible In some cases this is not desired Particularly when an interface is shared Shared interfaces use the same remote resources If a faster refresh rate on one output is more desirable relative to another one increase the delay interval to slow down the less desirable command numeric entry Page 73 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 74 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES 5 1 OVERMEW The COMPASS for Pressure main screen contains the interface between the program setup and all of the data acquisition run screens When COMPASS is first started the main screen displays without any child windows Only after a menu option is selected does the screen update to display the corresponding window The following features are available on the main screen Main menu bar Status bar Run mode display Main toolbar Several individual run screens To access all COMPASS menus and functions At the bottom of the screen that contains information on the status of test execution To indicate t
285. d selected in the grid Use the options on the Tools Options Data Grid tab to prevent the automatic selection of the current test point When automatic selection is ON and the grid is scrolled to the top to view points taken earlier in the test completion of a new point forces the grid back to the last point The data types logged and how they are ordered in the grid can be customized see 14 7 Data Grid tab Any or all of the different data items logged during a test can be displayed at run time in the Data Grid Run Screen The order of points logged in the Data File is not affected by the grid display default COMPASS displays six frequently used columns Reference Pressure DUT Output DUT Pressure lt Rdg Error 96FS Errors and Status The Data View Data File option and the Data File Viewer always displays all data columns logged to the file in the embedded grid see 19 and 21 2 Figure 50 Data Grid Run Screen 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 92 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES 5 5 8 DATA PLOT RUN SCREEN When running a test the Data Plot Run Screen can be used to display a variety of graphs of the data currently logged in the Data File The graph can be changed or printed without affecting test execution Unlike the Data Plot Data File graphing function no new Data File s can be selected see 20 Data Plot Data File However all other functions supported by the graphing tool
286. d these masses onto the Piston Gauge and float the piston When stability is achieved press the Pressure is Ready button 5 5 6 DEVICE RUN SCREENS DHI products display output information on custom run screens in place of the general device run screens Each supported device run screen contains tools and output information specific to the supported product Use the displayed tools as desired to change the state of the device The following sections describe the DHI product specific run screens s Refer to the device s Operation and Maintenance Manual for complete information on all of its functions and displays F Click any display value on a run window to get a popup of options associated with the displayed value Almost any displayed output can also be displayed in a different unit of measure or added to a strip chart All run screens display the model and serial number of the corresponding device in the window caption Use this information to distinguish multiple windows of the same type device 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 88 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES Alwaye use the toole on the run screen instead of the device front panel when running tests Front panel access can interfere with remote communications and with COMPASS program execution Use the run toole to change pressure and other test parameters as necessary when running a test If you must use the device front panel while a test ie running use the Paus
287. dditional Criteria NONE C AND C OR e SAL Statement SHAPE SELECT DISTINCT Test FROM Test WHERE Test ser D MLF AND Test TestDate gt 01 25 2003 APPEND SELECT FROM Devices AS chapDevices RELATE TestKey to ParentT estKey SELECT FROM Data ORDER BY TempCycle LinePresCycle PresCycle PresPnt 4S chapD ata RELATE TestKey to ParentT estKey Execute Cancel Figure 157 Database Search Setup 215 DATABASE TABLES AND FIELDS The database consists of three tables Test Devices Data All tables are linked to a single test through the unique test key as described in 21 3 Database Principles 21 5 1 TEST TABLE The test table contains all the information about a test except the device information and individual data points recorded during the test The TeskKey is the primary key for the table and is also the common value that links information across tables see 21 3 Database Principles Most fields in this table directly correspond to Test Definition settings Refer to Section 8 Setup Test for details on these fields Table 71 contains an exhaustive list of all fields in the Test table Table 71 Description of fields in the Test Table DATABASE FIELD DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION COMPASSVersion Text Version of COMPASS that was used to create the data file CompleteTestCycles Integer Number of pressure cycles completed Cycles Intege
288. de on the Header tab of the Piston Gauge Platform Editor Piston Gauge Type Platforms define the output pressure by solving the pressure equation using the effective area of the piston cylinder and the force applied by the mass load Deadweight Tester Type Platforms define the output pressure by summing the pressure values assigned to all of the loaded masses A Platform must be used with metrological components piston cylinder mass set mass bell of the same type Piston Gauge or Deadweight Tester we Piston Cylinders Mass Sets and Mass Bells must be defined to use a Platform These setup are in their own editors A Platform must be used with metrological elements that are of the same type as the platform type Piston Gauge or Deadweight Tester 1L2 PISTON GAUGE PLATFORM The Piston Gauge Platform Editor provides features to create edit view and delete Piston Gauge Platforms from the COMPASS database Access the Piston Gauge Platform Editor using the Setup Piston Gauge Piston Gauge Platform menu option or the Main Toolbar Piston Gauge Platform Editor icon When the editor is opened the last accessed Piston Gauge Platform displays Use the Editor Toolbar to create a new platform select a platform to be edited or copy a platform to be edited Then simply edit the desired fields Press the Editor Toolbar Save icon to save the changes Page 161 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL The P
289. definition are automatically selected on the right side of the display see Figure 67 New sources can be selected if desired Run Manual Test Setup Configure Device 1 of 2 Non Auto Piston Gauge Manufacturer Generic CustomerID Model pa 7 RS232Settngs COMI2400E 7 1 SerialNumber Parameter ID Identification Sample Reference Pressure Piston Gauge Settings Piston Cylinder Exmple Piston Cylinder Head Height Mass Set DHI MassSet 2012 T SOT Mass Bell Example Mass Bell P C Temperture Sample PG 7601 1 Trim Mass Set None T Mo P C Position Sample PG7601 1 easuremen ode Y a P C Rotation Sample PG7601 1 ponds Reference Vacuum Sample PG7601 I Cancel Back Next Finish Figure 67 Manual piston gauge device Configuration 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 110 6 HOW DO I e Press Next to setup the auto detected PG7000 Press Next again or the Load Settings button to load the basic PG7000 information This loading process is very fast because the individual piston cylinder mass set and mass bell data does not need to be loaded This device configuration step does not require any specific selections see Figure 68 Run Manual Test Setup Configure Device 2 of 2 Sample PG 7601 Manufacturer 5H Instruments Customer ID Model Pa 7601 RS232 Settings COM1 2400 E 7 1 Seri
290. del information is entered will the Autodetect Setup gt option appear Check this box when it displays see Figure 57 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 102 6 HOW DO I Support Device Editor Support Device Record Example PPC3 Label Editing Record Header Calibration Communications Comment Manufacturer DH Instruments Model PPC3 v IV Autodetect setup Serial Number 1234 Identification Customer ID Figure 57 Example PPC3 Setup Enter information on the Calibration tab to track the calibration history of the PPC3 see 4 3 4 Calibration Tab Select the remote interface that COMPASS will use to communicate with the PPC3 on the Communications tab see 4 3 5 Communications Tab In this case assume the will use an IEEE 488 interface By default all DHI products use address 10 unless specifically changed Enter 10 as the IEEE 488 address The actual address used and the interface type can be changed during test initialization see 7 3 3 Configure DUT s Devices Press the Save toolbar option The PPC3 setup is complete To verify the setup run a manual test and select the PPC3 as the reference and controller Choose the Run Run Manual Test menu choice to start a manual test see 7 5 Run Run Manual Test Do not select a DUT at this time The goal of this run is to simply verify that the PPCS is properly setup Press Next to proceed to the next Test Initializati
291. dentifier of the final output unit UnitRaw Integer The unit identifier of the raw output UseAs Integer The use of the output or set e 0 Pressure reference e 1 DUT pressure 2 Test line pressure reference 3 Residual vacuum pressure 5 Ambient pressure 6 Ambient Temperature 7 DUT temperature 8 Reference temperature 9 Piston Cylinder temperature 12 Ambient humidity 15 Piston 16 Piston rotation 17 Piston fall rate 18 Piston rotation decay 19 Voltage measurement 20 Current measurement 21 Frequency measurement 22 Resistance measurement 23 Auxiliary data device 43 Time measurement 100 Line pressure controller 101 Test pressure controller 103 Test temperature controller 104 Voltage controller 105 Current controller 108 Multiplexer 109 Valve driver controller Page 331 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PROPERTIES UseAutoZ DATA TYPE Boolean DESCRIPTION TRUE for DHI products that are setup to use Auto Zero and FALSE otherwise UseMux Integer Multiplexer channel to that the output is attached to 0 to n or 1 when a multiplexer is not used UserCalDate UserPA UserPM ZNatErrGauge ZoffsetAbs String Double Double Double Double The user calibration date of a DHI product The user adder of a DHI product The
292. der The value is used to calculate the effective area of the piston cylinder at the operating temperature using thermal expansivity The value is entered by the user or read from a configured support device when running a test This value is not required when using a Deadweight Tester Type Piston Gauge Local Gravity required numeric entry Value of acceleration due to gravity at the sight of use The value is entered by the operator Typically this is the gravity at the testing facility However any value can be entered to calculate the pressure that would be defined at different gravities Pressure Display Resolution conditional drop down list Resolution to use when displaying the calculated pressure Make a selection from the drop down list Mass Loading Resolution conditional drop down list 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Determines the minimum mass value to be handled to set a pressure or mass target With higher resolution smaller masses are loaded and final pressure or mass value is closer to the nominal target Masses that exceed the selected resolution are not selected by COMPASS See section 16 3 Mass Loading Protocol for details on the mass loading algorithm Page 206 16 TOOLS PISTON GAUGE CALCULATOR FEATURE DESCRIPTION Mass List conditional check box list Select masses from the list to define a pressure in Mass Selection Mode Only select masses that are were phys
293. details on these setups Page 17 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Multiplexer Not available on all multiplexers Internal External DMM Figure 4 Typical Multiplexer Connection 3 4 1 SWITCHING MULTIPLEXER A switching multiplexer is available for switching channels only When this type of multiplexer is used an external DMM is required to measure the actual output of a device This multiplexer configuration is commonly used even when the multiplexer has a built in DMM To use voltage output DUTs with this setup define the DUT to use Voltage Measurement as the raw output source Create a support device DMM and a support device multiplexer During test initialization when the DUT is selected an option to select the DMM and specify the multiplexer channel is available see 7 3 3 Configure DUT s Devices As with any setup a multiplexer setup will not work properly unless the remote commands defined in the multiplexer setup select the proper channel Many multiplexers support the basic SCPI commands to close a channel exclusively ROUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE The text following this command may differ for different multiplexers and configurations Refer to the multiplexer documentation for details Several common multiplexer commands are listed in Table 2 Although the commands defined in thie section are common they not guaranteed to work for all multiplexers Special commands
294. device is used to measure voltage 4 3 6 2 3 Tolerance Tab The Output Relationship Editor Tolerance tab is used to provide an uncertainty or error tolerance for a final output The calculated tolerance displays on the Device Run Screen of the device when running a test and if the device is a DUT on the Comparison Run Screen A red or green triangular indicator is used to indicate in or out of tolerance on these screens see 5 5 2 DUT Reference Comparison Run screen The tolerance on a DUT final output is used to determine the status of a test point in or out of tolerance when running tests and to provide tolerance bars on plots Page 54 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES There are several tolerance formatting options different tolerance can be applied to up to four segments of the final output span Use the selection appropriate for the final output Reading only tolerances should be avoided if test points at or near O will be taken The tolerance becomes infinitely small as the output approaches zero Instead use a combination tolerance to provide a low end threshold such as lt DUTFS OR Reading Greater of See Table 16 for detailed information on all Tolerance tab fields Output Relationship Raw Output Final Output Tolerance Number of Tolerance Segments 2 4 gt Segment 1 Segment Tolerance papane 5 0 010 ZReading 0 500 Tolerance Segment Definition Final Outputs Fi
295. dhinstruments com The examples allow COMPASS users to quickly setup DUTs support devices and piston gauge platforms To use the existing examples activate one of the Device Editors from the Setup menu Select a manufacturer and model on the Header tab then press the Find Previous Setup button see 4 3 3 Header Tab Example setups that match the selected manufacturer and model are available for selection Select the setup that best describes the device Edit the range and communications settings as required for the active device Follow the steps described below to update the current list of examples e Download the latest copy of the default mdb The file should be copied to the installation directory of COMPASS for Pressure e Select the Database COMPASS Database Maintenance Tool menu choice see 24 5 e Select the downloaded example database file default mdb if it is not already selected as the Merge Database file e Select Example Device Setups from the Data to View list All current examples in the example database and in the active database will display see Figure 195 Select the individual examples to update in the Merge Database list Alternatively press the All button in the Merge Database frame to quickly select all examples e Press the down arrow to update the current database with the selected examples 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 8 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 3 OPERATING PRINC
296. dim RefP NumberofPressurePoints 1 redim DUTOut NumberofPressurePoints 1 Create the arrays of DUT V and Ref Pressure for 1 to NumberofPressurePoints RefP p 1 DataPointRef 1 1 1 cint p RefPressure DUTOUT p 1 DataPointRef 1 1 1 cint p DUTRawOutputl next end With Fit the DUT output vs the reference output Only determine the 1 and 2 order coefficients i Poly Fit DUTOUT RefP coefs 2 0 or 2 1 Return the results as a string templ First Order amp formatNumber coefs 0 1 5 amp W amp _ FormatNumber coefs 0 0 5 First Order templ templ amp vbcrlf amp Correlation amp formatNumber coefs 0 6 7 temp2 Second Order amp formatNumber coefs 1 2 5 amp V amp chr 178 amp _ amp formatNumber coefs 1 1 5 amp V amp formatNumber coefs 1 0 5 temp2 temp2 amp vbcrlf amp Correlation amp formatNumber coefs 1 6 7 Return them both separted by a new line FitNewData templ amp vbcrlf amp temp2 End Function Page 229 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 18 5 8 TEST MACROS iT Current test temperature point If temperature points are not usedinthe test the valueis always 1 iL Current test line pressure point If line pressure points are not used in the test the value is always 1 ic Current test pressure cycle iP cTest Current T est Definition Class Most
297. ds Examples of non Zoom Controls how large or small the current document appears on the screen Page 269 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 23 4 4 INSERT Text Image gt Object Page Break Figure 174 COMPASS Report Editor Insert Menu Images may be added throughout the document if desired It is recommend that images are inserted with the Image At Caret Position option The ability to insert objects ie included for advanced use Objecte in a document require the object interface to be registered in the Windows registry of the PC used to view the document Objects available on one PC are not necessarily available on another As a result a document may display properly on one PC and not at all on another Table 79 COMPASS Report Editor Insert Menu Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Display an open file dialog box for selection of a text file When this file is chosen the contents of this file are inserted into the document at the current carriage position Display an open file dialog box and prompts for an image to add to the document The images are inserted in two different methods At Caret Position and As Fixed Object At Caret Position Object is inserted into the document as a single character Text will not wrap around the object Since the object is treated as a single character it is centered much easier The object will also mainta
298. e 2 options are not supported by the Direct Remote Communication form To teet this functionality manually set the device COM2 port to the R5252 settings of the device connected to the COM2 port Then send commands with the COM2 prefix required by the product In most cases the prefix will work Refer to the Operation and Maintenance manual of the specific product for detaile on the pass through support Direct Remote Communication Interface IEEE 488 IEEE 488 Settings Command Terminator CR LF bd Card National Instruments Response Terminator IEEE 488 sPIBO Send Only Device EE Append CR LF to reply display Automatically re send command a Poll Interface a Send DH INSTRUMENTS INC PPCK 112 44277 Verl 00h jjil R 13 906 psi a 0 001 psi s 13 974 psi al Figure 133 Direct Remote Communication Page 201 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Select an Interface and enter the necessary interface settings Enter the command to be sent in the command field Clicking Send or pressing the Enter key causes the command to be sent using the current interface setup Results and return strings are displayed in the white portion of the form on the bottom of the display These return strings are logged as read and unmodified by COMPASS The communications time out is fixed at 10 seconds A time out is indicated by displaying INTERFACE ERROR f the
299. e Function SetMultiplexerChannel Target ChnlSt SetMode ParamID cDevice if Target gt 9 then cmd 1 amp target amp else cmd 10 amp target amp end if cmd ROUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE amp cmd SetMultiplexerChannel cmd End Function III III III III III III II This Function must return the command to be sent to a remote Multiplexer that uses the SCPI protocol Up to 3 channel banks are supported by this macro It is assumed that each channel bank has 20 individually switchable channels This makes the channel total 60 Target Target value when the SetMode it True ChnlSt True False to activate or de active a valve driver SetMode True for Set commands False for all other commands ParamID Parameter ID of the device cDevice Device class that the relation ship applies to The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value RH He IO IO kkk IC IO k Function SetMultiplexerChannelEXT Target ChnlSt SetMode ParamID cDevice if Target 1 and Target 21 then BANK 1 chnl 1 20 tBase Target BANK 1 elseif Target gt 21 and Target lt 41 then BANK2 channel 1 20 tBase Target 20 BANK 2 elseif Target 41 and Target 61 then BANK3 channel 1 20 tBase Target 40 BANK 3 else This is some type of an error exit function en
300. e It is not necessary to change this setting unless a conflict with other ports exists Data Acquistion Type TCP IP TCP IP Part 1001 TCPAPHos P nobod Figure 199 TCP IP Settings 25 5 HART MARS232 COMPASS provides basic HART support to read the primary variable and loop current of HART enabled devices Complete functionality of a HART master is not provided The device must be set to the desired range and unit of measure prior to starting a test COMPASS accesses HART devices by using an RS232 to HART converter The available interface options are identical to the RS232 Interface options see 25 2 1 RS232 setup There are many converters available on the market today The RS232 settings required by each converter may differ between manufacturers Typical RS232 settings used by HART to RS232 converters are 1200 Baud Odd Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit 1200 0 8 1 no lt Command Terminator gt no lt Response Terminator and Binary commands selected see Figure 200 The RTS ON OFF gt handshaking option should be used to set the RTS line high while sending data to the HART device see 4 3 5 Communications Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 298 25 REMOTE INTERFACING Data Acquistion Type HART via R5232 5232 R5232 Settings Handshaking RTS ON OFF Binary Commandset 4 Command Timeout a Command T erminator Response Terminator Figure 200 Typical HART via
301. e on the main toolbar to suspend test execution and remote communications allowing access to the front panel controle 5 5 6 1 7000 RUN SCREEN The PG7000 Run Screen is used for all remotely enabled DHI PG7000 piston gauges This setup requires that a Piston Gauge platform is created when the Auto Detect gt setup option checked see 11 2 Piston Gauge Platform Based on the model and embedded software version of the PG7000 some features may be disabled or not included on the run screen All relevant piston cylinder mass pressure and ambient conditions information displays real time in the run window The PG7000 Run Screen also includes a mini toolbar allowing direct control of certain PG7000 functions Refer to the PG7000 Operation and Maintenance manual for complete information on PG7000 set up functions and displays Information on each of the PG7000 Run Screen fields is listed in the table below Figure 48 PG7000 Run Screen Table 31 PG7000 Run Screen Fields LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Circular Indicator Green when the PG7000 pressure is Ready and red when the pressure is Not Ready Refer to the PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual for details on PG7000 Ready Not Ready conditions Piston Position The piston position relative to mid stroke mm Fall Rate The rate at which the piston is moving vertically fall rate mm min Rotation Rate Piston rotation rate rpm Rotation Decay Rate
302. e 26 Main Toolbar Run Display Tools ICON DESCRIPTION View Test Causes the Test Definition Editor to display in the main screen with the information corresponding to the active Test Definition see 8 2 Test Editor This allows complete information on the current test procedure to be reviewed without interrupting the test This feature is available only in Run Test mode Do not confuse this option with the Open Test Editor toolbar shortcut It ie not possible to edit a Test Definition while COMPASS is running a test Device Run Generates a popup menu to allow the selection of the desired Device Run Screen Display Screen to display see 5 5 4 Device Output Run Screen The selected Device Run Screen automatically displays in the main window Depending on the selections of the Tools Options Run Test tab the displayed Run s Screen may or may not allow direct control of the device see 14 4 Run Test Tab There are several different run screens Each DHI product has it s own run screen to support it s unique features Non DHI piston gauges have a run Screen that supports entry and selection of the piston gauge conditions used to calculate pressure All other non DHI devices use a common run screen that lists the device s raw outputs and corresponding final outputs F a Q Click outputs on the various run screens to get a list of options that apply to the output Display unit of measure and
303. e 333 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Name Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks Example Name Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks Example Name Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks Example 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc ioSetTarget Set a target output in a controlling device Function ioSetTarget dTargl dTarg2 e dTarg1 The first target output e GdTarg2 The second target output TRUE when the commands were sent successfully and FALSE otherwise Use the ioSetOutput method of the of the Calculation Class whenever possible 28 8 2 The ioSetOutput method accesses other instruments as required to set the device output The ioSetTarget method can be used only with Range Classes used for controlling Set commands must be specified for the device In most cases dTarg1 is a new output value pressure temperature voltage ect It must be in the final output unit When the class is used for a valve driver dTarg1 should specify the driver to change and dTarg2 should specify the new state So dTarg1 3 and dTarg2 0 would deactivate valve driver 3 Function Set50PSI cRange If cRange ioSetTarget 50 0 then Set50PSI TRUE Else Set50PSI FALSE End if ioVent Vent the output in a controlling device Function ioVent None TRUE if the commands were sent correctly and FALE otherwise This method can be used
304. e 58 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES 4 3 7 SET TAB The Set tab is common to the definition editor for all advanced type device setups The features on the Set tab are used to define a device s set capabilities These include pressure control temperature control valve driver actuation channel switching multiplexing etc Not all device setups require selections on the Set tab Devices that do not provide control or set functions and DHI products setup using the Auto Detect Setup feature do not use the Set tab 5 5 Device instrument Support Concept to get thorough underetanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic ie critical to proper setup of the Output tab The features on the Set tab are the same for all device setups Press the Add button to create a new final set for the device or press the Edit Set button to edit an existing final set Set defining information is entered on the Output Relationship Editor that appears when adding or editing a final set If necessary press the Edit Commands button to modify or create remote commands required to send set commands to the device The fully formatted remote commands must result in a numeric set point value in the Set Type unit of measure specified on the Set Relationship Editor Raw Set tab The Remote Command Editor provides features to allow a remote command to be formatted according to the current s
305. e Medium drop down list box 14 3 Determines the default pressure medium to use for head corrections The actual selection is made during Test Initialization when a reference pressure measuring device is initialized Pressure media are created using the Pressure Media Editor gt INITIALIZE TEST TAB The Tools Options Initialize Test tab is used to set user preferences affecting the initialization portion of test execution see 7 3 Test Initialization The test initialization steps can be adjusted to avoid repeating undesired or unnecessary warnings and selections The purpose of the Initialize Test tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 56 When selections are complete click OK to save changes or select another tab to change other options COMPASS Options DataGrid Data Fil Ambient Conditions Data In File Data Header Interface Language initialize Test 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc RunTest EndTest Piston Gauge Only use references that are marked for M amp TE Only use reference sources that are marked M amp TE nly use references and output sources that have valid calibration dates Display warning when DHI device setup SN and remote SN do not match Use DHI PG ambient conditions when PG is used as the reference List DHI PPC ambient sensors for ambient pressure when applicable Display warning when
306. e Voltage Setup the Raw Output tab of the Output Relationship Editor as detailed in Figure 52 Note that the Output Source is lt IEEE 488 gt Therefore remote commands must be specified to read the output value The Minimum and Maximum voltages entered do not impact the setup because the selected Output Relationship is Same This means that the value read from the remote interface is the final output No further manipulation is required Output Relationship Raw Output Final Output Tolerance Required Raw Outputs to determine Final Output 55 Output Voltage z M xl Output Source iEEE 488 Minimum opo 7 Maximum ooo Resolution non ttt Raw Output to Final Output Relationship Same Raw Output Final Output v Cancel Figure 52 Example Voltage Raw Output Setup Select the Final Output tab and enter information as described in Figure 53 The lt Final Output gt selection of lt Voltage Measurement gt tells COMPASS that the DMM can be used to measure voltage During Test Initialization this output can be selected to read any instrument that has a lt Raw Output Source gt of lt Voltage Measurement gt Output Relationship Raw Output Final Output Tolerance Label Voltage Dutput Type Final Output 270022972020 UN m SS Resolution nm sl Cancel Figure 53 Example Voltage Final Output Setup Page 99 2002 2004 DH Instru
307. e actually modifies data logged in the Header portion of the test Data File In most cases this will cause problems with third party applications that were configured to read the Data File in a previous format This feature should not be included as part of routine COMPASS use Header data not logged in the Data File is not available in COMPASS Reports 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 198 14 TOOLS OPTIONS COMPASS Options Ambient Conditions Initialize Test RunTes End Test Piston Gauge DataGrid DataFile DatalnFile Data Header Interface Language Test Record v DUT DUT Raw Source 1 DUT Raw Source 2 DUT Raw Source 3 Pressure Reference Pressure Reference Raw Source 1 Pressure Reference Raw Source 2 Check the devices in the list that you wish to include header information for in the data file _ ts Figure 130 Options Data Header Tab 14 11 INTERFACE TAB The Tools Options Interface tab is used to set up the IEEE 488 card s that the computer running COMPASS can use for IEEE 488 communications and to define how RS232 ports are detected The panel allows a Capital Equipment Corporation CEC or National Devices IEEE 488 card to be selected and the card address to be specified The IEEE 488 Card pull down provides the choice of National Devices and lt CEC Capitol Equipment Corp Clicking on the lt IEEE 488 Card Address field causes an address entry pop up to
308. e convenient when trying to mimic a test that includes multiple readings per point Taking data at short time intervals can quickly result in a very large Data File Press the Abort Data Acquisition option to abort fixed interval data acquisition Average Setup Manual Averaging Timed point interval s 5 Cancel Figure 42 lt Average Setup gt Abort data Press this icon to abort data acquisition at fixed intervals or a point currently acquisition being averaged 1 Never use other Toolbar features when this icon is enabled Changing the state of the system while a point is in progress may lead to faulty data logged in the Data File 5 5 RUN SCREENS 5 5 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS uses several different run screen types to display output information while in a run mode Use the Run Display choices on the Main Toolbar to display a specific run screen Click and drag the border of a run screen to adjust its size Closing minimizing or maximizing any of the run screens has no affect on the run mode A test continues to run even if all run screens are closed The Window menu includes cascade and tile options for common default displays The combination of these features makes the COMPASS user interface totally customizable 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 82 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES s By default each run window is displayed in the last used size and position Some run screens have
309. e data when it is replaced Use this feature to characters limit or force the size of a field to maintain symmetry in a report Grow and shrink Data field will expand or contract to fit the replacement data size The number of characters to fit selected is imposed on the field Spaces are added to the field when the field s size is too small and the field is truncated when the size is too large Fixed length Field will not change with data size and replacement data will either be padded with spaces or truncated to fit field size Grow Only Field will only expand to fit data Data that is not large enough to fill the field will be padded with spaces Shrink Only Field will only contract to fit the data If data is too long to fit the field then it will be truncated 23 11 REPORT CREATION PROCESS There are several ways to create reports from with COMPASS test data The COMPASS Report Editor supports report generation from COMPASS for Pressure drag and drop Data Files from Windows Explorer and creation within the Report Editor itself All report creation begins with the template selection If no template is selected the current template or default template is used see 23 9 3 Templates Tab Next the data source for reporting must be identified This is accomplished by selecting individual Data Files or database records from the Data Selector window After all sources are identified the COMPASS Report Edi
310. e device respond directly with the desired final output In other cases significant manipulation of one or more raw outputs is necessary to obtain the final output There are several built in Raw Output to Final Output conversion selections provided to cover the most common relationships In addition a COMPASS Relationship Macro can be used for high level manipulation of raw output s as needed to obtain a final output see 18 5 5 Relationship Macros In addition to defining the relationship of raw outputs to final outputs final output tolerance information is also specified on the Output Relationship Editor Tolerance tab A variety of different tolerance types and ranges can be defined for any final output The tolerance information created in this editor is used to determine the output tolerance displayed on the Device Run Screen for the device and on the Comparison Run Screen if the device is a DUT The lt Final Output Label gt on the Final Output tab is used to identify a final output for selection during Test Initialization and when creating Test Definitions Always enter a label that will be easily recognized when selecting output sources For devices that have multiple final outputs be sure the label describes the specific output being set up For example use Pressure Range 1 rather than just Pressure on a device with several ranges To define a final output using the Output Relationship Editor always make se
311. e in both Read and Set command sets we Options on the Command tab apply to the selected command in the Commande list only and not the entire command set and not just the selected command Table 23 Remote Command Editor Command Tab Fields FRAME LABEL DESCRIPTION Commands List of all command s that are currently in the command set Selecting command in the list updates the editor for the current command selected Only one command can be display list edited at a time Use the Save toolbar option to save command changes Command Type Determines the type of command to setup A device the is used to measure supports Initialization and Read commands A device that is used to control supports Initialization drop down list and Set commands selection Initialization commands Sent one time during test initialization according to the Command Numbers value Read commands Sent continuously so long as the device is active in COMPASS Set commands Sent only when a new target is requested by a Test Definition or via user interaction on the Device Output run screen see 5 5 4 Device Output Run Screen Command Number The numerical order in which commands are sent Commands of the same type are sent according to their ascending Command Number order All Initialization commands drop down list are issued followed by all Read or Set commands depending on the Output Type selection Command Ente
312. e indicate the property ie not available in all versions of COMPASS 28 7 1 PROPERTIES PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION AutoGenerate Boolean TRUE when auto float is active in a PG7000 and FALSE otherwise AutoGenerateDeadBand Single Auto generation deadband for PG7000 with auto float active CommandPrefix String Command prefix to allow the device to use a passthrough port of another product COMPASS automatically sets this prefix when the device interface uses the COM2 of a product ControlMode Integer Pressure control mode of a DHI product e 0 Static e 1 Dynamic cPG clPGCalc Not available FactCalDate String The factory calibration date of DHI products FactPA Double Factory adder in Pa FactPM Double Factory multiplier FinalOutput Double The last updated output of the instrument Setting this property to a new value will automatically trigger the update of any instruments that uses the output FinalText String The user defined text label to associate with the output Page 329 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PROPERTIES HeadHeight DATA TYPE Single DESCRIPTION The head correction height to use for the device The value should not be set when a DHI device is used Hold Single The output hold limit in the final output unit The value should not be set when a DHI device is used InterfaceMode Integer Th
313. e interface used to communicate with the device e 0 Manual 1 Remote e 2 Support Device Key Long Unique database key associated with the Range Class DHI and COMPASS manual devices use a randomly generated Key value LastResponse String The last response to the remote command marked for processing MaxFinal Double The full scale output of the device in the final output unit MaxRaw Double The maximum output of the device in the raw output unit MeasMode Integer The pressure measurement mode for pressure controlling and output devices 0 Absolute 1 Gauge MinFinal Double Minimum final output in the final output unit MinRaw Double Minimum raw output in the raw output unit MultiRange Boolean TRUE for DHI products that use multi ranging and FALSE otherwise MultiRangelD Integer An integer value that represents the RPT or range ID of a multirangeable DHI product PPC2 RPM3 PPC3 PPCH RPM4 ect For products that support Auto Range the value is the number of the RPT 1 n f the RPT is autoranged the value is 10 For products that do not support Auto Range the value is the range counting up from the lowest range on the Hi RPT 1 H1 2 H2 3 H3 4 L1 5 L2 and 6 L3 MuxChannel Integer The multiplexer channel assigned to the device during Test Initialization If the device is not associated with a multi
314. e left panel of the point sequence tab The points described are always in the General child tab Unit selection Temperature and Line Pressure point sequences are optional Disable these options by choosing a different test definition type or by un checking the General child tab Run Temperature or Line Pressure Sequence option 8 6 2 TEST POINT SEQUENCE INSERT OPTIONS Use the Insert button press the Insert key on the computer s keyboard or click the point number next to each point to get a list of point options Use these features to add and remove test points as well as add special point features Right click the option number next to each point to remove custom point features New Point Minimum Pressure Maximum Pressure Vent System Valve Driver Change Pre Point Macro Delete Point Figure 96 Insert Options 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 144 8 SETUP TEST Table 36 Insert Options Choices FEATURE DESCRIPTION New Point existing test points are shifted down to expose an empty point at the selected test point ATM Point The test point is an atmospheric measurement The test controller is vented or the test User is prompted to vent the system The Vent commands of a controller are sent when a remotely interfaced controller is used When automated control is not available the test operator is prompted to vent the system For Line Pressure and Test Pressure point
315. e minimum rotation rate at which a Ready condition can occur when operating the Piston Cylinder This value is applicable to Piston Gauge Platforms that are setup to use a Piston Cylinder rotation measuring device It is not used if there is no rotation rate measurement The value must be entered in rotations per minute rpm Max Rotation Rate optional numeric entry field The maximum rotation rate at which a Ready condition Can occur when operating the Piston Cylinder This value is applicable to Piston Gauge Platforms that are setup to use a Piston Cylinder rotation measuring device It is not used if there is no rotation rate measurement The value must be entered in rotations per minute rpm Piston Thermal Expansivity optional numeric entry Enter the value of the piston material linear thermal expansivity The value must be entered in terms of relative change per degree centigrade relative to 20 C nn x 10 C The 10 exponent is fixed The default is 0 which results in no effective area change due to expansion of the piston as a result of temperature changes Cylinder Thermal Expansivity optional numeric entry Enter the value of the cylinder material linear thermal expansivity The value must be entered in terms of relative change per degree centigrade relative to 20 C nn x 10 C The 10 exponent is fixed The default is 0 which results in no effective area change due to expansion of the
316. e tests Figure 125 Options End Test Tab Page 191 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 58 Options End Test Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Final point of each cycle COMPASS provides the capability to repeat test points using the Run Toolbar Back icon However if a test ends automatically after the last point there is no opportunity to repeat points when the last point has completed This option determines whether COMPASS will pause to allow points to be repeated after the last point is complete or automatically end the test without pause radio button selection There are three choices Enable repeat for fixed time delay After the last test point is complete the test pauses for a fixed time delay During the delay the Run Toolbar Back icon remains active allowing points to be repeated This choice gives the possibility of repeating points after the last point is complete but also causes the test to eventually continue automatically without operator intervention Prompt to repeat Systematically pauses the test at the end of each test cycle and prompts the user to indicate whether the last test point should be repeated This selection guarantees that the operator will consider whether to repeat points but it also prevents the test from completing automatically No repeat option The test will concludes automatically after the last point There is no opportunit
317. e that is not used for any specific COMPASS function Any type of final output can be designated as an auxiliary output Therefore all devices setup in COMPASS are available for selection in each auxiliary device dropdown list Up to 10 individual auxiliary outputs can be used Measureands already used in other parts of COMPASS can also be used as Auxiliary Sources An output already used by COMPASS cannot be used as an auxiliary data source Typically the output of a device is logged to the Data File automatically see 14 9 Data In File Tab Selecting the output as an auxiliary data source would yield redundant data Page 181 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Default Hardware Configuration m usiliary Output Sources Auxiliary Device 1 NONE Auxiliary Device 2 NONE ej Auxiliary Device 3 NONE sj Auxiliary Device 4 NONE Auxiliary Device 5 NONE Auxiliary Device 5 Auxiliary Device 7 NONE Auxiliary Device 8 NE ej Auriliary Device 9 NONE e Auxiliary Device 10 NONE Figure 120 Default Hardware Configuration Auxiliary Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 182 13 SETUP PRESSURE MEDIA 13 Setup PRESSURE MEDIA The Pressure Media Editor provides features to create edit and remove pressure media that used by COMPASS in calculating fluid head Corrections Access the Pressure Medium Editor using Setup
318. easured by the reference line pressure device FinalTemperature Double Temperature measured by the device reference temperature FSError Double Difference between the reference and DUT measurements divided by the span of the DUT presented as a percentage LinePresCycle Integer Line Pressure Cycle Used to Import Data into Test Data Class DataPointCollection clsDataPoint ParentTestKey Long Integer Link to a specific test Primary Key Point Text Text that is used to differentiate separate data points PresCycle Integer Pressure Cycle Used to Import Data into Test Data Class DataPointCollection clsDataPoint PresPnt Integer Individual Pressure Point Used to Import Data into Test Data Class DataPointCollection clsDataPoint RdgError 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Double Page 250 Difference between the reference and DUT measurements DATABASEFIELD DATA TYPE 21 DATA DATABASE DATA VIEWER DESCRIPTION divided by the reference pressure presented as a percentage RefCounts Integer Number of measurements used to determine the average reference pressure value ReflD Long Integer COMPASS Device Database Key for the reference RefMass Double The total mass load of the reference This field applies to piston gauge and deadweight tester type DUTs only RefMassList Text List of individual masses curr
319. eate Data File Press this button to create a new Data File A standard windows filebox allows the selection of the Data File name and location The choices in Options Data File determine the default file naming convention and file location It also specifies whether or not to automatically name the file and avoid the filebox prompt A separate Data File is created for every active DUT If there are no DUTs only one Data File is created However no DUT information is logged Log a single data Logs the instantaneous output of all devices to the Data File This is identical point in function to using a 0 averaging time in a test All non automated devices must have their outputs entered in the lt Manual Data Entry gt window Average and take Average all devices according to the active averaging method This is 1 point identical to averaging data during a test Both automatic and manual averages can be used to average the data The drop down arrow displays a m menu that lists the automatic and manual averaging options The option with an preceding it is the active averaging mode To change the automatic averaging time select it in the menu and enter the desired averaging time in the input box that follows Data can be automatically averaged from 1 to 9999s Ei 5s Averaging Time Manual Averaging Figure 41 Manual Averaging Options Page 81 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESS
320. eater of the two Figure 31 Span or Reading Greater of FS or Reading greater of The tolerance is calculated at each point as both FS and Reading The tolerance used is the greater of the two This tolerance is graphically equivalent to Span or Reading greater of Const in Final Unit or Reading greater of The Reading tolerance is calculated at each point and compared to the const tolerance value The tolerance used is the greater of the two This tolerance is graphically equivalent to Span or Reading greater of Span Reading The tolerance is calculated at each point as both Span and Reading The tolerance used is the sum of the two Figure 32 Span Reading FS Reading The tolerance is calculated at each point as both FS and Reading Tolerance used is the sum of the two This tolerance is graphically equivalent to Span Reading Const in Final Unit Reading The Reading tolerance is calculated at each point and compared to the constant tolerance value The tolerance used is the greater of the two This tolerance is graphically equivalent to Span Reading Const in Raw Unit Reading The Reading tolerance is calculated at each point and added to the const tolerance value This tolerance is graphically equivalent to Span Reading No Tolerance Specification There is no tolerance specification 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Pag
321. eater than 1 under Complete Test Cycles The complete test point sequence will run for the number of times specified without initializing between runs If all test operation aspects are automated and Tools Options End Test Prompt to repeat last test point is NOT checked the cycles will run without interruption Create a custom plot of data logged in the Data File There are two ways of going about this First COMPASS provides the ability to create custom plots within the Plot Properties toolbar option see 20 4 Create Edit Plots A label for the plot as well as the X and Y data can be setup The second method requires the use of a third party spreadsheet application Microsoft Excel for example Import the delimited COMPASS Data File and use plot functions within the tool to create a plot see 22 2 Export To Excel 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 96 6 HOW DO I Avoid having to go through undesired initialization steps each time a test is started Use the Finish button to automatically complete the test initialization Selections that are not explicitly defined by a Test Definition or a previous configuration will use a default selection Abort a test that is running Press the Abort key on the Run Test Toolbar Add or remove pressure test point while editing a Test Definition In the Test Definition Points Table click the point number or the Insert button to display a list of point options
322. ecific setup using the Setup Selector see 4 1 Setup Selector This is a more efficient way to select a specific setup than scrolling through existing setups Scroll Select KE gt scroll bar Scrolls to the next setup in ascending alphabetical order by lt Record Label gt Page 31 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 4 3 DEVICE EDITORS 4 31 OVERVIEW Device Definitions identify and define the devices that COMPASS uses to measure control and acquire data Device Definitions are created edited and deleted using Device Editors See Section 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept and become familiar with the eupport concepte before using Device Editore 4 3 2 CREATING AND EDITING DEVICE DEFINITIONS WTH DEVICE EDITORS Device Definitions are divided into three main types Each type has its own Device Editor e DUTs are set up in the DUT Editor see 9 Setup DUT e Support Devices are set up in the Support Device Editor see 10 Setup Support Device e Piston Gauge Deadweight Testers Platforms Piston Cylinders Mass Sets and Mass Bells are set up in various Piston Gauge Editors all other devices are set up in the Support Device Editor see 11 Setup Piston Gauge All of the Device Editors have common features that are described in sections 4 3 3 Header Tab to 4 3 8 Comment Tab The Editors provide features to view create and remove final outputs
323. ecommended for users that share metrological elements between platforms In this method piston cylinders mass sets and mass bells are stored once in COMPASS database rather than in each individual PG7000 platform COMPASS calculates pressures and mass loads Piston position rotation and other ambient condition measurements provided by the Piston Gauge are defined as individual final outputs when the platform is defined To use this method follow the steps below If the PG7000 piston cylinder mass set and mass bell information is loaded in PG7000 it must be extracted from the PG7000 into the COMPASS database using the PG7000 Setup Extractor If not the metrological elements must be set up using the Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell Editors Setup the PG7000 Piston Gauge Platform without the Auto Detect Setup option checked and define the remote interface settings on the Communications tab Use the Output tab to set up final outputs for ambient pressure ambient temperature ambient humidity piston position piston rotation and reference vacuum if available O Save the Piston Gauge Platform information using the Editor Toolbar Save icon This updates the list of available final outputs for selection in the next step 6 Select the Sources tab and choose the PG7000 being setup as the source for the Platform Conditions Sources Select the P C MS tab and define which metrological elements are supported by the
324. ected view type automatically displays in each database frame Choose the individual setups to copy in the Merge Database or the Active COMPASS Setup Database frames then press the Up or Down arrow to copy the data from one database to the other Use the Clear and AII buttons to quickly de select or to select all options in a frame et All dependencies of setups copied from one database to another are copied The one exception is for macro dependencies within a macro That is a function within a macro is not automatically copied when the main macro function is copied to another database The database file Default mdb is installed with COMPASS and can be updated from the website This file contains default setup information and many example setups This file is typically used as the Merge Database It is also useful to use information from this database when a default setup in the active database becomes corrupt or is deleted COMPASS Database Maintenance Tool Data to View Example Device Setups Merge Database C Program Files COMPASS for Pressure D efault mdb Example Agilent 34401 a Agilent 344014 Example Example DH Instruments PG7601 DH Instruments PG7601 Example Example DH Instruments PPC2 DH Instruments PPC2 Example Example DH Instruments PPC2 DH Instruments PPC2 Example Example DH Instruments PPC24F DH Instruments PPC2AF Example Example DH Instruments PPC3 DH Instruments PPC3 Example Example
325. ections of each type of metrological element that is available for use with a platform prevents errors and saves time during Test Initialization During Test Initialization COMPASS only offers elements specifically setup on this tab when the platform is being used When an incorrect metrological element is used during a test significant errors can occur Press the Editor Toolbar Edit icon next to the specific metrological element to edit the corresponding list A prompt to lt Support All gt displays when the Edit button is pressed It is recommended to use the lt Support All gt choice only when all the metrological elements in the COMPASS database can be used with the PG7000 Platform that is being setup If the response to the prompt to lt Support All gt is lt No gt the COMPASS Piston Cylinder Mass Set or Mass Bell Selector displays to allow the specific element to be selected see figure below Double click elements on the left side of the list to add them to the list of supported items Double click the items on the right side of the display to remove them from the supported list When selecting piston Cylinders Mass Sets and Mass Belle to be used with Piston Gauge Platform keep in mind that metrological elemente used with a platform must be of the same type as the platform Piston Gauge or Deadweight Tester 2 Piston Cylinder Selector ET TESFERTE Piston Cylinder Selector DHI PC 117 DHI P C 153 REZ DH Instruments
326. ects Enter a followed by the function name and any function parameters in the Debug Windows at the bottom of the editor Data File and Report Macros should be tested and verified in the COMPASS Report Editor using the same basic techniques mentioned above Before troubleshooting a macro make sure that the macro ie selected for the device in question or assigned to a report template The most common problem in macro is a misspelled variable Always double check spelling The exact macro function name must be set to the return value of the function for COMPASS to properly process the macro 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 214 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR 18 5 MACRO TYPES There are 8 different types of COMPASS macros Each macro has a specific purpose and is provided with unique parameter input When a macro is selected it is called by COMPASS during test execution to complete a specific operation The macros are selected in specific COMPASS editors Table 63 summarizes the different types of COMPASS macros how they are used and when they can be used A typical device macro sequence is detailed in Figure 141 Understanding this sequence is important to understand how each macro interacts with the output of an instrument Table 63 COMPASS Macro Types Summary MACRO TYPE DESCRIPTION Data File Data File Macros are used to manipulate data stored in the test Data File These macros are used in the repor
327. ed by default Delete all text in the field to not use a command terminator Do not enter empty quotes COMPASS sends only the exact text specified by the remote command to the remote device Response Terminator text entry drop down list selection Defines when COMPASS will consider an individual response to be complete This option is not available in IEEE 488 communications With IEEE 488 there are hardware level assertions that define the end of a command and response The selections available from the drop down list are lt CR gt Carriage return ASCII character 13 lt LF gt Line feed ASCII character 10 lt CR gt lt LF gt Carriage return line feed ASCII characters 13 and 10 This is the most common selection and is selected by default lt CR gt lt LF gt Carriage return OR line feed must be detected in the device response ASCII characters 13 or 10 gt Read at least characters from the RS232 buffer before assuming the response is complete No physical buffer limitations are imposed When characters are received from the remote device the response data is used by COMPASS This type of termination is useful when a final character is not used to mark the end of a response COMPASS limits the RS232 buffer to characters When the buffer is full the response is considered complete and the data in the buffer is used by COMPASS This type of termination is useful when the remote response is always a fi
328. ed features with the potential to be misused and or misunderstood Check the How Do I section of this manual for an explanation on how to properly use COMPASS for several common applications as well as quick tips on how to use many features Before assuming that unexpected behavior is caused by a software or hardware defect the operator should use this manual in conjunction with the documentation on other devices used with COMPASS to troubleshoot and identify normal behavior The following section contains suggestions and solutions to resolve many commonly encountered issues Identify the unexpected behavior from the symptoms list in Table 108 A Probable Cause and Solution are proposed including cross references to sections in this manual that may be of assistance When communicating with a DHI technical service representative it is best to note the specific COMPASS behavior and the steps used that led to that behavior Attempting to diagnose the problem prior to communicating this behavior frequently delays the resolution of the problem Table 108 Troubleshooting SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION Ascending and descending points must agree within 1 to determine a hysteresis value Define a test that has identical ascending and descending test points The test report logs N A as the hysteresis value The DUT s specified lt Process Command or lt Manipulate Response Use Tools Remote Communications entry is incorrec
329. ed target pressure The required masses to load are selected in the Mass List and displayed on the Masses to Load panel The corresponding nominal mass and true mass totals display in the Nominal Mass and True Mass fields see 16 Tools Piston Gauge Calculator Only Pressure Entry Mode and Nominal Mass Entry Mode use this mass loading protocol see 16 2 Calculation Modes The Mass Selection Mode allows the operator to directly select the individual masses to use to solve the pressure equation Masses are not selected in True Mass Entry Mode In principal the method resembles the protocol in the PG7000 refer to the PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual Mass Loading Protocol First the required nominal mass load is determined based on the target pressure or mass value entered The true mass load is determined when nominal mass values are not specified in the mass set see 11 4 3 Mass Set Tab Starting with the piston and bell if necessary the masses are selected from largest to smallest respecting the current mass loading resolution until the target mass value is achieved If a makeup mass is selected in the mass set it is selected for loading immediately following the mass bell if the current mass load requires it Masses that do not meet the mass loading resolution limit are not used As a result the requested pressure may differ significantly from the actual pressure available based on the mass set mass increment A Alw
330. ed within a Relationship Macro will be interrupted The status bar is not systematically updated when running Manual Tests Therefore most status messages will remain on the status bar indefinitely Make sure the status bar is cleared by using as the sMsg parameter To manually clear the status bar double click the text This example will display the text Hello World on the COMPASS status bar cCOMPASS StatusDisplay Hello World StepBack Programmatically press the Step Back button cCOMPASS StepNext None None Unlike the button on the toolbar each call to this method moves the current test point back by 1 see Run test Tools 5 4 1 The individual test steps are skipped In many cases it is desirable to repeat a test point if the controller or piston gauge was not ready while averaging or if the DUT is out of tolerance These cases are automatically handled by COMPASS options see Run Test Tab 14 4 This method should never be used when a Manual Test is running Check the RunMode property of the COMPASS Class to verify the current test type if necessary Page 346 28 COMPASS OBJECTS This example demonstrates how to repeat a test point The macro is designed to automatically repeat test points that do not repeat within 5096 of their tolerance specification It requires a test with multiple test pressure cycles and a DUT with a valid tolerance specification Each point in the test must use this
331. edit an existing final output Final output defining information is entered on the Output Relationship Editor that appears when adding or editing a final output see 4 3 6 2 Output Relationship Editor If necessary press the Edit Commands button to modify or create remote commands required to read the raw output from the device The fully formatted remote commands must result in a numeric output in the Raw Output Unit specified on the Output Relationship Editor Raw Output tab The Remote Command Editor provides features to handle this operation see 4 4 Remote Command Editor When defining remote commands for a particular output use Initialization Commands as needed to set the device to the state expected by the Output Relationship Editor setup It is expected that the response to the command is in the Raw Output Unit Initialization commands can be used to assure the device is set to output in the correct unit of measure In some cases an output may correspond to a specific range of a device Again use initialization commands to set this range With few exceptions COMPASS does not limit the type of final outputs that can be created for a device nor does it limit the number of final outputs that a device can support Create as many final outputs as desired and appropriate for the device Remove final outputs by pressing the Remove button DUT Definitions of simple type DUTs have a simplified Output tab and Output Relations
332. ee Section 23 for additional details on remote communications in COMPASS The available Data Acquisition Types are Manual Output values are entered manually by the operator and or set values are executed manually by the operator No further selections on the Communications tab are necessary Read and or set values will be communicated remotely using an RS232 interface Settings specific to the RS232 interface must be complete on the tab Remote commands to read and or set with the device are setup on the Output and or Set tabs Refer to section 25 2 RS232 Interface for information on RS232 settings and options HART via RS232 Read data by using an RS232 to HART converter as the remote interface see 25 5 HART via RS232 Settings specific to the RS232 interface must be complete on the tab Remote commands are defined internally by COMPASS by using the HART protocol No remote command setup is required This option is cannot be used for controlling devices IEEE 488 Read and or set values will be communicated remotely using an IEEE 488 interface Remote commands to read and or control with the device are setup on the Output and or Set tabs Remote commands to read and or set with the device are setup on the Output and or Set tabs Refer to section 25 3 IEEE 488 interface for details on the IEEE 488 interface and settings The active IEEE 488 interface card manufacturer is selected in Tools Options Interface see 14
333. eets the minimum requirement there is no noticeable impact on program performance unless an indefinite loop is used within the macro When a macro is required to handle or use the change in output of one or more devices or if the macro will execute a loop for an extended amount of time use the cCOMPASS TimeDelay method see 28 9 2 This method returns the shared program thread back to the main program This allows the output of all instruments to update in their various objects and on the corresponding run screens In most cases a delay time of 0 5 seconds is all that is required Because of the shared program thread a macro that locks up will effectively lock up COMPASS To avoid this potential problem systematically check the state of the cCOMPASS SystemAbort property if the macro will execute a loop see 28 9 1 When this value is TRUE COMPASS has aborted so any active macro should also abort Page 231 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 18 7 VARIABLE AND FUNCTION SCOPE As with any other programming language each function and variable used within a macro has a specific scope Knowing the proper function and variable scope can greatly simplify macro development In many cases a well developed function can be used many times from different macros A macro can represent one or many functions The only requirement is that the first function represent the macro called by COMPASS Any number of sup
334. ef description of the setup steps Realize that remote commands are specific to each device When using devices other than those used in these examples refer to the actual device documentation so that the proper commands are used 6 3 2 EXAMPLE 1 DMM How do setup my HP34401A DMM to measure voltage current and resistance in COMPASS The HP34401A is a popular high accuracy Hewlett Packard Agilent multimeter that has IEEE 488 and RS232 interfaces This instrument supports almost all electrical output measurement types voltage current resistance frequency and period This is perfect example of an instrument that should be setup with multiple outputs e Open the Support Device Editor and press the New toolbar option to create a new support device e Enter information on the Header tab appropriate for the DMM see 4 3 3 Header Tab e Enter information on the Calibration tab to track the calibration history of the DMM see 4 3 4 Calibration Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 98 6 HOW DO I Select the remote interface that COMPASS will use to communicate with the DMM on the Communications tab see 4 3 5 Communications Tab In this example select IEEE 488 This requires the HP34401a to be setup in IEEE mode with a known address Enter this address on the tab in the appropriate field Select the Output tab and press Add to create a new output see 4 3 6 Output Tab The first output will b
335. eference Level Height at which pressures are defined PG7000 defines pressures at its reference level Fluid head corrections correct the pressure relative to the reference level Regulation The ability to use a controller to set a target based on the measurement of another device This is commonly used when the absolute measurement capabilities of the controller are poor relative to the absolute measurement capabilities of the reference RPT Reference Pressure Transducer The pressure transducers used in a DH Instruments PPC3 are referred to as RPTs Acronym for Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments This is a common remote command protocol used instruments Many DMM and multiplexers use this command protocol Set Final Set Set Types Defines the nature of the set of a device i e Current Driver Mux Channel Pressure Temperature User Defined Voltage All Final Set s are a sub of Set Types See also Output Types Span The difference between the minimum and the maximum DUT input or output Often referred to as full scale but more meaningful than full scale for DUTs whose minimum output is not zero State Targets Stability Rate of change of an output per second Stability Limit A limit expressed in units of an output pressure temperature etc per second e g psi second The stability limit is used by DHI products and is applied to non DHI products in COMPASS Test Defin
336. eference pressure or output It depends on the purpose of the best fit Typically it is the DUT pressure Y axis data The data may be either the DUT or reference pressure or output It depends on the purpose of the best fit Typically it is the reference pressure 29 4 LINEARITY COMPASS determines the terminal based linearity of the DUT errors relative to the reference readings The linearity value can be included in reports There are two possible linearity calculations depending upon the test point sequence If the test point sequence is made up of corresponding ascending and descending or vice versa points linearity is calculated by taking the average between corresponding DUT pressures drawing a straight line between the minimum and maximum DUT pressure and determining the maximum deviation of any average DUT pressure from this line In this case a hysteresis value is also calculated If the test point sequence is not made up of corresponding ascending and descending or vice versa points linearity is calculated by drawing a straight line between the minimum and maximum DUT points and determining the maximum deviation of any one point from this line In this case hysteresis is not calculated Page 353 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL If the minimum and maximum reference pressures in the test sequence are equal linearity cannot be calculated and COMPASS displays N A in
337. efficient2 Text User calibration correction applied last time CalibrationCoefficient3 Text User calibration correction applied last time CalibrationCoefficient4 Text User calibration correction applied last time CalibrationCoefficient5 Text User calibration correction applied last time CalibrationCoefficient6 Text User calibration correction applied last time CustomerID Text Identifies the original owner DAQMethod Text Method which was used to communicate with the device during the test DatabaseKey Long Integer Location Key in the COMPASS Test Device Database DeviceKey Long Integer Primary Key for Table DeviceType Text Designates what the device was used for in the test ie DUT REF AUX DWTGravity Double Gravity value used by a DWT Deadweight Tester DWTGravityUnit Text Unit of DWT Gravity FinalOutputMax Double Maximum value attainable by the device FinalOutputMin Double Minimum value attainable by the device FinalOutputSpan Double Difference between the maximum and minimum final outputs of the device FinalOutputTolerance1 Text Primary output tolerance statement for device FinalOutputTolerance2 Text Additional output tolerance statement for the device FinalOutputTolerance3 Text Additional output tolerance statement for the device FinalOutputTole
338. efined in the VB Script function can directly execute to complete an operation and return the results to COMPASS In addition the macro can call ActiveX controls DLLs and other programs to complete a task The code in the macro can change the state of object variables in COMPASS using the COMPASS object model Detailed information VB Script is beyond the scope of this document Visit http msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us script5G html vtoriVBScript asp for complete language reference Realize that VB Script can call other programs that expose functions to the Windows environment Therefore any language that supports ActiveX technology can be used to develop the code used by the macro The COMPASS macro would simply call this newly developed program 18 2 VBSCRIPT VB Script is the macro language of COMPASS for Pressure This a common scripting language used in many applications This section includes information related to common problems and benefits associated with VB Script Although VB Script is very similar to Visual Basic there are a few key differences 1 Variables cannot be declared with a specific data type All variables are of the Variant data type The type conversion functions cDec cSng cStr cDbl ect must be used to obtain a specific data type when required by a function 2 VB Script is not fully compiled Therefore most errors in the code are not detectable until the macro is used 3
339. eful when the remote response is always a fixed number of characters Delete all text in the field to not use a response terminator Do not enter empty quotes COMPASS assumes that any response is complete when data has been retrieved from the remote device and new data is not received for 300ms If no data is returned from the device a Timeout error occurs This is really a safety feature to prevent false device time outs in the many devices that do not have a specific Response Terminator gt Page 42 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES 4 3 6 OUTPUT TAB The Output tab is common to the definition editor for all device setups in COMPASS that have outputs This includes DUT Support Device and Piston Gauge Platform Editors The features on the Output tab are used to define a device s final outputs Final output creation is not required for all devices Piston Gauge Platform Definitions do not require a final output setup nor do DHI products created with the Auto Detect Setup option selected 5 5 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic is critical to proper setup of the Output tab With the exception of simple type DUT Definitions the features on the Output tab are the same for all device setups Press the Add button to create a new final output for the device or press the Edit Final Output button to
340. ence Temperature Pressure Control Line Pressure Control Temperature Control Manual Control Cancel Figure 118 Default Hardware Configuration Environment Tab Table 52 Default Hardware Configuration Environment Tab Fields OUTPUT SET TYPE OUTPUT SET SOURCE CHOICES Ambient Pressure The list includes all devices setup with a final output of Ambient Pressure or General Pressure Select the default ambient pressure source device Ambient Temperature The list includes all devices setup with a final output of Ambient Temperature or General Temperature Select the default ambient temperature source device Ambient Humidity The list includes all devices setup with a final output of Ambient Humidity Select the default ambient humidity source device Reference Vacuum The list includes all devices setup with a final output of Reference Vacuum or General Pressure Select the default reference vacuum source device Reference Pressure The list includes all devices setup with a final output of Reference Pressure or General Pressure Select the default reference pressure source device This selection does not have to change to use a different pressure reference when running a test A reference pressure source device selection may be made during Test Initialization The reference pressure is compared to the DUT pressure during tests Reference Line Pressure The list includes all devices setup
341. entified by the value entered in this field see 14 3 Initialize Test Tab This label may also be used in Test Initialization In many cases a useful label is one that is equivalent to the lt Set Type gt Select the Set Type The Set Type is a broad classification of sets that determines the available Final Set Types Select the Final Set to define for what function s the set capabilities will be used by COMPASS The Final Set selection ultimately determines for what purposes the device will be available when setting up and running tests Select the Unit in which the final setpoint is defined COMPASS automatically converts to this set unit as required Pressure sets also require a Pressure Measurement Modes selection Enter the Minimum and lt Maximum gt final setpoint values These determine the span and full scale of the final set COMPASS limits any target output to 110 of the lt Maximum gt value entered Select the Resolution to apply to the final setpoint Use a resolution appropriate for the device The final set definition is complete Detailed information on all selections are provided in the Set Relationship Editor Final Set Tab Fields Table see Table 21 Page 66 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Table 21 Set Relationship Editor Final Set Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Final Set Label A user defined label that describes the final set of the device This label
342. ently loaded at the point Each mass is delmited by a colon gt For example piston bell 5kg 1kg RefMaxPressure Double Maximum pressure value recorded while averaging the reference pressure RefMinPressure Double Minimum pressure value recorded while averaging the reference pressure RefPistonPosition Double Position of the piston at the time of measurement RefPistonRotation Double Speed at which reference mass was measurement was recorded rotating when RefPressure Double Pressure as recorded or generated by the reference RefRawOutput1 Double Value of the 1 reference raw output RefRawOutput2 Double Value of the 2 reference raw output when applicable RefRawOutput3 Double Value of the 3 reference raw output when applicable RefReferenceVacuum Double Value of vacuum used by the reference RefStnDev Double Standard Deviation of the reference measurement pressure RefTemperature Double Temperature viewed recorded by the reference SetErrorFS Double Difference between the set pressure and actual reference pressure divided by the span of the DUT presented as a percentage SetErrorRdg Difference between the set pressure and actual reference pressure divided by the reference pressure presented as a percentage SetPointLinePres Double Line pressure set point specified by the Test
343. ents Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL The database tables are related to one another through the use of a common key value named TestKey The TestKey is the unique record identifier for an individual Test table record This key is auto generated when a data file is added to the database and is present in all tables Test TestKey Devices ParentTestKey and Data ParentTestKey Each test saved to the database will reside as a single record in the test table but multiple records will be created in both the Devices and Data tables to store associated information Figure 156 displays the table relationship Manufacturer Model 1 GerialNi imher NumPresPoints NumPresCydes NumLinePresCydes NumTempCycles PresMeasMode LinePresMeasMode COMPASSVersion Figure 156 COMPASS Test Data Database Table Links 214 CREATE SEARCH QUERY One advanced function of the Data Viewer is the ability to search through the database and extract only certain tests that match a limited criterion There are two basic ways with which to perform this search Use the Query Builder or compose an SQL statement These options are available by selecting the Search icon on the toolbar This displays the Create Search Query dialog The Query Builder is located in the upper portion of the window This is a simple interface used for building complex SQL statements Select the field to limit in the database and then included the criteria to be app
344. ents Inc Page 270 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR 23 4 6 TABLE Tables are useful for either providing a fixed layout or for presenting lists of data Tables are also used in conjunction with dynamic data fields to display test data from COMPASS for Pressure files see 23 12 2 Tables It is good practice to separate tables with at least a space A table is required to use data field links that represent test data acquired at each point of a test This type of data is referred to as dynamic data 23 4 7 TOOLS Options Edit Plots Edit Macros Figure 175 COMPASS Report Editor Tools Menu Table 80 COMPASS Report Editor Tools Menu Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Options Displays the Options form see Error Reference source not found Error Reference source not found Edit Plots Opens the COMPASS Plot Tool in order to create edit or delete plots see 20 4 Create Edit Plots Edit Macros Opens the COMPASS Macro Editor in order to create edit or delete macros see 18 Tools COMPASS Macro Editor 23 48 WINDOW The Window menu contains a list of the file names of all open documents in the COMPASS Report Editor Any document selected in the list becomes the current top document in the editor As an alternative to using this menu feature clicking any open document in the display can make it the current top document Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical v 1Untitled 1
345. eport format reports can be created as ASCII txt rich text file rtf Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP doc documents or PDF files PDF files can be created only when Adobe Acrobat is installed on the PC running the Report Editor Report templates are files that resemble reports except special placeholders are used instead of actual data Format the template to look like the desired report by directly entering text and images that are a permanent part of the report Then drag and drop fields from the Available Data Fields panel into the template Each field represents data that will be read from the selected Data File and added to the report All information in the data file as well as many common calculations Data File Macros and Report Macros are available as fields see 18 5 Macro Types The ability to insert data file links at any location within a report template using flexible text formatting is one of the most important features of the report editor Report generation always begins by selecting a report template and the data file or files to use for report generation Any Data File Macros stored in the selected report template are processed These macros may add new columns of data or manipulate existing data in the data file The process proceedes by replacing each field in the report template with the proper data When all fields are replaced the report is complete see Figure 168 Page 263 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc C
346. equired the automatic initialization halts and a prompt for the necessary input is presented The following sections detail the Test Initialization process Select Test Units User ID Specify the units of measure to use for the test pressure line pressure and test temperature points and confirm enter the User ID Units selected for quantities not used have no effect on the test Select DUT s Choose the DUT or DUTs for testing Depending on the Test Definition a DUT is not required Double click DUTs in the grid to use them for testing see 7 3 2 Select DUT s 6 Configure DUT s Make selections specific to the DUT such as range and serial number information for profile DUTs Specific support hardware required by the DUT is selected at this time see 7 3 3 Configure DUT s Devices O Select Test Select the Test Definition to use By default the Test Definition associated with the first DUT is selected If the first DUT does not include a Test Definition the last used Test Definition is selected by default Double click the desired Test Definition to use see 7 3 4 Select Test Verify Test Hardware References and controllers defined in the test are listed for verification If the Test Definition is not locked the specific test hardware selections can be altered O Configure Test Hardware Make selections specific to each configured device In most cases only specific range selections and or remote interface set
347. er communications settings required on this tab Because this is a simple DUT the output tab includes settings for only 1 output see Figure 56 Enter the given DUT output information It is important to specify the proper units of measure and Minimum and Maximum output values It is important to select Voltage Measurement as the Source on the Raw Output frame The selection of Voltage Measurements tells COMPASS that a voltage measuring device must be selected by the user during Test Initialization see 7 3 3 Configure DUT s Devices Page 101 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL DUT Editor DUT Record Label E ample Voltage DUT Header Calibration Communications Output Raw Output Final Qutput Output Type Voltage Y Final Output Label Pressure Source Voltage Measurement Measurement Mode Absolute Output Unit vo Unit ka Minimum 0 0000 Minimum 0 0000 Maximum spp i 5 0000 Maximum 100 0000 Resolution 0 0001 x Resolution 5 0001 X Tolerance Span NES Span 0 010 Close Figure 56 Example Voltage DUT Setup e Save the DUT by pressing the Save toolbar option e Execute a Manual Test to use the DUT with the DMM by selecting the Run Run Manual Test menu choice The Run Test Setup form displays to begin the Test Initialization process Select the DUT from the list of available DUTs and press Next The DUT conf
348. er device definitions are created following the same principles as other multiplexer device definition Start by creating a support device and defining an output for each electrical measurement that will be used by COMPASS All output settings and the remote command setups are no different than any other DMM setup The raw and final output relationship should be Same and the remote command to read the output of the device must be defined However a macro is required to delimit the response see Figure 8 The macro code reads the response to the scan list and passes data to the devices that use the multiplexer see Table 6 Information from various COMPASS objects is required for the creation of this macro see 28 COMPASS Objects and 18 5 6 Reply Parser Macros The macro should not return a value since all outputs are already updated Therefore the Tools Options Run Test feature should be used to disable the Wait for update from each remote device while averaging option The multiplexer Set definition must be setup to use a macro to create a scan list based on the output type of the DUTs and the multiplexer channel used by each of the DUTs Most instruments only require the scan list command 1 time so it should be defined as an initialization command Since the remote command requires knowledge of the current DUT setup a Get Command Macro is used to crate the scan list command see Table 6 Each read request from an output automatica
349. erage 20 Default Complete Test Cycles 4 Ambient Temperature Lock Test Setup Default 1 Local Test Ambient Humidity Test Event Macro NONE ay None m Multiplexer Post Test Macro bd None Figure 107 Test Editor Data Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 154 8 SETUP TEST Table 43 Test Editor Data Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Timed Manual Averaging list box selection Determines a fixed or user selectable time over which data is averaged at each pressure point When lt Timed gt is specified COMPASS averages for the fixed Averaging Time entered O to 9999 seconds Manual averaging allows either a fixed time or user selectable starting and stopping of averaging at each point Averaging only occurs in devices that use a remote interface As many readings as possible are taken during the averaging period The min max standard deviation and number of samples of the reference and DUT are logged to the Data File see 21 5 3 DATA Table Complete Test Cycles numeric entry COMPASS can run up to 10 complete test cycles in one test This includes executing all test operations defined in the test definition for the number of times entered The pre test choices are used on the first complete test cycle Do not confuse this option with the Pressure Cycles option found on the Pressure tab Lock Test Setup check box Check this option
350. esponse and passes the data to the DUTs that use the response Reply Raw unmanipulated response of a device ParamID Parameter ID of the device cRange Device Range class that the output applies to TO E IO IO IIS IO IO Function ParseScanListRead Reply ParamID cRange When a 34970A is used to scan multiple channels at the same time it responds with all data collected from a simple Read command Look at the CreateScanList GetCommand MACRO With this setup parse the responses into the various raw outputs of the devices but DO NOT RETURN a value for the function The Raw Output Update will update the output of each device automatically This code assumes that the channels are defined in order inc Store response position With cCOMPASS cConfig Use global COMPASS Configuration object for i 1 to DUTPrs Count chnl dutPrs i RangeMain MuxChannel if chnl gt 0 and chnl lt 60 then The device is setup to use a MUX So get it s Raw Output inc inc 1 Step to the next position in the response temp qextract reply inc inc 1 Get a value by using a Global Macro dutPrs i RangeMain RawOutput GetVal temp Update the output of the DUT end if next End With Never Respond We already updated the data for all of the DUTs ParseScanListRead End Function Page 25 2002 2004 DH Instruments
351. essure the criteria used to determine if the pressure has been set are the same as those used when setting pressure for any other test point Whether the test will continue on timeout is determined by the Abort Test On Failure setting see below in this table If pressure control is Manual the leak test set pressure timeout is ignored Page 141 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FIELD DESCRIPTION Leak Rate Limit Defines the leak test pass fail criterion in pressure unit aaaaaaa second The pressure aaaaaaa s unit is the Leak Test Pressure Unit The leak rate is calculated in pressure unit per second following total pressure change during the leak test time divided by the leak test time in seconds If the absolute value of the calculated leak rate is greater than the Leak Rate Limit gt the leak test fails numeric entry field Dwell Specifies the amount of time to wait after the pressure has been set before aborting pressure control and starting the leak test measurements A dwell delay improves the reliability of the leak test by allowing adiabatic effects to settle out prior to beginning the actual leak test numeric entry field Leak Test Time Defines the amount of time over which the leak testing pressure measurement is made The appropriate amount of time depends on the characteristics of the test system and the leak rate limit When setting the leak test time
352. essure Final Output Ambient Pressure Support Device Raw Output 1 Output Source Manipulator Final Output 1 1 1 Barometer Type Pressure RS 232 Pressure Monitor with RS 232 Communications and Reference Pressure gauge Final Output Final Output 1 Reference Pressure gauge Support Device Raw Output 1 Output Source Manipulator Pressure Monitor Type Pressure RS 232 1 1 Pressure Monitor with RS 232 Communications and the Barometer Final Output as Second Raw Output to Reference Pressure absolute Final Output Manipulator a Support Device Raw Output 1 Output Source Raw Output 1 Final Output 2 Reference Pressure Pressure Monitor Type Pressure RS 232 bsolut Raw Output 2 absolute Final Output 1 Output Source Barometer Ambient Output Ambient Pressure Pressure 2 3 3 3 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER WITH VOLTAGE RAW OUTPUT READ BY DMM AND CONVERTED TO PRESSURE FINAL OUTPUT DMM with IEEE 488 Communications Current Measurement Final Output Final Output 2 Support Device Raw Output 1 DMM Current Measurement Output Source Manipulator Type Current 1 1 IEEE 488 DMM with IEEE 488 Communications and Voltage Measurement Final Output Support Device Raw Output 1 Output Source Manipulator Final Output 1 DMM Type Voltage IEEE 488 1 1 Voltage Measurement Pressure Transducer with Voltage Raw Output and D
353. essure based on the setup information in the Piston Gauge Calculator display The calculation mode is set automatically by making a selection or an entry in the Mass List Pressure Nominal Mass Load or Mass fields The four modes are e Mass Selection Mode Manually select masses from the Mass List and enter a value in the Trim Mass field and COMPASS calculates the resulting pressure Trim Masses are available with Piston Gauge Type Piston Gauges Platforms only e Pressure Entry Mode Enter a target pressure value in the Pressure field COMPASS selects the mass set masses required to set the target pressure as close as possible using the current mass loading resolution setting Decrease the mass loading resolution to set pressure closer to the target value e Nominal Mass Entry Mode Enter a mass value within 0 1 kg in the Nominal Mass Load and trim mass in the Trim Mass field if trim mass is being used COMPASS calculates the resulting true mass load and the resulting pressure The masses loaded following normal COMPASS mass loading protocol are checked in Mass List table e True Mass Entry Mode Enter the total true mass load in the True Mass Load field COMPASS calculates the resulting pressure Trim masses and the individual mass selector are not used 16 3 MASS LOADING PROTOCOL The mass loading protocol is used to allow COMPASS to consistently select masses to load to achieve a desir
354. ester Type Platforms the Mass Bell is included in the Mass Set The information on the Mass Bell tab of the Mass Bell Editor define the true mass and density of the mass bell so the this information is available to COMPASS to calculate the complete mass load on the piston and the resulting final output pressure After a Mass Bell is defined future changes using the editor are required only for maintenance purposes For this reason and due to the critical metrological impact errors in Mass Bell can cause restricting user access to the Mass Bell Editor is highly recommended Administrative users can assign user rights with Database Users 24 3 Database Users Edit Mass Bells by selecting the appropriate tab and editing the necessary information Press the Save option on the main Editor Toolbar to save all changes to the setup 11 5 1 HEADER TAB See section 4 3 3 Header Tab 11 5 2 CALIBRATION TAB See section 4 3 4 Calibration Tab Page 175 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 11 5 3 MASS BELL TAB The Mass Bell tab provides fields to define the metrological characteristics of a Mass Bell Entries that have an asterisk next to them are required E Refer to section 29 8 Piston Gauge Pressure Calculations for details on how the fields on the Mass Bell tab are used to solve the pressure equation Errors associated with the values entered directly impact the
355. et Child Tab for a Pressure Controller Page 151 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL General Read Set 1 PPC3 RPT Control Change Before Point Macro Moe Control Mode Dynamic Use Ready Criterion v Hold Stability Unit ZDUTSpan E Hold Setting 4DUTSpan 0 01 Stability Setting DUTSpan s 0 01 N Ready Hold Time s 5 Control Timeout s 300 PPCK RPT Control Add Remove Edit Figure 105 Test Definition Editor Advanced Test Set Child Tab for a Pressure Controller Table 41 Test Definition Editor Points Sequence Tab Set Child Tab for Pressure Controller Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Control Mode list box selection Determines how pressure will be controlled when a DHI PPCx Pressure Controller Calibrator is the selected pressure controller If the pressure controller is not a PPCx this option is disabled see the PPCx Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on dynamic and static pressure control modes Pressures will be set automatically in dynamic control mode in response to COMPASS remote commands Dynamic Static Pressure will be set automatically in static control mode in response to COMPASS remote commands Use Ready Criterion conditional check box The option is valid for controllers that have defined Ready Commands The response to a Ready Command signals to COMPASS when the
356. et Tab Table 50 Mass Set Editor Deadweight Tester Type Mass Set Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Mass Name optional numeric entry An easily identifiable description of an individual mass When masses are used in operation they are listed and need to be recognized by the value entered in this field and their Corresponding Pressure values Typically the label used is a mass number and nominal pressure value Corresponding Pressure required numeric entry The pressure that results when a specific mass is floated at the gravity specified in Gravity The value must be entered in the selected Pressure Unit gt Gravity required numeric entry The gravity at which the pressure associated with each mass is correct This is sometimes known as the mass set gravity or the Deadweight tester gravity The value must be entered in meters per second squared m s COMPASS uses the ratio of this gravity to the Local Gravity value specified in Options to calculate the pressure value of each mass when the Deadweight tester is used at Local Gravity Pressure Unit required drop down list The pressure unit of measure to associate in which the Corresponding Pressure entry is expressed Use the Unit of Measure Converter if needed Mass Set Resolution required drop down list selection The resolution with which pressure values are entered in the Mass field stored in the Ind
357. et point by either using a macro or by substituting the numeric set point for the text x see 4 4 3 Control Set Commands If necessary press the Edit Commands button to modify or create remote commands required to send set point information to the device In addition to Set Commands COMPASS supports the ability to create Ready Not Ready Vent and Abort Control commands This provides complete support of many different types of setting devices or controllers Use Initialization Commands as needed to put the device into the state expected by the Set Relationship Editor setup COMPASS assumes that any target output value in the set command must be formatted in the Set Type unit of measure Initialization commands can be used to assure the device is configured to interpret set commands in the correct unit of measure Proper use of initialization commands can guarantee that the setup is valid even after users have accessed the front panel of the device Header Calibration Communications Dutput Set Final Set Labels Set 1 1 Temperature Raw Set Temperature 0 000 100 000 C Final Set Test Temperature Controt Oto 100C Edit Set Edit Commands Use Ready Status Hold Stabilty Ready E Use Remote Vent Edit Vent Command s Use Remote Control Abort F Manual Control Abort Figure 33 Device Editor Set Tab Page 59 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 18 Device Editor
358. etermine the final output of a measuring device or to change the target output in acontroller The raw andfinal outputs and current Ready status of a device accessed using this class Device Class Access settings stored in a DUT support device or piston guage platform Figure 209 Calculation Class Object Model An asterisk next to a data type indicates that the property value ie read only 28 8 1 PROPERTIES PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION AllDataUpdated Boolean This property returns TRUE when all outputs required by the Calculation Class have been updated Raw Output 1 2 and 3 when applicable and FALSE otherwise This property is checked by COMPASS when the Tools Options Run Test Wait for update from all remote devices option is selected Set the property to TRUE to prevent COMPASS from waiting for an update from a device This is necessary when a macro is used to alter the way a device output is used cDHIClass Object Object reference to the DH Instruments class specific to a DH Instruments product Only instruments setup with the lt Auto Detect Setup gt option enabled use this property The properties events and methods of this object are product specific and are not available at this time cDHIClass SetPressureVolume Read or set the target pressure volume to use for a DHI PPC2 PPCK PPC3 or PPCH pressure controller Specifying a volume with each new target pressure is necessary to i
359. etween line pressure adjustments when line pressure regulation is active LinePrsRegulation Integer Defines the type of line pressure regulation 0 None 1 Regulate to the reference LinePrsRun Boolean TRUE when line pressure points are included in the test file LinePrsUnit Integer The test line pressure unit identifier PointP Test Points Class Test pressure point collection containing information for all test points Access a point by specifying the point array index following code Object PointP 4 will return the 4 pressure point class PointLP Test Points Class Test line pressure point collection containing information for all test points Access a point by specifying the point array index following code Object PointLP 8 will return the 8 line pressure point class Test Points Class Page 321 Test temperature point collection containing information for all test points Access a point by specifying the point array index following Object PointT 5 will return the 5 temperature point class 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PROPERTIES TemperatureDwell DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION The type of temperature dwell to use after the target temperature is set 0 Use manual dwell The test operator must respond to a prompt to continue the test 1 Automatic dwell The dwell time is specified
360. evice No x Figure 103 Configure Device Dialogue Configure Device 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 150 8 SETUP TEST Table 40 Configure Device Dialogue Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Change Before Point conditional numeric entry Indicates the point at which the new reference will be used If there is a macro selected the macro will execute prior to changing to the new reference The test point entered must already be defined the Points table Macro Optional list box selection Select a Test Macro to execute prior to changing the reference see 18 5 8 Use this option to automate any reference specific operations prior to changing reference devices in a test The active valve driver controller as well as any other test instrument can be accessed within the macro if desired Prompt before changing device optional list box selection Select Yes to get a prompt prior to changing the reference during a test The prompt should be used to allow the test operator to adjust any valves or make any other reference specific changes before changing the reference within the a test Configure Device required list box selection 8 6 7 Specify the exact range measurement mode and remote settings of a device if desired All options available in the device configuration step of test initialization are provided see 7 3 3 to configure a device The selections made allo
361. evice Class e fTargeti The double precision Target output to use when controlling tan output When used for a device specified as a multiplexer or valve driver this value is an integer that represents the channel to manipulate chnISt TRUE or FALSE to activate or de activate a valve driver channel Only used when the device is initialized as a valve driver controller e cConfig Configuration Class that holds all active Calculation Classes within COMPASS Page 221 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Return Value Remarks Example 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc The return value must be the raw output of the instrument in the raw output unit specified in the Output Relationship Editor 4 3 6 2 Return an empty string or 9999 to prevent COMPASS from using the response COMPASS will not abort or display an error message The return value is simply ignored Interface Macros specified for Read commands are called at the approximate interval selected on the Communications tab in any of the device editors COMPASS checks the interval time every 250ms As a result the time interval value has an effective resolution of 250ms In most cases an Interface Macro should call an OLE object to read the output of an instrument This allows existing data acquisition code to be used by COMPASS Take advantage of the object and data space available within the COMPASS defined o
362. exer switches channels to allow the measurement of an individual device output as required for testing Page 366 2 31 GLOSSARY Nitrogen gas Nominal Mass The mass loaded on the piston in terms of the nominal values written on the individual masses See also True Mass Normal A conventional or standard value Editor Output Source Where data will come from e g the Data Acquisition Type specified for the device or a different Final Output Found on the Output Relationship Editor Raw Output tab Output Type Defines the nature of the output of a device i e Current Frequency Humidity Position Pressure Resistance Rotation Temperature User Defined Voltage All Final Outputs are a sub category of Output Type This is really a classification convenience to avoid having to deal with the complete long list of final outputs all the time See also Set Types There is an Output Type on the Output Relationship Editor Raw Output tab to define the type of raw output and there is an Output Type on the Final Output Tab to define the type of the Final Output When relationship of Raw Output and Final Output is lt SAME gt then Output Type of the Final Output is fixed to be same as Raw Output Type PC Piston cylinder piston cylinder module PG7000 Generic representation of the entire line of DHI 7000 series Piston Gauges PG7601 PG7102 PG7601 PG7302 Physical Targets Pi
363. f a DUT The output of any instrument in the COMPASS database can be used as auxiliary data It is not necessary to use an auxiliary data selection to log the raw output of a DUT or reference This data is logged automatically Double click a device in the list to add it to the selected auxiliary data devices Press Remove or double click selected devices to remove them from the list of selected auxiliary devices Pre Test Pressure Data Auxiliary Auxiliary Data Devices Manufacturer Hewlett Packard HP34401a EHPDMM Hewlett Packard 34401 Lab Oven Ecosphere sa gt HPDMM Voltage Remove Figure 108 Test Editor Auxiliary Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 156 9 SETUP DUT 9 Setup DUT 9 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS is organized around the support testing and maintenance of Devices Under Test DUTs DUT Definitions not only specify the relationship between raw device outputs and pressure they determine how the output data will be acquired and maintain calibration and tracking information for the device A DUT can be setup to provide DUT pressure only or to include pressure control and measurement of other variables See Section 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic is critical to proper setup of the Output tab Then review 4 5 Device Editors for detai
364. feed ASCII character 10 Carriage return line feed ASCII characters 13 and 10 This is the most common selection and is selected by default Response Terminator text entry drop down list selection remote interface lt Data Acquisition Type only 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Defines when COMPASS will consider an individual response to be complete This option is not available in IEEE 488 communications With IEEE 488 there are hardware level assertions that define the end of a command and response The selections available from the drop down list are lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt LF gt Carriage return ASCII character 13 Line feed ASCII character 10 Carriage return line feed ASCII characters 13 and 10 This is the most common selection and is selected by default lt CR gt lt LF gt Carriage return OR line feed must be detected in the device response ASCII characters 13 or 10 gt Read at least characters from the RS232 buffer before assuming the response is complete No physical buffer limitations are imposed When characters are received from the remote device the response data is used by COMPASS This type of termination is useful when a final character is not used to mark the end of a response COMPASS limits the RS232 buffer to characters When the buffer is full the response is considered complete and the data in the buffer is used by COMPASS This type of termination is us
365. fer to section 21 5 3 DATA Table for a listing of the fields that can be logged to the data file Only data actually logged to the Data File can be imported into the Test Data Database Press the Default Settings button to automatically log the COMPASS default data fields When taking large amounts of data it is desirable to reduce the file size In such situations data normally logged in short duration tests may not be required Reduce the file size by eliminating data fields using the features on this tab This feature actually re arranges the columns of data in a test Data File In most cases this will cause problems with third party applications that were configured to read the Data File in a previous format Only advanced users should use this feature to manipulate file data The COMPASS Report Editor can read Data Files regardless of the format selected Data logged in the test Data File determines the data available in COMPASS Reports Make sure that all desired data is collected by making the proper selections on the Data In File tab When a test is complete there is no way to retrieve data that was not logged to the Data File Multiple file fields can be selected in two ways a hold down the SHIFT key and use the UP and or DOWN arrow keys to make multiple contiguous selections b hold down the CTRL key and us the mouse to make multiple non contiguous selections Add or remove the selections by using the appropriate shift button
366. fficient Piston Cylinder definition Piston cylinder pressure coefficient Page 355 Piston Cylinder definition 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL VARIABLE DEFINITION SOURCE OF VALUE Temperature of piston cylinder Internal measurement or user entered value as specified by the test initialization Air density Calculated from standard air density corrected for actual atmospheric pressure ambient temperature and relative humidity atm p humidity and temp source are specified by SETUP file Mass density Mass Set definition 29 8 1 GAUGE MODE Aap Ayo qos I 0 20 ap Ae AP nom 29 8 2 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE BY ADDING ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE ui Pe es nr P m Py P atm Ags App Ayo 107 I T 0 E 20 ap Ae AP nom 29 8 3 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE WITH VACUUM REFERENCE Mg 27 E p P T Pg t P vac Agp Aap Ayo 1107 I 0 E 20 ap Ae AP nom 29 8 4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL MODE A Mg 2 ZOE ji AP T Pg Pc P vac offset Aap Aap Apo 10 5 1 0 20a p ac 1 AP nom 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 356 29 9 29 CALCULATIONS FLUID HEADS 29 9 1 FLUID HEAD COMPONENTS COMPASS supports three different fluid head components DUT head ATM head and Piston head The three components are combined to create t
367. fication and customer identification Use the final output label to distinguish between multiple DUT final outputs on a single instrument dl Double click items in the DUT grid to add them to the list for testing Double click items in the selected list or press the Remove button to remove them Page 121 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Run Test Setup Select DUTs Add DUTs by double clicking the desired DUTs in the list Use the Remove button to remove DUTs from the support list The specific setup of DUTs is handled in a later step Label Manufacturer Model Output Example Manual DUT Generic M MMM Pressure Example RPM1 DH Instruments RPM1 Pressure Example Voltage DUT Generic Pressure ppck controller DH Instruments ppck Pressure lt Cancel Finish gt Remove Figure 82 Run Test Setup Select DUTs When a DUT profile is selected more than 1 time an option to enter the number of DUTs is presented Up to 50 DUTs can be entered for a single DUT profile Range and identification information for each profile DUT must be specified on the Configure DUT Initialization step Although COMPASS does not impose a limit on the number of DUTs it is recommended that no more than 20 DUTs be specified Too many DUTs may require excessive test averaging times to guarantee a new update from each instrument Never choose more DUTs than is practical
368. file directly through the Windows operating system Auto Save Reports Reports generated automatically have the same file name as the first COMPASS dat file used as a data source but with the default report extension Auto saved reports are saved to the root directory for reports If a newly created report has the same name as an existing report the user is prompted to change the file name of the new report Use Data File Use the path of the first Data File as the default path for the report Checking this box 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 276 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR FEATURE DESCRIPTION directory as default supersedes the path in the Root directory for reports report location Default Report Determines what format the reports are saved in The COMPASS Report Editor allows a Extension report to be created and saved in a number of formats Each format has pro s and cons which are dependant on the final use of the report The report editor can convert files between formats but not all formats support all functionality The operator risks the loss of information when converting between file formats If the Report Editor is used to convert one report type to another some content may be lost The amount and type of information lost is dependant on the starting and ending file types For example ASCII Text files cannot contains graphs or specialized fonts Microsoft Word doc Best used for shar
369. final output The linearly proportional raw output to final output formula is Fr inal Span VARIABLE DESCRIPTION Frinai Calculated final output in the Final Output unit Fspan Final output span in the final output unit Un manipulated raw output as entered or measured remotely Omin The minimum raw output in the raw output unit Ospan The raw output span in the raw output unit Finin The minimum final output in the final output unit Inverse Square Use this selection when the final output has an inverse square root relationship to the raw output This relationship is not defined when the raw output is zero 1 lO Raw Add Macro Select this choice to create or edit COMPASS Relationship Macros All other choices Are labels identifying user created COMPASS Relationship Macros Review the comments of these macros to determine their intended use if it is not implied by the macro name see 18 5 5 Relationship Macros Any level and type of manipulation can be performed within the macro The device remote interface and manual entry are always possible output sources regardless of the selected Raw Output Type The actual device used ae the output source ie selected during Test Initialization see 7 5 5 Configure DUT s Devices Page 49 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 13 Raw Output Type and Possible Output Sources R
370. final output is general pressure Any of the pressure output devices stored in the COMPASS database can be selected Resistance A device that measures resistance is required to measure the output The choices are Resistance Rotation A device that measures rotation is required to measure the output The choices are Piston Rotation Temperature 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc A device that measures temperature is required to measure the output The individual choices confine the list of available temperature measuring devices during test initialization The choices are Ambient Temperature The raw output is the final output of a device whose final output is ambient temperature Reference Temperature The raw output is the final output of a device whose final output is reference temperature Piston Cylinder Temperature The raw output is the final output of a device whose final output is piston cylinder temperature General Temperature The raw output is the final output of a device whose final output is general temperature Any of the pressure output devices stored in the COMPASS database can be selected Page 50 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES RAW OUTPUT POSSIBLE OUTPUT SOURCES TYPE OTHER THAN THE DEVICE ITSELF User Defined Any device in COMPASS can be used to measure the output Use this choice only when none of the other selections are valid for a particular raw output Typically
371. fined by the Device Type column and is defined under the Devices table description along with a complete description of other columns device header information specifically added to the data file is available in this grid see 14 10 Data Header Tab Table lists all test data points individually by row Test points are listed in order that they were recorded in COMPASS This can be verified with the Point column For a detailed description of each column refer section 21 5 3 DATA Table Only data point information specifically added to the data file is available in this grid see 14 9 Data In File Tab All other fields display 9999 to represent the absence of data 2L3 DATABASE PRINCIPLES The data is stored in an Access database consisting of three tables Test Devices and Data Data from all three tables combine to hold specific information pertaining to a single test data file The Test table maintains information regarding the environment and procedures for each test see 21 5 1 Test Table The Devices table maintains all the devices used for that particular test including the reference and DUT as well as any other support devices and controllers see 21 5 2 Devices Table Only device information specifically selected for output to the data file is available in this section The Data table houses all the individual test data points for each test see 21 5 3 DATA Table Page 243 2002 2004 DH Instrum
372. for the support hardware and data acquisition methods A DUT selection is not required Manual Tests and Tests that do not include DUT based criterion can run without a DUT selection A warning message displays when a DUT is not selected Use the Tools Options Initialization tab to prevent this warning message When all DUTs are selected press the Next button to proceed to the next Test Initialization step 7 3443 CONFIGURE DUT S DEVICES This Test Initialization step is provided to select settings specific to the DUT The basic device header information and final output range of the device display In some cases there are no selections available or required to proceed to the next step In other cases settings specific to the DUT must be specified The options available in this step depend on the selections in the device definition Make settings appropriate for the device then press Next to continue with the setup of the next DUT or test step Profile based DUTs require the entry of at least one of the identifying fields serial number identification and or customer identification In addition the range information must be entered An example of a profile DUT setup is provided in Figure 83 Edit the remote interface of a device by clicking the interface field and changing the settings as desired These changes are not saved in the database and only effect the current test run 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 122 7
373. formation is not required Do not check this box if you wish to manually specify Read and Set capabilities of a DHI product DHI products that use this feature display their output on Device Output Screens Features to control monitor and change the state of the device are provided Checking this feature allows COMPASS to send test initialization information to a device when initializing a test This includes setting the selected range head medium and height stability and hold limits as well as the selected Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell settings for a PG7000 sf Check this option to use all of the advanced features of a DHI product without the need to specify remote commands Serial Number optional text entry field Write in the device serial number The field can contain any combination of characters and numbers to represent a specific device The value entered is included in the Test Data Files and can be included in reports DUTs whose record type is Profile do not include a serial number in the DUT Editor Instead the serial number can be entered during test initialization The default Data File directory naming preference can use the DUT Serial Number to create the data directory for date files when running tests Identification optional text entry field Write in the device identification The field can contain any combination of characters and numbers to represent a specific device This fiel
374. fully automated pressure controllers PPCx If a PG7000 reference is used automatically repeating the point may appear to be the next test point This can be confusing to the test user The test point is repeated a maximum of 3 times regardless of other test related auto repeat options Wait for Ready When a Not Ready occurs test averaging is suspended and the test defined stability criteria are used to wait for a Ready condition before continuing with the average All stability criteria are imposed in the same fashion as when setting a target The control timeout is the maximum possible delay when waiting for a Ready state Averaging continues when the target output is Ready or when a stability time out occurs If a time out occurs no more wait for ready operations will apply for the current averaging cycle Otherwise there is no limit to the number of times a wait for ready event will occur for a single averaging cycle Each time a Not Ready state is determined any averaging data collected within 2s of the Not Ready is discarded This option was designed for use with the AMH PG7000 automatic piston gauge system Page 189 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION If DUT is out of tolerance dropdown selection list Determines what action to take if any of the DUTS is out of tolerance according to its tolerance specification while averaging data for a test point A T is l
375. g Step Forward Causes the current test point to be interrupted and the test point sequence to step forward to the next step in a point sequence This feature only moves forward up to the take data step of the highest point executed The limitation d is to ensure that data is logged at each point and points are not skipped entirely Most often this tool is used to skip through test dwell of an increment or to skip over previously executed points when the step back key has been used The tool is enabled only in Run Test mode as manual tests do not have a defined point sequence to skip through Suspends test execution and remote communications with all devices being used by COMPASS Use this feature to allow front panel access to a device while COMPASS is in a run mode This feature is also useful during test execution as it pauses any test timers currently running Click Pause again to resume operation Causes the Abort Test confirmation pop up to appear to abort the test that is running 5 4 2 RUNDISPLAY TOOLS Run Display Tools provide toolbar features that relate to COMPASS run screens Each of the toolbar icons forces the corresponding run screen to the top of the display Run display tools are available when COMPASS is in a run mode only Depending on the data acquisition state not all tools are available even when running Page 79 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Tabl
376. g the appropriate tab and editing the necessary information Use the Editor Toolbar in the Mass Set tab to create save and delete individual masses in non trim mass Mass Sets Individual masses must be saved prior to creating a new mass Press the Save option on the main Editor Toolbar to save all changes to the setup The following sections describe the options on the Mass Set Editor 11 41 HEADER TAB See section 4 3 3 Header Tab 11 42 CALIBRATION TAB See section 4 3 4 Calibration Tab 114 3 MASS SET TAB Refer to section 29 8 Piston Gauge Pressure Calculations for details on how the fields on the Mass Set tab are used to solve the pressure equation wi Options in COMPASS are available to alter how the list of Mass Set masses display See section 14 6 Piston Gauge Tab for details on these features 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 170 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE 11 4 3 1 PISTON GAUGE TYPE MASS SET When the Mass Set Type specified on the Mass Set Editor Header tab is Piston Gauge the mass Set Editor Mass Set tab displays the fields listed below The Mass Set Mass Set tab provides the true mass and density of all the masses in the mass set Each mass selection in the Individual Masses list updates the specific mass s information on the right side of the tab Entries that have an asterisk next to them are required Ay Errors in values entered into the Mass Set Mass Set tab
377. g the file and database format of COMPASS data is all that is necessary to import the data Review sections 21 5 Database Tables and Fields and 27 3 Data File Structure for details on the structure of data stored in the database and in ASCII data files respectively The following sections describe methods used to export data into applications frequently used with COMPASS for Pressure 22 2 EXPORT TO EXCEL 9 There are no direct features within COMPASS to export data into Microsoft Excel However Data Files created by COMPASS can be used within Excel by using Excel s import option Once the data is in an Excel Worksheet all normal spreadsheet functions are available to manipulate the data as desired Avoid overwriting the original COMPASS Data File with a file edited with Excel it will no longer be compatible with COMPASS Use the File Save As option in Excel to save the spreadsheet under a different name To open a file within Excel select File Open locate and select the Data File that you would like to import Excel will open the Text Import Wizard Select the Delimited option and the Next button Choose the semicolon delimiter or other selected delimiter and complete the action by pressing the Finish button These steps are detailed below A licensed copy of Microsoft Excel is required e Run test in COMPASS to generate the desired test data Make sure that the desired data is logged to the da
378. gh understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic is critical for proper use of the Output Relationship Editor Set Relationship Raw Set Final Set Set Type ETERNI 2 Set Source R5232 X Minimum 0 000 Maximum 1100 000 Resolution 0 001 v Raw Set to Final Set Relationship Same Raw Output Final Output Cancel Figure 34 Set Relationship Editor Raw Set Tab Select the Raw Set tab Select the lt Setpoint Type gt and corresponding unit of measure The lt Setpoint Type is a broad classification of sets that determines the available Set Sources The selection specifies the Raw Set as a pressure temperature multiplexer etc The unit of measure selected is the unit in which the Set Source interprets set commands This is the raw setpoint unit Page 62 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Select the Set Source to specify how COMPASS will set the target values The choices available are the device itself either manual or its remote interface as specified on the device definition s Communication tab or another device selected by its final output set type When the choice is manual control COMPASS prompts the test user to set a specific output or control state when a test is run er Device based lt Set Source selections do not require a specific device selection at this step The actual source device is determined by the Test Defin
379. gt or These characters cannot be used in file or directory naming in Windows Use the DUT Editor to remove any invalid characters in the DUT Definition serial number or ID field Make sure these characters are not entered during the Setup DUT s gt step of test initialization The target directory for Data Files has restricted access or does not exist COMPASS always defaults to the root directory without generating an error when trying to create test Data Files Use Windows Explorer to verify the Data File directory selection on Tools Options Data File tab is valid Data Files are not being stored to the right directory Data Files are stored under the Data File name and the directory path specified You may not be looking in the correct directory path Familiarize yourself with the Data File naming and storing protocol Also consider that the COMPASS main program and the COMPASS Report Editor may be specifying two different default directory paths The front panel of my device displays more resolution than the main run screen of COMPASS The output resolution selection in the device s or DUTs Device Definition is less than the actual device resolution Use the appropriate hardware Editor to change the Final Output Resolution field When running COMPASS the front panel of a device used by COMPASS is not displaying the same unit as on the COMPASS run screen When change units i
380. gure 27 Output Relationship Editor Tolerance Tab Table 16 Output Relationship Editor Tolerance Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Number of Select the number of independent tolerance segments within the final output Tolerance span Most devices have one tolerance segment For each segment Segments complete tolerance information must be specified COMPASS uses segment specific tolerance information to determine the tolerance of a final output The span segment over which each tolerance segment is applied is determined by the lt Tolerance Segment Definition gt selection required list selection When a value greater than 1 is selected a scrollbar appears next to the display Use this scroll bar to select each tolerance segment see Figure 27 The information on the Tolerance tab is displayed according to the active tolerance segment Use this feature to create more than one segment only when a compound tolerance definition is not adequate For example if the tolerance is 1 Span between and 30 of span and 0 5 Span between 30 and 100 two tolerance segments are needed Do not use this feature when the device has a compound tolerance such as Rdg Span In this case use the appropriate lt Tolerance Type gt selection Segment Tolerance Selects the tolerance formula used to calculate the tolerance for each output Each tolerance choice defines a specific tolerance determination technique See Section
381. h changes in the COMPASS setup 4 3 5 COMMUNICATIONS TAB The Communications tab is common to the definition editor for all device setups in COMPASS that have outputs or sets This includes DUT Support Device and Piston Gauge Platform Editors Select the desired data acquisition type and enter the settings appropriate for the selection By default COMPASS will perform all communications with the device following the data acquisition type specified Automated remote interfaces such as IEEE 488 and RS232 require remote commands to be setup for each raw output or raw set of the device Use the Header tab Find Previous Setup function to reuse devices that have already been set up and or to check whether the device under set up is already included in the device database see 4 3 3 Header Tab To use COMPASS features correctly the Communications tab settings should always correspond to the actual output of the device not of a support device that may be required For example for a DUT that outputs a voltage the remote interface of the DMM used to measure voltage should NOT be specified here Rather select lt Other Device gt for lt Data Acquisition Type gt of the DUT and setup the DMM separately using the Support Device Definition Editor On the Communications Tab of the DMM s setup specify the remote interface to the DMM with a Final Output of Voltage The DUT raw output source must be set to Voltage Measurement gt When
382. he PG7000 terminal prior to running a test with COMPASS Define a piston gauge platform with the autodetect option enabled see 6 3 5 Example 4 At this point the setup is complete When running a Test Definition or a Manual Test select the AMH mass set and corresponding mass bell during Test Initialization see 7 3 8 3 This step is no different than for any other PG7000 setup AMH mass sets display with an A following the serial number This is the same designation used on the PG7000 Terminal When the AMH mass set is used each target pressure automatically changes the AMH mass load However automatic pressure generation must be turned on separately When running a Manual Test use the tools on the PG7000 Run Screen to engage automatic pressure generation and automatic rotation see 5 5 6 1 Enter a target pressure and press Enter to set a new target pressure This is equivalent to entering a new target pressure on the PG7000 terminal If the mass loading resolution is 100g no prompts to load trim mass will follow If the mass loading resolution is less than 100g a separate prompt to load the required trim mass displays The test operator must load this trim mass and acknowledge the test prompt before automatic pressure generation will continue A Test Definition must specify automatic pressure generation and rotation to automatically control pressure with the PG7000 AMH setup Edit or create a new Test Definition see 8 Setup
383. he Raw Output Tab are provided in Table 7 Table 12 Output Relationship Editor Raw Output Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Required Raw Outputs to Determine Final Output required drop down list selection Select the number of raw outputs that are required to calculate the final output By default the selection is 12 When more than one is selected a COMPASS Relationship Macro is required to handle the manipulation of multiple outputs to arrive at a final output When required raw outputs is more than one the Raw Output tab display choices also change to allow only Output Type Source and Unit selections for each of the raw outputs More than one output is required for final outputs that have a complex raw output to final output relationship During Test Initialization the specific devices to use as sources for these raw outputs are selected see 7 3 3 Configure DUT s Devices Using a Relationship Macro in the COMPASS Relationship Macro the outputs of these devices are combined and converted to the final output of the device see 18 5 5 Relationship Macros COMPASS for Pressure Basic does not support multiple raw outputs or COMPASS Macros Output Type required drop down list selection Select the output type of the numeric output of the raw output This selection describes the general type of the output The choice updates the available units of measure and lt Output Source gt selec
384. he PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on this feature When turned ON the piston position dead band value must be entered Target pressures can then be set directly by entering the requested pressure into the lt Target Pressure gt field The lt Nominal Mass Load gt value displays the required nominal mass to achieve the requested pressure Automatic pressure generation capability must be set up on the PG7000 prior to running a test If the function has not been properly set up on the PG7000 no action occurs when this function is selected Toggle Auto Rotate Toggles the state of the optional PG7000 auto rotate feature see the PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on this feature When turned on the PG7000 auto rotate function operates to rotate the piston at the appropriate time The displayed icon always represents what will occur if the icon is clicked Auto rotate should be turned OFF when the mass loading bell is not loaded If the PG7000 does not have the motorized rotation option this icon has no effect Equivalent to the PG7000 terminal s momentary piston rotation key see the PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on this feature Engages motorized rotation when pressed release when not pressed This icon has no effect if the PG7000 is not equipped with the motorized rotation option Change Mass Loading Resolution E T
385. he controller until masses have been manipulated and the piston is floating within acceptable limits conditional check box Auto Rotate PG Select this option to automatically enable the Auto Rotate gt option of a DHI PG7000 set Mass up for remote communication that is equipped with motorized piston rotation See the conditional check PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on this feature box Auto Generate PG Select this option to automatically enable the Auto Pressure Generation option of a Pressure DHI PG7000 set up for remote communication that is equipped with automated pressure generation See the PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on this feature conditional check box If a non DHI piston gauge is used check this option to use an automated test pressure controller Target commands are sent to the controller using the same method as any other controller in COMPASS The only difference is that the target pressure values are set according to the actual piston gauge pressure and not the target piston gauge pressure It is assumed that the pressure control process will change mass and float the piston There is no pause or option to load mass Page 153 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Ready Hold Time The amount of time that the piston gauge must be ready to complete the set press
386. he current COMPASS run mode Provides quick access to runtime program displays and functions Are available when running to provide real time data acquisition information 5 2 MAIN MENU BAR The main menu bar is divided into six separate selections Each menu item is summarized below and covered in detail in various sections of this manual 5 21 RUN Run Test Run Manual Test Exit 5 2 2 SETUP Initialize and run a Test Definition Test Definitions are pre defined test scripts see 7 2 Run Run Test Initialize and run a manual test Manual tests provide monitoring and control features without a pre defined test script Manual tests also support data acquisition see 7 5 Run Run Manual Test Close COMPASS All of the necessary program setup features are contained in this menu choice The ability to create Test Definitions DUT Definitions Support Device Definitions Piston Gauge Definitions and the Default Hardware Configuration are amongst the available choices Test DUT Create edit view and delete Test Definitions using the Test Editor see 8 Setup Test Create edit view and delete DUT Definitions using the DUT Device Editor see 9 Setup DUT Page 75 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Support Device Create edit view and delete non DUT devices using the Support Device Editor Devices defined using this option can al
387. he following tables list the potential property values and the corresponding definition 28 2 1 PRESSURE UNIT CONSTANTS Table 98 Pressure Unit Constants VALUE DESCRIPTION DUTSpan MPa Mega Pascal Pa Pascal mbar milli bar kPa kilo Pascal Bar mmWa 4 C mmHg 0 C Torr o mTorr psi psf inWa 4 C inWa 20 C inWa60 60 F inHg 0T kcm2 mPa mWa 4 C ATM cmHg 0 cmWa 4 dyn cm ftHg ftWa 39F ftWaC conventional ft of Water gfcm grams force per sq cm inHg 32F inHg 60F inWa 39F 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 310 28 COMPASS OBJECTS VALUE DESCRIPTION kgm kip in pdlf poundal square foot lbf pound Force square foot Ibin pound force square inch inWaC conventional inches of Water cmWacC convetional cm of Water mmWacC conventional mm of Water hPa ft feet altitude unit m meters altitude 28 2 2 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT MODE Table 99 Pressure Measurement Mode Constants VALUE DESCRIPTION Absolute measurement mode Gauge measurement mode Absolute by ATM measurement mode 28 2 3 TEMPERATURE UNITS Table 100 Temperature Unit Constants VALUE DESCRIPTION C Celsius F Fahrenheit K Kelvin R Rankin 28 2 4 MANUAL AUTOMATIC Tab
388. he overall head correction for each Piston Gauge pressure according to the active pressure measurement mode DUT head Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to predict the defined pressure at a level other than the Piston Gauge s reference level The reference level is typically marked on the Piston Gauge platform This is the location on the Piston Gauge in which the pressure is defined by the force of the mass load on the effective area of the Piston Cylinder Refer to the Piston Gauge documentation for this location The DUT head is calculated following Pss o Pa gh Where Paus DUT head Pa Fluid head correction applied to the defined pressure calculated at the Piston Gauge reference level P s fluid density kg m density of the pressurized medium The medium may have a fixed density or a density that is dependant on the current ambient conditions The lt Dynamic Density Compensation gt option of the lt Pressure Medium Editor gt determines if the density is fixed at a given value or changes with ambient conditions Typically hydraulic media remain constant and gaseous media are changed with ambient conditions p a air density kg m Density of ambient air calculated using current ambient pressure temperature and relative humidity Assumed to be zero when operating in absolute with a vacuum reference mode g gravity m s Acceleration due to local gravity as specified in Tools Options P
389. he string Example This example demonstrates how to send use the ioSendCommand method to communicate with the active reference device In this case the reference is a PPC3 and the command will set a target pressure with a volume argument The reference Calculation Class is accessed by using the Configuration Class in the global COMPASS Class Since the COMPASS Class is global this code can be used in any macro function With cCOMPASS cConfig RefPrs 1 Reply ioSendCommand PS 100 75 FALSE 0 End With Page 339 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Name Purpose Arguments Return Value Remarks Example Name Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc loSetOutput Control the output of an instrument using the configured command and control settings e GTarg The first target output e GdTarg2 The second target output e iOutputType The type of output to send to an instrument o 0 Primary target output pressure temperature driver channel o 1 Ventthe instrument using the vent commands o 2 Abort control using the abort commands o 6 Set the pressure faster with less control for a DHI product only The PSF command is used o 7 Change the state of the Up Fast valve of a PPC dTarg1 is 0 to close the valve and any other value to open the valve The valve must be closed after it is opened to prevent pressure from continua
390. he value should be used with the RefPrs collection to access the calculation class of the active pressure reference ActiveRefSetLP Integer The collection index of the active line pressure controller The value should be used with the SetLinePrs collection to access the calculation class of the active line pressure controller ActiveRefSetP Integer The collection index of the active reference pressure controller The value should be used with the SetPrs collection to access the calculation class of the active test pressure controller ActiveRefSetTemp Integer The collection index of the active reference temperature controlling device The value should be used with the SetTemp collection to access the calculation class of the active temperature controller Page 327 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PROPERTIES ActiveRefTemp DATA TYPE Integer DESCRIPTION The collection index of the active reference temperature measuring device The value should be used with the RefTemp collection to access the calculation class of the active temperature reference AmbPrs Calculation Class Calculation class of the ambient pressure measuring device AmbRH Calculation Class Calculation class of the ambient humidity measuring device AmbTemp Calculation Class Calculation class of the ambient temperature measuring device Auxiliary Collection of Ca
391. hen the DUT is setup However a DHI reference or controller can use the COWZ port of a DHI DUT The supported COM2 ports are typically at the top of the COM Port list in the port settings dialog see Figure 197 The available options are Ref COM2 The reference must be a DHI product This feature is not available to DHI DUTs SET COM2 The test pressure controller must be a DHI product This feature is not available to DHI DUTs DUT COM2 The DUT must be a DHI product that has a COM port Port Settings Com Port COM1 2400 E 7 1 Data Bits Stop Bits pP sh x Eancel Figure 197 DHI COM2 Ports 25 3 IEEE 488 INTERFACE IEEE 488 also known as GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus is a popular device interface protocol This interface allows a single IEEE 488 controller card to simultaneously interface with up to 15 devices Each device must be set to an independent IEEE 488 address from 1 to 30 The controller card also has an address that is used when multiple IEEE 488 cards are installed in the PC However this is a rare case Page 297 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL To use IEEE 488 with COMPASS use the Tools Options Interface IEEE 488 Card option to select the IEEE 488 card installed in your PC When this selection is made no other card related selections are required only the device IEEE 488 address must be specified Each device in an IEEE change must use a unique IE
392. hip Editor Header Calibration Communications Output Set Final Output Labels 1 Period Time Output 3 Raw Output Current 4 000 20 000 m 4JFrequency p Final Output Current Measurement 4 to 20 m 5 Resistance Add Edit Commands Remove Figure 22 Device Editor Output Tab Page 43 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 11 Device Editor Output Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Final Output Labels display list box Contains a list of final outputs available from a device Final outputs are added and removed using the Add and Remove buttons Select a final output and select Edit Final Output to modify a final output s information This causes the Output Relationship Editor to load Select Edit Commands to create or modify remote commands associated with the final output Add button Press this button to create a new final output The Output Relationship Editor displays to allow the final output information to be edited Remove button Press this button to remove the final output selected in the Final Output Labels list The Undo button on the Editor Toolbar can be used to restore a deleted final output until the record is saved Raw Output label Displays raw output information corresponding to the final output label selected in the Final Output Labels list Final Output label Displays final outpu
393. his function is the equivalent of the RES key on the PG7000 Terminal see the PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on this feature Use the dropdown menu next to the icon to select the desired mass loading resolution Then press the icon to set the new resolution value The mass load for the next requested target pressure will be specified with the selected resolution Typical mass loading resolution used when calibrating DHI RPTs is 0 1 kg 100 g 5 5 6 2 PPC RUN SCREEN The PPC Run Screen can be used not only to view the output of a specific DHI PPC Pressure Controller Calibrator model but also to directly control the test pressure The windows toolbar icons are designed to act as a software interface to the front panel of the PPC Use the toolbar icons in the same manner the PPC front panel buttons are used Features are also provided to control the test parameters and change the test target pressure see Table 32 Hold down the up or down arrow icons by holding down the right mouse key to continuously increase or decrease the pressure Release the icon to stop the pressure change 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 90 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES PPC3 A1000 G0050 SN 304 4 Rate Pressure ATM Range Target Pressure 150 000 Stability Setting Hold Limit O E 4 Slow Figure 49 PPC Run Screen Table 32 PPC Run Screen Fields LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION
394. his information available for reporting the values or text are available to COMPASS Relationship Macros The Relationship Macro can apply the calibration data to the output of the instrument to obtain a fully compensated final output see 18 5 5 Relationship Macros The user controle the format and use of the data Calibration information is entered for a device and not a specific final output This is because in most cases all calibrated quantities of an instrument are calibrated at the same time If this is not the case make sure that the calibration information entered corresponds to the output that must be calibrated next Header Calibration Communications Comment Calibration Date 20030305 Due Date 20030318 Calibration Performed By Certification ID Calibration Settingl Calibration Setting3 I Calibration Setting2 Calibration Setting4 Default Test Record Last Edited 2003 03 18 7 55 01 Record Last Edited By Figure 16 DUT Editor Calibration Header Calibration Communications Comment Calibration Date 20030203 Due Date 20040203 v Calibration Performed By Certification ID 355095 Calibration Settingl 0 0044 Calibration Setting3 0 333387 Calibration Setting2 Calibration Setting4 Device T Record Last Edited 2003 03 07 7 48 19 Record Last Edited By Admin Figure 17 Su
395. ibration Communications Dutput Set Comment Manufacturer mensor v Model PCS 400 Serial Number 180326 Identification i500 7200 psio 7 Customer D This device can be used as a DUT Figure 72 mensor PCS 400 Header Setup Define the remote interface settings to the controller by using the Communications tab Be sure to set the Command Terminator to lt CR gt only Support Device Editor Support Device Record mensor PCS 400 8 12 C Label gt Header Calibration fi Common read and set interface Data Acquistion Type IEEE 488 IEEE 488 Address hh Interface Command Timeout 5 5 Command Terminator Response Terminator lt CR gt lt LF gt Close Figure 73 mensor PCS 400 Communications Setup The Output tab tells COMPASS what outputs are available and how to read them Select the Output tab and press Add button or Edit The Output Relationship Editor displays The Output relationship defines the span of the controller output the source of this data and any manipulation required to get the data in a recognizable format ie scaling a mV output to a pressure value For this example assume that the controller has a range of 0 1500 psi The lt Relationship gt selection should be lt Same gt since the raw output value of the controller is a pressure The required settings for the raw and final outputs are in Figure 74 Press OK to close the O
396. ic actions during a test When running a manual test the value is always 0 The list below contains all possible values of this property Each of the property changes to the listed value before the listed action actually begins e 0 Undefined e 100 Set Temperature 110 Temperature Dwell 150 Temperature Cycle Complete All line pressure and pressure cycle points are complete and recorded 200 Set Line Pressure 210 Line Pressure Dwell 250 Line Pressure Cycle Complete All pressure cycle and pressure points are recorded 300 Set Test Pressure 310 Test Pressure Dwell 320 Averaging test pressure 330 Averaging complete The averaged data is logged 400 Pre Test Leak Test 500 Pre Test Pressure Cycle Exercise 1000 New Test Cycle A new test file is being created for each DUT No data has been collected 1050 Test Cycle Complete All points defined in a test have been logged 1100 New Test Pressure Cycle 1150 Test Pressure Cycle Complete All pressure points defined in a pressure cycle have been logged The system has not been vented 2000 Test Complete The post test options have not displayed and the user notes have not been entered DataCollection Collection A collection of Test Data Classes that can be used to verify and manipulate data collected during a test see 28 2 If data is changed by using this object the resultant data file data is not changed until the test or current pressure cycle
397. ic entry field Defines the amount of time in seconds before a timeout will occur when an automated pressure controller is being used to set the exercise pressure If the controller is unable to set the exercise pressure within the timeout period cycling is aborted When setting the pressure the criteria used to determine if the pressure has been set are the same as for any other test point Whether the test will abort after a set pressure timeout is determined by the lt Abort Test On Failure gt setting see below in this table If pressure control is Manual the cycle set pressure timeout is ignored lt Abort Test On Failure gt check box selection The selection determines whether test execution will continue if cycling fails a timeout occurs when setting cycle pressure If the option is not checked the test will continue if cycling fails Otherwise the test will abort when cycling fails lt Abort Test On Failure gt is sometimes disabled when running fully automated unattended tests to attempt to complete the test and gather test data even though cycling was not successful Of course the conditions that caused cycling to fail may also cause the test data to be invalid TEST POINT SEQUENCE 8 61 OVERVIEW There are three types of test point sequences Pressure Temperature and Line Pressure Which are available depends on the lt Test Definition Type gt Each test point sequence is defined on it s own tab within
398. ically loaded onto the Piston Cylinder All elements that can be included in the mass load display in this list including Piston Mass Bell and each individual mass in the selected Mass Set Use COMPASS options to alter how the individual masses are displayed see 14 6 Piston Gauge Tab View the masses selected by COMPASS to achieve a mass or pressure target in Mass Entry and Pressure Entry Modes Press the lt lt or gt gt buttons at the top of the Mass List to display the Masses to Load panel This panel includes only masses specifically required to achieve the current target pressure This prevents the need to scroll down the mass list to m make sure that all required masses have been loaded Trim Mass conditional numeric entry Entry field in mass selection mode and mass entry mode for the value in grams of trim masses loaded Most piston gauges include a set of trim masses masses 100g whose true values are equal to nominal values These masses are used in addition to the main masses to set very specific mass loads The value in this field is added to the sum of all the masses to arrive at the total mass load on the piston display in the True Mass Loads field In pressure entry mode the Mass Loading Resolution feature can be used to limit the mass loading resolution and avoid the use of trim masses without affecting measurement uncertainty Generally mass loading resolution of 0 1 kg or more does not require use of tr
399. ice updates the available Final Output choices and units of measure for the final output Final Output required list selection Select the final output The available choices depend on the Output Type selection The choice made in this field determines for what tasks this final output will be available for use in setting up and running tests Pressure Measurement Mode conditional list selection Select the pressure measurement mode This selection applies only to final outputs whose final d type is pressure The choices are Absolute Absolute by ATM gauge pressure plus a separate measurement of atmospheric pressure Gauge Final Output Unit required text entry list selection Select or enter the unit of measure in which the Final Output is defined COMPASS automatically converts this unit to the required test or display unit when running a test Minimum conditional numeric entry Enter the minimum final output in the specified Final Output Unit Maximum conditional numeric entry Enter the maximum final output in the specified Final Output Unit Resolution required list box selection Set the resolution with which the Minimum and Maximum output entries display This selection also determines the default resolution with which this final output is displayed and logged Use Multiplexer optional list box selection Determines the associ
400. ics of a DUT at each test pressure The template should include a table that has the data field MacroDefined1 Add this field by editing a template and dragging the MacroDefined1 field form the list of lt Available Data Fields gt into a table The Report Editor will execute the macro and generate the report The table that includes the MacroDefined1 value will list the force of each pressure HER D De D ee ee Calculate the force applied to the DUT based on the DUT pressure ColFiles A collection of all active Data Files CurFile ID of the current Data File CUO E II IO De ICI IO IOI ICI IO IOI ICI IO IOI ICI IC IO Function CalcForceData colData curFile With colData curFile Determine the Area constant for the DUT The DUT must be setup with the Area constant as Calibration Coefficient 1 and the diameter must be saved as Coefficient 2 AC cdbl DUT CalibrationCoefficientl Convert string to Double D cdbl DUT CalibrationCoefficient2 D 2 Conversion factor to lbs Force from psi Create a column of data to hold the new lbs Force Value and corresponding Error for 1 to NumberOfPressureCyclePoints Update the value for all pressure cycles for p 1 to NumPressurePoints DataPointRef 1 1 c p DUTPressure Limit the value to 4 digits of resolution DataPointRef 1 1 c p
401. ient Pressure The ambient pressure output by the configured ambient pressure device in the lt Ambient Pressure Unit gt or the most recently selected display unit Ambient Temperature The ambient temperature output by the configured ambient temperature device in the lt Ambient Temperature Unit gt or the most recently selected display unit Ambient Humidity The ambient humidity output by the configured ambient humidity device in the lt Ambient Humidity Unit gt or the most recently selected display unit 5 5 4 DEVICE OUTPUT RUN SCREEN A Device Output Run Screen is created for each non DHI device that is not a piston gauge All outputs of a device that are in use have a final output display on one row and all corresponding raw outputs on the next row The label next to each output is the specified lt Final Output Label gt and the raw output type defined in the output specific setup of the device A triangular in out of tolerance indicator is used in the same fashion as on the DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen see 5 5 2 An H displays next to the tolerance indicator when a head correction is applied to the output pressure by COMPASS Controllers display Final Set fields with white backgrounds Right Click these fields to enter a new target output value Entering output information into these fields automatically updates the target setpoint of the controller Any associated remote commands are Page 85 2002
402. iew to see how text graphics and other elements are positioned on the printed page This view is useful for adjusting margins and for working with columns and drawing objects Centered Page Layout Centered Page Layout is very similar to that of Page Layout except that this view shows the document s pages centered and displays three dimensional borders Headers and Footers Edits the text that appears at the top and or bottom of each page Tool Bar Selecting this item toggles the display state of the toolbar Refer to the previous sections for specific information on how to use these toolbar shortcuts Paragraph Bar The paragraph tool bar contains buttons to change the format font and size of Selected text The ruler also controls the justification controls to control text alignment Ruler The markers on the horizontal ruler display settings for the paragraph that contains the insertion point To change the settings for indents margins and column widths drag the markers on the horizontal ruler To set a tab stop by using the horizontal ruler click the left mouse button where you want the tab stop Status Bar The bar at the bottom of the document window displays information about a command or toolbar button or an operation in progress Control Characters Show normally non viewable characters in the documents viewable characters are paragraph breaks and carriage returns and line fee
403. iews previously created reports by opening a file selection window and enabling files to the opened The window will filter all files based on the Default Report Extension listed in Options Regardless of the default report extension all report types can be accessed through this window Create Template Create Template creates a new blank template The template defines the information from COMPASS dat files which will be included in the report It further defines the fixed information image layout and the report format typical template includes a customized header and footer miscellaneous text data labels and embedded links to data files The flexibility of templates and the ease with which they are created and edited allow COMPASS reports to be personalized to your exact requirements Edit Template Open an existing template for editing Existing templates can be altered and save under a new file names to reduce the effort in creating a new template from scratch Save Save acts on the current document in the Report Editor If the current document has previously been named the name of the file will appear across the top of the window Choosing Save in this case saves the current contents of the window to the file name with no further prompts Files that have not previously been saved may display Untitled or New Template in their window caption Saving these files generates a prompt for the entry of the pa
404. ification DUT Fressure Output Label Pressure DUT Temperature Measurement NONE Min kPa 0 000 Max kPa 0 Measurement Mode Raw Output Type Output Source Use Multiplexer f Channel Cancel Einish Figure 7 Multiplexer Channel Specific Output Source Selection 3 4 2 2 SWITCHED OUTPUT Switched outputs use a multiplexer Set output to change to a specific channel and a Read output to obtain the specific electrical signal This setup is similar to the Switching Multiplexer setup described in section 3 4 1 The key difference is that one device is used to change channels and read the electrical output Create a multiplexer set by using the Set tab of the Support Device Editor Setup the multiplexer output commands to switch channels and acquire a measurement This configures the internal DMM to read the desired electrical output on the current channel The output value returned by this command when applicable is not used by COMPASS The individual read outputs are used to read the active measurement configured by the set command Table 5 lists several Set and Read remote commands 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 22 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES Table 5 Common Multiplexer Channel and Measurement Commands SET COMMAND READ ACTION COMMAND MEAS VOLT DC Switch to channel 1 and return the DC voltage 101 measurement The value is returned by both the set and read commands
405. iguration options include a selection for the voltage measuring device Select the DMM created in example 1 and press Finish If all remote interface and electrical connections are correct and secure the DUT pressure will display on the DUT Reference Comparison Display see 5 5 2 DUT Reference Comparison Run screen COMPASS will read the DMM output using the DMM s remote interface and convert the measured voltage into a pressure assuming 0 to 5V corresponds to 0 to 100 psi 6 3 4 EXAMPLE 8 PPC3 How do I setup my PPC3 for use as a pressure reference and a controller Any DH Instruments product that is setup with the Autodetect Setup option checked is available in all setups relevant to the device see 4 3 3 Header Tab When a DH product is setup in the DUT Editor the device is available for DUT pressure and control when applicable When setup in the Support Device Editor the device is available for reference pressure and control when applicable If the Device can be used as a DUT gt option is selected in the Support Device Editor the device can also be used as a DUT The steps described below should be used to setup the PPC3 for this example e Open the Support Device Editor and press the New toolbar option to create a new device e Enter information on the Header tab appropriate for the header information Enter DH Instruments as the manufacturer and PPC3 as the model e Only when supported manufacturer and mo
406. ilable This information may be helpful in selecting the test to run To select a test double click it in the list of Test Definitions Press View to display the Test Editor loaded with the information of the currently selected Test Definition see Figure 88 Use the editor scroll bar to move to different Test Definitions if desired Press Select on the Test Definition Editor to select the currently displayed Test Definition When the desired test is selected press Next to continue with the next test step Before continuing with the next test step the Test Definition and DUT are compared to make sure that the measurement mode and test range are appropriate Warnings and error messages display as needed to indicate an error condition 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 126 7 RUN MODES Run Test Setup Select Test Definition Selectthe desired Test Definition by double clicking the desired test the list Only one Test Definition can be used Use the Remove button to delete an undesired selection Pressure Measurement Avg Temperature Lir Dwell 1 Points Debug Gauge Tests 2 ENT 3 Ns C ND VETTER Absolute es N P amp T Test Remove View Cancel Back Next Einish Figure 87 Select Test Definition Test Editor i General Set 13 Unit 14 15 Measurement Mode 25 50 16 17 18 ef 13 Jog Before
407. ile to use for importing Fluke Metrology Software Automated Data Entry X Definition file C Temp COMPASSP def coea NS C Temp COMPASSP sic A Allow out of cal standards v lanore Calibration Interval Check Cancel Figure 167 Automated Data Entry Form Input Date Format MM DD YY v Y e data outlined in Table 75 is now available in MET CAL Only test data is imported No device or test information is updated or replaced with the imported file Below is a description of the COMPASS definition file and how it translates COMPASS data fields to those used by MET CAL For additional information on MET CAL Results Fields refer to the Results Table Reference included with MET CAL s documentation Table 75 Data Imported into MET CAL DEFINITION FILE FULLRESULTS COMPASS DATA FIELD DATA EXAMPLE 4201 UUT Asset DUT Identification PPC34117 2301 CalDate 03 03 03 2333 CalTime 01 30 47 row num Row Number Index of Rows 1 test desc Test Description Test Label PPC3 Abs Cal test step Test Step Point Led sel cpt Cardinal Point Set Point Pressure 103 cpt_p Unit Prefix k cpt_u Unit Unit P sys_actual System Actual Reference Pressure 103 1213 Sys actual p Unit Prefix k sys actual Unit Unit P uut ind UUT Indicated DUT Pressure
408. ill Points action button Clicking Fill Points causes the test point table to clear and fills in the table with the points calculated from the Auto Fill instructions Starting Point Ending Point gt Step Value Ascending Descending Points If the values are such that the distance from starting point to ending point is not an even multiple of the step value the last step value is adjusted to end exactly on the ending point Points set up by Auto Fill can be edited directly in the Test Points table and new points can be inserted at any point using the Test Points table Insert button Clear Points action button Clicking Clear Points at any time causes all entries in the test point table to clear Page 147 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 8 65 TEST POINTS SEQUENCE GENERAL CHILD TAB The Test Definition Point Sequence tab General child tab is used to specify details relating to reference and control information for test points This includes defining point unit of measure dwell time and output control features The General child tab is common for Test Pressure Temperature Line Pressure and Point Sequence Tabs Most but not all features are the same on the three versions General _Read Se Measurement Mode Absolute vj Read PPCZ RPT Measurement e Set PPC2 RPT Control Jog Before Dwell Regulate To Refe
409. im masses Trim Mass Sets are not used with Deadweight Tester Type Piston Gauges Pressure conditional numeric entry The calculated pressure defined by the PG based on all selections and conditions in the units of measure to the left of the field Double click the Pressure label to change the pressure unit of measure Entering a value in this field puts the editor into Pressure Entry Mode In this mode there are two Pressure fields one has a white background and the other has a black background Use the white background field to enter a target pressure When a pressure is entered COMPASS calculates and displays the masses to load to achieve a pressure as close to the target pressure as possible considering the Mass Loading Resolution and the masses available to achieve the target mass load The black background field is the actual pressure defined when the piston is floating considering all selections and conditions True Mass Load conditional numeric entry This field is not present when the active piston gauge platform is a Deadweight Tester type When in pressure entry nominal mass entry or mass selection mode displays the true mass value loaded on the piston based on the selected masses in the Mass List and the trim mass value This field can also be used to enter true mass loads When entries are made the field turns white When a true mass value is entered the corresponding pressure is cal
410. impact The Piston Gauge pressure automatically requires the entry of the ambient information on the Piston Gauge Calculator There are three possible choices First Point Entry of ambient conditions is prompted only at the first point of the test No more entries are requested after the first point and the values entered are used for all the points Every Point Entry of ambient conditions is prompted at each point in the test The values entered at each point are used for the point Use Default Value There is no prompt for entry of ambient conditions The default conditions specified on the Options Ambient Conditions tab are used Enter manual ambient conditions in default units check box When a manual entry ambient pressure temperature or humidity device is used the output may be entered in the raw output unit of the device or the unit specified on the Ambient Conditions tab When the selection of the device during test initialization is Manual Entry the default units are used regardless of this selection Display COMPASS Macro error message check box 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Check this option to help debug COMPASS macros when running tests If there is a macro error a message box will display with the pertinent error information At this the error can be ignored or the macro can be debugged based on the response to the error message f the macro is debugged save the changes and clo
411. in its position with respect to the text as the document is edited As fixed Object The object is inserted into the document but is not part of the text It floats on top of the document and text can wrap around the object As the document is edited these objects may be shifted about the page and should be checked prior to completing the document Object At Caret Position Object is inserted into the document as a single character Text will not wrap around the object Since the object is treated as a single character it is centered much easier The object will also maintain its position with respect to the text as the document is edited As fixed Object The object is inserted into the document but is not part of the text It floats on top of the document and text can wrap around the object As the document is edited these objects may be shifted about the page and should be checked prior to completing the document Page Break Inserts a page break at the current curser position The page break appears as a dotted line across the documents and marks the end the current page and start a fresh page 23 4 5 FORMAT The Format selection provides access to all the normal word processor options Font selections paragraph layout and bullets are all contain herein The format toolbar contains a shortcut to almost every option available in this toolbar see 23 6 Format Toolbar 2002 2004 DH Instrum
412. in the report editor unless a printer specific issue overrides a document feature Since all printers do not support the same font Set it is possible for one printer to print as expected while another printer does not If this is the case refer to your printer s operation manual for instructions If Adobe Acrobat is installed on the computer printing to the Adobe Distiller will generate a pdf file This type of file is non editable after generation Print all Print All sends all open documents to a user selected printer Documents titled Untitled or New Template will not be printed Close All Close All is a short cut to selecting every file currently open in the Report Editor then closing them individually This is a convenient way to close several open files If changes have occurred there is still a prompt to save the file before closing Selecting Exit closes the Report Editor 23 4 2 EDIT The Edit menu provides common word processor editing functions Many of these functions have several possible shortcuts The toolbar and short cut keystrokes provide direct access to many editing features All edit functions act on the current document only Paste Ctrl Delete Del Find Ctrl F Replace Ctrl H Select Al Ctri A Figure 172 COMPASS Report Editor Edit Menu Table 77 COMPASS Report Editor Edit Menu Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Undo is provided to undo the most recent
413. ing device output specified during test initialization RawOutput2 Double The output of the instrument setup to provide the second raw output value when at least 2 raw outputs were specified in the Output Relationship Editor Only set this property to a value that is already in the proper unit of measure To avoid setting the value in the same unit of measure use the RangeRaw2 class and set the RawOutput property to the desired value The normal unit conversions between the output source device s final output unit of measure and the requested raw output unit of measure happen automatically When the RangeMain class is for a non DHI piston gauge this value represents the piston position measuring device output specified during test initialization RawOutput3 Double The output of the instrument setup to provide the third raw output value when at least 3 raw outputs were specified in the Output Relationship Editor Only set this property to a value that is already in the proper unit of measure To avoid setting the value in the same unit of measure use the RangeRaw3 class and set the RawOutput property to the desired value The normal unit conversions between the output source device s final output unit of measure and the requested raw output unit of measure happen automatically When the RangeMain class is for a non DHI piston gauge this output represents the reference vacuum measuring device output specified during test initializati
414. ing reports with other users that may not have access to the COMPASS Report Editor Microsoft Word format maintains most functionality with the original report but formatting may appear different on individual computers The Microsoft Word format is consistent with Microsoft Word releases 97 through 2002 XP Older versions may not be able to view these reports Report Editor Format rpt This format is the most compatible with the COMPASS Report Editor Reports saved in this format can only be opened with the COMPASS Report Editor but are converted to all other formats easily Rich Text Format rtf Rich Text Format is more restrictive of content than either the rpt or doc formats This format will not retain plots images or other inserted objects but will preserve text formatting ASCII Text txt Most restrictive of all file formats The ASCII Text format will not retain plots images or other inserted objects not will it maintain text formatting This format has the smallest file size that other formats and is the most portable to other programs Page 277 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 23 9 2 REPORT GENERATION Reports t emplates General Report Gerneration Options F Add or remove rows in tables to fit the data in the first column Edit graphs prior to insertion into report Default Path to Data Files C Program Files COMPASS for Pressure D ata mi Save Ex
415. instrument has not responded If bNoResponse is FALSE COMPASS will asynchronously read the response The value is ignored when bNoResponse is TRUE Return String value representing the return value of the command An empty string is Value automatically returned when bNoResponse is TRUE If bWaitReply is FALSE the function will always return an empty string Remarks Use this method only when a DH Instruments interface is used to communicate with the device RS232 HART via RS232 IEEE 488 and TCP IP If the device communications interface is the COM2 port of a DHI product the required prefix is automatically added to the sCmd value prior to sending the command The prefix used is stored in the CommandPrefix property of the Range Class Make sure that the bNoResponse argument is used correctly Many instruments that send a response will return an error or timeout if the response to a command is not read If the return value of the remote command is not required in the macro it is best to set bWaitReply FALSE The macro will execute faster Do not use FALSE for this parameter when the remote command return value is required or if a specific state change is intended by the remote command This method supports limited HART functionality in the same way as the ioSendCommand method of the Calculation Class see 28 8 2 The device used to supply the output must use HART via RS232 as the remote interface selection Example None Pag
416. ion as defined in the controllers Operation and Maintenance Manual Page 152 8 SETUP TEST FEATURE DESCRIPTION Ready Hold Time Time duration that stability and hold criterion must be met for COMPASS to consider that the stability test has been met The ready condition must be present and uninterrupted for the duration of the Ready Hold Time If a not ready condition occurs the hold time countdown starts over after the next ready output is received This process continues until either the stability test is passed or the Stability Time Out occurs required numeric entry Depending on the configuration of the test system and the performance of the controller the output may stabilize within the stability test and a ready condition may occur momentarily before the output has truly stabilized The Stability Hold Time can be used to assure that the output remains stable for a certain amount of time before the stability test is considered to have been met and test execution to continue When the Use Ready choice is selected the ready output from the controller must be maintained for the Ready Hold Time before the output is considered Ready Use this feature to prevent temporary ready conditions from falsely passing the output control criterion Control Timeout Defines the amount of time in seconds before a timeout will occur if a Ready condition has not been achieved in response to a set command to an automated controlle
417. ion to the database check the items on the left and press the lt Right gt arrow To write elements to the PG7000 check the items on the right and press the lt Left gt arrow Select a different lt Element Type gt and repeat the process gt PG7000 Setup Extractor Interface R5232 COMT 2400E 71 Load PG Information Model PG7102 SN 316 Element Type Piston Cylinders PG Piston Cylinders DH Instruments Data Base Piston Cylinders 473 110 kPa kg 510 250 kPa kg 107 10 kPa kg 532 240 kPa kg 110 200 kPa kg 715 300 kPa kg 117 50 kPa kg 764 390 kPa kg 118 50 kPa kg 801 110 kPa kg 121 10 kPa kg 825 280 123 2 0 MPa kg 845 4 4 MPa kg 153 10 kPa kg 902 310 kPa kg 154 10 kPa kg Select All Select None Select All Select None Close Figure 137 PG7000 Setup Extractor Page 209 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 210 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR 18 Toots COMPASS MACRO EDITOR 18 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS for Pressure Macros open the door to a high level of program customization Macros are available to read instruments calculate instrument outputs modify test operation and manipulate data in the Data File for custom reporting Macros are defined and maintained by the COMPASS Macro Editor see Figure 138 PAN Macros are an advanced COMPASS feature Some programming knowledge is required to successfully
418. is complete and then the test is immediately repeated The purpose of the Leak Test tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in the table below Table 34 Test Editor Pre Test Tab lt Leak Test gt Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Run Leak Test Determines whether a leak test will be run at the beginning of a test or not If the option is heck b checked a leak test will be run Otherwise a leak test will not be run and the rest of the chec DOX lt cLeak Test panel is disabled selection Leak Test Pressure The unit of measure in which the leak test pressure is defined The selected unit in this Unit list box field is appended to the unit specific fields of the Leak Test setup Numerous pressure units and DUTSpan are amongst the available unit choices If DUTspan is used leak values entered are converted to a pressure based on the span of the first DUT tested Leak Check Pressure aaaaaaaa numeric entry field Defines the pressure at which the leak test will be run in the unit of measure aaaaaaa specified in Leak Test Pressure Unit gt Set Pressure Timeout s numeric entry field Defines the amount of time in seconds for which automated pressure control will try to set the leak check pressure before a timeout occurs If the controller is unable to set the leak test pressure within the timeout period the leak test is aborted When setting the pr
419. is frequently used to return test instruments to a normal state or to send special commands to devices at the end of a test In other cases this macro can be used to determine new calibration data for DUTs and send commands to the DUTs to update their calibration data It is not necessary to use this macro to vent test devices Instead make sure that the Use Remote Vent gt option is selected in the definition of any controller that you wish to vent see Set Tab 4 3 7 This is true for both pressure and temperature controllers This option is available in Advanced Tests only Ambient Pressure Ambient Temperature ect list box selection The selection in each frame defines the default test selection for the corresponding quantity By specifying a specific device in the Test Definition no selection is required during Test Initialization If a quantity is not required select None Use the Default selection to use the devices selected in the Default Hardware Configuration see Setup Default Hardware Configuration 12 Page 155 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 8 8 AUXILIARY TAB The Test Editor Auxiliary tab is used to specify what devices to use for auxiliary data Auxiliary data devices can be any type and any range Typically auxiliary devices are used to log test specific data that would not normally be logged by COMPASS For example the excitation voltage o
420. is how this specific set of this specific device is identified in COMPASS In many cases a useful label is one that is equivalent to the Final Set Type Set Type Select the type of the final set This selection describes the general type of the set The choice updates the Final Set choices of units of measure for the required drop down final set list selection Final Set Select the final set The available choices depend on the Set Type selection The choice made in this field determines for what tasks this final set will be required list available for use in setting up and running tests selection Pressure Select the pressure measurement mode of the set This choice applies only to Measurement final sets whose type is pressure The choices are Mode Absolute required list Absolute by ATM selection pressure Set Type only Gauge Unit Select or enter the unit of measure in which the final set is defined COMPASS automatically converts this unit to the required test or display unit when running a test required text entry list selection Minimum Enter the minimum final setpoint in the specified final set unit of measure conditional numeric entry Maximum Enter the maximum final setpoint in the specified final set unit of measure conditional numeric entry Resolution Set the default resolution with which to display and log setpoints required list
421. ist box or enter a new manufacturer into the field required drop m list Selecting a manufacturer from the list automatically updates a list of corresponding selection lt Models gt Devices DUT Support Devices and Piston Gauge Platforms included on the list have existing or example setups in the COMPASS database Use the Find Previous Setup button to copy an existing setup The default Data File directory naming preference can use DUT lt Manufacturer gt as part of the Data File directory structure Model Select the lt Model gt from the drop down list or enter a lt Model gt into the field The drop down list of Models is based on the currently selected lt Manufacturer gt required drop down list selection Models selected from the list have existing or example setups in the COMPASS database 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Use the Find Previous Setup icon to copy an existing setup The default Data File directory naming preference can use DUT Model as part of the Data File directory structure Page 34 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES FEATURE DESCRIPTION Find Previous Setup conditional icon on available in device editors only Press this option to search the COMPASS database for an existing setup of the current Manufacturer and Model selections Only Manufacturers and Models selected from the drop down list can use this feature A list of matching setups displa
422. iston Gauge hp DUT height m Height of DUT above the Piston Gauge reference level Value is negative if below reference level ATM head Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to internal or external barometer readings to correct the atmospheric pressure value to the Piston Gauge s reference level if the barometer is reading at a different level than the Piston Gauge See section for ATM head height information Page 357 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PISTON head 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc The ATM head is calculated following Where P head Pa Pas air density kg m3 g gravity m s2 h barometer height m Py Pas gh atm fluid head correction applied to the internal or external barometer reading standard air density of 1 2 kg m3 acceleration due to local gravity Height of the internal or external barometer above the Piston Gauge reference level Value is negative if below the reference level of the Piston Gauge Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to compensate for the difference between the current measured piston position and the Piston Gauge reference level This correction is not applied when the piston position is not measured The ability to measure the Piston Position is determined by settings in the Piston Gauge Platform Editor and in the Test Initialization The DUT head is calculated foll
423. iston Gauge Platform Editor is a COMPASS Device Editor See 4 3 Device Editors for complete information on creating editing and saving Device Definitions using Device Editors Piston Gauge Platform setups do not require an Output or Set A valid setup only requires selections on the Header tab Using default selections on all other fields and tabs ie common Use the following steps to create a Piston Gauge Platform e e o Select Setup Piston Gauge Piston Gauge Platform Press the Editor Toolbar New icon see 4 2 Editor Toolbar Enter a Record Label that allows users to quickly identify the defined platform Begin completing the Piston Gauge Platform Definition starting with the Header tab Select the Manufacturer and Model If the desired selections in the list press the Find Previous Setup button to search for previous setups or examples of the Platform Definition If the Manufacturer and Model are not in the list enter them Select the Platform Type For Piston Gauge Type platforms output pressure is calculated from piston cylinder effective area and mass load for Deadweight Tester Type platforms output pressure is calculated by summing the pressure value assigned to the loaded masses Enter relevant information on the Calibration tab see 4 3 4 Calibration Tab Go to the P C MS tab and specify the Piston Cylinders Mass Sets and Mass Bells that the Piston Gauge Platf
424. iston gauges Individual DUT A type of DUT Definition that is intended to define a specific DUT including its serial number and ID Individual DUT Definitions can only be used to test one specific DUT See also DUT Profile InHg Pressure unit of measure inches of mercury InWa Pressure unit of measure inches of water Adjust an output slightly at a particular point Jog is most often used when testing visual output devices such as pressure gauges to set the pressure so that the DUT indication is on the nominal pressure point prior to taking data at the point COMPASS Test Definitions allow jog before dwell to be included in the test procedure Kcm2 Pressure unit of measure kilogram per centimeter square Leak Check A process in which a pressure is set in the test system and then allowed to evolve freely The decay rate of the pressure over time is used as an indication of the leak present in the system COMPASS Test Definitions can include a leak test at the start of the test Line Pressure Pressure on the low side in high line differential pressure measurement mode Pressure relative to which the differential pressure is defined Local Variable Any variable created within a macro function No other macro function read or set the data held by these variables Manual Control Indicates in a Test Definition that the output will not be controlled in response to remote commands sent by CO
425. it Figure 182 COMPASS Report Editor Options Report Generation Tab Table 85 COMPASS Report Editor Options Report Generation Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Add or Remove This selection enables the Report Editor to add or remove rows in a table as required to Rows ensure that there is adequate room for all data as well as to remove any excess rows when generating a report The determination whether to add or remove rows is based on the requirements of the first column of data in a table When dynamic data data logged at each point in a test is expanded inside a table during report creation there may exist a surplus or shortage of rows If this is the case and this option is enabled the Report Editor will expand or contract the number of rows in the table as required Rows are not removed unless they are blank Edit Graphs Prior When enabled the current plot is displayed during report generation While viewing the to Insertion displayed plot alter the plot type scale colors or any other special formatting prior to inserting the plot Formatting may include turning on or off specific data points or changing plot type or colors When all changes are complete press the Inser Plot button on the plot toolbar to add to plot to the report After the plot is added to the report no further changes can be made Refer to section 20 Data Plot Data File for details on how to change plots in COMPASS Create a custom plot opposed
426. ith an internal DMM to read 4 voltage output DUTs the multiplexer should be defined to have 4 voltage outputs by using the Support Device Editor see 4 3 6 Distinguish each output by a specific final output label see Figure 6 When initializing DUTs during test initialization select the multiplexer output that corresponds to the multiplexer channel used by the DUT see Figure 7 To simplify output selection use the Tools Options Initialize Test feature to list outputs by their final output label Use the direct output method to quickly get started when only a few channels are required When multiple channels are necessary the selection process becomes very cumbersome because each channel and output type requires a unit output definition If this is the case use one of the switched output or the scanned output method Page 21 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Header Calibration Communications Output Set Comment Final Output Labels 1 CH1 Voltage Output 2 2 CH2 Voltage 3 CH3 Voltage Raw Output Voltage L O00000 10 0000000 V 4JCH4 Voltage Final Output Voltage Measurement 0 000000 to 10 0000000 V Edit Output Add Copy Remove Figure 6 Multiplexer Individual Output Setup Configure DUT 1 of 4 Example Voltage DUT Manufacturer Ganenc Customer ID nitter Interface other Model Tra Serial Number 1234 Parameter ID Ident
427. ition or is selected during Test Initialization For example a voltage controlled pressure regulator would use lt Voltage Supply gt as the lt Set Source gt selection During Test Initialization the actual voltage supply device is selected The default devices used throughout COMPASS to supply final sets and outputs are specified using the Default Hardware Configuration see 12 Setup Default Hardware Configuration Enter the Minimum and lt Maximum gt set values These determine the raw set span Depending on the lt Raw Set to Final Set Relationship gt the values entered may be used to determine the raw set point to apply to a device when given a desired final set value These fields are disabled for multiplexer and valve driver set point types Select the Resolution to use when displaying and logging the raw set Use a resolution appropriate for the set device Select a lt Raw Set to Final Set Relationship gt This selection determines how the raw set is manipulated to obtain a final set Proceed to the Final Set tab Detailed information on all selections of the Raw Set Tab are provided in the Set Relationship Editor Raw Set Tab Fields Table see Table 14 Table 19 Set Relationship Editor Raw Set Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Set Type Select the set type of the raw set This selection describes the general type of the set Each choice updates the available units of measure and lt Set Sou
428. itions Page 367 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Static Pressure Pressure on the low side of a Piston Gauge in differential mode Support Device Any piece of hardware device that is NOT a DUT or a PISTON GAUGE Test Cycle A complete set of all points in a test definition A test cycle may be repeated A test with multiple test cycles is called a Complete Test Cycle A Test Cycle includes Pressure Cycle the sequence of pressure points e g 0 20 40 60 etc The pressure cycle may be repeated Line Pressure Cycle the sequence of line pressures The pressure cycle or multiple cycles if specified is run at each line pressure Temperature Cycle the sequence of temperatures The line pressure cycle including the pressure cycle s is run at each temperature in the sequence The Test Cycle may be repeated A Complete Test Cycle includes all repetitions of the Test Cycle Test Definition A database record which defines all the aspects of a test procedure that COMPASS can run on a DUT Test Definitions can be associated with DUTs and control the test procedure when a test is run Test Hardware Configuration The selection of sources for final outputs used by COMPASS to run a specific test seen during test initialization Shows only the outputs needed to run the test as specified in the Test Definition Does not include DUT needed devices as they are handled wi
429. itor Use Remote Vent optional check box 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Check this box to remotely return a pressure or temperature controlling device to normal ambient conditions This feature is available for pressure and temperature controllers only The commands associated with this feature should return the device to normal conditions This is typically atmospheric pressure for a pressure controller and ambient temperature for a temperature controller Checking this feature requires defining remote commands to vent the device if it has a remote interface In many cases the commands associated with this feature are equivalent to a specific Set Command with the target embedded in the command Unlike regular Set Commands COMPASS does not merge the defined command with any particular target value The definition of the normal condition is user defined When this feature is checked COMPASS can automatically return the system to a normal state upon completion of a test This is very important for running fully automated unattended tests Leaving a temperature chamber set to the highest temperature point all night could be avoided by using this feature When this feature is not checked COMPASS prompts the operator to vent pressure when vent is specified in the Test Definition point sequence Page 60 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES FEATURE DESCRIPTION Use Remote Check this box to remotely abort pressure co
430. its cardinal point before reading back the actual pressure from the reference When running the test use the Increase and Decrease arrows to vary the target output by the amount specified next to the jog buttons A fixed 2s delay occurs after each jog step This prevents repeated jog steps from piling up in the buffer and causing erratic behavior when using slower remote interfaces Adjust Output Change Target By psi 0 001 Decrease Figure 2 Set Jog 3 3 5 3 READY NOT READY COMPASS provides two methods to determine if a controller is Ready This means that the desired target output has been achieved within a predefined criterion and it is acceptable to take test data or to move on with other test steps The specific method used is selected in a Test Definition see 8 6 7 Manual Tests require the test operator to decide when it is acceptable to acquire data Therefore no specific ready criterion is available Both methods include a timeout to prevent a test from hanging while waiting for a ready condition A Ready Hold time is also available to prevent a momentary ready condition from being accepted as a true ready condition The first method is to read the Ready condition directly from the instrument This is possible only when the controller uses a remote interface and is setup with the Use Ready Commands option see 4 3 7 Set Tab When this method is employed COMPASS will poll the device for the ready s
431. ity criterion after changing conditions ranges Enter Os for the stability and hold values to allow the PPCs to use their default settings When using a DHI pressure controller or reference to run a test the reference Ready indicator is always red though the output appears very stable Tho tegulaHOD dl Make sure the gas supply is sufficient for When output regulation is active The gas supply is running out causing the current test and that the controller has the regulated output oscillates faulty control the proper performance Use the Test significantly around the target Editor to change the regulation limit in the test The target output is not within the resolution of the controller When initializing a test an error The device was permanently deleted Devices removed from the COMPASS displays because a device cannot from the database database cannot be retrieved However if Page 361 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL SYMPTOM be located in the COMPASS database PROBABLE CAUSE The wrong COMPASS database is in use SOLUTION the wrong database is in use use the Database Setup option to specify the correct database The output of my PPC is changing erratically in COMPASS yet my pressure is stable Interface is not properly buffered by the operating system This issue is typically associated with the Windows NT
432. ive individual mass sets be linked to a Piston Gauge Platform selection Trim Mass Sets The list contains all of the trim mass sets that can be used with the Piston Gauge Platform Press the Edit button next to this field to modify the list of available trim mass sets Up optional list box to give individual trim mass sets can be linked to a Piston Gauge Platform selection Mass Bells The list contains all of the supported mass bells for the Piston Gauge Platform Press the Edit button next to this field to modify the list of available mass bells Up to five optional list box individual mass bells can be linked to a Piston Gauge Platform selection Default Medium optional list box selection Define the test pressure medium to use by default The list of available media is determined by the Pressure Media Editor If the Piston Gauge Platform is designed for a specific medium check the lt Limited to lt Default Medium gt gt option This prevents the Test Initialization from allowing the medium to be changed when the Piston Gauge Platform is selected Default Measurement Mode optional list box selection Define the default pressure measurement mode to use when initializing the Piston Gauge Platform If the Piston Gauge Platform will always be used in a single specific measurement mode check the Limited to Default Measurement Mode gt gt option This prevents the Test Initializati
433. ividual Masses list The resolution option is necessary to avoid rounding and truncating errors when determining target pressures given a mass load using the Piston Gauge gt Total Pressure numeric display 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Displays the sum of the corresponding pressures of all the masses in the Mass Set in the selected Pressure Units Page 174 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE 1L5 MASS BELL The Mass Set Editor provides features to create edit and remove Mass Bells that are used with Piston Gauge Type Piston Gauge Platforms by COMPASS Use the Main Toolbar shortcut or Setup Piston Gauge Mass Bell to access the Mass Bell Editor Information on metrological elements piston cylinders and masses entered in DHI PG7000 piston gauges can be extracted into COMPASS using the PG7000 Setup Extractor see section 17 This avoids having to manually enter existing Piston Cylinder information A Mass Bell setup in COMPASS is not necessary when direct remote pressure access of DHI PG7000 is used with the Autodetect Setup option see 4 5 5 Header Tab The remote pressure output of the PG is fully compensated for all conditions and is not modified by COMPASS Features are provided during test initialization to pick the current Mass Set setup inside the PG7000 A Mass Bell setup is required for a Piston Gauge Type Piston Gauge Platform to be used in COMPASS For Deadweight T
434. k with older versions of MET CAL To synchronize COMPASS setup information with MET CAL setup information the DUT UUT Identification field on the Header tab of the DUT Editor must contain the asset number of the DUT setup in the MET CAL database If these fields do not match test data cannot be imported COMPASS for Pressure data is imported into MET CAL by converting the Data File into a MET CAL source file By default the source file is named the same as the original data file with a src extension This source file can be directly imported into MET CAL by using MET CAL s import data tools This procedure works only if the date time and DUT Identification information stored in the COMPASS Data File corresponds to a Calbration Record in the MET CAL database Therefore a Calibration Record in MET CAL must be created prior to importing the Data File At this point the data can be imported as a complete text file or into individual fields in the Results table of the MET CAL database 22 3 1 CREATING THE CALIBRATION RECORD Prior to importing data into the MET CAL database a MET CAL Calibration Record must be defined This section describes how to create the Calibration Record It is import to remember the calibration time and date as it will be used by COMPASS for Pressure and MET CAL s Import Tool to automatically synchronize the data with the calibration e Run Met Track and choose the Add Calibration Record menu choice
435. k Connections Figure 191 COMPASS Database Settings Page 289 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 24 3 DATABASE USERS The COMPASS Users dialog defines the available COMPASS users and their associated rights Use the Database Users menu to access this feature The user rights determine what features of COMPASS are not accessible for a user In most cases restricted access to a feature means that changes cannot be saved however all aspects of the feature can be viewed The objective is to preserve the integrity of COMPASS setups and data COMPASS Users User login during COMPASS startup Supported Users User Access v Piston Gauge Platform v Piston Cylinders Program Options Support Device gt Y Password Current User dmin Figure 192 COMPASS Users To maintain users rights the access level of the current user must include access to the Database Users feature If this is not the case use the Database Change Current User option Use the editor toolbar to add and remove users from the Supported Users list When any field of the dialog changes or a new user is added the form changes to edit mode In edit mode make the necessary selections and entries in the User Access list Password field and User Name fields Use the Undo button to abandon edits to a user Press the Save button to save changes to the selected user The
436. lable fields Contains an alphabetically sorted list of the data field columns not currently included in the Data list box Grid Run Screen Individual fields can be dragged and dropped onto the Columns in grid list Alternatively multiple fields can be selected and moved by using combinations of the shift arrow and control keys along with the shift right button gt gt gt gt gt gt Fields in grid These are the data field columns that display in the Data Grid Run Screen when a test is running list box The Point field is always included and is always at the top of the list All other data fields can be added removed or arranged in any order Double click a field to remove it from the list Alternatively multiple fields can be selected and moved by using combinations of the shift arrow and control keys along with the shift left button lt lt lt lt lt Move a field s position in the list by selecting the field then using the UP or DOWN arrow keys while holding the CTRL button Scroll to display When checked the current data point is automatically displayed in the Data Grid run screen when current data point COMPASS is in the Run Test mode If the grid is scrolled between points and a new point is taken the grid automatically scrolls to the bottom to display the new point The plot is also updated to force the display of the current point in the current test cycle even if the plot has been customized
437. lace select data fields when creating templates Exit the Report Editor either by selecting File Exit or the X in the upper right corner of the main form 9 COMPASS Report Editor Ele Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help Ara 112 C PROGRAM FILES COMPASS FOR PRESSURE REPORTS SAMPLE DOC F F 2 Calibration Solutions Calibration Report and Flow Model PPC3 Serial 102 Report Information Report Compiled 021231 Test file BG Standad Cal User Admin DUT Information Reference Information DH Instruments Manufacturer DH Instruments PPC3 Model FPG8601 102 Serial Number 103 Identification Service Lab 15 to 15 kPa Pressure Range Oto 15 Data Acquisition Method RS232 Data Acquisition Method Other Device Nominal Uncertainty Nominal Uncertainty Test Information Pressure Unit kPa Dwell Time 100 s Leak Rate N A Pressure Stability setting 0 005 DUTSpan Page 1 Line 7 Col 0 100 Figure 169 COMPASS Report Editor All functionality of the Report Editor is controlled through the selection and settings made with in the main menu bar see 23 4 Main Menu Bar The menu is accessed either by the mouse short cut key combinations or by pressing Alt and the corresponding underlined character Four tool bars are included with the COMPASS Report Editor The lt Ruler gt Icon Format and Status tool bars are present to assist in the development and editing of te
438. lculation Classes Collection of Calculation Classes used for up to 10 auxiliary data devices Auxiliary devices are stored in this collection in the order selected during test initialization Collection of Calculation Class Collection of Calculation Classes used for each configured DUT DUTs are stored in this collection in the order selected during test initialization MeasModeLP Integer The test line pressure measurement mode 0 Absolute pressure measurement mode 1 Gauge pressure measurement mode 2 Absolute mode by addition of atmosphere MeasModePrs Integer The test pressure measurement mode See MeasModeLP Mux1 Calculation Class Calculation class of the test multiplexer Changing the channel state of the multiplexer is not recommended The COMPASS remote interface triggers remote operation with instruments latched to the multiplexer Sending a command to change the channel can have an adverse affect on this triggering RefLinePrs Collection of Calculation Class Collection of line pressure reference devices RefPrs Collection of Calculation Class Collection of test pressure reference devices RefTemp Collection of Calculation Class Collection of test temperature reference devices SetLinePrs Collection of Calculation Class Collection of line pressure controllers Collection of Calculation Class Collection of test press
439. ld properties after each field is added to a report template see 23 9 3 Templates Tab COMPASS Report Example Manufacturer 26 gt Properties Delete Figure 185 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Table 88 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties FEATURE DESCRIPTION The name of the field is displayed at the top of the pop up menu and if highlighted will bring up another window displaying the field hierarchy The field hierarchy is a simple explanation of where the field was chosen from in the list This may assist the user in determining what data will replace the inserted field The lt ID gt is included as an aid in programming and trouble shooting macros created for use with the Report Editor The ID value is linked to a specific piece of data stored in the Test Data Class see Test Data Class 28 3 Properties Displays the Field Properties form see 23 10 1Field Properties Delete Left click this to remove the field from the template This is the most secure method with which to remove fields from templates If a field is simply typed over or deleted using the Delete or Backspace key then there exists the possibility that it was not completely removed from the template This could affect reports created with this template 23 10 1 FIELD PROPERTIES FORM The field properties window displays by selecting the Properties option on the field dialog This window displays different
440. ld in a Data File Deadweight Tester Each mass has a pressure value for a specific gravity Default Hardware Configuration The selection of default sources for final outputs used by COMPASS Is selected by Final Output not by Device See also Test Hardware Configuration Definition Probably needs to be defined by itself as in DUT Definition Test Definition Platform P C mass set bell Device Hardware component or device DUTs piston gauges and support devices are all Devices A device may have multiple Raw and Final Outputs Device Definition The record in the DUT piston gauge or support device database of a specific device available for use by COMPASS The Device Definition defines the device including manufacturer serial number ID and interfacing details Device Definitions are selected to put together the Default Hardware Configuration that specifies the default source of final outputs used by COMPASS to run tests Device Editor Say what it is and that it is only DUTs platforms and support devices Differential As in differential pressure Pressure expressed relative to atmospheric or another static pressure determined by subtracting the static pressure from absolute by vacuum differential measurement mode DMM Digital multimeter Used by COMPASS to read the electrical outputs DUT Device Under Test Test Device Unit Under Test UUT The device that is being
441. le Increment Li ne Pressure Point Last Line Pressure Point Increment Temperatur e Point Last Temperatue Point This s ymbol represents the possible location of a EN test macro call Pre Test Pre Piont Test Event and Post Test Macros are avail able in atest A defi nition Yes Test Complete Enter test notes and proceed to Test Conclusion Figure 90 Test Definition Flow Chart Page 131 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL A more detailed look at the run test sequence follows When running a test the Back and Next buttons are available to move through points in test execution These buttons do not allow temperature or line pressure points to be skipped if present in a Test Definition Only the setting and dwell portions of the point can be skipped If a Test Event Macro is selected in the Test Definition the macro is called prior to each step listed below The cCOMPASS CurrentTestStep property should be used in the macro to determine the current test step see COMPASS Class 28 9 Run Pre Test Macro If a pre Test Macro is specified in the Test Definition it is executed as the first step in the test sequence A pre Test Macro can be used to adjust valve states read device settings or handle any other systematic task that occurs at the beginning of the test Run Leak Test If a leak test is specified in the Test Definition and the reference
442. le the controller s remote response is a status bit field The 5 is set only when the controller has achieved the target output D HE HD HE This Function must return the fully formatted response a device The output is used as the Raw output in the relationship determination of the Final Output Reply Raw unmanipulated response of a device ParamID Parameter ID of the device cRange Device Range Class that the relationship applies to The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value NH RD D D ee ee XX Function OutputReady Reply ParamID cRange if Reply and 2 5 then OutputReady TRUE Else OutputReady FALSE End if End Function Page 227 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 18 5 7 REPORT MACROS Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Collection of Test Data Classes Current Fie heremen gem Report Macro Manipulate the data in a Test Data Class or classes and return a string to insert into the report There are length or format requiremnets on the return value The unmani pul ated return value is inserted into the report i nplace of the template fiel d key Figure 148 Report Macro Prototype Report Macros return a single string to use in a report
443. le 101 Manual Automatic VALUE DESCRIPTION Manual dwell or averaging Timed dwell or averaging Page 311 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 28 3 TEST DATA CLASS The Test Data Class is used to access data stored in data files and in the COMPASS test data database This class is an ActiveX control that can be accessed by other programs as well as macros within COMPASS Data in this class should not be changed while running a test Edit data using a Report or Test Macro to customize a report Test Data Class Used to access irformation stored in a Test Data file Device Header Class A separate class is usedfor each device Ambient Pressure Ambient Temperature ect General Header Class Stores general test information such as test date operator ect Test Header Class Stores test specific control settings and limits Test Point Class A separate class is used to store data from each test point Use the DataPointRef method to obtain data froma specific test point Figure 204 Test Data Class Object Model 28 3 1 PROPERTIES Properties with a Device Header Class data type are logged in the test data file only when specified in Tools Options Data Header see 14 10 Data Header Tab Table 102 Test Data Class Properties PROPERTIES ActiveUser DATA TYPE String DESCRIPTION The user defined in the test data file AmbPres Device Header
444. le naming convention check box Check this option to automatically name new Data Files using the default Data File naming convention Use long Data File name format check box Check this option to use the long Data File naming convention as described in This feature is checked by default Although COMPASS is a 32 bit Windows application Data Files may be stored on a network or other location that does not support the long file naming convention To avoid file name truncation uncheck this option to create default file names that are 8 characters or less Write protect all complete Data Files check box When this option is checked test Data Files are write protected Check this option to protect data gathered from completed tests Write protected files are not easily modified so this option helps to prevent accidental data alteration If this option is unchecked Data Files are NOT write protected Auto delete incomplete Data Files check box When this option is checked COMPASS automatically deletes Data Files that do not include at least one complete test cycle This avoids collecting partial Data Files for tests that were not completed If this option is unchecked a prompt for whether to delete the partial Data File or not appears whenever a test is aborted Data file delimiter drop down list box This preference sets the data delimiter for the data in test Data Files dat The choices
445. lect the desired elements from the list and specify the Medium and Measurement Mode The Piston Gauge Pressure is calculated based on these selections the mass load and Piston Gauge conditions found at the bottom of the display beginning with Ambient Pressure Enter all relevant Piston Gauge conditions at the bottom of the display COMPASS does not impose a limit on the values entered Careful attention should be used to insure that the values entered are correct and in the proper units of measure To change the unit of measure for any field click the label associated with the field to get a popup display of supported units for the selected field Always enter values according to the unit displayed Page 203 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL mieu water 9 ZUL A Unit Selector Pressure Mass Load kg Figure 134 Unit Selector To use automated entry of ambient conditions when support devices are available run a Manual Test and do not select a DUT unless desired Pressure can be calculated in the same manner as when this tool is accessed by using the Tools Options menu choice However the Piston Gauge platform setup information is disabled Click the label associated with the Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set Trim Mass Set Mass Bell or Medium fields to display the current selection in it s corresponding editor This allows quick un editable access
446. lections on its Raw Output tab first then the Final Output and finally the Tolerance tab Selections on each tab can impact the selections available on other tabs Making selections in tab order will prevent confusion The following sections and Tables provide detailed information on using the Output Relationship Editor Page 45 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 4 3 6 2 1 Raw Output Tab Setup Procedure This section describes the features associated with the Output Relationship Editor Raw Output tab A step by step tab completion process is detailed below Table 7 provides detailed information on the tab fields and options e 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc See 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic is critical to proper use of the Output Relationship Editor Output Relationship Raw Output Final Output Tolerance Required Raw Outputs to determine Final Output Output Type Voltage x M x Output Source R5232 Y Minimum 0 000 Maximum Resolution 9 001 Raw Output to Final Output Relationship Linearly Proportional Figure 24 Output Relationship Editor Raw Output Tab Open the Output Relationship Editor from the Device Editor Output tab and select the Raw Output tab Select the number of raw outputs required to arrive
447. lied The SQL statement is automatically created when selections are made For example the field DUT Serial Number can be selected and the criterion 2803 can be entered When Execute is pressed only test data records that include data from DUTs with serial number 2803 will be displayed Up to 3 fields can be linked together using AND or OR to locate a specific test record Two date fields can be used to search for tests that occurred between a specific date range Searches are case insensitive and dates must be formatted as mm dd yyyy Figure 157 contains an example search for all tests created by the user MLF that have occurred since January 25 2003 Instead of the Query Builder SQL statement be entered directly in the SQL Statement text box In most cases editing the statement created by the Query Builder is recommended opposed to creating a statement from scratch A Creating an SQL statement requires knowledge of the SQL syntax Any error associated with a SQL statement may cause the search to fail It is also possible to delete and or change records or the database structure itself Ensure that your data is backed up prior to using this feature when the outcome of a query is uncertain 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 244 21 DATA DATABASE DATA VIEWER i Create Search Query Query Builder User ID x MLF Additional Criteria C NONE AND C OR Test Date gt 125 2003 A
448. list box selection Select a macro to execute on the test Data File prior to generating a plot Data File Macros are intended to create temporary columns of data in the Data File or edit existing Data File data 3D Plot check box Check this box to crate a 3D plot The box is not checked it is assumed that a 2D plot will be created X Axis Data list box Select the data that will display along the X axis The text of the selection followed by units when selected will appear along the X axis Press the button next to the drop down list to change the text to associate with X Axis Data Y Axis Data list box Select the data that will display along the Y axis The text of the selection followed by units when selected will appear along the Y axis of the plot Press the button next to the drop down list to change the text to associate with Y Axis Data Y2 Axis Data list box Select the data that will display along the secondary Y axis This axis is labeled on the right side of a plot The text of the selection followed by units when selected will appear along the right side of the plot Press the button next to the drop down list to change the text to associate with Y2 Axis Data Z Axis Data list box Select the data that will display along the Z axis The text of the selection followed by units when selected will appear along the Z axis Press the button next to the drop down list to cha
449. lities using its active setup see the PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual are used and COMPASS reads the PG7000 s pressure and mass outputs To use this method check the Auto Detect Setup option on the Piston Gauge Platform Editor Header tab and enter the proper remote communications settings of the Piston Gauge on the Communications tab see 11 2 Piston Gauge Platform All piston cylinder and mass set information storage and pressure calculations are handled by the PG7000 COMPASS simply reads the available selections and provides choices for the test operator During Test Execution COMPASS sends the new set point information to the PG 7000 and reads the required mass load The operator is prompted to load the mass returned by the PG7000 remote interface and respond to the message when the pressure is generated This is a remote interpretation of the process used to set pressure by accessing the PG Terminal This is recommended for users that do not share metrological elements between multiple PG7000 platforms DHI PG7000s can be set up two ways One uses the PG7000 s on board metrological element storage and pressure calculations In the second metrological elements are stored in the COMPASS database and calculations are handled by COMPASS Examples of both PG7000 setup methods are available in the COMPASS database Use the Find Previous Setup option to locate an example see 4 3 3 Header Tab The second setup method is r
450. lize Test RunTest EndTest Piston Gauge Data Grid Data File Data In File Data Header Interface Language Supported languges English US Set s Active Language r Active language English 05 Figure 132 Options Language Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 200 15 TOOLS REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS 15 TOOLS REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS The lt Direct Remote Communication gt form is accessible by using the shortcut icon in the COMPASS for Pressure program group or by using the Tools Remote Communications menu choice in COMPASS This tool provides a simple means of sending individual command strings to remote devices and receiving and displaying the response This tool can be used for discreet remote device communication and communications testing Use this tool to familiarize yourself with the device s communications for troubleshooting communications problems and determining the appropriate commands to send prior to entering command information into of the Remote Command Editor see 4 4 Remote Command Editor If a command issued to a device does not give the desired results refer to the device documentation for information on how to troubleshoot the problem Try cycling power on the device and also try a command more than one time before concluding the command is in error See section 25 Remote Interfacing for details on using the remote interfaces supported by COMPASS DHI devic
451. ll the masses in the set The value is used for air buoyancy corrections when applicable when solving the pressure equation Mass Set Resolution required drop down list selection The resolution with which mass values are entered in the Mass field stored in the Individual Masses list The resolution option is necessary to avoid rounding and truncating errors when determining target pressures given a mass load using the Piston Gauge Calculator gt Total Mass numeric display Displays the total mass in the Mass Set in kilogram kg This is the sum of the mass of all the masses in the mass set 11 4 3 2 PISTON GAUGE TRIM MASS TYPE MASS SET When the Mass Set Type specified on the Mass Set Editor Header tab is Piston Gauge Trim Mass the mass Set Editor Mass Set tab displays the fields listed below The Mass Set Mass Set tab provides the true mass of the trim mass set and the mass set s resolution smallest mass Trim mass sets are used by Piston Gauge Type Piston Gauge Platforms in combination with a piston cylinder and a mass set The trim mass set is used to load specific mass values more precisely than is possible using just the masses in the mass set A Errors in values entered into the Mass Set Mass Set tab directly impact the calculation of Piston Gauge pressure when the Mass Set is used Make sure that all values are Typically a pressure span error results entered in the prope
452. ller and makes no further adjustments In this case how close the final value of a point is to the target value depends on the calibration of the controlling device Check Jog before dwell if you want to adjust the output at the point for example to put the DUT reading on a cardinal point To Reference At each point in the test COMPASS continuously readjusts the set point command to the controller to adjust the output to the target value as indicated by the reference This option causes the final reference value at a test point to be very close to the cardinal target point as indicated by the Read reference At each point in the test COMPASS continuously readjusts the set point command to the controller to adjust to the target value as indicated by the DUT This option causes the final value at a test point to be very close to the cardinal point as indicated by the DUT This feature is valid only when the DUT has automated data acquisition The Regulation Delay entry determines the time in seconds between regulation loop cycles This is how often the set point is readjusted to get closer to the target value Setting this value to a time value that is too short relative to the response time of the System results in unstable control Review the Output Control section of this manual for more details on output regulation Dwell required entry field and drop down list selection Dwell is a pause that occurs following set
453. lly activates the scan list A command definition is required for the actual Set command even though the scan list command is already defined COMPASS requires that a Set Command exist Send any command to the device that will not change the state of the device and allows a quick return A device identification query is a convenient choice Figure 9 displays a common Set Command definition used by scanned output multiplexer setups Page 23 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL cf Output Command Editor Voltage Commands Command Global Settings Command Type Read Command Number Command READ Delay After Command s 0 Read Response X Process Response X Manipulate Response ParseScanListR ead Figure 8 Multiplexer Scanned Output Command Setup X Set Command Editor Mux Channel V Commands Command Global Settings Command Type m de Command Number Command CreateScanList Delay After Command s 0 ReadResponse X Process Set Apply Set SET JDN Figure 9 Multiplexer Scanned Set Command Setup 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 24 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES Table 6 Multiplexer Scanned Output Macros MACRO CODE TO PARSE A SCANLIST FOR AN AGILENT 34970A TO D D IO IIS IO IO This process the scan list r
454. lly increasing o 8 Change the state of the Down Fast valve of PPC dTarg1 is 0 to close the valve and any other value to open the valve The valve must be closed after it is opened to prevent pressure from continually decreasing TRUE when the output was set successfully and FALSE otherwise This method can be used only when the RangeMain Range Class is used for controlling The interface or instrument required to set an output is used to set the desired output For example if a voltage controlled regulator is issued a target pressure the configured voltage supply instrument selected during test initialization will be sent a command to set a voltage equivalent to the target pressure When a direct remote command interface with the instrument is available the target remote commands are sent to the instrument The OverRangeLimit multiplier property is used to limit how far beyond the maximum final output a target output may be This limit is enforced only when the iOutputType argument is 0 In most cases dTarg1 is a new output value pressure temperature voltage ect It must be in the final output unit of the RangeMain Range Class When the class is used for a valve driver dTarg1 should specify the driver to change and dTarg2 should specify the new state So dTarg1 3 and dTarg2 0 would deactivate valve driver 3 This example demonstrates how pressure can be set in two stages with a PPC by using this Method This scheme may
455. loating and stable This is the case whenever the test pressure controller selection is set to Manual Control gt When the pressure reference is a piston gauge and the corresponding test pressure controller is not set to manual COMPASS assumes that the controller will load the required test mass and float the piston Whether or not the controller performs both tasks is not important lt is important to realize that COMPASS will wait for a Ready condition before continuing with the next test step In some cases the controller may simply load the required mass and the user will float the piston The specific operations of the controller are specific to the current piston gauge setup and user preference After the target pressure is set in an automated piston gauge controller COMPASS will wait for a Heady condition There are two ways of determining Ready 1 The controller outputs a Ready response by using Ready Commands 2 The measured piston position is within the test defined Dead Band Regardless of the ready case used the reference Heady indicator on the DUT Reference Comparison run screen is based on case 2 If case 2 is not available there is no reference ready indicator In both cases a Ready Hold time is also available in a Test Definition to prevent a momentary ready condition from being accepted as a true ready condition Case 1 is possible only when the controller has the Use Ready Commands option selected and the Test Definitio
456. ls due to a cycle set pressure timeout on an automated pressure controller and lt Abort test on failure gt for cycling is checked in the Test Definition the test aborts Otherwise test execution continues Use the Next icon to skip the pressure exercise if desired Set Test Temperature If a test temperature sequence is defined in the Test Definition the test temperature is set Prior to setting the temperature any pre point macro or valve driver change specified in the Test Definition is set before setting the temperature The active temperature controller is set to the target temperature or a user prompt to set the temperature manually displays The active temperature controller is selected during Test Initialization Regardless of the controller specified in the actual Test Definition the controller selected during Test Initialization is used e Regulation When temperature regulation is active in the Test Definition and the temperature reference has a remote interface the target temperature is adjusted based on the output of the temperature reference at intervals specified by the Test Definition Regulation is explained in greater detain in section 3 3 5 1 e Stability Test After the Temperature is set using an automated controller the test stability criteria are used to determine when the temperature is ready A controller is ready because the remote response from the controllers Ready Command returns true or the temperature reference ou
457. ls on how the COMPASS device editors function Rights associated with the active COMPASS user may prevent edite in the DUT Editor Adjust the user rights as necessary using the Database Users menu choice Page 157 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 9 2 DUT EDITOR The DUT Editor provides features to create edit view and remove DUT Definitions from the COMPASS database Access the DUT Editor using the Setup DUT menu option or the Main Toolbar DUT Editor icon When selected the last accessed DUT Definition displays To edit an existing DUT use the Editor Toolbar features to select the desired DUT Then simply edit the desired fields Press the Editor Toolbar Save icon to save the changes The DUT Editor is a COMPASS Device Editor See 4 3 Device Editors for complete information on creating editing and saving Device Definitions using Device Editors Use the following steps to create a DUT Definition Select Setup DUT Press the Editor Toolbar New icon see 4 2 Editor Toolbar Enter a Record Labels that allows users to quickly identify the defined DUT o o Begin completing the DUT Definition starting with the Header tab Select a DUT Type and a Record DUTs can be defined as Individual Profile and Profile w Range These selections allow an explicit DUT to be created including epecific range and serial number information or
458. ly based on the selected field type The complete information contained below is not available for all fields The options on each of the tabs are described in the following sections Edit the field properties as desired then press the Update button to apply the changes to the currently selected field The Undo feature cannot undo changes made to field properties 23 10 2 DATA FORMAT Data Source and Cycle Selection Field Behavior E Return unit only without data Update Cancel Figure 186 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Format Tab Page 281 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 89 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Format Tab FEATURE DESCRIPTION Data Format Enables users to select individual formats for each numeric data field placed in a template This individual format will have precedence over the format set by COMPASS for Pressure Any custom format may be entered but in correct formats may result in data loss Convert Units to Currently not enabled Future use will enable users to convert pressure and temperature data items to other units supported by the Unit Converter Return unit only without data If only the unit associated with the data item is required enabling this box removes the numeric portion of the data Use this feature in tables of data when the unit alone is desired 23 10 3 DATA SOURCE AND CYCLE S
459. m Editor Header Tab 33 Figure 16 DUT Editor Calibration Tab issus 37 Figure 17 Support Device Editor Calibration Tab 37 Figure 18 Piston Cylinder Editor Calibration Tab 38 Figuro 19 Date Selectiork zu rre ee uter mi no exte est o 38 Figure 20 Common Read and Set Interface Setups on the Communications 40 Figure 21 Individual Read and Set Interface Setups on the Communications Tab 40 Figure 22 Device Editor Output Tab sisi 43 Figure 23 DUT Device Edit Output Tab for a Simple Type DUT 44 Figure 24 Output Relationship Editor Raw Output Tab nnns 46 Figure 25 More Than One Raw Output on the Raw Output 46 Figure 26 Output Relationship Editor Final Output Tab 51 Figure 27 Output Relationship Editor Tolerance Tab 55 Figure 28 Output Relationship Editor Tolerance Tab 57 Figure 29 Reading Tolerance isa 57 Figure 30 Span Tolerance iii 57 Figure 31 Span or Reading Greater of eee 58 Figure 32 Span Reading sise 58 Figure 33 Device Editor Set Tab siens 59 Figure 34 Set Relationship Editor Raw Set Tab 62 Figure 35 Set Relationship Editor Final Set Tab 66 Figure 36 Test Definition Editor Comment Tab 68 Fig
460. m are required When determining pressure for a Deadweight Tester type Piston Gauge Platform the corresponding pressure of all masses and the Piston Cylinder are summed and corrected for differences in gravity to yield the final pressure Po Errors in values entered into the Mass Set Mass Set tab directly impact the calculation of Piston Gauge pressure when the Mass Set is used Typically a pressure span error results Make sure that all values are entered in the proper unit of measure The information on the bottom right of the tab applies to all masses in the Individual Masses list Select a mass in the Individual Masses gt list to view information specific to that mass Changes to each mass must be saved prior to using the inset Editor Toolbar For Deadweight Tester Type Mass Sets the mass bell or carriage must be set up as an individual mass of the Mass Set For Piston Gauge Type Mass Sets mass carrying bells have their own setup Page 173 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Header Calibration Mass Set Tolerance Individual Masses 5 1 00000 psi 1 Individual Mass Settings 1 10 00000 psi E 3 20 00000 psi Corresponding Pressure 1 00000 4 20 00000 psi Makeup Mass Adjusted Gravtp m e 3 80665 Pressure Unit psi Mass Set Resolution psi foo Mass Set Total 51 00000 psi Figure 116 Mass Set Editor Deadweight Tester Type Mass S
461. m the Merge Database to the Active COMPASS Setup Database alg button Transfer data selected in the lt Data to View gt list from the lt Active COMPASS Setup Database gt to the lt Merge Database gt X Delete the setup information selected in the Active COMPASS Setup Database frame This is a fast way to remove multiple setups The alternative is to remove setups individually from the appropriate editor Dependencies of the selected setups are not deleted For example a deleted test that specifies a Specific reference or controller does not remove the support device information used by the reference and controller g button The Clean Up option is used to remove fragmented records Fragmented records are not visible within COMPASS yet consume database space It is good practice to use this option whenever multiple records are removed by using the Delete button Page 293 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 294 25 REMOTE INTERFACING 25 REMOTE INTERFACING 25 1 OVERVIEW The ability to communicate quickly and simply with a wide variety of devices is one of the most important features of COMPASS Without this capability the benefits of automation could not be fully realized as data acquisition and control functions would still have to be performed manually This section provides information on CO
462. mand Editor 4 41 INITIALIZATION COMMANDS Initialization commands are used to set a remote device to a known state This can include setting a specific unit of measure range information clearing error buffers etc All commands entered are sent just one time during the Test Initialization Responses to initialization commands are not used in any way by COMPASS Macros can be used to create initialization commands based on instrument settings if desired see 18 5 2 Get Command Macros 4 4 2 READ OUTPUT COMMANDS Read commands are used to obtain an output from a remote device When COMPASS is in a run mode that uses the device the read commands are constantly sent in order to provide real time updating of the device output The faster the device responds the faster the refresh rate on the run screens For this reason it is best to use the smallest number of commands possible to obtain the desired device response COMPASS however does not impose a limit on the number of commands that can be used in a command set Although multiple commands can be issued as part of the read process one command must be specified as the actual read command This command when formatted using the Manipulate Response criterion should yield an output value in the raw output measurement unit specified for the device see 4 4 4 Editor Options Refer to the device s Operation and Maintenance Manual for details on remote commands In many cases the manipulation
463. mass to use for calculations is conditional drop down list A Trim Mass Set is not available when using a Deadweight Tester Type Piston Gauge Platform This field is disabled in these cases Use the Mass Set Editor To create and edit Trim Mass Sets Page 205 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Mass Bell conditional drop down list Select Mass Bells that can be used with the selected Piston Gauge Platform To use any Mass Bell in the COMPASS database press the button next to this field to make a selection The mass of the Mass Bell displays in the Mass List A Mass Bell is not available when using Deadweight Tester Type Piston Gauge Platform since the Deadweight Tester Type Mass Bell is included in the Mass Set This field is disabled in these cases Use the Mass Bell Editor to create and edit Mass Bells Medium required drop down list selection Select the pressure medium to use for pressure head corrections The Piston Gauge Platform definition may limit the available media If this is the case the required medium is selected and this field is disabled Use the Pressure Media Editor to create and edit pressure media Measurement Mode required drop down list selection Select the supported pressure measurement mode from the list calculated differently for each measurement mode selected Final output pressure is Ambient Pres
464. matically sorts Data Files in DUT dependent directories so that they list can easily be located when desired This option determines how major Data File directories will be named The choices are DUT serial number identification model or manufacturer In addition None can be selected The directory name will include the full text of the selected DUT field unless the Use long Data File name option is unchecked or the DUT field contains one of the following invalid characters as part of the field lt gt If so the directory name will contain all text up to the first occurrence of the invalid character The lt Model gt selection is recommended for this field even when only one type of DUT will be used by COMPASS dropdown selection lt Minor sub This option is similar to the lt Major sub directory named by gt The difference is that the directory directory named created by this selection is created as a subdirectory of the Major Sub directory by gt list The Serial Number of the DUT selection is recommended for this field 14 9 DATA IN FILE TAB The Tools Options Data In File tab is used to customize what data fields are actually logged in the test Data File The selections do not affect the data displayed in the Data Grid Run Screen Although a specific piece of data is not logged in a test Data File it can still display in the Data Grid Run Screen Re
465. may be required to put the device in remote mode prior to sending the other commands It is important to refer to the product specific documentation for details on using the remote interface of any remote device used by COMPASS 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 18 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES Table 2 Common Multiplexer Channel Commands COMMAND ACTION ROUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE 101 Turn on channel 1 only ROUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE 2101 102 Turn on channels 1 and 2 simultaneously ROUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE 2105 205 Turn on channel 5 on multiplexer channel banks 1 and 2 This is possible only when the multiplexer supports more than one internal channel bank CLOSE 101 102 Turn on channels 1 and 2 simultaneously The other channels are left in their current state A channel reset command should be used prior to closing commands in this way OPEN 101 102 Turn off channels 1 and 2 simultaneously The other channels are left in their current state The commands defined Table 2 are all easily implemented by using the Replace x option in the Remote Command Editor see 4 4 3 The text x is substituted for the channel number see Figure 5 When the channel is set to 3 the x becomes 3 and the remote command is ROUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE 103 The only limitation is that the required multiplexer channel must not exceed 9 If channel 11 is used x becomes 11 and the remote command i
466. me RU OK Kk eK KK oko Read the output of the device using the clsExample data acquisition object Store the object in the Calculation Class cCalc The Calculation Class of the device cParent The parent Device Class fTargetl Target output for controller bCchnlSt True False to activate or de active a valve driver cConfig Configuration Class that holds all active Calculation Classes The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value III II ICI I Function GetActiveXPressure cCalc cParent fTargetl bChnlSt cConfig with cCalc If ParamData 1 0 then Set an instance of the object into the objl property Set Objl GetObject DaqObj clsExample If Objl LoadFile RangeMain GetParent SN False Then Exit Function Set the flag to prevent a new class from loading cCalc SetParamData 1 1 End If GetActiveXPressure Objl GetPressure cParent SN end with End Function Page 222 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR 18 5 5 RELATIONSHIP MACROS Out3 Out2 The third devic e raw output The s econd device raw output value inthe defined third raw val ue in the defined s econd output unit The valueis the raw output unit The value is final output of the s elected the final output of the selected support device The val
467. ments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL e The entries on the Tolerance tab are available to associate a tolerance with the voltage output If desired choose the Tolerance tab and enter tolerance settings that correspond to the output voltage of the DMM Press OK when all entries are complete Program control will return to the Support Device Editor e Since the Raw Output Source was lt IEEE 488 gt remote commands must be specified to read the instrument Press the Edit Commands button on the Output tab to display the Remote Command Editor see 4 4 Remote Command Editor variety of commands can be used to read the voltage from this DMM In this example the command MEAS VOLT DC will be used to read the voltage and CLS will be used to initialize the instrument e Add commands by first pressing the New toolbar option in the Remote Command Editor to create a new command Select lt Initialize gt as the Command Type and enter CLS as the command This command does not respond so do not check the Read Response option Default settings in all other fields are valid in this example Press the Save toolbar option to save the command and then press the New toolbar option to create a second command Select Read as the Command Type and enter MEAS VOLT DC as the command Check both the Read Response and Process Response fields Read Response must be checked to tell COMPASS to
468. mmand Sets only This option is valid for Read commands that have the Read Response option checked Check this value when a formatted response to this Command will yield device Raw Output value in the Raw Output Unit This output is manipulated according to the range setup to yield a Final Output Only one command in a Read Command Set can use this option Process Set check box used for Set Command Sets only This option is valid for Set commands only Check this value when the command in edit should be combined with the current target output to form the final command The Apply Set option determines how this manipulation is handle when the lt Commands is not the result of a COMPASS Macro Macro generated commands must include any target requirements in the macro code Manipulate Response text entry drop down list Read Command Sets only Applies only to commands with Process Response checked Text entered is used to allow COMPASS to properly interpret the output when the response does not start with the output value This field can include any combination of delimiters and numerical space values For example a device might return the string Pressure 4 343 psi The actual output value for this example appears at position 10 Therefore 9 leading characters need to be stripped prior to processing the string Alternatively if the colon following Pressure will always appear prior to the
469. mp target amp else cmd end if ROUTE CLOSE 81 amp target amp 02 amp target amp SetMux3Channel cmd End Function GLOBAL MACROS Any combi nati on of user defined arguments can be sentto a Global Macro Global Macro Global Macros are never dir ectl y called by COMPASS Therefore the macro has norequired tasks The operations performed by a Global Macro are completely user defined All macros in any macro type can call a Global Macro User defined return value N ot required Figure 144 Global Macro Prototype Global Macros are never directly accessed by COMPASS Therefore there are no limitations to the purpose or use of a Global Macro function User defined User defined User defined Use Global Macros to support standard macros A well written Global Macro can be used by many macros If the code added to the Global Macro will be used by only one macro add the code in a separate function at the end of the macro that will use it Having all relevant code in the same edit space simplifies troubleshooting Page 220 Example 18 5 4 Purpose Syntax Arguments 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR This example macro reads a file when given a fully qualified file name and path The contents of the file are returned in one string This script creates an instance of the FileSystemObject This object is very useful when working with files Read a text file and return the c
470. mperature measuring device if one is already required to convert the DUT Raw Output into a pressure in this case the temperature measuring device will be selected as a raw output source To use a multiplexer check the Use Multiplexer gt option and enter a Channel number to latch the update of a raw output to a specific channel on a multiplexer Although the channels are designated as 0 to n the physical state of the multiplexer can include setting a variety of channels The remote command setup for the multiplexer must handle the specific channel setup see 4 4 3 2 Multiplexer Valve Driver The remote command setup of the multiplexer allows a Macro to be used to handle the more involved multiplexer states When this option is used the final output of the device is only updated when the multiplexer is set to read the selected channel Page 123 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc 7 3 3 1 MULITPLE RAW OUTPUT DEVICES Devices that use more than 1 Raw Output require more than 1 Output Source selection A separate Output Source selection is available for each raw output see Figure 84 The selected devices are not configured at this step in the test initialization process When the configured Output Source is a standard COMPASS output device such as Ambient Pressure Line Pressure Reference Pressure etc the actual device selection will be made during the
471. mplates and reports A separate window will appear for each open document Multiple report documents may be viewed simultaneously but only one template may be edited at a time The file name and path for the document is displayed across the top of the window There are two types of documents in the Report Editor reports and templates Templates created by the user act as the blueprint or model on which future reports will be based Reports are generated by merging templates with data from COMPASS Data Files 23 4 MENU BAR The Main Menu Bar of the Report Editor is divided into nine sections each dealing with a separate group of settings Many of these settings can also be accessed by a shortcut on one of the COMPASS Report Editor toolbars All of the functionality in the COMPASS Report Editor is controlled through the menu selections found within this toolbar Page 265 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL The Main Menu Bar gt may be accessed with several methods with the use of a mouse short cut key strokes defined next to individual menu items pressing Alt and the corresponding underlined letter or by pressing Alt and then using the arrow keys to navigate the menu File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help Figure 170 COMPASS Report Editor Main Menu Bar Items that have an equivalent toolbar shortcut display the icon of the tool bar next to the section title Ma
472. mprove control performance in some cases By default the value is invalid 9999 If a value greater than O is set to this property each new target pressure request to the PPC will use the command format PS Target Volume The default format is PS Target DHIDevice Boolean TRUE when the device is setup to use the lt Auto Detect Setup gt flag dspForm Form The object reference to the display form used for the output Page 335 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PROPERTIES ErrorFS DATA TYPE Single DESCRIPTION The last updated Full scale error ErrorRdg Single The last updated Reading error ErrorSpan Single The last updated Span error FinalOutput Double The last updated final output value in the final output unit inTolerance Integer The tolerance state based on the current output All applicable tolerance segment criteria are applied TRUE The output is in tolerance FALSE The output is out of tolerance 9999 There is no tolerance specification Read or set an object used by macro Use this property to store a reference to an object used by a macro A Set statement is required to assign an object to this property The reference will persist until the test is aborted or other macro code removes the reference COMPASS does not directly access this property Obj2 See Obj2 Obj3 See Obj3
473. mpts to install the program 211111 OR Insert the COMPASS for Pressure CD into the CD drive Use the Add Remove Programs feature in the Windows Control Panel Press the Windows Start button and select Settings followed by Control Panel 6 Double click the Add Remove Programs icon and click the Install button Follow the prompts to install COMPASS Select COMPASS for Pressure from the list of applications and follow the installation prompts to install the program When the software installation is complete a new Windows group is created to hold the COMPASS program To run the program select it by pressing the Windows Start button selecting the Programs sub menu followed by the COMPASS for Pressure group Click the COMPASS for Pressure icon to start the program Page 5 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 2 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS COMPASS for Pressure is an application designed for Windows 32 bit operating systems This includes all 32 bit versions of Windows Although any computer running one of these operating systems has the basic requirements to run COMPASS it is recommended that the following minimum configuration be used Windows Versions greater than 95 500 MHz Pentium processor 128 MB RAM 50 MB free hard disk space As of the printing of this manual COMPASS supports only CEC and National Instruments IEEE 488 interface cards One of these cards must be installed
474. n Dynamic Density Check this box to allow COMPASS to determine density as a function of the current Compensation pressure and temperature Only pressure media directly supported by the Unit of Measure Converter support this selection These media are in the list of Medium Labels optional check box Density Enter the constant density to use for pressure head corrections in kilogram per cubic meter kg m An entry is only required when the Dynamic Density Compensation option is itional conditiona not selected numeric entry 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 184 14 TOOLS OPTIONS 14 TOO Ls OPTIONS 14 1 OVERVIEW The COMPASS Options dialog is accessed using Tools Options Selections on this form are used to adjust a variety of COMPASS operational preferences The COMPASS Options dialog is organized into individual tabs that organize preferences in to specific aspects of COMPASS operation The following sections detail the options on each tab 14 2 AMBIENT CONDITIONS TAB The Tools Options Ambient Conditions tab is used to specify default conditions and unit of measure to use when running tests The purpose of the Ambient Conditions tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 55 When selections are complete click OK to save changes or select another tab to change other options COMPASS Options DataGrid Data
475. n isi e eese ET ee 92 Data Plot Screen ii di dd a m e aie een pei 93 Example Voltage Raw Output Setup sisi 99 Example Voltage Final Output Setup sise 99 Example DMM Remote Command Setup sis 100 Example DMM Output Tab rtc eee utt ee ea a e edle 101 Example Voltage DUT Setup tor rece rhe knee cet 102 Example PP O9 Seltip x teer e e Cr tea f n tse cala B RE 103 Example PPC3 Hardware Selection rs 104 Example PPC3 Device Configuration 104 Example PPG3 R h SCreel oie ren e a e ana a eee 105 Example PG7601 Setup ei eee doe ee eves 106 Example PG7000 Hardware Selection 107 Example PG7000 Device Configuration 107 Example PG7000 Run Screen eene renes 108 PG7000 SetUp SOUFCes terea eet e snae Er a ace annee tale E nda 109 Example PG7000 Hardware Selection 110 Manual piston gauge device Configuration sessssssssssee enne 110 PG7000 Base used for sensory output 111 Manual Piston Gauge with autodetect PG7000 Base sse 112 PG7000 AMH RS232 Connections rennes 113 PG7000 Test Definition Set Requirements enne 114 mensor PCS 400 Header Setup is 115 mensor PCS 400 Communications Setup us 115 mensor PCS 400 Output Relationship is 116 mensor PCS 400 Remote Command Setup sse nenne 116 mensor PCS 400 Set Relationship sis 11
476. n see 7 3 3 Configure DUT s Devices A device output or remote command setup must enable the use of a multiplexer to enable channel selection during Test Initialization see 4 3 6 2 2 Final Output Tab Setup procedure 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 16 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES To use a multiplexer to read the output of multiple DUTs with a single DMM or other support device do the following 1 Create the DUT with the proper raw output source for the raw output type Voltage Measurement Frequency Measurement ect Create a support device to read the output of the DUT This is the device that will read the DUT after the multiplexer selects the proper channel This may be the same support device that is used for multiplexing Create the multiplexer support device to switch channels based on the current configuration This requires an output to be created on the Set tab of the Device Editor Select lt Mux Channel gt as the lt Set Type gt on the Set Relationship Editor Define remote commands for the multiplexer depending on how it will be used see 3 4 1 and 3 4 2 Set Relationship Raw Set Final Set Set Type 201 Set Source Minimum Maximum Resolution Raw Set to Final Set Relationship z Cancel Figure 3 Multiplexer Set Relationship Run a test and select the DUT When configuring the DUT select the device defined in step 2 as the raw output source Check
477. n COMPASS my device units do not change 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS does not modify the display unit of devices used by COMPASS Including DHI products The device display unit active during test initialization will remain active for the duration of the test Except when using a PPC or RPM3 that has changed range In this case the unit may change since PPCs and RPMS maintain independent display units for each range Page 362 This is normal COMPASS behavior To change the device display unit change it on the devices front panel DHI devices require no further setup However non DHI devices must output in their configured Raw Output Unit Changing the device front panel unit frequently requires the devices Device Definition to be edited to use the selected display unit SYMPTOM The run screen display unit in COMPASS is the same as the display unit of my device but the numbers are not the same 30 1 ERROR LOG PROBABLE CAUSE The device output is being manipulated by the Raw Output to Final Output Relationship gt 30 TROUBLESHOOTING SOLUTION Make sure that the output manipulation is intended and correct A pressure head correction is being applied to the output This applies for non DHI references only when the head correction height lt gt 0 Use 0 as the head correction height to prevent COMPASS from performing a head correction on non DHI pressure references
478. n Gauge Platform Editor P C MS Tab 164 Piston Gauge Platform Editor Sources Tab 165 Piston Cylinder Editor Piston Gauge Type Characteristics 167 Piston Cylinder Editor Deadweight Tester Type Characteristics Tab 169 Mass Set Editor Piston Gauge Type Mass Set 171 Mass Set Editor Piston Gauge Trim Mass Type Mass Set 173 Mass Set Editor Deadweight Tester Type Mass Set 174 Mass Bell Editor Mass Bell Tab 176 Default Hardware Configuration Environment Tab 180 Default Hardware Configuration Electrical Tab 181 Default Hardware Configuration Auxiliary Tab 182 Pressure Media Editor ie 183 Options Ambient Conditions Tab 185 Options Initialize Test min eh tte d e nete tn nue dans 186 Options R n Test afa atem eet ed 188 Options End Test Tab nitet tie e destitui a eget nde tena 191 Options Piston Gauge etn Et e net rem dette tate 193 Options Data Grid Tab dee te t ss eet et Re e ete ees 195 Options Data File aD irc eet pc Hen bti He e agite re doa 196 Options Data In File
479. n a shared network drive The following sections describe the features available in this menu choice 24 2 DATABASE SETUP Use this menu choice to change the configuration database file check the number of active database connections and to specify that the database is used in a shared environment Click the lt COMPASS Configuration Database field to display a file selection dialog that can be used to select a new database This task is necessary to use a networked database or to simply use a backup copy of a local database Check the lt Database is Networked with other COMPASS stations gt option when more than one station will use the COMPASS database The Station Identification field should contain a string that uniquely identifies the current station By default the string in this field is the Computer Name read from the Windows registry Changing the Station Identification will hide local tests created using the old Station Identification In most cases it is not necessary to change the Station Identification Press the Check Connections button to find out how many users are actively using the COMPASS database This may be necessary in a networked environment when the number of users exceeds licensed user limit For site licenses this is 10 For single user licenses it is only 1 COMPASS Database Settings COMPASS Configuration Database C Software CompPrs CompSetp mdb Station Identification Blue Sppp Chec
480. n in this table is not searchable with the lt Query Builder gt but custom SQL statements may be written and applied to this table With the exception of the database specific fields DataKey and ParentTestKey all data in this table can be logged in test data files Options are provided in COMPASS to limit the data logged to the data file and displayed on the data grid See 14 9 Data In File Tab and 14 7 Data Grid t for more information on limiting the data logged in files and displayed on the data grid Page 249 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 74 Description of fields in the Data Table DATABASEFIELD AmbientHumidity DATA TYPE Double DESCRIPTION Relative humidity measured by the Relative humidity device or entered by the user AmbientPressure Double Ambient pressure measured by the ambient pressure device or entered by the user AmbientTemperature Double Ambient temperature measured by the ambient temperature device or entered by the user Aux1Final Aux10Final Double Final output value to auxiliary device if present Up to 10 auxiliary devices can be used in a test AuxiRaw AuxiORaw Raw output value for auxiliary device if present auxiliary devices can be used in a test Up to 10 DataKey Long Integer Primary Key for this table Date Text Date the data point was recorded DUTCounts Integer Number
481. n information on the Calibration tab Use the P C MS tab to select the specific elements to use with the platform The lt Support All gt option is a good place to start Select the outputs provided by the auto detected PG7000 Base setup in step 1 for the sources on the Sources tab COMPASS will use the outputs of the auto detected PG7000 base to determine piston and vacuum information for this piston gauge setup 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 108 6 HOW DO I Piston Gauge Platform Editor Piston Gauge Non Auto Piston Gauge gt Record Labe Editing Record Header Calibration P C MS Sources Communications Output Set Comment Platform Condition Sources Reference Vacuum Sample PG7601 Reference Vacuum Y Piston Cylinder Temperature Sample PG7601 P C Temperature Piston Position Sample PG7601 Piston Position X Piston Rotation Sample PG7601 Piston Rotation Rate v Figure 65 PG7000 Setup Sources Outputs and communications settings are not required Save the platform definition To test the setup run a manual test and select the new platform as the reference Choose the Run Run Manual Test menu choice to start a manual test see 7 5 Run Run Manual Test Do not select a DUT at this time The goal of this run is to simply verify that the piston gauge setup is valid Press Next to proceed to the next Test Initialization step see 7 3 5 Verify Select Test Hard
482. n specifies the use of the controller s Ready Commands see 8 6 7 This case is unavailable when running Manual Tests Case 2 is possible only when an instrument with a remote interface is used to provide the piston position The piston position measuring instrument must be selected with the piston gauge during test initialization see Configure Piston Gauge DeadWeight Tester 7 3 3 3 The piston gauge is assumed to be Ready when the absolute piston position is less than the absolute value of the Dead Band piston position defined in a Test Definition When running a Manual Test the Dead Band value specified in Tools Options Piston Gauge is used When a remote device is used to measure the piston position and an instrument with a remote interface is selected to output the piston rotation rate the instantaneous piston rotation rate is compared to the min max rotation limits defined in the selected piston cylinder see Piston gauge type piston cylinder 11 3 4 1 If both the piston position and the rotation rate are within the defined limits the piston gauge is Ready otherwise it is assumed to be Not Ready 3 4 USING A MULTIPLEXER Multiplexers are used in COMPASS to support multiple devices by switching signals to a single measuring device For example a multiplexer can be used to read 5 DUTs with a single DMM COMPASS triggers the measurement of each device with a specific multiplexer channel selected during Test Initializatio
483. nce multiple DUTs are being tested If the box is checked at each test point a single reference for multiple DUTs pressure entry will be used as the common reference reading for all the DUTs If the box is not checked an individual reference reading must be entered for each DUT check box This setting has no effect if the reference device is read remotely and or the test is not a multiple DUT test Use set point as When DHI PPC is the pressure controller and the Test Definition specifies Dynamic reference reading pressure control the target pressure is used as the reference pressure when this option is in dynamic control checked check box 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 188 14 TOOLS OPTIONS FEATURE DESCRIPTION Wait for a new update from each remote device when averaging check box Check this option to force a new update from all remote instruments when averaging test data COMPASS will not complete the averaging process until every instrument that has a remote interface outputs a least one new value This prevents the need to increase the averaging time of a test when using instruments that have a slower remote interface When this option is not checked COMPASS averages as many samples as possible during the specified averaging time However this may result in no new data samples in some devices If there are no new data samples the data logged to the data file will be the last
484. nce pressure measurement reference pressure control data acquisition auxiliary devices if needed e A Test Definition to define the test procedure The Test Definition is not required to run a Manual Test Page 9 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 3 2 RUN MODES Run mode refers to COMPASS s automatic test execution functions The top of the main screen always displays the current run mode COMPASS has three run modes Typically devices are polled over their remote interface while in a run mode All run modes support the ability to log data to a Data File There are two run modes and an idle mode as follows Idle No run mode is active Non run menu items such is Setup Tools Data and Database can only be accessed in this mode They are not available in active run modes Run Test Definition Activated by the Run Run Test Definition menu option This run mode is to test DUT s using a specific test script in a Test Definition see 7 2 Run Run Test Run Manual Test Activated by the Run Run Manual Test menu option This run mode is to run 3 3 various devices There are no constraints as to what devices may or may not be included see 7 5 Run Run Manual Test DEVICE INSTRUMENT SUPPORT CONCEPT 3 3 1 MEASUREMENT DEVICES COMPASS for Pressure approaches the support of test devices differently from previous COMPASS applications To open COMPASS to support
485. nd Editor Pressure Commands i Global Settings Command Type Read Command Number 1 d Command _pes4 outform 1 Delay After Command s 0 Read Response X Process Response X Manipulate Response 0 Figure 75 mensor PCS 400 Remote Command Setup The output definition is complete To create other outputs using a different pressure range or measurement mode press the Copy button on the Output tab Edit the output and change the range and unit of measure as desired All outputs created are available as pressure references To simplify the selection of each range use a specific Final Output label for each unique range Select the Set tab to define a controllable output Outputs defined on the Set tab are used for control Press Add to create a new Set The Set Relationship Editor will display Enter the source range and unit of measure information required for the controller The defined output range was 0 1500 psi so the control range should also be 0 1500 psi see Figure 76 Press OK to return to the Set tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 116 6 HOW DO I Set Relationship Set Relationship inal Set Label Pressure Set Type Pressure psi Set Type Set Source EEE 499 Final Set Test Pressure Control Minimum 0 000 Pressure Measurement Mode Gauge Maximum 1500 000 uni Resolution 0 001 X Minimum Maximum Raw Set to Final Set Relati
486. nd Mass Sets that are also defined as a Deadweight Tester DHI PG7000s should never use this selection DHI PG7000s do not use this option when Auto Detect Setup is checked In this case the PG7000 is remotely queried for mass load and pressure information when running tests COMPASS performs no metrological calculations related to the piston gauge Piston Cylinder Type required drop down list selection Piston Cylinder editor only Select the type of Piston Cylinder There are two choices Piston Gauge The piston cylinder is defined in terms of effective area and will be used with a lt Piston Gauge gt type Platform Deadweight Tester The piston cylinder is defined in terms of the corresponding pressure when it is floated at a specified gravity and will be used with a lt Deadweight Tester gt type Platform The setup choices of the lt Piston Cylinder Editor gt editor change based on this selection Mass Set Type required drop down list selection Mass Set editor only 4 3 4 Select the type of Mass Set There are three choices Piston Gauge The mass set is defined in terms of the true mass in kilogram of each mass and will be with a lt Piston Gauge gt type Platform Deadweight Tester The mass set is defined in terms of the corresponding pressure when each mass is floated on a specific piston at a specified gravity and will be used with a Deadweight Tester gt type Platform Piston
487. nd can be entered directly or created using a COMPASS Macro see 18 5 2 Get Command Macros Commands available in the drop down list are a result of COMPASS Macros Commands created using a macro do not require the Process Set selection The target value provided to the macro function should be used to create the target command Set commands typically have a command portion and a target portion The command portion designates that a specific set point will occur and the target portion is the numerical set point value The actual command and format are device specific so refer to the device s manual for command details Since the target output will change based on test conditions the required test command must to accommodate the target The Process Set selection tells COMPASS how to adjust the command for a given set point The most common choice is Replace x This tells COMPASS to substitute the current numerical set point in the Final Output Unit with the text x Commands that require more significant manipulation should use a COMPASS Macro to create the command based on the current target For example a PPC3 uses the command PS 20 to set 20 psi assuming the PPC3 is already in psi The command PS 30 is used to set 30 psi Substitution of the value after the equals sign with the desired target will yield the command necessary to send to the device In this case create a command PS x in the C
488. ng HI Edit Plot Displays an options window to customize the points used for plotting Properties 20 3 PLOT OPTIONS MENU An Options menu is available for use in place of the toolbar when COMPASS is not running a test The options in the menu directly correspond to options on the plot toolbar In addition there is an Add Plot option used to add additional Data Files to the plotting tool This is a useful feature that allows Data Files created at different times to be compared on a single plot 20 4 CREATE EDIT PLOTS All plots used by the plotting tool can be customized using the Custom Plot Editor Use the toolbar or menu choice to access this tool The features on this form allow plots to be created edited and removed Editing custom plots follows the same basic editing rules as all other editore within COMPASS The one exception is that the Edit button must be pressed prior to modifying plot properties Plot properties cannot be modified directly prior to pressing this button To edit an existing plot simply select the plot in the list and press the Edit button Use the New toolbar option to create a new plot Using either of these options puts the editor into edit mode Only in this state can plot properties be changed Any combination of test data can be used to generate plots Always start by entering a lt Plot Description gt that accurately represents the plot The text entered displays at the top of ea
489. ng test operation see 14 4 Run Test Tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 84 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES DER Reference Pressure 945 000 kPa Line Pressure Target Pressure Target Line Pressure Test Temperature Target Temperature Ambient Pressure Ambient Temperature Ambient Humdity Figure 44 Conditions Run Screen Table 29 Conditions Run Screen Fields LABEL DESCRIPTION Reference Pressure The pressure reading of the active pressure reference in the last specified display unit Target Pressure Last requested target pressure sent to the active test pressure controller This field is updated during tests even when the controller is manual The Test Definition specified target pressure is used Line Pressure The pressure reading of the active line pressure reference in the last specified line pressure display unit Target Line Pressure Last requested target line pressure sent to the active line pressure controller This field is updated during tests even when the controller is manual The test specified line pressure displays Test Temperature The reference temperature of the active temperature reference in the last specified temperature display unit Target Temperature Last requested target temperature sent to the active temperature controller This field is updated during tests even when the controller is manual The test specified temperature displays Amb
490. nge the text to associate with lt Z Axis Data 20 5 PLOT POINTS Use the toolbar or Options menu to display the Plot Points dialog The features on this form allow users do select which points Data Files and point cycles to include in a test data plot The tabs available on this display vary with the information stored in the Data File The General tab contains features to apply tolerance subset and legend options The remaining tabs contain point and cycle values to include in the plot Check options that you wish to include in the plot and uncheck options that you do not wish to include in the plot When the selected plot type uses Reading Error Span Error or DUT Difference on the Y Axis an additional tab is available to plot best fit error data The best fit DUT error is determined using the best fit order selected on the Best Fit tab See Figure 154 and Table 68 for information on the options on the Best Fit tab This is a convenient way of viewing predicted error information This option is not available for 3D plots and plots with a secondary Y axis To view best fit data when the Best Fit tab is not available use the Custom Plot Editor and specify best fit information for an axis in the plot 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 238 20 DATA PLOT DATA FILE Select Test Points i Points Pressure Cycle Include tolerance bars Mew subset for each data point Include subset legend Figure 153 Plo
491. nipulation routines can be used to obtain a valid numeric output from a remote command see 4 3 8 A thorough understanding of the instruments remote interface is needed to determine the requirements of a Reply Parser Macro Sometimes the response processing may involve extensive string manipulation and other times it may require mathematical manipulation A Reply Parser Macro can also be used to determine if a response is valid COMPASS does not perform product specific error handling on the remote output of non DHI products A Reply Parser Macro can be used to verify that the output is valid to prevent taking erroneous data Use the Interface Spy window of the device output to verify that the macro is functioning properly 5 5 4 1 In some cases there is a fine line between using a Relationship Macro and a Reply Parser Macro Generally a Reply Parser Macro is not necessary when the output of an instrument can be manipulated into a real number by using the text delimiting mechanism in COMPASS When a Reply Parser Macro is used it is OK to manipulate the response beyond the raw output value and into the final output value If this is the case make sure that the selected relationship of the output is Same This prevents another layer of manipulation applied to the response of the macro Ready commands must respond with TRUE or FALSE to indicate ready and not ready COMPASS considers 0 to be FALSE and any other value to be TRUE Set commands
492. nition is modified or a new definition is created Different types of Test Definitions are supported depending of the version of COMPASS installed Use the Test Definition Type option to select the type of test The choices are e Simple Test Basic test that defines a list of pressure points only No macro or changes in reference device during the test are permitted e Simple Test w Temperature Pressure and Temperature points are definable No macro or changes in reference device during the test are permitted e Simple Test w Temperature and Line Pressure Pressure Temperature and Line Pressure points are definable No macro or changes in reference device during the test are permitted e Advanced Test All test point types are definable In addition Test Macros and reference changes can be used to test a device available in COMPASS for Pressure Enhanced only Section 7 4 Run Test explains the standard COMPASS algorithm for running tests Familiarity with the steps of test execution steps is necessary to properly setup a Test Definition Refer to the following sections for details on the selections in the Test Editor Test Definitions can only be edited when COMPASS is not in an active run mode If in Run Test mode only the active Test Definition displays All fields and selection functions in the editor are disabled 8 3 CREATING TEST DEFINITIONS Open the Test Editor using the Setup Test menu option Use the Te
493. nless a change in the device is necessary Select Setup Test to create a Test Definition that describes the test points and other aspects of the testing procedure The Test Definition also specifies the reference pressure measurement and control devices to use in the test see 8 Setup Test Select Run Run Test to begin the Test Initialization process required to begin a test see 7 3 Test Initialization Page 95 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 62 QUICK TIPS Set up and run a test Create a Test Definition to define the test procedure see 8 Setup Test Create a DUT Definition to define a device under test see 9 Setup DUT Configure the hardware to be used to run the test by creating Device Definitions and the Default Hardware Configuration Run test Run a test in which the pressure at each point is adjusted to a nominal pressure value for example to the nominal point when calibrating a manual gauge Specify lt Jog before dwell gt in the Test Definition This causes test execution to pause at each point to allow pressure adjustment jog prior to taking data at the point see 3 3 5 2 Jog How do add existing data files to the COMPASS Test Data Database There are three ways to add data to the COMPASS Test Data Database Use Data Add Data File to Database menu choice choose the Import Data File option in the COMPASS Data Viewer see
494. ns Reports 276 COMPASS Report Editor Options Report Generation 278 COMPASS Report Editor Options Templates Options 279 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler Options enne 280 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties ss 281 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Format Tab 282 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Source Tab 282 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Source Tab 283 COMPASS Report Editor Available Data Fields 286 COMPASS Users Selections and Associated Rights 291 COMPASS Database Maintenance Tool 293 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page X Table 95 Table 96 Table 97 Table 98 Table 99 Table 100 Table 101 Table 102 Table 103 Table 104 Table 105 Table 106 Table 107 Table 108 TABLES amp FIGURES Command Termination and Timeout Frame 301 DataFile Str clue o tete oe eit tede e rette ea ede nav tne rd aede toes 306 COMPASS Object Summary 309 Pressure Unit Constant iii 310 Pressure Measurement Mode Constant sess enemies 311 Temperature Unit Constants ss 311 Manual AUtOmatlc 4
495. nship settings apply from this point on In most cases it is desirable to use Same as the relationship choice when reading the Primary Variable This way no manipulation other than a unit conversion of the output will occur 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 300 25 REMOTE INTERFACING 25 6 TERMINATION AND TIMEOUT Interfaces settings common to all COMPASS supported remote interfaces are listed at the bottom of the interface setup screen on the Communications tab Command Timeout s a Command Terminator CR LF E Response Terminator E Figure 203 Command Termination and Timeout Table 95 Command Termination and Timeout Frame Labels FRAME LABEL DESCRIPTION Command Timeout s numeric entry The maximum length of time to wait for a response to a remote command If a response is not received within this amount of time a COMPASS timeout occurs Command Terminator text entry drop down list selection Defines how the device terminates command strings The selected or entered value is automatically appended to the end of every command issued Make sure that the terminator is not also included in the remote command setup The selections available from the drop down list are lt CR gt Carriage return ASCII character 13 lt LF gt Line feed ASCII character 10 lt CR gt lt LF gt Carriage return line feed ASCII characters 13 and 10 This is the most common selection and is select
496. nt then RepeatCount 0 Clear repeat flag cCOMPASS StatusDisplay Verifying data repeatability Since this is a Pre Point macro the current point doesn t have data yet so the previous point is checked With cCOMPASS DataCollection 1 DataPointRef 1 1 1 cint iP 1 Diffl DUTDiff End With With cCOMPASS DataCollection 1 DataPointRef 1 1 cint iC cint iP 1 Diff2 DUTDiff tol abs Tolerance tolerance value End With RepVal abs Diffl Diff2 Uncomment the message lines to view messages for debugging msg DIFF1 amp diffl amp vbcrlf amp DIFF2 amp diff2 msg msg amp vbcrlf amp TOL amp TOl amp vbcrlf msg msg amp Difference amp repVal msgbox msg vbSystemModal POINT amp iP amp CY amp iC if RepVal Limit Tol then The value did not repeat within the desired specification RepeatCount RepeatCount 1 RepeatPoint iP Flag repeated point cCOMPASS StatusDisplay Repeating Test Point cCOMPASS StepBack end if end if End Function Page 347 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Name Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks Example Name Purpose Syntax Arguments Return Value Remarks 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc StepNext Programmatically press the Step Next button to skip through steps or points in a test cCOMPASS StepBack
497. ntify the device as a Measurement and Test Equipment device COMPASS provides features so that only devices identified as M amp TE can be used as Sources of reference pressure This helps to limit the number of devices in the list of reference measurement related quantities Default Test Definition optional drop down list DUT editor only Select the default test to execute when the DUT is selected The selection can be made from the drop down list of Test Definition Record Labels or press the button next to the field to access the Test Definition Selector During Test Initialization the test specified here is selected by default This is a simple means of linking a DUT with a testing procedure Choose None to remove any DUT and Test relationship Record Last Edited display only The user that was actively logged into COMPASS when the device definition being edited was last modified This field is used for display purposes only COMPASS updates this field automatically when appropriate when changes are saved Record Last Edited Date display only The date of the last edit of the device This field is used for display purposes only COMPASS automatically updates this field when changes are saved Changes to metrological elements such as piston cylinders can adversely impact pressure measurement using COMPASS Use this field to determine the last time a setup was changed and to troubleshoot problems associated wit
498. ntrol This feature is available for pressure Control Abort controllers only Checking this feature requires defining remote commands to abort pressure optional check control if the device has a remote interface box The commands associated with this feature should abort all active control provided by the device Abort commands are issued as part of the Leak Test only When a remote abort option is not provided the test user must abort pressure control during the leak test when prompted 4 3 7 1 SET RELATIONSHIP EDITOR Final sets are created using the features on the Set Relationship Editor Press the Add button to create a new final set or press the Edit Set button to edit an existing final set See 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic ie critical to proper use of the Output Relationship Editor The purpose of the Set Relationship Editor is to define a setting or controlling device s final sets There are two types of set targets physical targets and state targets Physical targets set a specific pressure or temperature in a test State targets set multiplexer channels and valve states Remote commands to control a set point merge a numerical value with remote command text to accomplish sets as required by a Test Definition point sequence The remote command is merged with the set point by either using a
499. ntrol the device output The individual choices confine the list of available temperature controllers during test initialization The choices are Test Temperature Control The output is controlled by the configured test temperature controller General Temperature Control The output is controlled by the any temperature controller stored the COMPASS database Voltage A device that controls voltage is required to control the output The choices are Voltage Supply 4 3 7 1 2 Final Set Tab Setup Procedure This section describes the features associated with the Set Relationship Editor Final Set tab A step by step tab completion process is detailed below Table 21 provides detailed information on the tab fields and options See 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs understanding of this topic is critical to proper use of the Output Relationship Editor Page 65 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc e Set Relationship Temperature Final Set Test Temperature Control v Unit Minimum Maximum Resolution Cancel Figure 35 Set Relationship Editor Final Set Tab Select the Final Set tab Enter the lt Final Set Label gt Features on the Tools Options Initialization tab allow final sets to be selected as id
500. ny final outputs as are supported by the platform Note that DHI piston gauge platforms set up using Auto detect setup do not have a read tab and most other piston gauges do not final outputs to be read Therefore the Output tab is not usually used for a Piston Gauge Platform If applicable select the Set tab to define final sets Press the Add button and edit the information on the Set Relationship Editor If the final set requires remote commands to control the device press the Edit Commands button to launch the Remote Command Editor Pressure and temperature sets can optionally use remote Ready Not Ready indication Control Abort and Vent commands Press the Add button to add as many final sets as are supported by the Platform Press the Editor Toolbar Save icon save all changes Any errors in the setup must be remedied before the Piston Gauge Platform Definition can be saved 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 162 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE 11 2 1 HEADER TAB See section 4 3 3 Header Tab 1L2 2 CALIBRATION TAB See section 4 3 4 Calibration Tab 1L2 3 P C MS TAB The P C MS Piston Cylinder Mass Set tab is used to define which metrological elements are available for use with a Piston Gauge Platform This tab is available on the Piston Gauge Platform Editor only In most cases not all metrological elements defined in the COMPASS database can be used with a given platform Limiting the list of sel
501. ny menu options contain a direct toolbar shortcut Accessing a feature with either method has the same function File The File section of the menu bar contains options that deal with files as a whole This includes open save and print options This menu also contains Exit in order to close the COMPASS Report Editor see 23 4 1 File Edit Edit governs the adding and removing of sections of text and also contains tools with which to search through the text see 23 4 2 Edit View View toggles tool bars on and off controls the appearance of documents and show or hides the tools bars see 23 4 3 View Insert Insert provides a link to outside components and objects that can be added to reports and templates see 23 4 4 Insert This is primarily how images are added to templates Format Format controls the way text appears in documents see 23 4 5 Format It can change the color add bullets set tabs and create advanced word processor styles Table Tables provide a very important feature Under this menu item tables are added or deleted from templates Tables are required on templates in order for a report to display multiple test data points see 23 4 6 Table Tools Tools stores options for the Report Editor and acts as an interface to administer the external controls that are used with the Report Editor see 23 4 7 Tools Windows Windows arranges multiple documents with in the main
502. of measurements used to determine the average DUT pressure value DUTID Long Integer COMPASS Device Database Key for the Reference DUTMass Double Total DUT mass loaded at this point This field applies to piston gauge and deadweight tester type DUTs only DUTMassList Text List of individual masses currently loaded on the DUT Each mass is delmited by a colon For example piston bell 5kg 1kg DUTMaxPressure Double Maximum pressure value recorded while averaging the DUT pressure DUTMinPressure Double Minimum pressure value recorded while averaging the DUT pressure DUTPistonPosition Double Position of the piston at the time of measurement DUTPistonRotation Double Speed at which DUT mass was measurement was recorded rotating when the DUTPressure Double Pressure as recorded by the DUT DUTRawOutput1 Double Value of the DUT s Raw Output 1 DUTRawOutput2 Double Value of the DUT s Raw Output 2 when applicable DUTRawOutput3 Double Value of the DUT s Raw Output 3 when applicable DUTReferenceVacuum Double Value of vacuum used by the DUT DUTStnDev Double Standard Deviation of the DUT pressure measurement DUTTemperature Double Temperature viewed recorded by DUT ElapsedTime Double Elapsed time in seconds from the start of the test FinalLinePres Double Line pressure m
503. ogged in the test Data File whenever a DUT is out of tolerance The DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen displays a red triangle next to all DUTs that are out of tolerance see DUT Reference Comparison Run screen 5 5 2 The options are No Action gt A T displays in the Status column of the test Data File but there are no associated prompts or messages during the test The test continues normally This is the default selection Prompt to repeat A message allowing the point to be repeated or to continue with data collection displays if an out of tolerance condition occurs A repeated point begins with the set pressure step of the test Do not use this selection when running automated unattended tests as COMPASS will wait indefinitely for a response to the prompt causing the test to hang Auto repeat 3 times The test set pressure step is automatically repeated up to 3 times when an out of tolerance condition occurs during averaging This selection can be used when running automated unattended tests as the test will proceed This selection is intended for use with fully automated tests The test point is repeated a maximum of 3 times regardless of other test related auto repeat options Manual entry of ambient conditions drop down list box Determines when manual ambient conditions information entries will be made in the test sequence When the reference or DUT is a Piston Gauge the selections here have no
504. ommand field and choose the Replace x option as the Process Set selection COMPASS formate all numeric targets to set commands according to the specified Final Output Unit and Resolution The range of targets is limited to 10 of the specified Min Output and Max Output values Enter control targets in the display unit on the lt Device Output gt run screen to change device targets when running manual tests 4 4 3 1 ABORT VENT COMMANDS Abort and Vent commands are special cases of Set commands Unlike typical set commands no target information is merged with the command Abort commands must abort control in the instrument without manipulation and vent 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 70 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES commands must return the instrument to ambient conditions without manipulation Macros can still be used to create the remote commands if desired 4 4 3 2 MULTIPLEXER VALVE DRIVER COMMANDS COMPASS uses positive integer values only when creating multiplexer and valve driver commands It is up to the user to associate these integer values with more complex connections and states in the actual instrument For example a multiplexer channel of 1 may actually require multiple channels on the multiplexer to be set In many cases this will require a COMPASS Macro 4 44 EDITOR OPTIONS The tables below describe the options available in the Remote Command Editor Not all options are availabl
505. on RawOutput4 The output of the instrument used to read the DUT temperature when the RangeMain class is a DUT and a DUT measuring device was selected during test initialization 7 3 3 Only set this property to a value that is already in the proper unit of measure To avoid setting the value in the same unit of measure use the RangeRaw4 class and set the RawOutput property to the desired value The normal unit conversions between the output source device s final output unit of measure and the requested raw output unit of measure happen automatically When the RangeMain class is for a non DHI piston gauge this output represents the reference vacuum measuring device output specified during test initialization Boolean TRUE when a controlled output is ready based on the COMPASS stability criterion or the instruments remotely queried ready criterion A remotely queried ready criterion is available on when Ready Commands are specified for the device 4 3 7 RefOutput Double The last updated reference final output for DUT based Calculation Classes The value is always in the final output unit of the reference RegEnabled Boolean TRUE when output regulation is enabled and FALSE otherwise Page 337 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL PROPERTIES RegulationMode DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION Integer The type of output regulation e 0 No Regulation 1 Regulate to the referen
506. on from allowing the pressure measurement mode to change when the Piston Gauge Platform is selected 11 2 4 SOURCES TAB The choices on the Piston Gauge Platform Editor Sources tab define specific devices to use to provide final outputs needed in determining the behavior of and the pressure defined by the Piston Gauge Platform Making selections on this tab can avoid having to select sources during Test Initialization The selected devices are used to measure the residual vacuum when applicable piston cylinder temperature piston rotation rate and position The Piston Gauge Run Screen displays the output of the selected devices when tests are run 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 164 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE Each list contains all devices that support the platform condition final output A selection is not required Review the Piston Gauge Calculations section of this manual for details on how the platform condition values are used If the platform under edit contains the desired outpute to use in a source field define the outputs and save the platform before making selections on this tab The outputs will not be available until the platform is saved Header Calibration P C MS Sources Communications Output Set Platform Condition Sources Reference Vacuum DH PG7000 Base Reference Vacuum v Edit Piston Cylinder Temperature DH PG7000 Base P C Temperature Y Edit Piston Position NONE
507. on step see 7 3 5 Verify Select Test Hardware Select the PPCS in the Reference Pressure field It is automatically selected in the Pressure Control field Devices are selected by their Record Label and Serial Number by default Change how devices are selected by changing test initialization optione see 14 5 Initialize Test Tab Page 103 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Run Manual Test Setup Test Hardware Configuration Ambient Pressure Ambient Temperature Ambient Humidity Reference Pressure Reference Line Pressure Reference Temperature Pressure Control Line Pressure Control Temperature Control Multiplexer Valve Driver Controller NONE NONE NONE Example PPC3 1234 NONE NONE Example PPC3 1234 NONE NONE NONE NONE Default Hardware Setup Back Next Einish Figure 58 Example PPC3 Hardware Selection Cancel e Press Next until the PPC3 setup screen displays Press Next again or the Load Settings button to load the range information of the see 7 3 3 2 Configure Device The available range information will display on the inset panel see Figure 59 Choose the measurement mode and range to use To use the Auto Range feature of the PPC3 select Auto Range as the PPC3 range The Max and Min pressure values will be used to Auto Range the PPC3 Run Manual Test Setup
508. on the PC to allow COMPASS to communicate with instruments via IEEE 488 23 UNINSTALLING COMPASS FOR PRESSURE To uninstall COMPASS use the Add Remove Programs feature in the Windows Control Panel and select COMPASS for Pressure In both cases a series of prompts must be followed in the application removal program to uninstall COMPASS All installation files and registry updates are removed Data directories created by running COMPASS are not removed by uninstalling It is up to the user to manually remove these data directories By default this directory is C Program Files COMPASS for Pressure Data The application removal program always displays a message indicating COMPASS was not completely removed when executed after new Data Files have been created Any file management tool such as Windows Explorer can be used to remove these data directories 24 UPGRADING FROM COMPASS FOR PPC RPM All Data Files DUTs and tests created with COMPASS for PPC RPM can be used in COMPASS for Pressure Data Files can be directly accessed like native COMPASS for Pressure Data Files Prior to using DUT and Test files use the Tools File Upgrade Wizard feature to convert the COMPASS for PPC RPM files into the format required by COMPASS for Pressure The original COMPASS for PPC RPM files are not modified and can still be used with COMPASS for PPC RPM after the upgrade process completes 25 NETWORK SHARED INSTALLATIONS The COMPASS main program and any of i
509. one 10 31 2002 11 59 02 PM Short Time 23 59 H M S AMPM 11 59 2 PM H M S 23 59 2 HH MM SS 23 59 02 Long Time 11 59 02 PM Date Format Choose the format that the Report Editor will use to display date information in the report The options are described in the table belo Ww FORMAT RESULT None 10 31 2002 11 59 02 PM Short Date 10 31 2002 yyyymmdd 20021031 yymmdd 021031 mmm d yy Oct 31 02 mmmm d yyyy October 31 2002 Long Date Thursday October 31 2002 Language Enables the user to choose between the available languages Currently English is the only available language Future plans incorporate a strategy to include user defined languages and terminology as well as a method to upgrade language support as new languages become available Plot Tool This path should point to the database that is common to both the COMPASS Plot Tool and Macro Editor the COMPASS Macro Editor Without a valid path plotting and macro functionality will not be Database available By default the file is the same as the value selected in the COMPASS main program see 24 2 Database Setup 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 280 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR 23 10 FIELD PROPERTIES Field Properties govern the way the field is replaced with data during report generation Click any field in a report template to view the field properties Options are provided to automatically display fie
510. ons made as a result of the outcome of the macro The code within the macro however can alter the test if desired 8 5 2 LEAK TEST FRAME The Test Definition Editor Pre Test tab Leak Test frame is used to specify whether a leak test will be run at the beginning of a test and to define the leak test parameters The leak test if included occurs at the very start of test execution Pressure is set to the specified Leak Test Pressure and pressure control is aborted once a Heady condition is reached If the pressure controller does not support Abort commands a prompt to abort pressure control is given to the user COMPASS then allows pressure to stabilize for the lt Dwell Time gt Once the dwell time has completed pressure is measured over the lt Leak Test Time gt Then the pressure is vented The leak rate is calculated as the difference in pressure between the beginning and end of the Leak Test Times divided by the leak test time The leak test pass fail is determined by comparing this value to the Leak Rate Limit The Abort Test On Failure option determines whether the test proceeds if the leak test fails If the test proceeds the pass fail status of the leak test is indicated in the Leak Test section of the Data File When running a test the Skip Forward toolbar icon can be used to ekip the leak test This may be desired if a Test Definition that includes a leak test is aborted at some point after the leak test
511. onship Resolution Same Raw Output Final Output Cancel Cancel Figure 76 mensor PCS 400 Set Relationship Define the remote commands to change the target pressure Press the Edit Commands button to display the Remote Command Editor This setup will use an Initialization command to ensure that the PCS 400 is in a VENT condition before the start of atest Initialization commands are sent only 1 time at the end of the Test Initialization process Click the New toolbar option and define the initialization command see Figure 77 Press the Save toolbar option and again press the New toolbar option to create the set command see Figure 78 The set command will use the lt Replace x gt option to alter the remote command as required by each new target pressure see Error Reference source not found Click the Save toolbar option before pressing OK 5 Set Command Editor Pressure Global Settings SET 1 pes4 func ctrl x Command Type Initialize Command Number 1 X Command pest func vent Delay After Command fio Read Response Process Set Apply Set s Set Command Editor Pressure Commands Global Settings Command Type Set Command Number 1 X Command pes func cti x Delay After Command s o ReadResponse X Process Set X Apply Set Replace x Figure 78 mensor PCS 400 Set Command Setup Page 117 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS
512. ontents as a string Public Function ReadAllTextFile fName Dim fso f Set fso CreateObject Scripting FileSystemObject Set f fso OpenTextFile fName 1 ReadAllTextFile f ReadAll Read the entire file into that variable End Function INTERFACE MACROS cParent Device Class that contains the output or Chnist set Val ve dri ver channel state cCalc Calculation Class cConfig used to determine Target The active Configuration the final output Target output for a Class All devices are value controller accessible with this cl ass Interface Macro Use any means necessary to return the raw output value of a measuring device or to setthe target output of a controlling device An Acti veX contr ol or any other COMPASS object can be access ed to read or control a device Set the macro function name to the return value Return or 9999 to prevent COMPASS fr om using the return value The raw output valueinthe defined raw output unit must be retur ned for measuri ng devices Figure 145 Interface Macro Prototype An Interface Macro must read the output of an instrument using code directly written in the macro or by calling an OLE object that communicates with the device This type of macro is used most frequently when the desired remote interface is not available within COMPASS Function ioMacro cCalc cParent fTargetl bChnlSt cConfig e cCalc The Calculation Class of the device e cParent The parent D
513. oose a Use Multiplexer gt option based on the requirements of the final output In most cases Nevers is the appropriate selection However there are cases in which linking the update of the final output to a specific channel on a multiplexing device is desirable For example a voltage output pressure transducer can be setup to use a specific multiplexer channel during Test Initialization As a result the voltage output is only updated when the selected multiplexer channel is active Multiple transducers can be setup this way allowing a single voltage source to measure the output of each transducer by relying on the multiplexer to handle the channel switching The Final Output tab settings are complete Select the Tolerance tab Detailed information on all selections are provided in the Final Output Tab Fields Table see Table 14 Page 52 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Table 14 Output Relationship Editor Final Output Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Final Output Label required drop down list selection A user defined label that describes the final output of the device This label will be used to identify the specific final output of this device throughout COMPASS n many cases a useful label is one that is equivalent to the Final Output gt Output Type required drop down list selection Select the type of the final output This selection describes the general type of the output The cho
514. operating systems If this is the case open Control Panel then select Ports Select the effected RS232 port from the list then choose Settings Change the state of the FIFO Enabled option at the bottom of the Settings display The RS232 cable is not properly grounded Check the RS232 cable to make sure that all pins are properly connected Especially pin 5 ground The PC s RS232 port is going bad However rare RS232 ports do go bad This problem is associated with intermittent communications Verify that other RS232 devices function properly while being continuously polled cannot edit a Test Definition Piston Gauge Platform Hardware profile etc The user rights associated with the current user login do not permit the Selected edits Login as a user with more user rights by using Database Change Current User or have a user with administrator level access adjust your user rights cannot edit a selected Test Definition during the initialization of a test COMPASS displays Test Definitions in Test Editor for viewing purposes only during test initialization and while a test is running Edit tests using Setup Test while COMPASS is idle to edit a Test Definition The test Data File appears in the COMPASS root directory as opposed to a directory based on the DUT serial number or identification An invalid character appears in the DUT serial number or ID field V lt
515. options are enabled To log a data point simply choose the appropriate icon Points can be taken individually averaged individually and averaged automatically When the run mode is ended or a new Data File is created all of the Options End Test and Options Data File selections are made available This allows test notes to be entered and empty test files to be deleted see 14 8 Data File Tab and 14 5 End Test tab 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 80 5 MAIN DISPLAY AND FEATURES When a Data File is created in Run Manual Test mode data points be taken without the constraints of a specific test sequence however the resulting Data File is identical to files generated with the Run Test option Therefore reports and plots can be created from the Data File PAN Using any of the automatic data logging options can result in very large Data Files These are files with significantly greater than 1000 data pointe COMPASS was not intended to manipulate such files Lower performance PC s will experience significant delays in generating reports and plots of large Data Files Therefore use of the plotting and reporting functions with very large Data Files is not recommended Instead export the Data File to a spreadsheet application for further analysis Table 22 describes each of the data acquisition toolbar options in detail Table 27 lt Control gt Toolbar Data Acquisition Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Cr
516. orm supports see 11 2 3 P C MS Tab By default all defined metrological elements are available Limiting the choices on this tab will prevent errors during Test Initialization Remember that Piston Gauge Type platforms must have piston gauge type metrological elements and Deadweight Tester Type platforms must have Deadweight tester type metrological elements Go to the Sources tab and specify the Platform Condition Sources see 11 2 4 Sources Tab Piston position rotation and temperature are not required selections If devices are available to output these values select them in the appropriate lists Piston Gauges that measure absolute pressure with a vacuum reference require a vacuum reference device to read the residual vacuum pressure Go to the Communications tab and specify the appropriate Data Acquisition Type and corresponding settings Most Piston Gauge Platforms other than DHI PG7000s do not have a remote interface If the Platform does not have an interface Manual is the Data Acquisition Type selection If applicable select the Output tab Press the Add button to create a final output and edit the information on the Output Relationship Editor If the final output requires remote commands to read the Raw Output press the Edit Commands button to launch the Remote Command Editor see 4 4 Remote Command Editor Specify the commands required to interface with the device Press the Add button to add as ma
517. ort Device Definition save operation can be completed 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 160 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE 11 Setup PISTON GAUGE 11 OVERVIEW See Section 17 Tools PG7000 Setup Extractor for information on setting up a DHI PG7000 piston gauge Piston gauges and Deadweight testers whether used as a DUT or a reference are set up and stored using the Piston Gauge Platform Editor A Piston Gauge Platform defines the specific type of Piston Gauge identifies which Piston Cylinders Mass Sets and Mass Bells are normally used with the platform and optionally defines how piston position and rotation information will be obtained when the platform is operated A Piston Gauge Platform can also specify final outputs and sets As with all device definitions in COMPASS a single device can provide multiple outputs and sets See Section 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic is critical to proper setup of the Output tab Then review 4 5 Device Editore for details on how the COMPASS device editore function Rights associated with the active COMPASS user may prevent edits in the Piston Gauge Platform Editor Adjust the user rights as necessary using the Database Users menu choice There are two types of Piston Gauges Platforms Piston Gauge Type and Deadweight Tester Type The selection is ma
518. ort into the MET CAL database is created see 22 3 Export to MET CAL X Deletes the current test record Delete Deleted records are not recoverable If a record is accidentally deleted the database may be restored by re importing the original COMPASS Data File I2 Sets the location of the database By default the database location is the value amp specified in Database Setup see 24 2 Database Setup Database Location Details of each record are displayed below the Test Record Information label General test information is displayed across the form in five labels while devices and data points are displayed in tables below This information is not meant to be comprehensive but is only intended to quickly identify an individual test See Table 70 for details on the information in these fields Table 70 Test Record Information Fields LABEL DESCRIPTION Test Label COMPASS Test Definition that was used to perform the calibration Data of Test Date that the calibration was begun Data Filename The original COMPASS filename of the data file that was imported into the database User Identification Identifies the individual who performed the calibration Station Indicates where the calibration was performed Identification Device Information Grid contains all devices involved with the calibration Separate devices are listed by individual row The function of the device is de
519. ouble The maximum pressure achieved by the reference during the averaging cycle RefMinPressure Double The minimum pressure achieved by the reference during the averaging cycle RefPistonPosition Double Reference piston rotation rate at the time the point was taken RefPressure Double The reference pressure RefRawOutput1 Double The un manipulated raw output of the reference RefRawOutput2 Double The un manipulated second raw output of the reference This value is present only when the reference has more than one raw output RefRawOutput3 The un manipulated third raw output of the reference This value is present only when the reference has three raw outputs RefReferenceVacuum Double The residual vacuum around the reference when the reference is a piston gauge RefStnDev Double The standard deviation of the average reference pressure If the reference was not averaged this value is not applicable RefTemperature The reference temperature output SetErrorFs The span error relative to the set point SetErrorRdg The reading error relative to the set point SetPointLinePressure Page 318 The Test Definition specified line pressure target 28 COMPASS OBJECTS PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION SetPointTemperature Double The Test Definition specified temperature target SetPointTestPressure Double The Test Definition
520. overshooting The new target value is limited by 1096 of the maximum output of the controller and 5 of the target value The adjustment equation is as follows T T 4098 1 Last Meas VARIABLE FEATURE The new target output This value is formatted into a remote command and issued to the controlling device as long as it does not exceed 110 of the Max Final Output and it differs from the last target Tias The last target output issued The measured output of the regulation reference device This can be the output of the DUT or the reference The choice is made in the Test Editor Zero target outpute are not regulated COMPASS will not attempt to set a target that exceede the maximum controller output by more than 10 In this case 110 of the Max Final Output is attempted Any calculated target that exceeds the output by more than 5 is ignored Regulation mode is selected on the Test Editor Pressure Tab General child tab The regulation readjustment time interval is the Regulation Delay Click the Device Output Run Screen of a controller to display a popup menu of options Regulation can be engaged or disengaged by using this menu Page 14 3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES 3 3 5 2 JOG Use jog when small adjustments to target output is desired after the target has been set but before data acquisition The most common use of jog is setting a manual DUT such as an analog gauge to
521. owing Where 4 Piston head Pa P t fluid density kg m3 P a air density kg m3 g gravity m s2 hp piston height m Page 358 Py o p eh fluid head correction applied to calculate defined pressure Density of test fluid at current pressure Density of ambient air calculated using current ambient pressure temperature and relative humidity Assumed to be zero when operating in absolute with a vacuum reference Acceleration due to local gravity Height of the current piston position above Piston Gauge reference level 29 CALCULATIONS 29 9 2 OVERALL FLUID HEAD CORRECTION The overall fluid head correction results from combining the three head components for each Piston Gauge measurement mode In general overall head correction is given by Py PH pur mcm Gauge mode lo Pa Pa ghp Absolute mode by adding atmospheric pressure Air density is zero for all components except for the ATM head which is used to compensate for barometer height Pg ppghp pasghg P Shp Absolute mode with vacuum reference Air density is zero for all terms and no barometer is used pgghp py Shp Page 359 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 360 30 TROUBLESHOOTING 30 TROUBLESHOOTING COMPASS for Pressure is a sophisticated software package with many advanc
522. p one time and used to perform many different functions in COMPASS Use of Multiple References Within a Single Test The range and or specifications of some DUTs may require the use of more than one reference device to complete the calibration process For each change COMPASS allows valves to be adjusted and macros to be executed to allow fully automated changing of reference devices Test Macro Access Test Macros allow complete control of the testing process A Test Macro can for example be used to adjust external valves in a specific sequence between test points or as part of a reference or controller change Include Temperatures and Line Pressures in a Test The basic pressure sequence can be repeated at multiple line pressures with line pressure setting and pressure line pressure sequence can be repeated at multiple temperatures with temperature control Page 3 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 12 COMPASS SINGLE USER AND SITE LICENSE COMPASS for Pressure Basic and COMPASS for Pressure Enhanced can be purchased with either a single user or a site license A single user license allows only one copy of COMPASS to run per purchased single user license at an organization Each copy of COMPASS must use its own database or be the only copy of COMPASS using a shared database Multiple single user licensed copies of COMPASS cannot use a common database at the same time
523. panel is disabled Exercise Pressure Unit list box The unit of measure in which the exercise pressures are defined The selected unit in this field is appended to the unit specific fields of the exercise setup Numerous pressure units and DUTSpan are amongst the available unit choices If DUTspan is selected cycle pressure values entered are converted to a pressure based on the span of the first DUT when the test is run Min Pressure aaaaaaaa gt numeric entry field Defines the minimum exercising pressure to be set for each exercise cycle aaaaaaa is the lt Exercise Pressure Unit gt choice To make the minimum pressure VENT or the lowest value that can be set by a piston gauge place the cursor in the field and then press the computer s Insert key to call a dropdown list with these insert selections Max Pressure aaaaaaaa gt numeric entry field Defines the maximum exercising pressure to be set for each exercise cycle aaaaaaa is the lt Exercise Pressure Unit gt choice To make the maximum pressure VENT or the lowest value that can be set by a piston gauge place the cursor in the field and then press the computer s Insert key to call a dropdown list with these insert selections Number of Cycles numeric entry field Defines the number of times the minimum maximum minimum pressure exercising cycle will be repeated Set Pressure Timeout s gt numer
524. pecified in the Commands field is sent to the remote device regardless of the set point Use this choice with controlling devices that have a pre programmed sequence of targets that correspond to Test Definition targets in COMPASS The Command should move to the next step in the pre programmed sequence of steps COMPASS replaces the text x with the numeric target output in the Final Set Unit of the device Multiplexer and valve driver state changes use positive integer values for x only Replace x Page 72 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Options the Global Settings tab apply to the entire command set and not just the selected command Table 24 Remote Command Editor Global Settings Tab Options FRAME LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Multiplexer Determines the association of a remote command set to the state of a multiplexer This feature is commonly used for DMMs that will be multiplexed to read several DUTs at dropdown list the same time The choices are Always During test initialization the device must specify a multiplexer to use and corresponding multiplexer channel Sometimes An option to use a multiplexer is provided during test initialization The selection is not necessary Never There is no choice to use a multiplexer during test initialization If a multiplexer is used COMPASS sends the remote commands to activate the desired channel on the multiplexer then issues the appropriate read comman
525. place of a number 29 5 HYSTERESIS COMPASS determines the hysteresis of DUT output relative to the reference readings The hysteresis value can be included in reports COMPASS first analyzes the test data to determine if a meaningful hysteresis calculation can be made For hysteresis to be calculated the test point sequence must correspond to a normal ascending and descending or vice versa calibration sequence This means that the first and last nominal test points must be within 196 of each other as well as the second and second to last etc If the sequence does not meet this criterion COMPASS displays N A in place of a number This is the same test used to determine which type of linearity calculation will be used It is not efficient for all possible combinations of points to be verified as part of the hysteresis calculation If hysteresis information is desired on test data that does not meet this criterion use a macro in the report editor Hysteresis is the maximum difference between corresponding ascending and descending DUT points in a test point sequence The hysteresis value is expressed in DUTFS 29 6 REPEATABILITY A calculated repeatability value is only possible when multiple pressure cycles test cycles or Data Files are used to generate a report The value is determined by comparing data from each test cycle and finding the maximum error deviation between any two cycles at the same point The value is expressed in DUTFS
526. plexer 1 is returned RangeType Integer 0 Normal output or set 1 DHI based output or set e 1 DHI Piston Gauge e 2 COMPASS defined Piston gauge RawOutput The last updated raw output value in the raw output unit Setting a new raw output value automatically updates the calculation of the final output RPTSN String The serial number of the internal RPT of a DHI device SetDevice Boolean TRUE when the Range Class is used for a set device and FALSE when it is used for an output device SpanFinal Double The span of the final output in the final output unit SpanRaw Double The span of the raw output in the raw output unit ss 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Single The stability setting in the final output unit of the device The value should not be set when a DHI device is used Page 330 28 COMPASS OBJECTS PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION TypeFinal Integer Final output type e 0 Pressure 1 Temperature e 2 Voltage 3 Current 4 Mass 5 Rotation 6 Other 7 Position 8 Frequency 9 Resistance 10 Humidity 11 Time 12 Multiplexer channel control 13 Valve driver channel control TypeRaw Integer Raw output type See TypeFinal UnitFinal Integer Theunit identifier of the final output unit UnitFinal Integer The unit identifier of the final output UnitRaw Integer The unit i
527. port functions can be created following this main function This grouping of functions will reduce troubleshooting time in the event of an error All functions of the same macro type can be called by any other function of the same macro type For example any function created within an Interface Macro can call any other function created within an Interface Macro The one exception is for Global Macros All functions in all modules can access Global Macro functions There are many useful Global Macro functions provided in the default COMPASS database Any variable created within a macro function is a Local Variable No other macro function can access the data in a Local Variable Variables declared before the first function in a macro are available in all functions created in the current macro and any other macro of the same macro type These variables are Module Variables Module Variables are declared using the DIM statement for example Dim iCounter A Module Variable created in a Global Macro is a Global Variable All macros regardless of their macro type can access Global Variables 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 232 19 DATA VIEW DATA FILE 19 DATA VIEW DATA FILE 19 1 OVERVIEW When COMPASS runs a test it logs exhaustive test related data in a Data File dat The Data File is automatically generated and stored to a DUT dependent directory Data Files can be viewed as raw text in almost any text editor or
528. ported Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell to be selected and used to determine pressure based on mass load and other Piston Gauge Conditions The Piston Gauge Calculator calculates mass to load to obtain a pressure or pressure resulting from a mass load This is a quick and easy way to verify pressure calculations within COMPASS and to determine the pressure of a Piston Gauge without running a test or using a spreadsheet All calculations used by this tool are detailed in section 29 8 Piston Gauge Pressure Calculations In addition to manual calculations the Piston Gauge Calculator is used when running tests to display and calculate pressure for Piston Gauge test devices During tests this tool acts as a run screen to provide most of the same features that are available when not running a test see 5 5 5 Piston Gauge device Output Run Screen The limitations are imposed to prevent corruption of a Test Initialization Setup By default the last used Piston Gauge and corresponding metrological elements are selected each time this tool is selected To begin always select a lt Piston Gauge Platform gt The Piston Gauge Platform Editor provides features to associate metrological elements to a specific Piston Gauge Platform and determines the Piston Gauge type Piston Gauge or Deadweight Tester Only elements supported by the selected Piston Gauge Platform display in the lists at the top of lt Piston Gauge Calculator gt Se
529. pport Device Editor Calibration Tab Page 37 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Header Calibration Tolerance Characteristics Calibration Due Date Calibration Performed By Calibration Date 29020607 v 20030107 Y 25894 Certification ID M amp TE Device Record Last Edited Record Last Edited By 2002 11 08 11 58 06 4M Admin Figure 18 Piston Cylinder Editor Calibration Tab Table 9 Device Editor Calibration Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Calibration Date optional calendar selection Enter the calibration date of the instrument In most cases the date of the last calibration should be entered The date is always formatted according to the host computer s short date format selected in the Windows Control Panel under Regional Settings Press the down arrow to select the date by using a calendar Use the horizontal scroll bars to change months Click the year at the top of the calendar to display a vertical scroll bar Use this scroll bar to select the year 20020821 hd August 2002 E 1 4 5 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 c 2 Today 2002 12 30 Figure 19 Date Selection Calibration Due Date optional calendar selection Use the calendar selector to specify the next calibration date of the device If this date is less than the current test date COMPASS considers the devices out of
530. pressure value could be entered as the leading character to strip In some cases both a delimiter and a number of characters to strip may be required For example if a remote device returns Range 1 4 34 volts NR 4 431 psi the number of characters in the volts output can change making it impossible to use a fixed length value for the number of spaces to remove to access the pressure value To avoid this problem enter the text lt 4 gt This tells COMPASS to move to the second comma then increment four spaces to read the pressure output value Only non numeric text be used as a delimiter in the leading charactere to strip field numerical entries are assumed to represent the corresponding numerical value Alternatively a COMPASS Macro can be specified to format responses that do not conform to simple text manipulation All available macros display in the list box Select the desired macro or create edit a macro by using the Add Macro menu choice see 18 5 6 Reply Parser Macros Apply Set drop down list selection Set Command Sets only 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Determines how a set command with the Process Set option checked will be combined with the current target output to yield the final set command This option applies only when the lt Commands is not the result of a COMPASS Macro There are 2 choices Automatic COMPASS takes no special action on the command The exact value s
531. r If the controller is unable to set the test target and achieve a Heady condition within the time out period a t is logged in the Status column of the data run time test log and in the Data File and test execution proceeds to the dwell step for that point see 21 5 3 DATA Table The control time out assures that a test will not hang up indefinitely waiting to achieve a Heady condition at a test point however data taken after a control time out is likely to be invalid Set the control timeout to a value greater than the worst case pressure setting time of the controller If pressure control is Manual or Reference PG the control timeout is ignored numeric entry field Pressure Control Use Ready Criterion Auto Rotate Mass Auto Generate Pressure I Generation Dead Band mm 25 Ready Hold Time s 0 Control Timeout s 600 Figure 106 Test Definition Editor Points Sequence Tab Set Child Tab for a PG7000 Table 42 Test Definition Editor Points Sequence Tab Set Child Tab for a PG7000 Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Use Ready The option is valid only when the Auto Generate Pressure option is selected and the Criterion selected test pressure controller has Ready Commands defined see 4 4 2 1 Ready Commands The response to a Ready Command signals to COMPASS when the controller has achieved its target output In the case of a piston gauge it is assumed that a Ready condition is not output by t
532. r Number of pressure exercise cycles DatabaseKey Long Integer Location Key in the COMPASS Test Device Database DataFile Text Filename of the original data file DatalnfoCollection Memo Text Representation of the Page 245 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL DATABASE FIELD DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION DatalnfoCollection DataPath Text Path to the original data file Deliminator Integer ASCII value of the delimiter used to Separate data in the data file DLLVersion Text Version of the TestData DLL that was used to collect the data LastModifiedBy Text COMPASS user that saved the data to the database LastModifiedDate Date Time Date Time when file was added to the database LeakDwell Integer Leak test dwell time LeakRate Double Calculated test leak rate LeakRateLimit Text Test leak rate criterion LeakStatus Text Result of the leak test LeakTarget Double Leak test target pressure LeakTime Integer Leak test time LinePresCtriMode Text The line pressure control mode static dynamic LinePresDwell Text Line pressure dwell time LinePresHoldLimit Text Line pressure hold limit LinePresJog Text Line pressure jog state Yes No LinePresMeasMode Text Under what condition is the line pressure measurement made
533. r a specific device output The Range Class properties are typically required for output manipulation in Relationship Macros Calculation Class The Calculation Class combines all objects required to determine the output of an instrument or to control its output The Calculation Class typically maintains one or more Range Classes The number of classes used is determined by the number of raw outputs selected in the Output Relationship Editor Use this class to read the output of an instrument or set a new target within a Test Macro Page 309 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL OBJECT NAME DESCRIPTION COMPASS Class The COMPASS Class is the only global object provided by COMPASS within a macro Many of the toolbar functions in COMPASS that are available when running tests can be accessed by this function This gives users the ability to repeat tests points and pause the test within a macro Access to the Configuration Class is also available The COMPASS Class is the only COMPASS object that supports events This functionality is provided because this class is the OLE interface to the COMPASS for Pressure main program Other than using macros to alter the sequence of a test a host program can be developed to respond to the events of the COMPASS Class 28 2 OBJ ECT CONSTANTS There are many properties in the macro objects that return an integer value that represents an action or a quantity T
534. r the command text to use to send a command or select a macro from the list The macro must return a string that is the exact command required by the device Do not include a command terminator for the remote command if a lt Command Terminator gt value is specified in the remote interface setup of the device see 4 3 5 Communications Tab Set commands are adjusted by the lt Apply Set gt selection when the selected command is not the result of a macro text entry drop down list In the event that the command required to interface with a device cannot be entered using a standard keyboard requires non printable ASCII characters or manipulation is required to create a command for the device use a COMPASS Macro to create the command using VB Script see 18 5 2 Get Command Macros A mechanism is provided to send specific data bytes to a device Enter the text BYTE followed by a series a data bytes 0 255 separated by spaces The numeric values are converted to a sequence of characters and sent to the remote device Make sure that decimal values are entered and not hex 255 not FF For example enter the command BYTE 2 27 to send the characters 2 and 27 Hex 02 1B Most devices that require specific byte data in this way do not use command or response terminators Page 71 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FRAME LABEL DESCRIPTION Delay After Command numeric entry
535. r unit of measure 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 172 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE Header Calibration Mass Set Total Trim Mass g 100 Available Resolution g Y Mass Set Density ka nv 7900 Figure 115 Mass Set Editor Piston Gauge Trim Mass Type Mass Set Tab Table 49 Mass Set Editor Piston Gauge Trim Mass Type Mass Set Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Total Trim Mass The total of all the mass in the trim mass set The value must be entered in optional numeric 9 9 s g entry Mass Set The smallest mass increment available in the trim Mass Set The values Resolution must be entered in grams g required drop down list selection Mass Density The density of all masses in the trim mass set The value must be entered in kilograms per cubic meter kg m The value is used for air buoyancy corrections when applicable when solving the pressure equation required numeric entry 11 4 3 3 DEAWEIGHT TESTER TYPE MASS SET When the Mass Set Type specified on the Mass Set Editor Header tab is Deadweight Tester the mass Set Editor Mass Set tab displays the fields listed below The Mass Set Mass Set tab provides the mass label and corresponding pressure for each individual mass in the mass set Each mass selection in the Individual Masses list updates the specific mass s information on the right side of the tab Entries that have an asterisk next to the
536. rance4 Text Additional output tolerance statement for the device FinalOutputUnit Text Final Output Unit HeadHeight Double Height above the base of the instrument where the measurement is said to represent HeadMedium Text Medium which is measured by the device air N2 water oil HeadUnit Text Unit of measure distance for the head height Identification Text User assigned ID or description Label Text Device label used to describe the device LastCalDate Date Time Date the device was last calibrated prior to current date Manufacturer Text Manufacturer of the device MassBellDatabaselD Long Integer Database Identifying the Bell in the COMPASS Device database MassBellMass Double Mass of Bell MassBellSerialNumber Text Serial number for Bell MassSetDatabaselD 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Long Integer Database Identifying the Mass Set in the COMPASS Device database Page 248 DATABASE FIELD MassSetSerialNumber DATA TYPE Text 21 DATA DATABASE DATA VIEWER DESCRIPTION Serial number of the mass set MassSetTotalLoad Double Sum of all the masses in the mass set MassUnit Text Unit of mass that describes all Piston Mass Set and Mass Bell masses MeasMode Text Mode in which the device was operated Abs Gauge Model Text Model number descrip
537. rce This is the Raw Output Unit gt Select the Output source to specify how COMPASS will obtain the raw output The choices available are the device itself manual or its remote interface or another device identified by the final output type THE NORMAL SELECTION IS THE DEVICE ITSELF MANUAL OR ITS REMOTE INTERFACE When the choice is manual entry or a remote interface the device s output must be entered or acquired in the selected Output Type unit This requires manual entry in that unit or that the response to remote commands is in that unit When a Support Device final output is selected as the Output source COMPASS handles all necessary unit conversions Device based Output Source selections do not require a specific device selection at this step The actual source device is determined by the Test Definition or ie selected during Test Initialization see 7 3 5 Verify Select Test Hardware For example for a voltage output pressure transducer Voltage Measurement is selected as the Output Source During Test Initialization the actual voltage measurement device ie selected The default devices used throughout COMPASS to supply final outputs and sete are specified using the Default Hardware Configuration see 12 Setup Default Hardware Configuration If not using multiple raw outputs go to If using multiple raw outputs repeat and for each of the raw outputs Then proceed to Enter the
538. rce gt required drop down selections for the raw set list selection State based targets such as lt Multiplexer Channel gt and lt Driver gt do not require further selections on any of the Set Relationship Editor tabs Raw Set Unit Select or enter the raw set unit of measure This unit is significant when the lt Set Source gt selection requires a support device A unit conversion is used to required text set the output entry list selection Set Source Select the source of the raw set The available choices are determined by the lt Set Type gt selection and the settings on the Communications tab of the device s definition required list selection Minimum Enter the minimum raw setpoint in the specified raw set unit This field is not conditional numeric available when a state based lt Set Type gt is selected entry Maximum Enter the maximum raw setpoint in the specified raw set unit This field is not conditional numeric available when a state based lt Set Type gt is selected entry Page 63 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Resolution Set the resolution with which the Minimum and lt Maximum gt setpoint entries display This selection also determines the default resolution used on the run required list box Screens and logged and reported for the raw set selection Raw Set to Final Select
539. rce to supply the reference pressure final output Make sure to select the correct final output the one corresponding to the desired range The same is true of a pressure controller that can be used in more than one measurement mode for example gauge and absolute lt needs a reference pressure final output for each measurement mode This does not apply to DHI products setup using the lt Auto Detect Setup gt feature In this case COMPASS handles the multiple final outputs automatically without requiring set up of each final output individually DHI products created using the lt Auto Detect Setup gt feature of the Device Editor are not handled in the same way as other COMPASS device setups see 4 3 3 Header Tab COMPASS automatically includes final outputs provided by the DHI device in all appropriate lists For example a PPC3 provides Reference Pressure Reference Line Pressure Test Pressure Control Line Pressure Control DUT Pressure and Ambient Pressure Multi range products such as the PPC2 and PPC3 are listed only once when selecting a final output source COMPASS handles the multiple final outputs and allows selection of the desired range when the device is initialized see 7 3 3 2 Configure DHI Device 3 3 4 CONTROL DEVICES Read the Measurement Devices section before reading this section Control features for a device are setup and used on the same principles as measurement devices The same device may have both final
540. re 91 Set Pressure with Non DHI Piston Gauge DHI Piston Gauge Reference When the pressure reference is a DHI PG7000 setup with the Auto Detect Setup gt option a prompt with the required nominal mass load is presented Load this mass according to the PG s mass loading order and press OK generate the test pressure and float the pi not support jog or regulation features 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Pag e 134 A second prompt to ston is displayed Float the piston and press OK When automatic pressure generation is enabled in the Test Definition the second prompt is skipped Test execution proceeds to directly to dwell after the pressure is set Piston gauges do 7 RUN MODES COMPASS Message Load 10 0kg nominal mass Press DK when ready Cancel COMPASS Message Generate approximately 100 00 kPa and float the piston Press DK when ready to begin dwell Cancel Figure 92 Set Pressure with a DHI Piston Gauge Regulation When pressure regulation is active in the Test Definition and the pressure reference has a remote interface the target pressure is adjusted based on the output of the pressure reference at intervals specified by the Test Definition Regulation is explained in greater detain in section 3 3 5 1 Stability Test After the test pressure is set using an automated controller the test stability criteria are used to determine when the test pressure is ready A controller i
541. read the output Process Response must be checked to tell COMPASS that the output of the active command must be manipulated to obtain the raw output of the device A Manipulate Response entry is not required because the voltage command directly outputs a numeric value The Remote Command Editor should look like Figure 54 when complete Press OK to return to the Support Device Editor s Output Command Editor Voltage Commands uie Command Global Settings Command Type Read x Command Number 1 v Command MEAS VOLT DC Y Delay After Command s 0 Read Response X Process Response X Manipulate Response Figure 54 Example DMM Remote Command Setup e At this point only the voltage output of the DMM is setup Repeat the steps described above for each output of the DMM Press Add enter raw output and final output information and edit the remote commands When all outputs are properly configured the Output tab will look like Figure 55 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 100 6 HOW DO I Support Device Editor Support Device Record HP 344014 For PC Temp Label Header Calibration Communications Output Set Comment Final Qutput Labels 1 PRT Resistance Output 4 2 Frequency SlPeriod Time Raw Output Current 0 000 1 000 A Final Output Current m Measurement 0 to 1 A Edit Output Edit Commands Remove Close Figure 55 Ex
542. rectly to the second PC If the files cannot be transferred over a network the data must be transferred via floppy disk or writeable CD Install COMPASS for Pressure on the first PC Determine a directory on the network that is accessible to all PCs that will be running COMPASS Read and write access is required Copy the Compsetp mdb and the CompData mdb files to this directory These files are found in the COMPASS installation directory and represent the configuration and test data database files respectively By default COMPASS is installed to C Program Files COMPASS for Pressure Create sub directory folders called Data Template and Report on the network These directories should be used as the default storage location for data files report templates and reports Locate the COMPASS installation directory on the local PC and copy the contents of the Data Template and Report directories to the corresponding folder on the network Run COMPASS and choose the Database Setup menu choice see 24 2 Database Setup Specify the network location of the configuration database and the test data database files Click the entry field and browse the network if necessary Also specify a unique Station Identification value Make sure that only alpha numeric characters are used in the Station Identification field Press OK to accept the changes Select Tools Options Data File and specify a network directory for the Roo
543. rence 71145 s Dwell i 45 s Automatic Pressure Cycles 1 Vent After Eacy Cycle v Figure 101 Test Definition Editor Point Sequence Tab General Child Tab Table 39 Test Definition Editor Point Sequence Tab General Child Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Run Temperature Sequence or Run Line Pressure Sequence condition check box Check this option to run the Temperature or Line Pressure sequence when the test is run When this button is not checked all features on the Temperature or Line Pressure tab are disabled This choice is not present on the Pressure tab General child tab as the pressure sequence is always run Unit required list box selection Select the unit of measure in which the points on the Points Table are expressed The choices include all points available in the Unit of Measure Converter Pressure Point Sequences can use DUTSpan as the unit In this case the actual test pressure unit is the Final Output Unit of the first DUT selected when the test is run Measurement Mode required list box selection Select the pressure measurement mode in which the test points are expressed Only pressure controlling and measuring devices that support the selected measurement mode are available in the in the Read and Set lists Temperature point sequences do not use this selection Read required list box selection 2002 2004 DH Instruments In
544. requires several characters to be ignored before converting the response to a number In other cases more significant command manipulation is required such as BCD binary coded decimal or ASCII to text conversions In these cases use a COMPASS Macro to parse the response using VB Script see 18 5 6 Reply Parser Macros Page 69 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 4 4 2 1 READY COMMANDS Although ready commands are associated with controlling devices they most resemble read commands Ready are continuously issued to an instrument after a target output is set A ready command must respond with FALSE or 0 when the target output has not been achieved and TRUE non 0 when the output has been achieved see 3 3 5 3 Ready Not Ready Not all instruments support ready commands 4 4 5 CONTROL SET COMMANDS Set commands are used to stimulate an output in the device The command set should generate an output in the Final Output Unit of the device A pressure controller should use these commands to set a pressure in the controllers Final Output Unit COMPASS automatically handles unit conversion between the required set unit and the current testing and display unit As with Read command sets multiple commands can be used however only the command with Process Set is combined with the current set point based on the Process Set selection to create a new command see 4 4 4 Editor Options A set comma
545. resolution can be changed for most outputs DUT Reference Display the DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen This display provides Comparison convenient real time error information calculated for each DUT compared to the active reference see 5 5 2 DUT Reference Comparison Run screen Display the Data Grid with the data logged for the current test The drop down arrow next to the image allows the selection of data from other DUTs to display when a test is executed with more than one DUT The information displayed in the grid and the data logged in the Data File can be modified by using Tools Options Data Grid and Data in File see 14 7and 14 9 Data Plot Display the Plot Tool loaded with data from the current test No new Data Files can be loaded in the Plot Tool while a test is running Data from all active Data Files or any one Data File is plotable while running a test Use the toolbar on the Plot Tool to generate the desired plot Displays the Conditions Run Screen This display lists the current ambient conditions the active reference outputs and the most recent output target for active controllers 5 43 DATA ACQUISITION TOOLS In Run Manual Test run mode data can be acquired based on the selection of data acquisition tools on the Main Toolbar The first requirement is to open a Data File by using the Create Data File function After the file is selected the remainder of the data acquisition
546. ressure controller is set to the target pressure or a user prompt to set the pressure manually displays The active pressure controller is selected during Test Initialization Regardless of the controller specified in the actual Test Definition the controller selected during Test Initialization is used e NON DHI Piston Gauge Reference When the pressure reference is a piston gauge the Piston Gauge Calculator is used as a run screen To set a pressure COMPASS automatically displays this form with the target pressure entered Load the selected masses and float the piston to set the target pressure After the piston is floating and stable press the Pressure is Ready button to proceed with the test dwell Piston gauges do not support jog or regulation features Page 133 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL s Basic PG Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set Trim Mass Set Mass Bell Medium Measurement Mode Ambient Temperature C Ambient Humidity RH Ambient Pressure psi Ambient Pressure Height cm Head Height cm Piston Cylinder Temperature C Piston Position mm Local Gravity m s Nominal Mass Loading Resolution Pressure kPa True Mass Load kg Nominal Mass Load kg Basic PG PC 107 DHI MassSet 2107 MB 229 25 000 Mass List 56 21 14 771 0 25 000 0 1 0 100000 20 2 00 100g 100 0000 Pressure is Ready Figu
547. rface settings ect This makes it possible to press the Finish button at any time during the test initialization process to automatically use the settings from the previous test When the previous test is completely unrelated to the test under initialization press the Clear Previous Selections button to remove information from the last test executed This may also be necessary if many devices used from the previous test are no longer available or if they were significantly altered Run Test Setup Select Units of Measure The unit lists below define the units of measure to use when logging outputs to the data file The selections also represent the default display unit of devices that output the corresponding quantity Select the desired units and press Next The selected Test Definition may override the units selected Pressure Unit Line Pressure Unit Temperature Unit Select Enter User Name Clear Previous Selections Cancel N Einish Figure 81 Run Test Setup Select Units of Measure 7 3 2 SELECT DUT S The Select DUTs Initialization Step is provided to allow DUTs to be selected for Testing A grid of all available DUTs displays at the top of the dialog This list is composed of all final outputs specified as DUT pressure or General Pressure and Piston Gauge Platforms that are designated as possible DUTs DUTs are listed by record label manufacturer model serial number final output label identi
548. rguments to the method determine which button is pressed see Data Acquisition Tools 5 4 3 TimeDelay 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Asynchronously delay the execution of a macro All other events in COMPASS will remain active however the current macro will delay for the time given as a parameter to this function If a macro uses an indefinite loop or a loop that will typically take several seconds the method should be called with a very small time delay 0 5 to allow an update of events within COMPASS In general Page 344 28 COMPASS OBJECTS Name AbortAutoPointCollection Purpose Programmatically press the Abort Autopoint Collection toolbar button see 5 4 3 This stops all active automatic point collection if it is active Use the TakePoints method to enable automatic point collection Syntax cCOMPASS AbortAutoPointCollection Arguments None Return None Value Remarks Use this method to abort automatic point collection when running a manual test in COMPASS Automatic point collection can be setup by user interaction or the TakePoints method Example See TakePoint example Name AbortTest Purpose Programmatically press the Abort button on the main toolbar to abort any active test Syntax rtv cCOMPASS AbortTest bSilentAbort Arguments bSilentAbort Use TRUE to abort the active test without a prompt to the user Use FALSE to abort the test only if the current test users responds appropri
549. rop them from the Available Data Fields panel onto the template or double click the data field to add it to the template at the current cursor position If the option to edit field properties is enabled see 23 9 3 Templates Tab the Field Properties form will display after a field is inserted see 23 10 Field Properties f necessary manually display the field properties by clicking the field on the report template The field properties help control how the field is used during report generation Page 285 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL e Data stored in each test point reference pressure DUT Pressure etc must be included in a table to automatically display all points of the selected type These fields are preceded by when displayed on the report template If the field is not included in a table only 1 point is logged in the report When the field is included in a table all points of the type specified by the field s properties are logged By default table rows are added and deleted to accommodate all data points reported see 23 9 2 Report Generation Add tables to display fields located in the lt Data File gt section of the lt Available Data Fields gt panel see 25 12 2 Tables This is data logged at each point a test The table is visible in the Report Editor only The table is not visible on printed reports e Add fields from the Available Data Fields gt 23
550. ruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 48 Mass Set Editor Piston Gauge Type Mass Set Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Mass Name optional numeric entry An easily identifiable description of an individual mass When masses are used in operation they are listed and need to be recognized by the value entered in this field and their Nominal Mass or True Mass values Typically the label used is a mass number and nominal mass value Nominal Mass required numeric entry The nominal mass value of the mass in kilogram kg This value can help recognize the mass when used as most mass sets includes a number of masses with the same nominal value but different true mass values The nominal value identifies the mass the True Mass value is actually used to calculate the total mass load and the pressure output True Mass required numeric entry The true mass value of the mass in kilogram kg Tolerance required numeric entry The tolerance of the True Mass entry in milligram mg The tolerance value is used in calculating the uncertainty in the final output pressure Makeup Mass check box Check this box to designate a mass as a makeup mass There can be only one makeup mass in a mass set Mass Density required numeric entry The density of all masses in the mass set The value must be entered in kilogram per cubic meter kg m and must be the same for a
551. s HOUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE 1011 In most cases this is incorrect If the device supports 11 channels the format is typically ROUTE CLOSE EXCLUSIVE 111 To handle this case and other extended channel function a Get Command Macro is required see 18 5 2 Select and edit these macros by using the drop down menu choice in the Command field Table 3 defines macros to use to handle extended multiplexer channels Command Type Set Command Number 1 v Command TE CLOSE EXLUSIVE 10 x Delay After Command s 0 Is Read Response Process Set Apply Set Replace x Figure 5 Common Multiplexer Command Setup Page 19 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Table 3 Switching Multiplexer Get Command Macros MACRO CODE FOR AN AGILENT 34970A DAQ SWITCH UNIT TOI HD IO IIS IG IOI IG IG IO IG IO I I IO a k This Function must return the command to be sent to a remote Multiplexer that uses the SCPI protocol Only 1 channel bank is supported by this macro Target Target value when the SetMode it True ChnlSt True False to activate or de active a valve driver SetMode True for Set commands False for all other commands ParamID Parameter ID of the device cDevice Device class that the relation ship applies to The value is returned by setting the function name to the calculated value IO III IO I IG IO IOI ICI IO IO X
552. s Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 5 3 STATUS BAR The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the main screen In all run modes COMPASS flashes information related to the current status of test execution on this display While running tests two panels and a progress indicator also display with status information on the current test step and point The red panel on the left displays the current major test step setting test temperature pressure etc The blue panel indicates the minor test step stability test dwell taking point etc Test Pressure Take Point Averaging data time remaining 7s Figure 38 lt Status Bar gt Clicking either of the inset panels of the status bar or using the Back or Next toolbar options displays the Test Status form This form lists the current test status when running a Test Definition Including the current point in a test relative to the maximum number of points as well as the status of the leak test if included in the test Test Status Complete T Figure 39 Test Status The progress indicator is a visual indication of the relationship between the current test point and the number of points in a test The indicator is a progress bar located across the bottom of the run screen just above the status bar The left side of the progress bar represents 0 progress and the right side represents 100 96 Each test point increments the progress indicator When Skip Back and Skip Forward
553. s Junk Reports ij Write protect reports M Auto Save Reports Use data file directory for default report location Default Report Extension Microsoft Word doc C TXT ext Format ASCII Text txt Rich Text Format rtf Save Exit Figure 180 COMPASS Report Editor Options 23 9 1 REPORTS TAB Report Generation Templates General Report File Options Root Directory for Reports C Program Files COMPASS for PressureSReports Bj Write protect reports Auto Save Reports Use data file directory for default report location Default Report Extension Microsoft Word doc TXText Format rpt ASCII Text txt C Rich Text Format rtf Save Exit Figure 181 COMPASS Report Editor Options Reports Tab Table 84 COMPASS Report Editor Options Reports Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Root Directory for Provide the default path for reports This is the location where users are promoted to save Reports their report or where auto saved reports are saved If Use Data File directory for default report location is checked then that supersedes this selection and files are auto saved to the data s path directory Write Protect After reports are saved set the read only property on the file As soon as reports are Reports generated and saved the report file properties are change to allow read only access This setting can only be altered by editing the properties of the
554. s may be necessary to analyze the data using the COMPASS Report Editor or to manipulate the data in a spreadsheet Access the DUT UUT by using the Instrument Browser gt Select the Calibration tab and press the Show Calibration Results icon Cut and paste the displayed results into a text editor and save the file with a dat extension To copy the data first click the displayed values and press CTRL A followed by CTRL C to copy the display to the clipboard The text editor Notepad found in the Windows Programs Accessories group is the recommended tool Click the text display in Notepad and press CTRL V to paste the data Save the file to complete the process 22 3 4 IMPORTING SPECIFIC DATA INTO RESULTS TABLE A Calibration Record and source file must be created prior to importing data into the database Not all data logged by COMPASS can be added to the MET CAL database See Table 75 for the specific fields imported The most common fields were selected Once imported data can be used within MET CAL in any way desired Follow the steps below to import data into the Results Table Run Met Track and choose the Tools Import menu option This will open the Import Tool see Figure 166 Fluke Metrology Software Import Ea Delete Log Delete Redo Files Select Delimiter View Log Exit Figure 166 MET CAL Import Tool Select the correct delimiter prior to importing the
555. s object name followed by an appropriate property or method cCOMPASS StatusDisplay Hello World No special declaration is required Like all objects used in a macro the COMPASS Class is not accessible in the Debug Window on the COMPASS Macro Editor see 18 3 The COMPASS Class contains a reference to the Configuration Class a reference to the active Test Class and many properties that are useful when automating COMPASS Use this object to monitor the state of COMPASS access data that is otherwise not available in a macro function and to update the status bar with information in a macro Page 341 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL One of the most important uses of the COMPASS Class is to pass program thread control back to the main COMPASS program within a macro by using the TimeDelay function This function is required to support asynchronous operation with COMPASS and a macro If this function is not used COMPASS code will not run until the macro completes This means the devices used with COMPASS and their corresponding Run Windows will not update with new output data A small occasional delay is all that is necessary to prevent this problem see Threading Model 18 6 COMPASS Class The only global object that can be accessed in a macro The current Test Defintion Class Test Data Classes and Configuration Class are accessed as properties of this object Use this class to determine the
556. s or select another tab to change other options The purpose of the Run Test tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 57 COMPASS Options DataGrid Data File DatalnFile DataHeader Interface Language Ambient Conditions Initialize Test Fun Test End Test Piston Gauge Allow manual control of devices when running tests Use common manual reference pressure for multiple DUTs Use set point as reference reading in dynamic control Wait for a new update from each remote device when averaging data If pressure Not Ready occurs while averaging Auto repeat 3 times If DUT is out of tolerance Action Manual entry of ambient conditions ach point Enter manual ambient conditions in default units Display COMPASS Macro error messages oues Figure 124 Options Run Test Tab Table 57 Options Run Test Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Allow manual Check this box to allow user access to the target controls of the Conditions and individual control of devices device Run Screens during tests The target controls allow new pressure and temperature when running targets to be set and direct adjustment of valve driver states Using these controls during a check box test can alter the sequence defined by the Test Definition Use common Affects how reference readings are taken when reference readings are entered manually and manual refere
557. s ready because the remote response from the controllers Ready Command returns true or the test pressure reference outputs a pressure that is within the hold limit relative to the target and the output is stable within the stability limit Stability and hold criteria are used only when an automated pressure reference is used Jog before dwell If jog mode is selected in the Test Definition the Output Control window displays with only the Target Temperature and lt Jog gt buttons active Use these control functions in the necessary combination to set the desired output Pressure jogging is typically used to set cardinal pressures on DUTs Dwell If timed dwell is specified in the Test Definition the dwell time counts down and execution continues If the Test Definition specifies manual dwell COMPASS waits for the operator to press OK on the Dwell Complete dialog box before test execution continues Page 135 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 6 Take data Following the settings in the Test Definition Data tab all test instruments are read as many times as possible for the averaging period If timed averaging is specified in the Test Definition the averaging time counts down as the data is averaged If manual averaging is selected a message displays awaiting confirmation of when to start averaging A fixed averaging time can be entered in this window if desired If the fixed time is entered and the Fixed
558. s to access device level properties Within COMPASS a Device Class contains collections of Range Classes that represent the outputs and sets of a device However macros access outputs and sets individually by using the appropriate Range Class or Calculation Class Use the properties and methods of these classes to access the Device Class as required by a macro Device Class Used to access settings stored ina corfgureddevice DUTs support devices and piston gauge all use the Device Class to stare infonration Figure 206 Device Class Object Model 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 324 28 5 1 PROPERTIES PROPERTIES AdvancedDevice DATA TYPE Integer 28 COMPASS OBJECTS DESCRIPTION e 0 Simple Pressure DUT e 1 Advanced DUT CalDate String Last calibration date CalDueDate String Calibration due date Callnfo1 String Generic calibration information string The field can be used anyway desired A combination of string and numeric data can be written in the field Various delimiting techniques can be used to extract numeric calibration data from the string value Calinfo2 String See Callnfo1 Calinfo3 String See Callnfo1 Calinfo4 String See Callnfo1 Calinfo5 String Only COMPASS macros can read or set data in this field See Callnfo1 The data in the field is written to the data file and available for reporting Calinfo6
559. s valve driver actuation and multiplexer channel selection The remote commands used to communicate with the device require formatting to allow integer targets to set the target channel or valve state In many cases a Remote Command Macro is required to properly format the target into a remote command The Remote Command Editor provides features to support the necessary target command manipulation Page 61 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL e 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc we Multiplexer and valve driver remote commands must be formatted to support integer target values to set the desired output To define a final set using the Set Relationship Editor always make selections on the Raw Set tab first then the Final Set tab Selections on each tab can impact the selections available on other tabs Making selections in tab order will prevent confusion The following sections provide detailed information on using the Set Relationship Editor tabs 4 3 7 1 1 Raw Set Tab Setup Procedure This section describes the features associated with the Raw Set Tab A step by step tab completion process is detailed below This section describes the features associated with the Set Relationship Editor Raw Set tab A step by step tab completion process is detailed below Table 19 provides detailed information on the tab fields and options See 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorou
560. se the editor to resume the test The next time the macro is called verify that the changes were successful This technique will work for all macros except GetCommand type macros see Macro Types 18 5 An error messages displays for each macro error If there are many macro errors it is best to abort the test and correct the problem It is a good idea to update the COMPASS status bar within the macro to notify the test operator of any errors Page 190 14 TOOLS OPTIONS 14 5 END TEST TAB The Tools Options End Test tab is used to set user preferences affecting operations that occur to conclude a test sequence see 7 4 Run Test The purpose of the End Test tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 58 When selections are complete click OK to save changes or select another tab to change other options we Selecting a fixed repeat point delay deactivating the test notes and enabling the auto report generation can allow an automated test to run and generate complete report without any user intervention COMPASS Options DataGrid Data File Data In File DataHeader Interface Language Ambient Conditions Initialize Test Run Test i Piston Gauge Final point of each cycle Enable repeat for fixed time delay n5 E Prompt to repeat C No repeat option C Auto generate reports after complete tests Prompt for test notes at the end of complet
561. ser defined intervals COMPASS will call the Interface Macro to read the output of a device Macros defined on the Set tab are called each time a new target is requested with the device Interface Macros allow users to continue using their existing data acquisition code while taking advantage of the benefits in COMPASS They also allow COMPASS to indirectly support a number of remote interfaces Relationship Relationship Macros are used to calculate a final output from raw output information The raw output of an instrument can be manipulated any way desired or required to obtain a final output Other COMPASS data is available for use in the manipulation The macro should return the final output of the instrument in the specified final output unit There is virtually no limit to the manipulation capabilities of this macro For example ambient pressure and temperature can be used to correct the output voltage of a transducer to obtain a final pressure for the transducer The output of a transducer can be corrected with an adder and multiplier to obtain a fully compensated final output This type of macro is selected using the Read Relationship Editor Set relationships cannot use macros to obtain a raw set value When a Relationship Macro is used it is called each time a raw output is available for the selected instrument Page 215 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL MACRO TYPE DESCRIPTION
562. set data in this field CalibrationCoefficients1 The data in the field is written to the data file and available for reporting CalibrationCoefficients6 Only COMPASS macros can read or set data in this field See CalibrationCoefficients1 CustomerID A unique identifier to associate with a customer DAQMethod Method with which information was relayed to the device DatabaselD Database primary key for the device DWTGravity The gravity assigned to a deadweight tester mass set The value is always specified in m s FinalOutputMax Maximum final output value FinalOutputMin Minimum final output value FinalOutputSpan Difference between the maximum and minimum final outputs FinalOutputTolorance1 String representing the first tolerance segment FinalOutputTolorance2 String representing the second tolerance segment FinalOutputTolorance3 String representing the third tolerance segment FinalOutputTolorance4 String representing the fourth tolerance segment HeadHeight The pressure head correction height The value is always in cm HeadMedium The medium used to determine the pressure head correction Label Device record label LastCalDate Date the device was last calibrated Manufacturer The manufacturer of this device MassBellDatabaselD The primary database key of the mass bell used with the device
563. so be used as DUTs see 10 Setup Support Device Default Hardware Configuration Specify non DUT devices to use by default when running a Piston Gauge Piston Gauge Platform Piston Cylinder Mass Set Mass Bell Pressure Media 5 2 3 TOOLS Options Remote Communications Unit of Measure Converter Piston Gauge Calculator PG7000 Setup Extractor COMPASS Macro Editor 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc test Test Definition device selection override the default hardware see 12 Setup Default Hardware Configuration Create edit view and delete Piston Gauge platforms using the Piston Gauge Platform Editor see 11 2 Piston Gauge Platform Create edit view and delete Piston Cylinders using the Piston Cylinder Editor see 11 3 Piston Cylinder Create edit view and delete Mass Sets using the Mass Set Editor see 11 4 Mass Set Create edit view and delete Mass Bells using the Mass Bell Editor see 11 5 Mass Bell Create edit view and delete pressure medium profiles using the Pressure Medium Editor see 13 Setup Pressure Media Select options to customize COMPASS behavior see 14 Tools Options Send and receive remote commands manually using the Direct Remote Communication tool see 15 Tools Remote Communications Run the Unit of Measure Converter This tool not only acts as a convenient unit converter it also provides the ability
564. spreadsheet application Data Files can be merged with report templates to generate custom test reports However there are occasions in which it is desirable to view a Data File without leaving COMPASS For this purpose the Data File Viewer is provided This tool is accessible using Data View Data File When Data View Data File is selected a standard Windows file browser appears with the default directory set to the root Data File directory Selecting a Data File causes that file to be opened and displayed in the COMPASS Data File Viewer The Data File Viewer provides no formatting It displays only there are no options to edit and or save Data Files using this feature The name and directory path of the Data File currently being viewed are shown at the top of the window While viewing a Data File a toolbar on the top left of the display is available for new file selection printing and displaying the test data in a grid format The function of each toolbar option is described in the table below 2 File C Software CompPrs Install Support SAMPLE DAT EEK TEST INFORMATION TestName Database Key Complete Test Cycles Num Pres Cycles Num Pres Pnts Pres DwellPres Avg Time Pres Hold Lmt Pres Stab Set Lmt Pres Stab Time Line Pres Stab Set Timeout T empJog T empRegulate LinePresJog LinePresRegulate PresJog PresRegulate LinePresCtrldode PresCtilMode BG Standad Cal 1041345765 1 3 9 100 s 45 s 0 01 DUTSpan 0 005 DUT Span 5 300 No 0
565. ss iii 264 COMPASS Report Editor sise 265 COMPASS Report Editor Main Menu Bar 266 COMPASS Report Editor File Menu eene 267 COMPASS Report Editor Edit Menu 268 COMPASS Report Editor View Menu 269 COMPASS Report Editor Insert Menu 270 COMPASS Report Editor Tools Menu 271 COMPASS Report Editor Window Menu ss 271 COMPASS Report Editor Main Toolbar sse nennen 272 COMPASS Report Editor Format Toolbar 273 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler seen 275 COMPASS Report Editor iii 276 COMPASS Report Editor Options Reports Tab 276 COMPASS Report Editor Options Report Generation 278 COMPASS Report Editor Options Templates 279 COMPASS Report Editor Options General 280 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties sssssssssssseeeeenneenen 281 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Format 281 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Source 282 COMPASS Report Editor Field Properties Data Source 283 BEES 284 Adding Dynamic Data to a Table 287 COMPASS Data
566. ssed as a value in DUT pressure units using a coverage factor of 2 The value is reported as DUTFS by dividing by the DUT s S Standard estimate of error for a first order linear regression This value combines linearity hysteresis and repeatability The value is the standard deviation of the error from a linear fit resolution Definition Specified DUT resolution This value is determined by the resolution selection in the DUT U std Uncertainty of the reference as specified in the reference Device Definition The value is converted to the DUT s pressure unit of measure for the calculation 29 8 PISTON GAUGE PRESSURE CALCULATIONS The following sections document the calculations used by COMPASS to define the pressure of a piston gauge When a DHI PG is used remotely COMPASS only applies a unit conversion as necessary to convert from the PG s output unit to the display unit in COMPASS The values on the following table are used to calculate the piston gauge pressure Each of the values is specified in COMPASS in either the Piston Cylinder Mass Set or Mass Bell setups Refer to the appropriate editor to view edit or modify a setting The COMPASS Tools Piston Gauge Calculation option is a simple way to verify the COMPASS calculation as compared to a spreadsheet or another PC based application VARIABLE Table 107 PG7000 Defined Pressure Calculation Variables DEFINITION Piston diameter at temperature and pres
567. st Toolbar New icon to create a new Test Definition Set up the test as desired then press the Save icon to store the test information Any conflicts that exist will cause an error message to display Resolve the conflicts before re saving The Restore icon is nonfunctional for new tests The feature only restores to the last saved state Since new Test Definitions have not been saved there is nothing to restore Page 139 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Familiarity with test execution sequence is necessary for proper setup of a Test Definition Review the Run Test Sequence section of this manual see 7 4 Run Test If a Test Definition similar to the one to be created exists use the Copy toolbar icon to copy the existing Test Definition into a new Test Definition with the same characteristics Then make the edits specific to the new test Don t forget to change the Record Label prior to saving 8 4 EDITING TEST DEFINITIONS Tests can be edited whenever COMPASS is not in an active run mode Use the Setup Test menu option to display the Test Editor if it is not already open Simply changing information in the Test Editor places the Editor in the edit mode No specific option need be selected to begin editing a Test Definition Use the Save icon to store the edits or press the Restore icon to return the test to its original state 8 5 PRE TEST TAB The Test Editor Pre Test
568. ston Cylinder PC Piston cylinder piston cylinder module Piston Gauge PG Abbreviation of piston gauge calculate pressure from Ae and mass Pressure Cycle A complete set of all pressure points in a COMPASS Test Definition Tests may include multiple pressure cycles pressure to mass Operating mode in which the user enters the pressure to be defined and COMPASS calculates the mass to load Primary Variable The designation of the main output of a transmitter using the HART protocol This is the output obtained by sending Universal HART command 1 PRT Platinum Resistance Thermometer The element used in the piston cylinder mounting post to measure temperature Raw Output The fundamental basic output of a device For example a pressure transducer s raw output is voltage and voltage is converted to its Final Output Type pressure then pressure is a Final Output such as DUT Pressure Ready Not Ready Indication of when conditions are present to make in tolerance pressure definitions based on specific criteria for each condition Ready Not Ready Indication of when conditions are present to make in tolerance pressure definitions based on specific criteria for each condition Ready Not Ready Indication of when conditions are present to make in tolerance pressure definitions based on specific criteria for each condition Reference Device that outputs reference pressure R
569. sure conditional numeric entry Atmospheric pressure as entered by the user or read from a configured device when running a test This value is not required in Absolute Measurement Mode and or when using a Deadweight Tester Type platform Ambient Temperature conditional numeric entry Ambient temperature as entered by the user or read from a configured support device when running a test This value is not required in Absolute Measurement Mode Ambient Humidity conditional numeric entry Atmospheric humidity as entered by the user or read from a configured support device when running a test This value is not required in Absolute Measurement Mode Vacuum Reference conditional numeric entry Residual pressure under the bell jar in Absolute Measurement Mode The value is entered by the user or read from a configured support device when running a test This value is not required in Absolute Measurement Mode only Head Height conditional numeric entry The height difference between the reference level of the Piston Gauge and the location in which you wish to define pressure Typically this is the difference between the reference level of the Piston Gauge and a DUT If the DUT is above the PG reference level the value is positive If the DUT is below the PG reference level the value is negative Piston Cylinder Temperature conditional numeric entry Measured temperature of the Piston Cylin
570. sure P SOURCE OF VALUE Calculated Piston effective area at 20 C Pam Piston Cylinder definition Piston effective area at temperature pressure P Calculated from in Piston Cylinder definition Local gravity Local gravity specified in Tools Options Piston Gauge Nominal mass to pressure conversion coefficient for a given piston cylinder size Calculated from and standard conditions Mass load Current mass load Absolute pressure Calculated Atmospheric ambient pressure Internal measurement user entered value or constant as specified in Tools Options Ambient Conditions Gauge pressure Calculated Fluid head correction in absolute mode Calculated using the specified head height and medium Fluid head correction in gauge mode Calculated using the specified head height and medium Fluid head correction in high line differential mode Calculated using the specified head height and medium Line Pressure High line differential mode only Nominal pressure In pressure to mass mode Prom Preq In mass to pressure mode P 2M Ky Differential pressure Calculated differential pressure differential measurement mode only Surface tension coefficient Piston Cylinder definition Cylinder linear thermal expansion coefficient Piston Cylinder definition Piston linear thermal expansion coe
571. t Points display Table 67 Plot Points Genera Tab Fields FEATURES DESCRIPTION Include tolerance bars check box Causes tolerance bars to be displayed on the graph The tolerance bars are calculated using the tolerance value stored in the Data File Tolerance bars are displayed only when plotting errors and or pressure information related to the DUT Tolerance bars are also not displayed when a secondary Y axis is included in the plot Limit Y axis to 1 5X tolerance check box This option is active only when tolerance bars are included in the plot and an error plot type is selected If the error exceeds the tolerance by 50 the actual DUT error plot will not be visible When this function is not active all plots are auto scaled This option is often used for plots included in reports so that all plots are scaled in the same manner regardless of actual error magnitude New subset for each data point button Use this Check this option to create a new subset of points for each pressure point option to generate lines of data for the same point when multiple cycles are used For example a 6 point 6 pressure cycle test would yield 6 lines of data The error of each point can be plotted to quickly display how error changed at a single point in each cycle This feature is most useful when each pressure cycle changes the output of the data plotted at the same point For example DUT Span Error vs Temperature Each
572. t a list of Piston Gauge Platforms that have been set Platform up for use by COMPASS Use the Piston Gauge Platform Editor to define new Piston Gauge Platforms as needed Piston Gauge Platforms specify which Piston Cylinders Mass required Sets and Mass Bells can be used with a specific platform selection Piston Cylinder Select any Piston Cylinder that can be used with the selected Piston Gauge Platform To use any Piston Cylinders supported by the Piston Gauge Platform Type press the button next to this field to make a selection The mass or pressure corresponding to the Piston Cylinders displays in the Mass List required drop down list Use the Piston Cylinder Editor to create and edit Piston Cylinders Mass Set Select Mass Sets that can be used with the selected Piston Gauge Platform To use any Mass Set supported by the Piston Gauge Platform Type press the button next to this field to make a selection The mass or corresponding pressure for each mass in the mass set display in the Mass List Use the Mass Set Editor To create and edit Mass Sets required drop down list Trim Mass Set Select Trim Mass Sets that can be used with the selected Piston Gauge Platform To use any Trim Mass Set supported by the Piston Gauge Platform Type press the button next to this field to make a selection The total mass provided by the Trim Mass Set display in the Trim entry in the Mass List The actual trim
573. t data file directory Specify any other relevant program options default values initialization options file and grid selections ect It is important to keep the program options consistent to avoid confusion between COMPASS users Run the COMPASS Report Editor Select Tools Options menu choice to display the Report Editor options On each tab there is a path related entry Specify the proper network path in each entry then save the options and close the Report Editor Use the network sub directories Data Template and Report created in step 3 For all other PCs install COMPASS then repeat steps 4 to 7 It is important to insure that all program options are the same to prevent confusion when users change COMPASS work stations However having the same options is not required for a valid Network setup As a shortcut to selecting COMPASS options on each PC a registry file can be generated on the first PC and imported into the registry on other PCs 1 Run the Windows Registry Editor on the first PC in which COMPASS was setup Press Start Run and enter Regedit then press Enter If an error occurs enter C Windows Regedit and retry The Windows Registry Editor should display Select the COMPASS registry key on the left of the display by navigating to the location HKEY LOCAL MACHINENSOFTWAREWDH Instruments COMPASS for Pressure Select File Export and enter the file name COMPASS reg and specify the COMPASS net
574. t describes your data Del ji Characters such as commas or tabs separate each field C Fixed width Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field Start import at row 1 File origin windows ANSI Preview of file C XComp4prs data sample dat 2 5 for PPC REM ver 3 fest Date July 01 1998 start Time 8 23 52 AM 1 01 1998 DH Instruments Inc Figure 159 Export To Excel Delimiting Data File e By default COMPASS Data Files are semicolon delimited Select the delimiter on the list of delimiting choices The data in the bottom of the display will separate into multiple columns when the correct delimiter is selected Press Finish when the correct delimiter is used 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 254 22 EXPORTING COMPASS DATA Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below r Delimiters Tab Semicolon Treat consecutive delimiters as one Text qualifier z Figure 160 Export To Excel Selecting the Data File delimiter The contents of the Data File will display in individual rows and columns on a single worksheet within Excel All normal spreadsheet manipulation can be performed on the data file Microsoft Excel sample dat Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Acrobat JOSH EA SRY Eme
575. t editor only All existing Data File Macros are available for selection in the Macros section in the Available Data Fields list while editing a report template in the Report editor Data Files macros are intended to create columns of test data based on data logged during the test However any data in the Data File can be manipulated GetCommand These macros are used to create read and set commands for an instrument The macros are selected only in the remote command editor The Command drop down list contains macros defined in this section see 4 4 4 A macro to obtain a read command is called only one time A macro that provides a set command is called each time a new set command is necessary This is because the new target most likely requires a new command It is not always necessary to use a macro to create set commands COMPASS provides a substitution method that works with most ASCII based remote commands Refer to the Apply Set topic in 4 4 4 These macros are available to all other macros There are no specific parameters or required return types for these macros manipulation functions should be added to this section COMPASS does not directly access this type of macro Interface Interface Macros provide an alternate remote interface choice for devices The Interface Macro is available on the Read and Set tabs of the device editors when the remote interface selection is Macro At u
576. t information corresponding to the final output selected in the Final Output Labels gt list Edit Final Output button Press this button to edit the information associated with the final output selected in the Final Output Labels list The Output Relationship Editor displays Double clicking the lt Raw Output gt or lt Final Output gt fields is an alternate way to open the Output Relationship Editor Edit Commands button 4 3 6 1 Press this button to open the Remote Command Editor to edit remote commands specific to the raw output from the device that is used to arrive at the final output selected in the Final Output Labels gt list Only final outputs that use a raw output that requires remote communication with the device require remote commands Commands set up are Output Commands and should output in the output unit specified in the Output Relationship Editor Raw Output tab OUTPUT TAB FOR SIMPLE TYPE DUTS The DUT Device Editor Output tab for simple type DUTS contain an abbreviated version of the settings available on the Output Relationship Editor A simple DUT is limited to a single final output of DUT Pressure Directly enter or select all relevant settings Header Calibration Communications Output Raw Output Final Output Final Output Label Pressure Measurement Mode Absolute xl ae Minimum 0 0000 Maximum 210 0000 Resolution Dutput Type Voltage gt
577. t reference and DUT output ranges There are no required selections At this time also verify that all pneumatic and remote connections are secure and correct When Next is pressed COMPASS begins initializing all remote instruments by issuing their initialize remote commands If this process does not generate any errors COMPASS begins polling all remote instruments using their read commands Any errors that occur will halt initialization Use the Back and Next buttons as needed to correct errors associated with different test devices This is the end of the test initialization process Program execution continues with the Run Test or Run Manual Test sequence Page 129 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 7 4 RUN TEST After test initialization is complete run test begins During run test the main menu bar is disabled but the run toolbar is active Use the run toolbar buttons to view the current Test Definition while the test is running to step test points back or forward or to display test Run Screens Various aspects of the Run Test Sequence be customized see 14 4 Run Test Tab separate Data File is created for each DUT A test that is running can be aborted at any time by pressing the Abort Test button on the run toolbar Before aborting the test COMPASS requires a second confirmation When the test aborts all system pressure is vented when the active pressure controller s
578. t support Vent commands and when the controller is manual The active controller Ready criterion is used to determine the system stability before considering the System Vented The point label will include a V when this option is selected Valve Driver This option sets a specific valve driver state prior to setting the target value of a test point Change When selected the Set Driver State form displays to allow the driver state to be set p Driver numbers that are depressed are considered ON and valve drivers that are not pressed are considered OFF When running a test COMPASS sends commands to the configured Valve Driver Controller to set the selected valve state If a Valve Driver Controller is not configured a warning message displays during test initialization The point label includes a D when this option is selected Do not select valve driver states that exceed the ability of the valve driver controller This can lead to remote interface timeoute and other interface based errore There are no built in delays associated with changing the valve driver state Make sure that the test hardware will not be damaged as a result of quick valve driver changes If delays are necessary use a COMPASS Test Macro to add delays between valve driver state changes 14 Set Driver State s 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Cancel Figure 97 Driver State Selector Page 145 2002 2004 DH Instruments
579. t value for all DHI gas lubricated and liquid lubricated gas operated piston cylinders PG7102 PG7601 and PG7202 is 0 unless they are operated with oil as the test medium The value is a positive number for oil operated oil lubricated piston cylinders Page 168 11 SETUP PISTON GAUGE 11 3 4 2 DEADWEIGHT TESTER TYPE PISTON CYLINDER When the Piston Cylinder Type specified on the Piston Cylinder Editor Header tab is Deadweight Tester the Piston Cylinder Editor Characteristics tab displays the fields listed below The Piston Cylinders Characteristics tab defines the pressure at which the piston floats Entries that have an asterisk next to them are required There are no calculations other than summing the pressure value of the loaded mass and piston and making a gravity correction when a Deadweight Tester is used Errors in values entered into the Piston Cylinder Characteristics tab directly impact the calculation of Piston Gauge pressure when the Piston Cylinder is used Typically a pressure span error results Make sure that all values are entered in the proper unit of measure Header Calibration Tolerance Characteristics Piston Name 25si Corresponding Pressure 1 99872 Pressure Unit psi M Pressure Resolution psi 0 000001 Figure 113 Piston Cylinder Editor Deadweight Tester Type Characteristics Tab Table 47 Piston Cylinder Editor Deadweight Tester Type Characteristics
580. t when the DUT data to send discrete commands to verify the A test runs but all DUT final acquisition is RS232 or IEEE 488 command being used by the DUT or DMM outputs and or output values are The DMM used to read the DUT output then make the appropriate edits to the DUT 0 00 or another unexpected value has an incorrect Process Command Or DMM setup Refer to the documentation or lt Manipulate Response entry This Of the data acquisition device for command is only possible when the DUT data details acquisition requires a DMM The device interface is not properly set up Always make sure a device is powered ON and has the remote interface cabling A COMPASS time out occurs RS282 or IEEE 488 interface cable securely attached prior to use The remote when reading a device during test IS RCP SECU interface settings of all supported devices initialization This can occur when A device command is used that does can be adjusted in their respective setups using any supported device not respond Make sure that the Read Response button is not checked when a remote The device power is not ON command does not respond Use the Test Editor Set tabs to change the stability and hold limit values as The Test Definition stability or hold limit required to yield a stable output PPC2 in the test results in a stability limit that PPCK and PPC3 pressure controllers use is too small for the current test default stabil
581. t1 The first raw output of the device The raw output may be the final output of another instrument or the output remotely acquired directly from the instrument The Output Relationship Editor determines how the value is acquired If a separate instrument is used the Test Initialization process allows the user to select what instrument to use The argument is a double precision number in the raw output unit specified in the output setup e 2 The second raw output of a device This value is used only when 2 or more raw outputs are defined in the Output Relationship Editor for the device output The value is always the double precision final output of another instrument in the raw output unit specified for the second raw output in the Output Relationship Editor e Out3 The third raw output of a device This value is used only when raw outputs are defined in the Output Relationship Editor for the device output The value is always the double precision final output of another instrument in the raw output unit specified for the third raw output in the Output Relationship Editor ParamiD User defined identification value for a device This value can be entered only during test initialization It is used as a flag to handle similar devices differently Particularly when devices require individual command addressing This is frequently the case when instruments are connected using an interface chain e cCalc The Calculation Cl
582. ta file by noting the data file options in COMPASS see 14 9 If a Data File is already available this step is not necessary e Run Microsoft Excel and choose the File Open option within Excel A standard file selection box will display to allow the desired test data file to be selected e COMPASS test data files have an extension of dat The files displayed in the file selection box are not filtered to include this type of file To view COMPASS data files enter the text dat into the File Name field Then navigate to the desired Data File directory By default Data Files are stored in the directory Program Files COMPASS for Pressure Data The exact location is controlled by the Tools Options Data File Tab Page 253 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL fact sample dat File name Fast Files of type All Microsoft Excel Files xl xls xit htm html v Figure 158 Export To Excel Changing File Filter to dat e Select the desired Data File The Text Import Wizard in Excel will display to complete the remaining steps Select lt Delimited gt to flag that the data file is delimited then press Next Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Fixed Width If this is correct choose Next or choose the data type that best describes your data inal data type Choose the file type that bes
583. tabase Tables and Fields for details on the actual data logged in the test data file Table 96 Data File Structure COMPASS Version Describes non test specific ASCII value of delimiter settings such as date user and GENERAL INFORMATION station id General Header General header labels TEST INFORMATION Test specific information is Test information labels stored in this section In particular control and data collection settings stored in the Test Definition Test Header Test information data Device Header Device Definition header and output information is stored in this section There is a Separate header for each device specified the Tools Options Data Header tab see 14 10 Data Header Tab Each section is labeled based on the device the section represents DUT DUT information labels DUT data labels Reference Etc Pre Test Leak test and pressure cycle settings are listed in this section 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc PRE TEST Pre test information labels Pre test data Page 306 Test Data Only test data specifically selected for use in the data file is logged to the data file see 14 9 Data In File Tab Test data is segregated by sections specific to each type of cycle These cycle labels are present even when the specific cycle type was not executed 27 DATA FILES TEST DATA TEST TEMPERATURE Test data identifier code
584. tate after any target output is set This method does not apply to multiplexer and valve driver controllers If the controller is a DHI product the hold and stability settings defined in the Test Definition are set to the device after the Test Initialization is complete if the lt Use Ready Commands option is selected see 7 3 Test Initialization A zero hold or stability value in Test Definition prevents COMPASS from changing the hold or stability criterion in the controller In this case the controller s default limits are used automatically In many cases the default control limits are the most appropriate for testing The second Ready determination method requires a reference instrument that uses a remote interface When available and the Use Read Commands option is not selected in a Test Definition COMPASS will apply the hold and stability limits to the reference output to determine a ready condition This means that the reference output is within the hold limit relative to the target output and stable within the stability limit Using a hold or stability setting of zero effectively turns off the criterion Page 15 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 3 3 5 4 PISTON GAUGE READY NOT READY In most cases the ready condition of a piston gauge is defined by the test operator COMPASS displays the masses to load to set the required target pressure and prompts the user to respond when the piston is f
585. te and ignore templates included as arguments Root Directory for Displays the default directory where the user is prompted to save templates Templates Display Field Check this option to automatically prompt to modify each field s properties as fields are Properties window added to a template Field properties are accessed later by left clicking above the field to be each time a field is edited and choosing properties from the pop up menu added Field Highlight Press this button to change the color used to highlight fields in a report template The Color current highlight color is indicated by the color of the button Changes to the highlight color only affect future fields as they are added Fields that have already been placed will not have their color changed Page 279 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 23 9 4 GENERAL TAB Reports Report Generation Templates L General Options Time Format AMPM E Date Format short date Language English Y Plot Tool amp nd Macro Editor Database C Program FilesNCOMPASS for PressureNCOMPSETP el Save Exit Figure 184 COMPASS Report Editor Options General Tab Table 87 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Time Format Choose the format with which the Report Editor will use to display time information in the report The options are described in the table below N
586. ted The Exercise function which is used to exercise the system before running test pointe should not be confused with the Pressure Cycles option on the Pressure tab which determines how many times the complete test pressure pointe sequence will be run Running two or three full scale pressure cycles prior to the test is recommended for DHI products The exercising sequence is set pressure to the cycle minimum set pressure to the cycle maximum set pressure back to the minimum repeat for the number of cycles that are specified vent system No measurement data is recorded during cycling s When running a test the Skip Forward toolbar option can be used to ekip pressure exercising This may be desired if a Test Definition that includes pressure exercising is aborted at some point after the exercising and then the test is immediately restarted The purpose of the Exercise panel s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in the table below 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 142 8 6 8 SETUP TEST Table 35 Test Editor Pre Test Tab Exercise Frame Fields Run Pressure Exercise check box selection FEATURE DESCRIPTION Determines whether pressure exercising will be conducted at the beginning of the test or not If checked exercising will occur at the beginning of the first test cycle Otherwise exercising will not occur and the rest of the Cycle
587. ted with the selected template if the proper report Editor options are selected The report Editor displays each report generated This is functionally equivalent to running the COMPASS Report Editor as a standalone application and selecting the File Generate Report option see 23 Data Report Editor Re Run Test Used to re run the exact same test under the exact same conditions without initialization prompts or selections This feature does not overwrite the current Data File s it creates a new Data File for each DUT action button action button View Database Used to review database data immediately following test completion without exiting the Data test completely This selection causes the COMPASS Data Viewer form to appear with the first selected data file loaded This option is available only when the data file was automatically added to the test base at the end of the test see 24 2 Database Setup or when the Add Data to Database button is pressed This is functionally equivalent to selecting Data Database Data Viewer option and viewing the Data File from the test that has just completed Close the COMPASS Data Viewer using the control box lt X gt or press lt Esc gt to return to the Test Complete selections Add Data File to This feature is not enabled when the Data File is automatically added to the COMPASS Database Test Data Database at the end of a test see 24 2 Database Set
588. teger The number of line pressure points specified in the Test Definition NumberofPressurePoints Integer The number of test pressure points specified in the Test Definition NumberofPressureCyclePoints Integer The number of pressure cycle points specified in the Test Definition NumberOfTemperaturePoints Integer The number of temperature points specified in the Test Definition ReadLinePres Device Header Class The instrument used to measure the test line pressure ReadTemp Device Header Class The instrument used to measure the test temperature Ref Device Header Class The instrument used to measure the reference pressure RefRaw1 Device Header Class The instrument used to measure the first raw output of the reference pressure device RefRaw2 Device Header Class The instrument used to measure the second raw output of the reference device This data is set only when the reference requires more than one raw output instrument RefRaw3 Device Header Class The instrument used to measure the second raw output of the reference device This data is set only when the reference requires more than two raw output instruments SetLinePres Device Header Class The instrument used to control the test line pressure SetPressure Device Header Class The instrument used to control the test pressure SetTemp Device Header Class
589. temperature cycle may yield a different DUT pressure error at the same point Include subset legend button Check this option to display a legend at the top of the plot to for each subset Do not check this option when many subsets will be used Page 239 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Select Test Points General BestFit Points r Plot best fit data only Best fit order FirstOrder tits Figure 154 Plot Points Best Fit Tab Table 68 Plot Points Best Fit Tab Fields FEATURES DESCRIPTION Plot best fit error Check this box to plot best fit error predicted error when the selected plot type uses a data DUT to reference error on the Y Axis check box Plot best fit data Plot only best fit data when this item is checked When it is not checked the original only error and best fit error are plotted check box Best fit order The order of the polynomial fit to use to determine the best fit error A least squares best fit is used on the DUT and Reference data to determine the polynomial coefficients The determined values are applied to the DUT data to determine the predicted DUT data A new error based on the selected plot type is calculated using the predicted DUT data and the reference data drop down list 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 240 21 DATA DATABASE DATA VIEWER 21 DATA DATABASE DATA VIEWER 2
590. tered The values must be entered in terms of percent of the output span Tolerance Segment Definition mampan men wae From Final Output Greater Than 0 00 To Final Output Less Than Z 100 00 Min Val1 lt Output The tolerance information is valid as long as the measured output is greater than or equal to the value entered The value must be entered in terms of percent of the output span Tolerance Segment Definition ere X All Final Outputs Greater Than 1 00 00 4 3 6 2 3 1 Tolerance Choices Final output tolerances are specified on Tolerance tabs of the Output Relationship the Mass Set and the Piston Cylinder Editors The tolerance choices are listed below along with plots to detail how the different tolerances are used Each tolerance selection updates the display of required entries as required by the tolerance type In general use Span in place of WFS Span based tolerances are identical to FS based tolerances when the minimum final output is Pay careful attention to the difference between and FS when using differential devices that have no terminal zero point FS should normally only be used when the full scale value is equal to the span value or the device tolerance is strictly expressed in terms of full scale 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 56 4 COMMON TOOLS AND FEATURES Output Relationship Raw Output Final Output Tolerance Number of Tolerance
591. tested using COMPASS DUTS are defined in DUT Definitions DUT Definition The record in the DUT database in which COMPASS stores DUT information that are tested by COMPASS Defines the DUTs DUT Profile A type of DUT Definition that is intended to define a type of DUT This is a generic definition that does not include serial number or ID or specific range information Can be used to test any DUT of a specific type Frequently used to test multiple DUTs that are specifically identified at the time of the test See also Individual DUT DUT Tolerance The performance limit of a DUT expressed in terms of maximum allowable disagreement with the reference DUT tolerance may be expressed in pressure units as a of DUT FS as a 96 of reading or as a combination A waiting period at a test point between the time the target is set and stabilized and the start of data acquisition to take the DUT and reference readings at the test point Page 365 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Dynamic Data COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Data recorded at each point during a test Error The disagreement between the DUT indication and the reference indication The error is always calculated using DUT reference Final Output Formerly known as Measurand This is the Output Type designated for a specific function in COMPASS e g Pressure is an output type Pressure output type can be Final Outputs of Ambient
592. text beginning at the tab and then centers text about the decimal point as additional characters are typed Show Formatting T 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Toggles the ability to view formatting characters in the document Page 274 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR 23 7 RULER The ruler gives a visual indication in inches of the document layout At all times the left most position of the ruler corresponds to the left margin setting of the document Changes in the margin settings will not reflect on the ruler The COMPASS Report Editor uses the ruler mainly to support tab positioning and paragraph indentation Tabs and indent values are adjusted by using the mouse to click and drag the tool to the desired location Where the mouse button is released determines the new location of the indent or tab Figure 179 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler Table 83 COMPASS Report Editor Ruler Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Left Indent Sets or displays the left indentation point of the first line of a paragraph The ruler location of this indent always displays as the number of inches from the left margin Left Hanging Sets or displays the left hanging indent of subsequent lines in a paragraph Using the Indent mouse click the left hanging indent image and drag it to the desired location then release the mouse button to drop it This parameter has no effect on the first line of a paragraph and are greater than or less than
593. text in a report or report template Enter the search text in the Find What field and select the search options then press Find The search begins at the current cursor location and continues either to the end of the document or to the beginning based on the lt Direction gt The first occurrence of the search text is highlighted in the current document To repeatedly search for the same text use the shortcut key CTRL F Replace Searches for and replaces the specified text and formatting Select AII 23 4 3 VIEW Select All highlights all text in the active document Most frequently selecting all text is done to copy the information to later paste it in another application or open document The selected text can also be deleted to clear an entire document of all text Normal Page Layout v Centered Page Layout Headers and Footers v Tool Bar v Paragraph Bar v Ruler v Status Bar Control Characters LA Zoom Figure 173 COMPASS Report Editor View Menu Table 78 COMPASS Report Editor View Menu Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Normal Normal view is usually used for typing editing and formatting text Normal view shows text formatting but simplifies the layout of the page so that you can type and edit quickly In this view page boundaries headers and footers do not appear The page number does not display in the status bar Page Layout Work in print layout v
594. th and file name to be used to save this The default file path is set in Options If you wish to save the file in another location do so realizing the COMPASS Report Editor will not default to this location unless the default path is changed Save As Save As is used to save the current document under a different name essentially making a copy of the file The option always displays a file selection box allowing the entry of a new file name and follows the same procedure as the Save option when an untitled file is saved Save All Save All will save all open documents into one selected directory Page Setup Sets margins paper source paper size page orientation and other layout options for the active document Print Preview In print preview the page is displayed as it would appear if printer on paper You can display multiple pages of a document in a reduced size In this view you can see page breaks hidden text and watermarks and you can make editing or formatting changes before you print the document Page 267 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Print Print is used to print the current file to any printer setup on the PC in use A printer setup window displays prior to printing allowing a printer to be selected and set up before printing The COMPASS Report Editor prints the document exactly as it is displayed with
595. th the DUT See also Default Hardware Configuration Tolerance Same as DUT tolerance True Mass The actual mass loaded on the piston using the measured value of each mass See also Nominal Mass Trim Mass Set 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Mass set used with piston gauges consisting of masses of less than 100 g whose true values are equal to their nominal values Trim masses are generally used in combination with the regular mass Set to set a target mass value exactly Page 368
596. the lt Use Multiplexer gt option and enter the multiplexer channel that corresponds to the DUT Continue with the Test Initialization On the Test Hardware Configuration step select the multiplexer defined in step 3 Complete the initialization process with any other test specific settings COMPASS will set the multiplexer to the channel defined for the first DUT then read the output of the raw output source device s to update the DUT value The channel for the second DUT is then set and again the raw source device s is queried to obtain output information This process continues until all DUTs have been read then it resumes again with the first DUT From a COMPASS perspective all multiplexer channels are always integer values beginning with 0 The actual channel setup depends on the electrical connections specific to the device setup Itis up to the user to associate the integer based channels 0 n with the electrical connections of the multiplexer The remote commands of the multiplexer must handle any channel specific operations associated with the test setup see 4 4 3 2 Multiplexer Valve Driver Commands There are 2 classes of multiplexer setups Switching multiplexers that are used for switching only and the combination multiplexers that are used for switching and measuring Other than the specifics of setting up the multiplexer the selection process of both setups is the same See Figure 4 and refer to the following sections for
597. the current font underscore setting this toolbar item This font uses an underscore CTRL U is a shortcut to Left Justify Displays and changes the paragraph justification to left Left justification forces all text to begin at the current left indentation point Only one style of justification is used per paragraph Right Justify Displays and changes the paragraph justification to right When active text is aligned to the right indentation point of the document Most commonly this is the right margin Displays and changes the paragraph justification to center centered between the left and right indentation points When active text is Full Justify Displays and changes the paragraph justification to the left and right margin When active text is center with and even margin along the left and right margins Increase or decrease the appearance of the document in the Report Editor Number Bullets Add or remove numbered outlines from a paragraph Bullets Add or remove bullets to a paragraph Tab Left Adds text beginning at the tab and then moves text to the left as more characters typed Tab Right l Adds text beginning at the tab and then moves text to the right as more characters are typed Tab Centered 4 Adds text beginning at the tab and then centers text about the tab as additional characters are typed Tab Decimal Adds
598. the text PASS FAIL or VERIFY based on the maximum error in the Data File AD HE HD Report Macros are intended to return a single value Manipulate the data in the data collection as desired colFIles A collection of all active Data Files curFile ID of the current Data File NH RD ee eee E AE E Function GetPassFail colFiles curFile With colData curFile SummaryCalculationCollection 1 If abs MaxFSError gt 007 then rtv FAIL elseif abs MaxFSError gt 005 then rtv VERIFY else rtv PASS end if End With GetPassFail rtv End Function This macro outputs the first and second order DUT transfer function and the corresponding correlation coefficients The global macro function polyfit is used to determine the first and second order coefficients and corresponding correlation value eK ICI ColFiles A collection of all active Data Files CurFile ID of the current Data File CIO I D D IO IOI ICI IO IOC IO IOI ICI IO Xe Function FitNewData colData curFile dim coefs 4 7 With colData curFile Create an array to store the data Poly fit is 0 based so 1 less than the actual total is needed re
599. this class In most cases a Test Event Macro or a Pre Point Macro defined in a Test Definition is used to alter test parameters based on test conditions Test Point Class A test point class used to store target Used to access settings stored in output information for each test point Each a Test Definition test point type has it s own Test Point Class Test Definition Class Control Settings Class Stores control setting s specific control settings and limits Figure 205 Test Definition Class Object Model 28 4 1 PROPERTIES Each property directly corresponds to a selection in the active Test Definition when running a test see Setup Test amp Table 104 Test Definition Class Properties PROPERTIES DATA TYPE DESCRIPTION AutoVent Boolean The value represents the state of the Auto Vent After Each Test Cycle gt When the value is TRUE the test pressure is vented after each test cycle AvgTime Long The amount of time in seconds that data is averaged The value is used only when the AvgType property is 1 AvgType Integer The value determines how data is averaged in a test e 0 Manual data is averaging is used The user specifies when to start and when to stop averaging data e 1 Test data is averaged automatically for the time duration specified by the AvgTime property Comment Any comments associated with the Test Definition are accessed by this property
600. ting and prior to taking averaged test data at each point When lt Dwell gt is set to lt Timed gt COMPASS dwells at each test point for the specified Dwell Time 0 999s When lt Dwell gt is set to Manual COMPASS dwells at each test point until OK is clicked on the Continue Test pop up This feature can be used to synchronize readings or to pause operation when setting a test point Enter a Dwell time of Os to effectively skip the test dwell Number of Test Cycles required entry field for pressure sequences only COMPASS can run up to 10 test pressure cycles in one test A test cycle includes setting and taking data at each of the pressure points in the Points table When more than one test cycle is specified pre test operations occur only at the beginning of the first cycle Data from multiple cycles is included in a single Data File The test pressure cycles are repeated at each temperature at each line pressure if there are multiple temperatures and or line pressures Page 149 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Vent After Each Check this option to vent the test pressure at the end of each test pressure point Cycle sequence This is typically desired when running a temperature and pressure test When check box selection Setting each test temperature the test pressure will be vented for pressure All automated controllers th
601. tings need be changed in this step The process is functionally identical to the DUT configuration step see 7 3 6 Configure Test Final Verification The DUT and reference output ranges display for final verification There are no required selections on this final step Press Back to alter device settings or press Finish to complete the process see 7 3 7 Final Verification Various aspects of the Test Initialization process can be customized by using the options found on the Tools Options Initialize Test tab see 14 5 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 120 7 RUN MODES 7 31 SELECT UNITS OF MEASURE Specify the units of measure to use for the test pressure line pressure and test temperature points and confirm enter the User ID The units selected are used to display the min and max outputs of devices that read or set the corresponding quantities When running a manual test the selected units are always used to log data in the data file When running a Test Definition the unit specified by the test is always used to log data When the test uses a DUTSpan unit selection the DUTs output unit is used The last test user name is automatically selected in the Select Enter User Name field If the desired user name is not in the list enter a new user name by directly typing in the field COMPASS stores all settings specific to each test executed DUTs selected ranges units of measure changes in remote inte
602. tion can be used only when running a manual test with a valid data file open The data file can be opened by clicking the Create Data File button on the toolbar or by calling the OpenNewDataFile function in a macro see Data Acquisition Tools 5 4 3 When interval based data acquisition is used iMode 2 or 3 the user or the macro must abort data acquisition by clicking the Abort Auto Point button on the toolbar or by calling the AbortAutoPointCollection method Data collection is automatically aborted when the test ends Using any of the automatic data logging options can result in very large Data Files These are files with significantly greater than 1000 data points COMPASS was not intended to manipulate such files Lower performance PC s will experience significant delays in generating reports and plots of large Data Files Therefore use of the plotting and reporting functions with very large Data Files is not recommended Instead export the Data File to a spread sheet application for further analysis Use the DataCollection property to manipulate data and open data files When a point is collected it will remain in the data file regardless of any property changes in the Test Data Class COMPASS options that can automatically repeat points are not used when running a manual test see Run Test Tab 14 4 Page 348 28 COMPASS OBJECTS Example This example demonstrates how to collect test data based on the output of a devi
603. tion of the device ParentTestKey Long Integer Link to a specific test PistCyl1DatabaselD Long Integer Database Identifying the 1 Piston in the COMPASS Device database PistCyl1EffectiveArea Double 1 Piston Effective Area PistCyl1KN Text 1 Piston s KN PistCyl1SerialNumber Text 1 Piston s serial number PistCyl2DatabaselD Long Integer Database Identifying the 2 Piston in the COMPASS Device database PistCyl2EffectiveArea Double 2 Piston Effective Area PistCyl2KN Text 2 Piston s KN PistCyl2SerialNumber Text 2 Piston s serial number PistCylEffAreaUnit Text Unit of piston cylinder effective areas RawOutputMax Double Maximum of Raw Output RawOutputMin Double Minimum of Raw Output RawOutputRelationship Text Method with which the raw output is converted into the final output RawOutputSpan Double Difference between the maximum and minimum raw outputs of the device RawOutputUnit Text Unit of Raw Output SerialNumber Text Serial number of device Span Double 21 5 3 DATA TABLE Difference between the extreme measurement limits of the device Used in calculations Data contained in this table represents each point of data that was recorded while performing a test Data is listed by the order of pressure line pressure and temperature cycles recorded Informatio
604. tions for the raw output Raw Output Unit required text entry list selection Select or enter the unit of measure in which the raw output will be obtained When manually entering the raw output or using remote commands to read the raw output the values must be acquired in the unit specified in this field Output source required list selection Select the source of the raw output The available choices are determined by the lt Output Type gt selection and the settings on the Communications tab of the device s definition When more than one raw output is specified in the lt Required Raw Outputs to Determine Final Output gt field there is an lt Output Source gt field for each raw output Make a selection in each field Minimum conditional numeric entry Enter the minimum raw output in the specified lt Output Type gt unit This field is not available when more than one raw output is specified in the Required Raw Outputs to Determine Final Output field When the selected relationship is lt Same gt the actual entry in this field is not used for calculation purposes Maximum conditional numeric entry Enter the maximum raw output in the specified Output Unit unit This field is not available when more than one raw output is specified in the Required Raw Outputs to Determine Final Output field When the selected relationship is lt Same gt the actual entry in this field is not use
605. tively slow pressure ramp The macro is selected as the Test Event Macro in an Advanced Test see 8 7 Data Tab RD DD Test Macro do not have a return value Manipulate the test or device collection as desired iT The current temperature point in the test iL The current line pressure point in the test ic The current pressure cycle in the test IP The current pressure point in the test cTest The test class cConfig Configuration class that holds all active devices JOO AE E A ICI IO Function InterCeptDwell iT iL iC iP cTest cConfig Only check test dwell test steps If cCOMPASS CurrentStep 310 then exit function Tl timer Log starting loop time cCOMPASS StatusDisplay Waiting for DUT Transition Do cCOMPASS TimeDelay 1 Allow COMPASS Events if cCONFIG DUT 1 FinalOutput 100 then The DUT has transitioned so escape cCOMPASS StepNext Move to data acquisition exit do end if Use global function to check the time from start of loop Timeout after 200s to prevent infinite loop Loop until Time Difference T1 gt 200 End Function Page 350 2
606. to Ranging is Supported case else rtv Auto Ranging is NOT Supported end select End with AutoRangeCheck Rtv End Fucntion Page 332 28 COMPASS OBJECTS Name GetRawFromFinal Purpose Return a raw output when given a final output Syntax Function GetRawFromFinal dFinalOutput Arguments e dFinalOutput Double precision final output value in the final output unit Return Double Value Remarks This function is used to determine raw set values when given a final set value Example None Name loAbortControl Purpose Abort output control in a device Syntax Function ioAbortControl Arguments None Return TRUE when the abort commands were sent successfully and FALSE otherwise Value Remarks This method can be used only with Range Classes used for pressure or temperature control The device setup must include abort commands for this method to function properly see 4 3 7 Example None Name loSendCommand Purpose Send a command using the device interface Syntax Function ioSendCommand sCmd bNoResponse bWaitReply Arguments e sOmd The exact command to send e bNoResponse Use TRUE to prevent COMPASS from reading a response and FALSE to allow COMPASS to read the response bWaitReply Set this value to TRUE to wait for the instrument to respond prior to exiting the function In this case the function return value is the instrument response Use FALSE to return from the function immediately even if the
607. to not display the current cycle Uncheck this box to avoid automatic forced updating of the Data Grid and Plot Run Screens check box 14 8 DATA FILE TAB The Tools Options Data File tab is used to set user preferences affecting the Data File dat which records the data from a test See section 27 Data Files for details on how data files are named and structured Use the Database Setup menu choice to store complete Data Files to the COMPASS Test Data Database The purpose of the Data File tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in Table 61 When selections are complete click OK to save changes or select another tab to change other options Page 195 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL COMPASS Options Ambient Conditions Data Grid Initialize Test RunTest EndTest PistonGauge DatalnFile DataHeader Interface Language Use default data file naming convention Use long data file name format Write protect all complete data files Auto delete incomplete data files Data file delimiter Semi Colon Root Data file directory C Software CompPrs D ata Browse Manufacturer Y Serial Number Major sub directory named by Minor sub directory named by o oa Figure 128 Options Data File Tab Table 61 Options Data File Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Use default Data Fi
608. to systematically using this option This feature is provided for special cases in which a custom plot is not merited Default Path to This is merely the initial location the Report Editor will browse when attempting to locate Data Files Data Files The last used Data File path is used by default when selecting a data file This field in no way restricts access directories when selecting files 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 278 23 DATA REPORT EDITOR 23 9 3 TEMPLATES TAB Reports Report Generation General Template Options Current Template IN MyNetwork T emplates SAMPLE tpl Lock current template Root Directory for Templates C Program Files COMPASS for Pressure T emplates E Display Field Properties window each time a field is added Save Exit Figure 183 COMPASS Report Editor Options Templates Tab Table 86 COMPASS Report Editor Options Templates Options FEATURE DESCRIPTION Current Template Indicates the current template that will be used to create reports This is also the default template that is used if no other template is identified prior to creating a report Double click this box to select a new default template The default template also changes when a new template is selected in the Selection form or when a report is generated Lock Current Prevents the current template from being changed This will override all requests to update Template templa
609. to users familiar with other word processors During the report generation process user defined templates are merged with COMPASS Data Files to create final reports These newly generated reports may be saved as Microsoft Word documents or PDF documents if Adobe Acrobat is installed The COMPASS Report Editor is accessed by selecting the Data Report Editor menu option in COMPASS pressing the Generate Report button in the Test Complete form at the end of a test or run directly by selecting the COMPASS Report Editor icon in the COMPASS for Pressure program group In all cases the Report Editor runs as a separate application and may be closed at any time without affecting the operation of COMPASS for Pressure 23 2 REPORT PRINCIPLES The COMPASS Report Editor is used to create templates tpl that are merged with data dat files to generate reports Multiple templates are created in order to support a variety of report styles All basic word processing features are included to allow custom formatting cut and paste ability changing font types and point size inserting objects etc In addition to the basic word processor the COMPASS Report Editor provides the ability to add plots to reports and display results from custom macros defined by the user see sections 20 Data Plot Data File and 18 5 Macro Types The Report Editor has the ability to view edit save or print multiple reports at the same time In addition to the default r
610. ton gauges can be extracted into COMPASS using the PG7000 Setup Extractor This avoids having to manually enter existing Piston Cylinder information A Mass Set setup in COMPASS is not necessary when direct remote pressure access of DHI PG7000 is used with the Autodetect Setup option The remote pressure output of the PG is fully compensated for all conditions and is not modified by COMPASS Features are provided during test initialization to pick the current Mass Set setup inside the PG7000 A Mass Set setup is required for a Piston Gauge Platform to be used in COMPASS There are three types of Mass Sets lt Piston Gauge gt lt Piston Gauge Trim Mass gt and lt Deadweight Tester gt The difference is that lt Piston Gauge gt Mass Sets require the entry of true mass information for the masses in the mass set so that COMPASS can solve the pressure equation lt Deadweight Tester gt Piston Cylinders simply require the entry of their corresponding pressures Select the Mass Set Type in the Header tab of the Mass Set Editor After a Mass Set is defined future changes using the editor are required only for maintenance purposes updates in effective area or corresponding pressure For this reason and due to the critical metrological impact errors in Mass Sets can cause restricting user access to the Mass Set Editor is highly recommended Administrative users can assign user rights with Database Users Edit Mass Sets by selectin
611. tor will merge the data with the template by replacing the highlighted fields with corresponding data source information All other formatting in the template is unmodified The final report is then displayed in the Report Editor This report can then be printed saved or manipulated in any way desired 23 11 1 SELECTING TEMPLATE AND DATA The most common method used to create a report is to select Create Report from the File menu or the comparable icon from the toolbar Both methods open the Data Selector window where the report template and data sources Data stored in Data Files and the COMPASS Test Data Database can be used for reporting Press the Select Additional Data Files button to use Data Files as sources Press the Select Additional Data From Database to use database data as a source Database data is selected using the COMPASS Data Viewer see 21 2 COMPASS Data Viewer Page 283 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Data Selector Current Template C Program Files COMPASS for PressureXTemplates NDRMAL TPL The above template requires 1 data source for completion Multiple selections will generate multiple reports Data Source C Program FilessCOMPASS for Pressure Datassample dat Select Additional Data Files Select Additional Data From Database Create Reports Cancel Figure 189 Data Selector While there is no limit to the number of data sources that may be
612. tput is within the hold limit and the output is stable within the stability limit Stability and hold criteria are used only when an automated temperature reference is used 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 132 7 RUN MODES e Jog before dwell If jog mode is selected in the Test Definition the Output Control window displays with only the Target Temperature and Jog buttons active Use these control functions in the necessary combination to set the desired output The jog feature is rarely used for temperature control e Dwell If timed dwell is specified in the Test Definition the dwell time counts down and execution continues If the Test Definition specifies manual dwell COMPASS waits for the operator to press OK on the Dwell Complete dialog box before test execution continues Set Test Line Pressure If a test line pressure sequence is defined in the Test Definition the test line pressure is set Prior to setting the line pressure any pre point macro or valve driver change specified in the Test Definition is set before setting the pressure The active line pressure controller is set to the target pressure or a user prompt to set the pressure manually displays The active line pressure controller is selected during Test Initialization Regardless of the controller specified in the actual Test Definition the controller selected during Test Initialization is used e Regulation When line pressure regulation is active in the Test
613. truments can be selected to automatically acquire piston conditions such as temperature rotation and position These selections are not required When setting up a DHI PG7000 that has the Auto Detect Setup option selected all Piston cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell information stored inside the terminal is loaded when the Load Settings option is pressed The available metrological element choices are automatically limited to those available in the terminal All piston sensing options are not available as the PG7000 automatically handles all piston sensing duties Page 125 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Run Manual Test Setup Configure DUT 1 of 1 Basic PG Manufacturer BulbCO Customer ID Model BPG7000 Read Interface Manual Serial Number 888 Identification DUT Pressure Piston Gauge Settings Piston Cylinder PC 107 Head Height 0 cm Mass Set MS 2054 Medium Water 20C Mass Bell MB 229 P C Temperture NONE P C Position INONE P C Rotation NONE Reference Vacuum NONE Cancel Back Next Finish Figure 86 Configure Piston Gauge Trim Mass Set TestTrimMass Measurement Mode Absolute Nominal Range 5 32 to 410 37 kPa 7 34 SELECT TEST The test selection step requires a Test Definition to be selected for testing The screen contains the core information about the Test Definitions ava
614. ts components can run from a network drive However the program must be installed on each local PC first Never directly install COMPASS on a network drive After the installation on a local PC the core COMPASS files and setup database files can be copied to the network drive To avoid issues associated with upgrading COMPASS it is best to only share the COMPASS setup database files Having these files in a shared location allows all COMPASS users on the network to use the same hardware setup User rights should be assigned to limit access to sensitive COMPASS data such as reference calibration information and Test Definitions see 24 3 Database Users The steps below describe this procedure Only site license versions of COMPASS will allow multiple copies of COMPASS to use the same database at the same time Non site license versions of COMPASS will not run if another copy of COMPASS is using the database 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 6 2 INSTALLING COMPASS COMPASS options are stored locally on each PC Users must manually choose the same options on the PCs that will use COMPASS It is a good idea to use user rights to limit access to the options to avoid inconsistencies between COMPASS stations The same process used to setup COMPASS in a network environment can be used to transfer a COMPASS setup from one PC to another PC The only difference is that instead of copying files to a network drive the files should be copied di
615. tton and edit the information on the Set Relationship form If the set output requires remote commands to control the device press the Edit Commands button to launch the Remote Command Editor Pressure controlling set outputs can optionally use remote Ready Not Ready indication Control Abort and Vent commands Press the Add button to add as many set outputs as are supported by the DUT Press the Editor Toolbar Save icon to save all changes Any errors in the setup must be remedied before the DUT Definition can be saved 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 158 10 SETUP SUPPORT DEVICE 10 SUPPORT DEVICE 10 1 OVERVIEW All devices that are not specifically DUTs or Piston Gauges are considered support devices Support devices are setup for use by COMPASS in Support Device Definitions using the Support Device Definition Editor Device Definitions define reference and support devices that measure and produce outputs as well as devices that control in response to target sets A Support Device Definition can also allow the device to act as a DUT to allow it to be tested and calibrated in COMPASS without having to set it up separately as a DUT A single device can provide multiple final outputs and final sets See Section 3 3 Device instrument Support Concept to get a thorough understanding of how COMPASS handles devices and final outputs An understanding of this topic is critical to proper setup of the
616. tup DUT to create a DUT Definition see 9 Setup DUT Start with a simple DUT A DUT that outputs an electrical signal such as V mV or mA will most likely be read using a digital multimeter Unless the DUT has a remote interface that provides the electrical output a DMM must be set up in the Device Definition before it will be available for use To use a piston gauge reference or piston gauge DUT select Setup Piston Gauge Piston Gauge Platform to create a piston gauge platform see 11 2 Piston Gauge Platform The other options under Piston Gauge allow piston cylinders mass sets and mass bells to be associated with the platform Each metrological element requires it s own setup to specify it s unique characteristics Therefore each piston cylinder mass set and mass bell must be created using the Piston Cylinder Editor Mass Set Editor and Mass Bell Editor respectively see 11 3 11 4 and 11 5 Select Setup Support Device to update the Device Definition of specific devices other than DUTs and piston gauges available for use by COMPASS see 10 Setup Support Device These can include reference pressure measuring and controlling devices data acquisition components temperature control and other devices Realize that a single DMM Device Definition can provide voltage current frequency and resistance measurement in one setup When a support device is selected for use there is no need to access the Device Definition u
617. ue support device The value should be ignored unless 3 should be ignored whenonly1 raw outputs are setup raw output is setup Out1 The device raw output cCalc value in the defined raw ParamID The Calculation Class output unit The value is Paramter ID value used to determine the obtaind by manual entry entered during Test final output remote interface or froma Initializ ation selected support device Relationship Macro Use any means necessary to return the final output value a measuring device inthe selected final output unit T ypicallythe raw output parameters are manipulated to determine the final output value The calibration setting values stored in the D evice Class can be usedif necessary Return an emptystring or 9999 to ignore the macro response The final output value in the defined final output unit Figure 146 Relationship Macro Prototype Purpose A Relationship Macro is used to manipulate the raw output of an instrument to obtain a final output value Use this macro when the standard conversion functions in COMPASS are not adequate The parameters passed to the function and or data in other COMPASS objects should be used to obtain the device s final output Syntax Function Relationship Out1 Out2 Out3 ParamID cRange Page 223 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Arguments Return Value Remarks Example 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Ou
618. ult asp url library en us script56 html vtoriVBScript asp 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 212 18 TOOLS COMPASS MACRO EDITOR 18 3 USING THE MACRO EDITOR The COMPASS Macro Editor can be accessed from many different areas of COMPASS The Tools COMPASS Macro Editor menu displays the editor as well as all list box options that provide a selection for a COMPASS macro The editor never starts with a specific macro selected The left of the editor contains a list of the different macro types Click on a macro type to expand the list to include existing macros of the selected type When an individual macro title is selected the corresponding script displays on the right side of the display Syntax highlighting is not available in the COMPASS Macro Editor All text will look the same Macros can be created and removed by using the toolbar functions on the top of the editor The functions on this toolbar are consistent with all other editor toolbars in COMPASS When the New toolbar function is pressed a new macro function with a default name is created The function arguments specific to the type of macro are included with the default function At this point the editor will be in edit mode see Figure 139 Change the name of the default function to a name specific to the function s use Never use the same function name twice The argument names can be changed as well The order of the arguments however cannot be changed COMPASS alwa
619. up Press this button to add the selected Data Files to the COMPASS Test Data Database This is functionally equivalent to selecting Data Write Data File to Database option and selecting the Data File from the test that has just completed Close the COMPASS Data Viewer using the control box lt X gt or press lt Esc gt to return to the Test Complete selections action button action button Delete File Used to delete the selected Data File s Use this feature if the data taken will not be used When used a delete confirmation prompt must be answered prior to deleting the Data File When confirmed the file is deleted and the Test Complete window automatically closes action button Page 137 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Plot Test Data Used as a shortcut to immediately view plots using the data from the test that just completed This choice is functionally equivalent to exiting the test and selecting Data Plot Data File see 20 Close the plot function using the control box X or press Esc to return to the Test Complete selections action button Exit Test Exits the test The Test Complete pop up disappears and the main menu and associated screen reappear The current test data remains active until another test is started action button 7 5 RUN RUN MANUAL TEST Use this feature to manually select testing devi
620. upports automatic venting An additional query is used to determine if the partial Data File containing the data collected for the test so far should be saved The Data File can be automatically deleted by using features on the Tools Options Data File tab A Test Definition that includes temperature line pressure and test pressure points requires all test pressure points be set for each line pressure and each line pressure must be set for each test temperature Therefore a test that has 5 temperature points 5 line pressure points and 10 test pressure points will log 500 data points When more than one pressure cycle is defined in a Test Definition each pressure point in each pressure cycle must be set for each line pressure It is easy to see how a large number of points can be acquired by making a few options in the Test Definition 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 130 7 RUN MODES Run Test Temperature Set temper ature and Temperature Points wait for ready Dwell Test Line Pressure Point 1 Run Test Line Set li ne pressur e and wait Line Pressure Pressure for ready Dwell Points Pressure C ycle 1 Test Pressure Point 1 Settest pressure and Test Pressure Collect data wait for ready Dwell and update data file s Last Pressure Point in Cycle Increment pressure point Increment pressure cycle Test Pressure point 1 Yes Last Pressure Cyc
621. ure 187 Figure 188 Figure 189 Figure 190 Figure 191 Figure 192 Figure 193 Figure 194 TABLES amp FIGURES Interface Macro Prototype isa 221 Relationship Macro Prototype sisi 223 Reply Parser Macro Prototype ss 225 Report Macro Prototype sic ses teo be eet ag debs etus lente x 228 Test Macro Prototype i TREE AENEA DATUR FREUE RA enn 230 Data File Viewer ie e ie ene eeu eder erento epit oie 233 Data Plot Data File Screen su 235 Gustom Plot Editor be rete bea 237 Plot Points display i edd ree trn rd Re 239 Plot Points Best Fit Tab iir are t eee te tdi are e Roa Aree P een 240 COMPASS Data Viewer main display eene nens 242 COMPASS Test Data Database Table Links 244 Database Search Setups ote e tr a ecc e E read 245 Export To Excel Changing File Filter to dat 254 Export To Excel Delimiting Data File ss 254 Export To Excel Selecting the Data File delimiter 255 Export To Excel Data File displayed in Excel 255 New Calibration Record Editor sisi 257 Exportte MET G ALD TOIT c nectit etur eds de ete eot roh Poet ventos ofer oa 257 Edit Calibration Results Option sisi 258 Calibration Results as Text Option 258 MET GAL Import TOOLS rete Ca eee e odere oie 259 Automated Data Entry Form sisi 260 Report Generation Proce
622. ure 37 Remote Command Editor sise 69 Figure 38 lt Status Bar ios itenim tet d trei aetas 78 Figure 39 LeStotatus Aten ec etn tete ten tout t oU cea 78 Figure 40 Main Toolbar dote hrec De ite redde ee eee tug Ede ald Me cede 78 Figure 41 Manual Averaging Options iii 81 Figure 42 lt Average Setup gt sisi 82 Figure 43 DUT Reference Comparison Run Screen is 83 Figure 44 Conditions Run Screen iii 85 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page XII Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 TABLES amp FIGURES Device Output Run iii 86 Spy Window SCr bn uidi ite itte ed e dre a RE nue Pe Hd abun Ee e a dud Re o EE e e Ed nn 87 Piston Gauge Run Screen iii 88 POZO000 RUN Screens sten tudin dott o d er e ecd 89 PPGCRUTSC EOM RH crt tutte dtc LC UE 91 Data Grid Scree
623. ure controllers SetTemp Collection of Calculation Class Collection of test temperature controllers UnitLP Integer Test line pressure unit identifier UnitPrs Integer Test pressure unit identifier UnitTemp Integer Test temperature unit identifier ValveDriver1 Calculation Class Test valve driver controller 28 6 2 METHODS This class has no methods of its own 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 328 28 COMPASS OBJECTS 28 7 RANGE CLASS The Range Class stores information about a specific Output or Set in a device Refer to the Output Relationship Editor for more detail on the properties of this class 4 3 6 2 ioSendCommand Send remote commands to the device Range Class The specific details of an output are stored in this class This includes min max output output units and the output label Methods are included to send remote commands to the instrument or use the defined vent abort or set commands ioSetTarget Set a target output in a controller ioVent Vent a controller using the Vend Commands Device Class Access settings stored in a DUT support device or piston guage platform ioAbortControl Send the defined Abort Commands to the device Figure 208 Range Class Object Model d An asterisk next to data type indicates that the property value is read only Two asterisks next to a data typ
624. ure test step and move on to the test dwell test step If an automated means of determining Ready is not available or Auto Generate PG Pressure is not checked this entry is ignored required numeric entry Auto Generate Specifies how close to the mid stroke position the piston should be set when the Auto Dead Band Generate PG Pressure option is selected By default the value is 1 5mm See the ny PG7000 Operation and Maintenance Manual for additional information on this feature conditional numeric entry If Auto Generate PG Pressure is checked and the Use Ready Criterion option is not checked this entry represents the piston position limit for the piston gauge to be Ready Control Timeout Defines the amount of time in seconds before a timeout will occur if a Ready condition has not been achieved If an automated means of determining Ready is not available this numeric entry field entry is ignored 8 7 DATA The Test Editor Data tab specifies support hardware to use during Test Initialization determines the test averaging time and provides options that effect how users can interact with the Test Definition The purpose of the Data tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in the table below Pre Test Temperature Line Pressure Pressure Data Aussiiry Comment Data Acquisition Ambient Pressure Timed Av
625. urrent insertion point only This toolbar also displays the formatting in place at the current insertion point Using the arrow keys to move within the text of an open document refreshes this toolbar with the current text formatting at the cursor insertion point Hilr wierd Figure 178 COMPASS Report Editor Format Toolbar 2 Table 82 COMPASS Report Editor Format Toolbar Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Format Normal m Specifies whether character and paragraph formatting properties apply to the complete document or limited to a selection Font Selection Times New Roman Displays and changes the current font A complete list of all fonts supported by the PC displays in the font selection box Font Size 8 Y Displays and changes the current font size Enter the numerical value of the desired font size and press ENTER Each value entered or present in the document is added to the list of available font sizes and are selected using Font Bold L Displays and changes the current font bold setting toolbar item This font is in bold CTRL B is a shortcut to this Font Italic L Displays and changes the current font italic setting toolbar item This font is in italics CTRL I is a shortcut to this Page 273 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL FEATURE DESCRIPTION Font Underscore Displays and changes
626. used to parse the data file Test data labels Delimited unit line corresponding the columns of test data TEST LINE PRESSURE TEST PRESSSURE CYCLE Data logged at each test point A new TEST PRESSURE CYLE section is recorded for each test pressure cycle A new TEST LINE PRESSSURE section and all subsequent TEST PRESURE CYCLE sections are recorded for each test line pressure point A new TEST TEMPERATURE section and all subsequent TEST LINE PRSSURE and TEST PRESSURE CYCLE for each test temperature point Test Notes NOTES Multi line test notes specified by the user at the end of a test Page 307 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 308 28 COMPASS OBJECTS 28 COMPASS OBJECTS 28 1 OVERVIEW COMPASS for Pressure functionality is highly expandable by the use of macros Macros can be used to change and read the state of objects in COMPASS Each COMPASS object has a unique set of properties and methods that are accessible to macros The following sections describe the unique characteristics of each object Table 97 summarizes the different object types and use In many cases it is not necessary to access COMPASS objects within a macro to achieve the desired functionality Table 97 COMPASS Object Summary OBJECT NAME DESCRIPTION Test Data Class The information stored in a COMPASS Test Data File can
627. user multiplier of a DHI product The natural error of a DHI product The Zoffset in absolute mode of a DHI product The value is not valid for gauge RPTs ZoffsetGauge Double The Zoffset value in gauge mode of a DHI product 28 7 2 METHODS FinalUnit Text value of the final output unit GetParent Return a reference to the parent Device Class GetRawFromFinal Return the raw output corresponding to a given final output ioAbortControl Abort output control for a controller loSendCommand Send a command to the instrument using the instruments remote interface ioSetTarget Set a new target output for a controller loVent Vent the output for a controller RawUnit Text value of the raw output unit Name FinalUnit Purpose Return the text value of the final output unit Syntax Function FinalUnit Arguments None Return String Value Remarks Use this function to access the text value associated with the final output unit Example None Name GetParent Purpose Return a reference to the Device Class associated with the output or set value used by the Range Class Syntax Function GetParent Arguments None Return Device Class Value Remarks Use this function to access properties in the Device Class when it is not directly available in a macro Example 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Function AutoRangeCheck cRange With cRange GetParent Select case Model case PPC3 4 rtv Au
628. user to run automated devices independently of a specific test definition Direct control of devices is supported throughout the test Test points can be taken one at a time or automatically at a timed interval Test Output to Database COMPASS test data can be logged to an MS Access database in addition to or instead of the delimited ASCII data file Features in COMPASS allow the database data to be viewed searched and reported Existing delimited data files can also be added to the database if desired Advanced Plotting Fully customizable plots can be created for general use or insertion into a report Plot colors types labels points and scaling are amongst the extensive list of customizable plot features In addition 3D scientific plots can be used to generate information rich surface plots Piston Gauge Support Piston Cylinder Mass Set and Mass Bell information can be defined and maintained by COMPASS Using the defined elements COMPASS solves the pressure equation as necessary for the type of Piston Gauge All ambient and device conditions can be read by COMPASS real time from any device with a COMPASS supported interface COMPASS operates in mass to pressure and pressure to mass modes Remote automation of DHI PG7000 piston gauges is also provided COMPASS reads and sets the desired pressure target in the PG Terminal and prompts the COMPASS user for the required mass load Support Device Database An extensive dat
629. using Run Test or Run Manual Test Data Files can be viewed edited printed and made into custom reports all within COMPASS Data Files are designed for easy export into third party applications such as spreadsheets or device management software Optionally Data Files can be added to a database for further manipulation or storage 27 1 DATA FILE CREATION At the beginning of a test a Data File dat is created A separate data file is created for each DUT in a test If no DUTs are selected during test initialization one file is created This file contains all the details on the test reference information DUT information test information and test data is logged to it as the test runs The exact information logged in the Data File can be controlled using Tools Options menu choices see 14 9 Data In File Tab and 14 10 Data Header Tab If a spreadsheet is used to manipulate COMPASS Data Files it is not recommended to modify the information logged to a Data File using the Tools Options menu When the file structure is changed the relative cell orders in the spreadsheet must also change If a test is aborted before test conclusion is reached the Tools Options Data File tab setting determines whether COMPASS queries the operator as to whether to keep or delete the partial Data File or the Data File is automatically deleted by COMPASS see 14 8 Data File Tab 27 2 NAMING AND STORING DATA FILES Data files are n
630. ustomization of the Data Grid Run Screen only see 5 5 7 Data Grid Run screen Use the View Data File option to view all columns of test data Use the Data In File tab contains features to alter the actual data stored in the Test Data File Multiple grid display fields be selected in two ways a hold down the SHIFT key and use the UP and or DOWN arrow keys to make multiple contiguous selections b hold down the CTRL key and us the mouse to make multiple non contiguous selections Add or remove the selections by using the appropriate shift button Sort the Columns in grid display by selecting an item then using the UP or DOWN arrow keys while holding the CTRL button 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 194 14 TOOLS OPTIONS COMPASS Options Ambient Conditions Initialize Test RunTest EndTest PistonGauge Data Grid DataFile DatalnFile DataHeader Interface Language Available fields Fields in grid Z5 Set Error Rdg Point Set Error Span Time Status Set Pt Test Press Ref Pressure DUT Pressure DUT Raw Dutl Tolerance Span Error Aux 5 Fnl Ada Error gt gt gt gt gt Use CTRL Up or Down arrow to Move items to the opposite list by change the position of the selection in double clicking the arid Scroll to display current data point Figure 127 Options Data Grid Tab Table 60 Options Data Grid Tab Selections FEATURE DESCRIPTION Avai
631. utput Relationship Editor and return to the Support Device Editor Page 115 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Output Relationship Output Relationship Raw Output Final Output Tolerance Required Raw Outputs to determine Final Qutput E Raw Output i Tolerance Label Pressure psi Output Type Output Type Pressure X Output Source iEEE 488 Final Output Reference Pressure Minimum 0 000 Pressure Measurement Mode Gauge Maximum 1500 000 Unit Resolution 0 001 X Minimum Maximum Raw Output to Final Output Relationship Same Raw Output Final Output DK Cancel ol Cancel Figure 74 mensor PCS 400 Output Relationship Press the Edit Command button on the Output tab to create the command to read the pressure The Remote Command Editor displays to facilitate the entry of the remote commands see Figure 75 Enter the remote command and press the Save toolbar option then press OK to close the Remote Command Editor An Initialization command is not used in this setup Therefore it is important that the test operator verify that the controller is in the correct range measurement mode and unit of measure prior to running a test NOTE mensor software ver 2 74 does not support a general READ command therefore the _PCS4 OUTFORM 1 command is used to return a pressure value s Output Comma
632. variable substitution method or a macro see 4 4 3 Control Set Commands Physical targets also support Ready Not Ready Vent and Abort control command setups on the Set tab of the editor used to define the final set For physical targets the Set Relationship Editor defines how a device s raw set corresponds to its final set In most cases the raw set is the same as the final set This is the case when a device has a remote interface and the remote commands used to control it are in the device s final set unit of measure In other cases a support device must be controlled to arrive at a specific final set result For example a voltage controlled pressure regulator requires a specific supply voltage to set a target pressure In this case the raw set would be voltage and the final set would be pressure The Set Source selection must be Voltage Supply This tells COMPASS that a voltage supplying instrument must be selected to control the regulator during test initialization Unlike Output Relationships Set Relationships do not support macros to convert from the raw set to final set One of the pre defined COMPASS relationships must be selected If the controller cannot accurately set the desired target values use regulation in the Test Definition to set the target pressure based a reference output see 8 6 5 Test Pointe Sequence General Child Tab Raw set to final set manipulation is not supported for state targets such a
633. w a test operator to completely customize settings within the Test Definition TEST POINTS SEQUENCE SET CHILD TAB The Test Definition Point Sequence Tab Set child tab is used to specify control settings for the selected test controller The control settings are ignored when the test controller is manual Automated tests controllers and Piston Gauge pressure control use slightly different settings Review the Ready Not Ready Section of this manual for details on set ready conditions in COMPASS When defining an advanced Test Definition multiple test controllers can be specified The form changes to be similar to the Read child tab see 8 6 6 Features are provided to add remove and edit controllers see Figure 105 Each controller has a unique set of control options The purpose of the Set tab s fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in the table below When using PG7000 piston gauge as the reference a different Set child tab is used see Table 42 The lt Use Ready Criterion gt option is available for DHI products and devices that include Ready Commands see 4 4 2 1 Ready Commands as part of the set definition Pressure Control Control Mode Dynamic Use Ready Criterion M Hold Stability Unit DUT Span z Hold Setting DUT Span 0 005 Stability Setting XDUT Spans 0 001 Ready Hold Time s 5 Control Timeouts 300 Figure 104 Test Definition Editor S
634. ware Select the new piston gauge platform as the Reference Pressure and the auto detected PG7000 for Ambient Pressure Ambient Temperature and Ambient Humidity Devices are selected by their Record Label and Serial Number by default Change how devices are selected by changing test initialization optione see 14 5 Initialize Test Tab The selection in Figure G2 ie based on Record Label and Output Label Page 109 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL Run Manual Test Setup Test Hardware Configuration Ambient Pressure Sample PG7601 Amb Pressure Ambient Temperature Sample PG7601 Amb Temperature Ambient Humidity Sample PG7601 Amb Humidity Reference Pressure Reference Line Pressure NONE Reference Temperature NONE Pressure Control Manual Control Line Pressure Control NONE Temperature Control NONE Multiplexer NONE Valve Driver Controller NONE Default Hardware Setup Cancel Back Next Einish Figure 66 Example PG7000 Hardware Selection e Press Next until the piston gauge platform setup screen displays Choose the measurement mode piston cylinder mass set and mass bell to use The items in each list are determined by the selects on the P C MS tab in the Piston Gauge Platform Editor Select the metrological elements to use for the test The sources defined in the piston gauge platform
635. with a final output of Line Pressure or General Pressure Select the default reference line pressure source device Reference Temperature The list includes all devices setup with a final output of Reference Temperature or General Temperature Select the default reference temperature source device Pressure Control The list includes all devices setup with a final set of Test Pressure Control or General Pressure Control Select the default reference pressure controller Line Pressure Control The list includes all devices setup with a final set of Line Pressure Control or General Pressure Control Select the default line pressure controller Temperature Control The list includes all devices setup with a final set of Temperature Control Select the default test temperature controller 12 3 ELECTRICAL TAB The Electrical tab specifies the devices to use to measure raw electrical outputs from DUT references and other support devices The fields of the Electrical tab are described in table below 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 180 12 SETUP DEFAULT HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Default Hardware Configuration Environment Electrical Auxiliary Electrical Output Sources Voltage HPDMM Voltage Current m4 NONE Resistance NONE Frequency NONE Voltage Supply Current Supply m NONE ERIFRIERIERIERIE Multiplexer HP3497014 MUX Mux Channel Valve Driver P
636. work path and press Save This saves all COMPASS settings to the COMPASS reg file If the PC is running Windows XP and other PCs that use COMPASS will not be running Windows XP select the Win9x NT Reg File Type in the Save as type This generates registry files that are reverse compatible Select the Report Editor registry key and create a second registry file The Report Editor key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINENXSOFTWAREWDH Instruments COMPASS Report Editor Repeat step 3 to save the Report Editor registry file This time use the file name Report reg Page 7 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 6 To import these settings on another PC again run the registry editor This time select File Import and select the previously created registry file COMPASS reg from the COMPASS network directory After this file is imported again select File Import and select the Report reg file to import the Report Editor options 7 At this point all COMPASS settings from the first PC have been copied to the target PC However each PC requires a unique Station ID value This field must be changed manually by running COMPASS and selecting the Database Setup menu choice Enter a unique value in the Station ID field 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all PCs that will use COMPASS 2 6 UPDATING EXANPLE SETUPS Many practical examples of COMPASS setups are available for download from the DH Instruments website www
637. wser appears set to the directory that holds the Data Files Selecting a file causes the COMPASS Plot screen to appear loaded with a plot generated using the data from the Data File f COMPASS Plot ele SES Aran Ero ve Reerence Presoue gt Span Error vs Reference Pressure o o a o a Figure 151 Data Plot Data File Screen Page 235 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL 20 2 PLOT TOOLBAR A plot toolbar is provided to select new Data Files print the current plot change the type of plot access common plot properties and create edit custom plots Use the list box at the top of the display to change plots The toolbar features are summarized below Table 65 Data Plot Toolbar FEATURE DESCRIPTION Select Append Allows selection using a standard Windows file browser of a different Data File s to be plotted Data File During test execution this icon is disabled Only the current test can be viewed in the plot tool while a test is active Print Data File Allows the graph currently selected to be printed using the standard Windows print function e Create Edit Plot Displays the Custom Plot Editor loaded with all existing plots The editor allows plots to be created edited and removed see 20 4 Create Edit Plots i Edit Plot Data Displays an options window to customize the points used for plotti
638. x File Data In File Data Header Interfac ons Initialize Test RunTest End Test Ambient Con Include mass bell in minimum PG pressure Include mass name in list of mass set masses List mass set masses by nominal mass List mass set masses by true mass Default mass loading resolution 100g Local Gravity m s 3 79474 Default piston position deadband rm 2 Cancel Figure 126 Options Piston Gauge Tab Table 59 Options Piston Gauge Tab Fields FEATURE DESCRIPTION Include mass bell When checked when the lowest possible pressure is specified as a piston gauge set point the in minimum PG minimum mass load is assumed to be the piston the mass bell Check this box is you do not Pressure want to make measurement with the piston gauge piston only In some cases this is required For example a PG7601 in absolute mode cannot engage rotation without the mass bell loaded check box Include mass Check this option to display the user specified name of each individual mass set mass in all lists of name in list of mass set masses The mass list displays in the Mass Set Editor and the Piston Gauge mass set masses Calculator are altered by this selection A mass name is not a required field for a mass set mass As a result it is possible that only the mass value will display as though this option were not check box checked List mass set Check this option to display the nominal mass
639. xdiellelme ccc 230 18 6 THREADING 231 18 7 VARIABLE AND FUNCTION 232 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page IV 19 20 21 22 23 TABLE OF CONTENTS DATA VIEW DATA FILE emere 233 19 1 OVERVIEW dee Lc LT 233 DATA PLOT DATA 1 235 20 1 OVERVIEW ne DERE EISE PA n end a dates te aaa aA es DUE ERR LET ni een Ua de 235 20 2 PEOT TOOLBAR i itiiicvsisecataciscceveceiadcctactacdcsctadcecacsnvecesssddaetacnsuscesssudsesacestscvuscuaccedcessiceascuecvcssecupaiccesating 236 20 3 PE OT OPTIONS Jdaaluececsuugducacteteccustucdeceseccedcusscdaccseeutccwccscacaseuecs 236 20 4 CREATE EDIT PLOTS TR 236 20 5 PLOT POIN TO 2 ERR 238 DATA DATABASE DATA 241 21 1 OVERVIEW a aa a aa A a aa aaa a a a aaraa 241 21 2 COMPASS DATA VIEWER a cR AA Wi 241 21 3 DATABASE PRINCIP L E O aa a aa a AE a AANE raaraa 243 214 CREATE 2 a aar
640. xed number of characters Delete all text in the field to not use a response terminator Do not enter empty quotes COMPASS assumes that any response is complete when data has been retrieved from the remote device and new data is not received for 300ms If no data is returned from the device a Timeout error occurs This is really a safety feature to prevent false device time outs in the many devices that do not have a specific Response Terminator gt Page 301 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 302 26 UNIT CONVERSIONS 26 UNIT CONVERSIONS All unit conversions and custom units are handled by the DHI Unit of Measure Converter Run the Unit of Measure Converter as a stand alone application using the program group icon or use the Tools Unit of Measure Converter option in COMPASS The Options menu in the Unit of Measure Converter contains features to allow custom units creation Custom units created in this way are available throughout COMPASS Refer the help menu of the Unit of Measure Converter for details on units conversion factors supported units and custom unit creation Page 303 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FOR PRESSURE USER S MANUAL NOTES 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 304 27 DATA FILES 27 DATA FILES Data files dat are the files created by COMPASS to store the data relating to a test run on a DUT
641. y M Reference Pressure Reference Line Pressure Reference Temperature Pressure Control Manual Control E Line Pressure Control NONE Temperature Control NONE Multiplexer m Valve Driver Controller NONE Default Hardware Setup Cancel Next Finish Figure 62 Example PG7000 Hardware Selection e Press Next until the PG7000 setup screen displays Press Next again or the Load Settings button to load the piston cylinder mass set and mass bell information of the PG7000 see 7 3 3 2 Configure DHI Device The available range based on the current metrological elements selected displays in the Nominal Range field on the bottom left of the display see Figure 63 Choose the measurement mode piston cylinder mass set and mass bell to use Run Manual Test Setup Configure Device 1 of 1 Sample PG7601 Manufacturer DH Instruments Customer ID Model RS232 Settings COM1 2400 E 7 1 Serial Number 512 Parameter ID Identification Sample Load Settings Output 1 of 4 Reference Pressure Piston Gauge Settings Change Display 4 Piston Cylinder DHI P C 407 Head Height 25 Mass Set DHI MassSet 158 Medium CE Mass Bell DH MassBell 272 v Trim Mass Set None Measurement Mode Absolute x Nominal Range 10 00 to 380 00kPa Cancel Back Next Einish Figure 63 Example PG7000 Device Configuration Page 107 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc COMPASS FO
642. y to repeat points after the last point is complete Use this choice to prevent any delays or interruptions in the test sequence Auto generate report after Check this option to automatically create a report when a test completes The complete tests report is generated using the last report template used The Test Complete options still display at the end of the test check box Prompt for test notes at the If checked COMPASS always prompts for test notes to be entered at the end of end of the test the test The test notes prompt does not interfere with unattended tests The check box prompt occurs after all test data is collected and the pressure is vented Uncheck this option to avoid the test notes prompt In this case no test notes can be included in the test s Data File 2002 2004 DH Instruments Inc Page 192 14 TOOLS OPTIONS 146 PISTON GAUGE TAB The Tools Options Piston Gauge tab is used to set default preferences affecting Piston Gauges The purpose of the Piston Gauge tab fields and settings as well as instructions on how to use them are provided in the Table 59 When selections are complete click OK to save changes or select another tab to change other options The Local Gravity setting entered is used in all Piston Gauge calculations unless specifically changed in the Piston Gauge Calculator see 16 Tools Piston Gauge Calculator COMPASS Options Data Grid I
643. ys in the Setup Selector Choose the setup that corresponds most closely to the device that you are setting up The settings specific to the device update in the editor The only requirement is to specify unique characteristics of the device such as serial number identification and customer number Also specify any unique communications settings associated with the device IEEE 488 RS232 Port and settings etc DHI maintains and updates a list of supported devices that can be downloaded from the www dhinstruments com Each setup contains all details required to use the device in COMPASS This includes supported final outputs and parsing protocols commands to read and set outputs and default communications settings for the device In addition to DHI provided examples all previous hardware component setups can be used However the Find Previous Setup feature is not required in this case Simply use the Editor Toolbar Setup Selector feature and locate the desired device Then use the Editor Toolbar Copy icon to copy all setup entries In this case serial number identification and customer ID values are copied as well Auto Detect Setup conditional check box available for device editors only when the Manufacturer is DHI and the Model is a known DHI product This feature is available for setups of DHI products Checking this option allows COMPASS to use built in device monitoring and control features Read and Set in
644. ys sends arguments in the order specified by the macro type If desired arguments can be removed but new arguments cannot be added Enter the code in the macro as required to complete the specific requirements of the macro function Refer to the comments at the top of the function for details on the purpose of the function and a description of the arguments Some knowledge of the COMPASS object model is required to manipulate COMPASS objects during test execution see 28 In addition to the arguments of any macro function there are global objects available for use Prior to saving a macro enter unique text in the Title field that accurately represents the macros specific purpose Macros are listed in COMPASS by the value entered A well titled macro is easy to select and use in COMPASS Up to 50 characters can be used to label the macro Press the Save toolbar function when all macro edits are complete Any number of macros can be created for any given macro type To edit a macro just begin typing and the editor will go into edit mode COMPASS imposes no restrictions on the names of macro functions Always use descriptive names and never give the same function name or title to more than one macro Macro functions are selected by lt Title gt not by function name Function names must be unique to avoid conflicts with functions that have the same name OMPASS Macro Editor mj x Editing Macro DataFile Test Script Title

COMPASS® for Pressure - Pressure Calibration

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

COMPASS&reg; for Pressure - Pressure Calibration

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

COMPASS® for Pressure - Pressure Calibration